Sunteți pe pagina 1din 1396

Automation College

EXP02R400 11/2010 Rev. 02 Student Guide

Experion Process Knowledge System (PKS) Server Engineering and Configuration

Notices
While this information is presented in good faith and believed to be accurate, Honeywell assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this courseware. The courseware is presented on an as-is basis. Honeywell disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, and makes no express warranties except as may be stated in its written agreement with and for its customer. In no event is Honeywell liable to anyone for any indirect, special or consequential damages even if Honeywell is informed of the possibility of these damages. The information and specifications in this courseware are subject to change without notice. No part of this courseware may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means. It is intended for the use of the original purchaser only. Copying, duplicating, selling or otherwise distributing the courseware is a violation of law. The materials and workbooks comprising the courseware may not, in whole or part, be copied, photocopied, reproduced, translated or reduced to any electronic medium or machine-readable form without prior consent in writing from Honeywell. This courseware is the confidential and proprietary information of Honeywell. The courseware may only be used by the person who attended the Honeywell class. The courseware may only be used in conjunction with a Honeywell system at the company that paid for the class. Only Honeywell may use the courseware for training purposes. This class has special equipment configurations that are appropriate only for training and should not be used for any other purpose. Experion, Da Vinci, IntelliMap, MXOpen, MXProLine, TotalPlant, PlantScape, TDC 3000, Uniformance, and Universal Control Network are registered trademarks of Honeywell International. These commodities, technology or software were exported from the United States in accordance with the Export Administration Regulations. Division contrary to U.S. law prohibited.

Copyright 2010 Honeywell Inc.

Honeywell International, Inc. Automation College Global Learning Services

Program Objectives
EXP02R400 - EPKS Server
Tab 1 2 Lesson Orientation and Course Introduction Experion System Overview Identify Experion PKS System Architecture Describe Station and Server and Their Connections Describe C200/C200E, ACE, and Their Simulation Describe C300 and Its Connection Describe SCADA Controllers and Their Connections Identify Experion PKS Functions and Data Sources Describe IKB Keyboard and It's Functions R400:Describe Experion Databases 3 Navigate Station Use the Main Display Areas in Station Start Station Use Display Navigation in Station Use Station for Data Display Use Point Detail Display Use Group Display Use Trend Sets 4 5 Configuration Tools Identify Experion PKS Configuration Tools Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe Enterprise Model Describe System Model Implementation Start Configuration Studio 6 Configuring Asset Model Describe Asset Model Describe Configuration of Assets Configure Parent and Child Assets 7 Alarm Groups Describe Alarm Groups Configure Alarm Groups 8 Flex Stations and Report Printers Identify Station Types and Security Options Open a Project in Quick Builder Build Static and Rotary Stations Configure a Printer 9 Station Configuration Describe Server-Wide Station Settings Describe Station-Specific Settings Describe Station Connection Properties Customize Station Menus and Toolbars 10 Channels, Controllers and Points Configure SCADA Connections Configure a Channel
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary Page: 1 of 4 11/05/10

Objectives Course Introduction

Program Objectives
Configure a Controller 11 Configuring Points Distinguish Among SCADA Point Types Describe the Fundamentals of Point Scripting Configure an Analog Point and Point Script Configure a Status Point and Point Script 12 13 14 Quick Builder Functionality Describe Quick Builder Functionality Alarm Setup in Server Configure Server Wide Alarm Properties Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security R400:Describe Users in Experion System Configure Asset Restrictions Configure Asset Profiles 15 Console Functions Describe Console Functions R400:Configure Console and Console Station 16 Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Event, Alarm, and Message Summary Customization Describe Alarm Shelving Mechanism Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving Customize Event, Alarm, and Message Summaries Configure Alarm Shelving 17 Reports List Report Types Configure Pre-Formatted Report (Alarm and Event) Configure Pre-Formatted Report (Cross Reference) Configure Free Format Report Configure Reports for Shelved Alarms Configure Point Attribute Report Configure Asset Alarm Count Report 18 Algorithms Distinguish Between PV and Action Algorithms Configure PV Algorithm Configure Action Algorithm 19 History Archive Options Identify History Archive Configuration Options R400: Describe Scalable history configuration R400:Configure History Assignment R400:Configure History Archiving 20 Event Archive Options Identify Event Archiving Configuration Options R400:Configure Event Archiving 21 Groups and Trends Describe DSP Trends Configure Groups Configure Trends 22 Data Extraction for Other Uses
Page: 2 of 4 11/05/10

Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Program Objectives
Use Experion Data in Other Applications Configure Microsoft Excel Data Exchange 23 Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture Configure DSA 24 Integrating Non-Experion Nodes Describe OPC Describe Configuration of OPC Client, Display Data Client R400: Describe use of OPC Performance counters Describe Configuration of OPC Advanced Clients Describe Purpose and Configuration of OPC Integrator Configure OPC Integrator 25 Utilities and Basic Administration Describe Commands, Utilities, Accounts, and Services Describe Server Configuration Panel, EMDB Admin, and File Backup 26 27 Final Project Student Assessment - Final Project Reference Material (Optional) Describe Knowledge Builder Identify Experion PKS Software License Options Identify Shifts, Point Schedules, and Holidays Config Options Describe Recipes Describe the Alarm Paging Function of an Experion Server Identify the Server and Station Hardware and Software Options Describe Parallel Operations Keyboard Specifications Identify eServer Configuration Describe the Configuration of PHD History Integration 28 TPS Integration (Optional) Describe the Configuration of TPS Integration Describe the Operation of TPS Integration

Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Page: 3 of 4

11/05/10

Program Objectives

Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Page: 4 of 4

11/05/10

Course Introduction

Orientation and Course Introduction Course Introduction

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Introduction to the course Navigating the self-paced computer-based lessons

Honeywell

Orientation and Course Introduction Course Introduction

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Purpose of This Course


The Experion PKS Server Engineering and Configuration course provides the end user the ability to: Plan an Experion System. Configure the Experion Server Use Experion PKS data in other applications Integrate Experion PKS to OPC servers Understand the integration of Honeywell TPS with EPKS Understand the Integration of Uniformance PHD with EPKS (optional)
Orientation and Course Introduction Course Introduction

Honeywell

Fault Tolerant Ethernet LAN

C300
ESVT

Experion ACE Server (ESV)

Safety Manager

NIM

TPS, TDC2000, TDC3000

HART

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Who Should Attend

Honeywell

This course is designed for Experion PKS System implementers responsible for designing and/or configuring the system. These individuals include:
System engineers or application engineers who are tasked to configure the server and add to or change the server configuration Others, whose job functions include performing these tasks

Orientation and Course Introduction Course Introduction

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

What You Will Learn In this course, you will learn how to:

Honeywell

Recognize the role of the major hardware and software components and learn how data flows through the Experion PKS server Use the Configuration Studio for server configuration Configure flex, console and console extension stations Configure Channels, Controllers, and SCADA Points Configure the Experion PKS server for process control effectiveness Configure distributed system architecture (DSA) and data exchange with Microsoft Excel Configure various connections to OPC servers Configure Honeywell TPS systems on Experion node (optional)

Orientation and Course Introduction Course Introduction

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

What You Will Not Learn In this course, we will not cover:

Honeywell

C200/C200E Controller Implementation (covered in the EXP2001R4xx course) C300 Controller Implementation (covered in the EXP2001R4xx course) HMI Web Graphics (covered in the EXP03R4xx course) ACE Implementation (covered in the EXP2001R4xx and EXP16R4xx courses) System Administration (covered in the EXP23R4xx course)

Orientation and Course Introduction Course Introduction

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Course Organization
The Experion PKS Server Engineering and Configuration course is divided into two sections:
Human Interface Console Operations

Honeywell

1. The first section is an overview of Experion architecture, system components, Station navigation, and Configuration tools. Self-paced computer-based lessons or instruct-delivered workshops Assessments to reinforce the key concepts

Fault Tolerant Ethernet LAN

ACE C300
ESVT

Experion Server (ESV)

Safety Manager

NIM

TPS, TDC2000, TDC3000

HART

Orientation and Course Introduction Course Introduction

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Course Organization
2. The second section of the course is a hands-on workshop to build and configure the Experion PKS server Self-paced computerbased lessons or instructor-delivered workshops that introduce concepts and procedures in the hands-on lab exercises Hands-on lab exercises with step-by-step instructions Assessments to reinforce lab exercises
Human Interface Console Operations
Fault Tolerant Ethernet LAN

Honeywell

ACE

C300
ESVT

Experion Server (ESV)

Safety Manager

NIM

TPS, TDC2000, TDC3000

HART

Orientation and Course Introduction Course Introduction

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Introduction to the course Navigating the self-paced computer-based lessons

Honeywell

Orientation and Course Introduction Course Introduction

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Lesson Window

Honeywell

Viewing area

Lesson outline

Navigation bar
Orientation and Course Introduction Course Introduction

10

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Pausing and Playing the Lesson

Honeywell

Click Play to resume

Click Pause to stop the lesson


Orientation and Course Introduction Course Introduction

11

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Moving Backward and Forward in the lesson

Honeywell

Click screen title Previous screen Next screen

Orientation and Course Introduction Course Introduction

12

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Volume Control

Honeywell

Orientation and Course Introduction Course Introduction

13

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Changing the Viewing Area

Honeywell

Click to change views

Orientation and Course Introduction Course Introduction

14

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Conclusion

Honeywell

Course Introduction

Completion Certificate

Proceed to the first lesson in your course material


Orientation and Course Introduction Course Introduction

15

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Orientation and Course Introduction Course Introduction

16

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Identify Experion PKS System Architecture

Experion System Overview Identify Experion PKS System Architecture

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Introduction

Honeywell

This lesson introduces you to the Experion PKS system components and connections At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Identify the basic components and connections of the Experion PKS system. Explain the general purpose of these components and connections
Human Interface Console Operations Fault Tolerant Ethernet LAN

ACE Experion Server (ESV) C300 Safety Manager


ESVT

NIM

TPS, TDC2000, TDC3000

Experion System Overview Identify Experion PKS System Architecture

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Architecture Overview
Unlimited Secure Access
www eServer

Honeywell

Casual Users

Application Control Environment

Experion Stations

Remote Engineering Tools

Wireless Devices (Operations and Maintenance)

PHD Historian

FTE Network C200/C200E

C300

PMD

ESVT

Redundant Servers
Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC

Safety Manager
GE Fanuc Versamax

NIM

MTL 8000

TPS, TDC2000, TDC3000


Frequency Converter

PM I/O SCADA Devices (OPC, Modbus DH+, and many more!) ,

Digital Video Manager

Ethernet

Comprehensive Support for Smart Field Devices

Investment Protection Complete Integration

Video as a Process Input!

Experion System Overview Identify Experion PKS System Architecture

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Architecture Overview

Honeywell

Experion System Overview Identify Experion PKS System Architecture

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 1: Global Database Component Which Experion PKS component contains the global database?
B) ACE A) C200/C300 or SCADA controller C) Server D) Station
ControlNet

Honeywell

Human Interface Console Operations


Fault Tolerant Ethernet LAN

ESV

ACE

ESVT

Safety Manager TPS, TDC2000, TDC3000

PM I/O

The correct answer is: Yourcorrect answer is: The answer: Youranswer:TheServer contains the global Incorrect.The Server contains the global Correct! The Server contains the global Incorrect.The Server contains the global Correct! You must answer the question before You not Clickdatabase. to continue must answer question before question YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue Incorrect answer anywhereto continue Correct --Clickdatabase. to continue Youdid You --answeredthis correctly! Correct answeranywhere to completely did You Clickanywhere not Click thisthis correctly! this completely anywhere continuing continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

HART
Submit
5

Clear

Experion System Overview Identify Experion PKS System Architecture

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Architecture Overview
Unlimited Secure Access
www eServer

Honeywell
State-of the Art Operation and Engineering Tools Advanced Applications and Integration

Casual Users

Application Control Environment

Experion Stations

Remote Engineering Tools

Wireless Devices (Operations and Maintenance)

PHD Historian

FTE Network C200/C200E

C300

PMD

ESVT

Redundant Servers

Safety Manager
GE Fanuc Versamax

NIM

Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC

MTL 8000

TPS, TDC2000, TDC3000


Frequency Converter

PM I/O SCADA Devices (OPC, Modbus DH+, and many more!) ,

Digital Video Manager

Ethernet

Comprehensive Support for Smart Field Devices

Investment Protection Complete Integration

Video as a Process Input!

Experion System Overview Identify Experion PKS System Architecture

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 2: Controller Classifications What are the two basic Experion PKS controller classifications?
A) ACE and C300 OR C200/C200E B) C300 OR C200/C200E and SCADA C) C300 OR C200/C200E and PLC D) ESVT and FTE

Honeywell

The correctanswer is: YourcorrectThetwo controller classifications inin Incorrect.The two is: Correct! The Youranswer: two controller classifications in The answer: two controller classifications in Incorrect.The Correct! answer controller classifications Experion answer the question before You must are C300 ORquestion before Experion are C300 ORC200/C200E and C200/C200E You not Click anywhere to continue must answer question completely YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue Incorrect answer anywhereto continueand Correct --Clickanywhere to continue Youdid You --answeredthis correctly! Correct answerSCADA. correctly! did You Click thisthis not Click SCADA. to completely anywhere this continuing continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
7

Clear

Experion System Overview Identify Experion PKS System Architecture

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 3: Operations Component Which Experion PKS component is used for operations? Human Interface
A) ACE B) C300 OR C200/C200E controller C) PMIO D) Station
ControlNet LAN

Honeywell

Console Operations
Fault Tolerant Ethernet

ESV

ACE

ESVT

Safety Manager TPS, TDC2000, TDC3000

PM I/O

The correct answer is: Yourcorrect answer is: The answer: Youranswer: Incorrect.Station isistheExperion PKS Correct! Station is the Experion PKS Incorrect.Station isthe Experion PKS Correct! Station the question before the Experion You must answer for operations.PKS You You -Click this question completely must answer for question before used YoucomponentClickanywhere to continue Incorrect-answered thequestioncontinue Correct answer anywhere to continue did not answer anywhere to completely used this correctly! YoucomponentClickanywhere to continue did You not Incorrect-answeredthis correctly! Correct -Click this operations. continuing continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

HART
Submit
8

Clear

Experion System Overview Identify Experion PKS System Architecture

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 4: Controls Component Which Experion PKS component is used for advanced control?
A) ACE
Human Interface Console Operations
Fault Tolerant Ethernet LAN

Honeywell

B) C300 OR C200/C200E or SCADA controller C) PMIO D) Station

ESV

ACE

ESVT

ControlNet

Safety Manager TPS, TDC2000, TDC3000

PM I/O

The Incorrect. The is: is used for advanced Yourcorrect answer ACE is used for advanced answer: Yourcorrect answer ACE for advanced control. answer: The Incorrect. Theisis: Correct! The ACE is used for advanced control. Correct! The ACE control. used You must answer control. question before You You -Click anywhere to continue must answerthequestion before YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue Incorrect--answeredthisquestioncompletely Correct answer anywhereto continue did not answeranywhere to continue You Correct -Click thisthiscorrectly! did You Click anywhere to completely not Click this continuing correctly! continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

HART
Submit
9

Clear

Experion System Overview Identify Experion PKS System Architecture

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Summary The Basic Experion PKS components and connections are:


Server and Stations Configuration PCs ACE eServer PHD Historian C200/C200E Controller C300 Controller SCADA Controllers Digital Video Manager FTE
Experion System Overview Identify Experion PKS System Architecture

Honeywell

10

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Conclusion Identify the Experion PKS System Architecture

Honeywell

Completion Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material


Experion System Overview Identify Experion PKS System Architecture

11

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Experion System Overview Identify Experion PKS System Architecture

12

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Describe Station and Server and Their Connections

Experion System Overview Describe Station and Server and Their Connections

13

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Introduction

Honeywell

In this lesson, you will learn more about the Experion PKS server and station components and how they are connected to the system. At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Describe the server and station components Describe the Fault Tolerant Ethernet (FTE) and its purpose ES-CE Trace the flow of data over the FTE

ES-C

ESV

ES-F

C300

Fault Tolerant Ethernet

C200/C200E Controllers

Experion System Overview Describe Station and Server and Their Connections

14

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Server Station FTE

Honeywell

Experion System Overview Describe Station and Server and Their Connections

15

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Process Server A global database


Operations

Honeywell

Data, trends, groups, reports and history

Efficient communications
Human Interface Console Operations
Fault Tolerant Ethernet LAN

Scaleable and expandable with a minimum re-engineering


ACE C300 Safety Manager

ESV

Standard & open PC hardware Provides for on-process migration

Experion System Overview Describe Station and Server and Their Connections

16

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Distributed System Architecture (DSA)

Location A

Honeywell

Integration of data, alarms, history, events and security Extends single database for very large systems
One Alarm & Event screen for all alarms No duplicate databases

FIC101.PIDA.PV
Dynamic Cache


Location C

Fully utilizes redundant servers, networks and FTE Simple configuration Supported across multiple software releases

FIC101.PIDA.PV
Dynamic Cache

Controller
FIC101.PIDA.PV

FIC101.PIDA.PV
Dynamic Cache

Location B

Experion System Overview Describe Station and Server and Their Connections

17

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 1: Experion PKS Server Which statement about an Experion PKS server is false? A server:
A) Can be redundant B) Can be built from parts found in your garage C) Can have multiple servers in a system
ControlNet

Honeywell

Human Interface Console Operations


Fault Tolerant Ethernet LAN

ESV

ACE

ESVT

Safety Manager TPS, TDC2000, TDC3000

D) Is not Honeywell hardware

Incorrect.The false statement isis"Canbe built from Correct! The false statement is "Can be built from Incorrect.The false statement is"Can be built from Correct! The false statement "Can be built from The correct answer is: Yourcorrect answer is: garage". Experion is an open parts found The answer: in your garage". Experion is an open Your answer: in your parts found You musthowever, youneed to beforeHoneywell You You Click anywhere to to use a mustanswer the question before answer use Yousystem, -answeredyou questioncompletely Incorrecthowever, thequestioncompletely Correct --Clickanywhere tocontinue Honeywell did not answerthisthisneed continue Yousystem, answer anywheretoforcontinue Incorrect-answeredthis correctly! Correct Click anywhere tocontinue did You Click thisquestion your a not approved continuing correctly! Server. continuing approvedDell machine for your Server. Dell machine Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

PM I/O

HART
Submit Clear
EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Experion System Overview Describe Station and Server and Their Connections

18

Topics Server Station FTE

Honeywell

Experion System Overview Describe Station and Server and Their Connections

19

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Station
Human Interface Console Operations

Honeywell HTML Human Interface


Graphic language of the Web See same graphic in browser or Outlook
Safety Manager

Fault Tolerant Ethernet LAN

ESV

ACE

C300

No exports

Open hardware
Off-the-shelf PC hardware Icon Console Robustness, security, & data handling by Honeywell

Experion System Overview Describe Station and Server and Their Connections

20

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

10

Station Types and Data Sources


2 ES-CE 4 ES-C ES-C ESV ES-F

Honeywell

ES-F

Dynamic Cache

Dynamic Cache

Dynamic Cache

C300

1 2 3 4

C200/C200E Controllers Data and Alarms/Events from CDA sources (C200/C200E, C300, FIM, ACE, etc.) are published to the Server Data and Alarms/Events presented by ES-F Data and Alarms/Events from CDA sources (C200/C200E, C300, FIM, ACE, etc.) are published to ES-Cs Data and Alarms/Events presented by ES-CE
21
EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Experion System Overview Describe Station and Server and Their Connections

TPS Integration
Extends TPS into Experion PKS
Auto-discovers TPS points No duplicate tag configuration or maintenance Auto Priming of TPS points is now possible with release 400.

Honeywell

TPS Process Alarms appear in the Experion Alarm Summary


Acknowledge TPS alarms on Experion PKS Go directly to detail displays from Alarm Summary

Experion Server TPS (ESVT)

TPS System Alarm appears in Experion System Status Display TPS Events appear in the Experion Event Summary TPS Messages appear in the Experion Message Summary TPS Data can be incorporated into Experion PKS History, Trends, etc. Half the plant / mill on TPS, half on Experion
Displays combine both systems
Experion Station Console TPS (EST)

Experion System Overview Describe Station and Server and Their Connections

22

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

11

TPS Integration
EST

Honeywell
2 2

ES-CE

2
ESVT ES - F

ES-CE

ES-C

ESV

Dynamic Cache
DSA Info

Dynamic Cache

Dynamic Cache
DSA Info

ES-F

Dynamic Cache

FTE

4 3 3
C200/C200E Controllers

LCN

NIM PM

1 1

1
C200/C200E Controllers

FTE

Data and Alarm/Events owned by controller devices 1 (C200/C200E, C300, FIM, ACE, NIM, HPM, etc.) and published to the server 2 Data and Alarm/Events presented by ES-F and via DSA 3 Data and Alarm/Events owned by controllers and published to ES-Cs

4 Data and Alarm/Events presented by ES-CE

Experion System Overview Describe Station and Server and Their Connections

23

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 2: Experion PKS Station Types Which of these is NOT an Experion PKS station type?
A) Flex B) Console C) Console Extension D) FIM

Honeywell

Incorrect.Experion PKS station types include flex, console Correct! Experion PKS station types include flex, console Correct! Experion PKS station types include flex, console Incorrect.Experion PKS station types include flex, console The correct answer is: Yourcorrect answer is: The 'FIM' is the Fieldbus interface and console The answer: extension. The 'FIM' is the Fieldbus interface Your answer: extension. and console You must module and questionstation type. before not You not Click anywhere to acompletely mustanswer thequestioncontinue answer the questionstation before YouIncorrectansweredandiscorrectly! Incorrect answer anywhereto acontinue type. Correct --Clickanywherenot continue Youdid You --answeredthisiscorrectly! Correct answerthisthis did You module not Click anywhereto continue Click this question completely to continuing continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
24

Clear

Experion System Overview Describe Station and Server and Their Connections

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

12

Question 3: Station Data Sources

Honeywell

Which of these statements about the source of station data is false?


A) ES-C gets data from the server and C200/C200E controller B) ES-CE gets data from ES-C C) ES-F gets data from C200/C200E controller D) ES-F gets data from the server
C200/C200E Controllers
ES-CE ES-C ESV ES-F

Dynamic Cache

Dynamic Cache

FTE

Incorrect."ES-F gets data from the Correct! "ES-F gets data from the Incorrect."ES-F gets data from the Correct! "ES-F gets data from the C200/C200E controllers" is the false C200/C200E The correct answer is: Yourcorrect answer controllers" is the false Your answer: The answer:The ES-F gets all of its data only is: statement. The ES-F gets all of its data only statement. answer the question before You must answer You not Click anywhere to continue must question before YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue Incorrect answer fromthe correctly! Correct --Clickfromthis to continue Correct answeranywhere to continue Youdid You --answeredthis correctly! did You Click anywhere to completely not Click this question completely anywhere this the continuing continuing Server. Server. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
25

Clear

Experion System Overview Describe Station and Server and Their Connections

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Server Station FTE

Honeywell

Experion System Overview Describe Station and Server and Their Connections

26

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

13

Fault Tolerant Ethernet

Operations
Human Interface Console Operations

Honeywell
Patented Honeywell technology that makes standard Ethernet robust and redundant No single point of failure Full redundancy with:
Experion C200/C200E when supervisory net is Ethernet and FTE Bridge module is used C300 (FTE)
Safety Manager

Fault Tolerant Ethernet LAN

ESV

ACE C300

Open, 3rd-party applications

Normal Ethernet connections to other devices Transparent to applications

Experion System Overview Describe Station and Server and Their Connections

27

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Fault Tolerant Ethernet


Firewall To Plant Information Network (PIN) Backbone Switches
History, Advanced Control

Honeywell

SWITCH

SWITCH

Cluster Switches SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH

Process UNIT #1 CLUSTER

Process UNIT #2 CLUSTER

Process UNIT #3 CLUSTER

Multiple data paths for communication redundancy


A to A, B to B, A to B, B to A
Experion System Overview Describe Station and Server and Their Connections

28

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

14

Fault Tolerant Ethernet Components & C300


Backbone Switches

Honeywell
Media Converters

Cluster Switches Software Dual NIC card or Embedded Dual NICs


Ethernet FTE C300 FTE Ethernet C300

FTE connected nodes and singly connected nodes FTE Nodes per FTE Community Scenario 1: If no FTEBs are used, limit is 330 FTE Nodes per community Scenario 2: If FTEBs are used, limit is 200 FTE Nodes per community with a maximum of 99 FTEBs in the community 60 ESFs for SCADA system only If system contains ESCs or CDA then 40 ESFs are supported 20 ESC/ESTs if system talks with C300 with Series C or Series A IO, or Series C FIM (FIM4), or with AB PLC via CNI residing in Series A chassis If system contains C200/C200E or Series A FIM (FIM2) via FTEB, then limit remains at 11 ES-C only 200 singly connected (non-FTE) nodes in an FTE community
Experion System Overview Describe Station and Server and Their Connections

FTE

FTE

29

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 4: Experion PKS FTE Which of these statements about the FTE is false? The FTE:
A) Has multiple data paths for communication redundancy B) Is not a redundant Ethernet C) Uses standard COTS (common-off-the-shelf) hardware D) Can be built from parts found in the garage
PM I/O
LAN

Honeywell
Human Interface Console Operations

Fault Tolerant Ethernet

ESV ACE

Safety Manager

ControlNet

Incorrect."Can be built from parts found inin Correct! "Can be built from parts found in Incorrect."Can be built from parts found in Correct! "Can be built from parts found your garage " is The correct answerthe false statement. To Yourcorrect answerthe false statement. To your garage The answer: is: Youranswer: " is is: implement FTE standard Cisco switches are implement FTE standard question before are You must answer the Cisco switches You You answer questioncontinue must Click this before YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue Incorrect--answeredthisquestioncompletely Correct answer anywhereto continue used whichClick approvedcorrectly! Youdidwhich--Clickanywherebytocontinue didnot arecontinuing byto not Click anywhere Honeywell. this Correct answeranywhere to completely You areapprovedcorrectly! this used Honeywell. continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

HART
Submit
30

Clear

Experion System Overview Describe Station and Server and Their Connections

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

15

Question 5: FTE Data Paths

Honeywell

How many FTE data paths are there for communication redundancy?
A) Six B) Four C) Three D) Two
Cluster Switches SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH
History, Advanced Control

Firewall To Plant Information Network (PIN) Backbone Switches SWITCH SWITCH

Process UNIT #1 CLUSTER

Process UNIT #2 CLUSTER

Process UNIT #3 CLUSTER

Incorrect.There are four FTE data paths for Correct! There are four FTE data paths for Correct! Thereare are FTE paths for The Incorrect.There is: four A to data to B, A to Yourcorrect answer is: four FTE data paths for B The answer: Yourcorrect answer answer: communication redundancy: A toA, B to B, A to B communication redundancy: A, B You must answer theB questionbefore question You You -Click anywhere A. continue must answer question before and B to to YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue Incorrect--answeredthis to A. continue Correct answer anywhereto continue did not answeranywhere to completely Click thisthiscorrectly! and You Correct -Click anywhere to completely did You Click this not continuing correctly! continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
31

Clear

Experion System Overview Describe Station and Server and Their Connections

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Summary An Experion PKS system can have:


Multiple servers and redundant servers 3 types of stations: flex, console and console extension Flex stations get data from the server

Honeywell

Console stations get data from the server and also directly from C200/C200E, C300 controllers and TPS Console extension stations get their data only from console stations FTE technology that provides four-fold communication path redundancy

Experion System Overview Describe Station and Server and Their Connections

32

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

16

Conclusion Describe Station and Server and Their Connections

Honeywell

Completion Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material


Experion System Overview Describe Station and Server and Their Connections

33

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Experion System Overview Describe Station and Server and Their Connections

34

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

17

Describe C200/C200E, ACE, and Their Simulation

Experion System Overview Describe C200/C200E, ACE, and Their Simulation

35

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Introduction

Honeywell

In this lesson, you will learn more about the Experion PKS C200/C200E process controller and the application control environment (ACE) as well as how they are connected to the Experion system. At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Describe the C200/C200E and ACE components Describe the C200/C200E and ACE network connections Identify the C200/C200E I/O options Explain the purpose of the Experion PKS Simulation Control Environment (SCE) and the SIM-ACE
C300

Experion Server (ESV)

Experion Station

ControlNet

Process Controller

ACE

Experion System Overview Describe C200/C200E, ACE, and Their Simulation

36

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

18

Topics C200/C200E C200/C200E and ACE Network Connections C200/C200E I/O Options Experion Simulation Control Environment ACE SIM-ACE

Honeywell

Experion System Overview Describe C200/C200E, ACE, and Their Simulation

37

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Process Controller
Redundancy

Honeywell
Integrated with Experion Server
Separate chassis, no single point of failure Redundant Power option Redundant Networks option

On-process migration One Control Execution Set for:


Regulatory Control Logic / Device Control Sequence Control Execution as fast as 5 ms

64 I/O unit capacity Peer-to-peer with Allen Bradley and other ControlNet devices

Experion System Overview Describe C200/C200E, ACE, and Their Simulation

38

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

19

Question 1: C200/C200E Control Which type of Control is not performed in the C200/C200E?
A) Regulatory control B) Supervisory control C) Logic/Device control D) Sequence control

Honeywell

The correct answer Yourcorrect answer is: Youranswer: The answer: Incorrect.Supervisory is: Correct! Supervisory Control isperformed by the Incorrect.SupervisoryControl isisperformedby the Correct!must answer Control is performed by the Supervisory Control performed You must answerthe question before by the You ServerClick not the correctly! YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue Incorrect--answeredthisquestioncompletely Correct answernot the C200/C200E. not Click thisthis C200/C200E. and thisquestion before Correct -- and anywhere to continue YoudidServer Clickanywhere to continue didYou answeranywhere to continue You Click anywhere to completely not continuing correctly! continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
39

Clear

Experion System Overview Describe C200/C200E, ACE, and Their Simulation

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics C200/C200E C200/C200E and ACE Network Connections C200/C200E I/O Options Experion Simulation Control Environment ACE SIM-ACE

Honeywell

Experion System Overview Describe C200/C200E, ACE, and Their Simulation

40

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

20

Process Controller Network Options

Honeywell

The C200/C200E can communicate with the Experion Server and the ACE node over two different types of networks:
Control Net (CNet) Fault Tolerant Ethernet (FTE)

Fault Tolerant Ethernet LAN

Crossover Cable Cluster Switches


A B

Experion Server (ESV)

ACE

ControlNet

Experion Server (ESV) Console Station

FTE Bridge

Experion System Overview Describe C200/C200E, ACE, and Their Simulation

41

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 2: C200/C200E - ACE Communication

Honeywell

Which type of network is NOT used for communication between the ACE and the C200/C200E ?
A) RS485 serial network B) Control Net C) FTE

Incorrect.Peer to peer communication Correct! Peer to peer communication Incorrect.Peer to peer communication Correct! Peer to peer communication The correctanswer is: Yourcorrect the C200/C200E and ACE uses between the C200/C200E and ACE uses The answer: Your answer: between answer is: You must or FTE the question before ControlNet answer and NOT RS485 serial You You - answer and question before must or FTE ControlNetClick anywhere toRS485 serial YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue Incorrect--answeredthisNOTtocontinue Correct answer anywhere to continue did not answeranywhere tocontinue You Correct -Click thisthiscorrectly! did You Click anywhere not Click thisquestion completely completely continuing correctly! network. continuing network. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
42

Clear

Experion System Overview Describe C200/C200E, ACE, and Their Simulation

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

21

Topics C200/C200E C200/C200E and ACE Network Connections C200/C200E I/O Options Experion Simulation Control Environment ACE SIM-ACE

Honeywell

Experion System Overview Describe C200/C200E, ACE, and Their Simulation

43

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

C200/C200E I/O options


Experion Server (ESV)
ControlNet

Honeywell
ACE

Process Controllers I/O Options Rail I/O Series A


ControlNet IO Link

Rack I/O Series A

PM I/O

Fiber Optic Fiber Optic Isolation Isolation

HART

GI/IS Rail I/O Series H

Experion System Overview Describe C200/C200E, ACE, and Their Simulation

44

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

22

Question 3: C200/C200E I/O

Honeywell

As long as you have no more then 64 I/O units for the C200/C200E, which types of I/O can you use?
A) RAIL, Chassis and Foundation Fieldbus B) HART, PMIO and Profibus C) DeviceNet D) All of the above

Correct! The correct answer is "All"Allof the above". Incorrect. The correct answer is of theabove". As Correct! The correct answer is "All thethe above". Incorrect. The correct above". Thelong as answer noanswer is "All64 I/O Units forAs Yourcorrect you haveis:more then 64of of Units for a a answer: Thelong you have no more then I/O Yourcorrect answer is:nomore then 64 I/O Units for Aslongasas you have nomore then 64I/O Units for a a long as you As answer: have You must all the question before You You -Click the IO typesmentioned must Clickanywhere before C200/C200E,answer thequestioncontinue above can YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinueabove can Incorrect--answeredthisquestioncompletely Correct answer anywhereto mentioned did not answeranywhere to continue completely C200/C200E,answer IO typestocontinue all thisthiscorrectly! You Correct -Click anywhere to did You Click this not continuing correctly! continuing be used. be used. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
45

Clear

Experion System Overview Describe C200/C200E, ACE, and Their Simulation

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics C200/C200E C200/C200E and ACE Network Connections C200/C200E I/O Options Experion Simulation Control Environment ACE SIM-ACE

Honeywell

Experion System Overview Describe C200/C200E, ACE, and Their Simulation

46

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

23

Experion Simulation Control Environment


SIM-C200/C200E:

Honeywell

Supports SCM & CM devices & algorithms Up to 4 C200/C200E controllers per workstation Process IO - simulation or simplified Tie-Back model Built and configured through Control Builder Allows reuse of the existing configuration Move configuration between simulation environment and on-process system

From Experion R400 onwards simulation of foundation fieldbus devices is supported

Experion System Overview Describe C200/C200E, ACE, and Their Simulation

47

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics C200/C200E C200/C200E and ACE Network Connections C200/C200E I/O Options Experion Simulation Control Environment ACE SIM-ACE

Honeywell

Experion System Overview Describe C200/C200E, ACE, and Their Simulation

48

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

24

ACE

Human Interface Console Operations

Honeywell
Windows-based platform for optimization, unit startup/shutdown, etc Software based on the C200/C200E or C300 CEE (Control Execution Environment) Peer-to-peer communication with:
Servers Process Controllers Fieldbus Interface Module TPS Integration Nodes
PM I/O

Fault Tolerant Ethernet LAN

Experion Server (ESV)

ACE

Safety Manager

ControlNet

3rd Party OPC Servers CAB (Custom Algorithm Block) on ACE node:
New function block that can be used in control strategies Can be used on the ACE node

HART

Experion System Overview Describe C200/C200E, ACE, and Their Simulation

49

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 4: ACE Which statement about the ACE is NOT true ?


A) Requires UNIX operating system B) Used to write control programs C) Supports Custom Algorithm Blocks D) Connects to the Fault Tolerant Ethernet

Honeywell

The Correct! The ACE does not use the UNIX Yourcorrect answer is: doesnot use the UNIX answer: The Correct! The ACE does not use the UNIX Yourcorrect answer is: doesnot use the UNIX answer: Incorrect. The ACE Incorrect. The ACE You must answer theItquestionbefore question before operating system. question completely You not Click anywhere to Windows. must answer YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue Incorrect answer anywhereto continue Correct --Clickanywhere to Windows. operating system. Ituses completely Correct answerthisthis uses continue Youdid You --answeredthis correctly! did You Click anywhere tocontinue not Click this continuing correctly! continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
50

Clear

Experion System Overview Describe C200/C200E, ACE, and Their Simulation

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

25

Topics C200/C200E C200/C200E and ACE Network Connections C200/C200E I/O Options Experion Simulation Control Environment ACE SIM-ACE

Honeywell

Experion System Overview Describe C200/C200E, ACE, and Their Simulation

51

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Experion PKS Simulation Control Environment (SIM-ACE) SIM-ACE:


Is the simulation environment for the ACE node Supports ACE strategy check-out prior to on-process Able to read but not write to on-line system

Honeywell

Experion System Overview Describe C200/C200E, ACE, and Their Simulation

52

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

26

Summary

Honeywell

When working with the C200/C200E, ACE and their connections, remember:
The C200/C200E performs regulatory, sequence and logic/device control The C200/C200E and the ACE communicate via ControlNet or FTE The C200/C200E supports Rail, chassis Foundation Fieldbus, HART, PMIO, Profibus and DeviceNet I/O The ACE is used to write control programs using CAB function blocks

Experion System Overview Describe C200/C200E, ACE, and Their Simulation

53

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Conclusion

Honeywell

Describe C200/C200E, ACE, SIM-C200/C200E, and Their Connections

Completion Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material


Experion System Overview Describe C200/C200E, ACE, and Their Simulation

54

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

27

Describe C300 and Its Connection

Experion System Overview Describe C300 and Its Connection

55

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Introduction

Honeywell

In this lesson, you will learn more about the Experion PKS process controller (C300) components, and how they are connected At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Describe C300 and Series C I/O Describe C300 network connections Identify the C300 I/O options

Experion Server (ESV)

Experion Station

C300

ControlNet

Process Controller

ACE

Experion System Overview Describe C300 and Its Connection

56

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

28

Topics C300 C300 Network Connections Series C I/O Options

Honeywell

Experion System Overview Describe C300 and Its Connection

57

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Series C Key Attributes


Series C is the name given to the new family of Honeywell Controller and I/O Environmental ratings equivalent to HPM
Temperature, corrosives, EMI/RFI, Vibration, other equal to HPM Class 1 Div 2 / Zone 2 interface & mounting support

Honeywell

Approvals Support (CE, FM, CSA, ATEX, etc.) Corrosion protected models All Series C components can be mixed & matched in cabinet Electronics mounted to Input/Output Termination Assembly (IOTA)
Module Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP) Reduces footprint Similar to TPS Process Manager today More Uniform Heat Management More Efficient Field Wiring
58

Packaged cabinet solution


Designed Vertical

Experion System Overview Describe C300 and Its Connection

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

29

Series C Architecture

Honeywell

Experion System Overview Describe C300 and Its Connection

59

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

C300 Controller Components C300 Controller Module


A distributed process controller and I/O gateway for the Experion system Module mounts to its Input Output Termination Assembly (IOTA)

Honeywell

C300 Controller Input Output Termination Assembly (IOTA)


Provides the connection point for the C300 Controller module and all cable terminations to the controller Provides 24 Vdc power distribution to the controller module Note: The C300 Controller IOTA supports only one controller module

Experion System Overview Describe C300 and Its Connection

60

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

30

Control Firewall Components 9 Port FTE Control Firewall Module


Provides FTE distribution to in-cabinet network nodes (C300 Controllers and Series C FIMs) and FTEBs connecting the Series A Chassis I/O and Allen Bradley PLCs

Honeywell

9 Port Control Firewall IOTA FTE requires two Control Firewalls, one for FTE A, one for FTE B

Experion System Overview Describe C300 and Its Connection

61

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 1: C300

Honeywell

Which component provides the connection point for the C300 controller, cable terminations to the controller (FTE, IOLink, Redundancy, Battery, and Time Source cable terminations) and 24V DC power distribution to the controller module?
A) IOTA Carrier B) IOTA Channel C) Control Firewall IOTA D) C300 IOTA
Your correct answer is: The correct answer is: Your answer: The answer: Yes! The correctanswerthe 'D'. The C300 IOTA provides the No. You must answer thequestion C300 IOTA provides the You not Click anywhere to C300 IOTA before Yes!The correct answer this'D'. to continueIOTA provides the The must Click thisis questionbefore correct answer is 'D'. The C300 answer No.Incorrect-answered isquestioncontinue The correct answer is 'D'. The completely provides the YouIncorrect-answered thiscorrectly! Correct --Clickanywhere Thecontinue Correct answer anywhere to completely Youdid You answer anywhere to continue did You not this question continuing correctly! connection pointClickthe C300 controller module and all the continuing connection pointfor the C300 controller module and all the for cable terminations to the controller ((FTE, IOLink, Redundancy, cable terminations to the controller FTE, IOLink, Redundancy, Battery and Time Source cable terminations). It also provides a Battery and Time Source cable terminations). It also provides a 24V DC power distribution to the controller module. 24V DC power distribution to the controller module. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
62

Clear

Experion System Overview Describe C300 and Its Connection

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

31

Question 2: Series C What are the key features of the Series C hardware?
A) Uniform heat management B) Reduced footprint C) Module removal and insertion under power D) Efficient field wiring E) All of the above

Honeywell

The correct answer is: Yourcorrect answer is: Your answer: The answer: Yes!You must answer theis'E'. All ofbefore are the key No. The correct answer is questionofbefore are the key The must answer is 'E'. All of these No. You You answer anywhere All continue The correct answer question completely Yes!Correct -answered the question these are the key The correct answer is correctly!these correct answer All of these YouIncorrect-answeredthis 'E'.to continue are the key Incorrect answerthisthis'E'. to continue Youdid not --Clickanywhere to continue Correct Clickofanywhere to hardware. did You Click anywhere C completely not Click the Series this question featurescontinuing correctly! featurescontinuing of the Series C hardware. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
63

Clear

Experion System Overview Describe C300 and Its Connection

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics C300 C300 Network Connections Series C I/O Options

Honeywell

Experion System Overview Describe C300 and Its Connection

64

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

32

C300 Network Connections C300 connects to the Control Firewall

Honeywell

C300 connects to the control and supervisory communications networks through the 9 Port Control Firewall (CF9) Control Firewall Module provides connection to other field Level 1 nodes on the FTE network, and an uplink to the supervisory level FTE network Control Firewall Module provides message management and protects the Level 1 network from message storms Control Firewall Module resides in the same cabinet as the C300

Experion System Overview Describe C300 and Its Connection

65

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

C300 Network Connections (Contd.) C300 Controller exists as a single node on an FTE network

Honeywell

C300 does not contain a ControlNet interface module and therefore cannot reside on a ControlNet supervisory network C300 Controllers and C200/C200E controllers can exist in the same server only when FTE is used as the supervisory network protocol

Experion System Overview Describe C300 and Its Connection

66

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

33

Question 3: C300 Network Connections

Honeywell

What type of network is used by the 9-port Control Firewall (CF9) to connect the C300 controller and the FIM to the supervisory network?
A) FTE B) ControlNet C) Modbus

The correct answer is: Yourcorrect answer is: Your answer: The answer: Yes! Youmust answer theisquestionbefore No.You must answer isquestion FTE network is used by The correct answer is'A'. The before Yes!The You --Click anywhere toThe FTE network is used by No.Correct The correct answer question completely The correct answer is'A'. The FTE network is used by correct answer 'A'. The FTE network is used by 'A'. YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue Incorrect -answeredthis correctly! Correct answeranywhere tocontinue Youdid not answer anywhere tocontinue did You -Click thisthis correctly! not Click anywhere Click this completely the 9-port Controlcontinuing to continue continuing (CF9) to connect C300 and FIM the 9-port ControlFirewall (CF9) to connect C300 and FIM Firewall controller to supervisory network. controller to supervisory network. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
67

Clear

Experion System Overview Describe C300 and Its Connection

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics C300 C300 Network Connections Series C I/O Options

Honeywell

Experion System Overview Describe C300 and Its Connection

68

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

34

Series C I/O Options The C300 Controller is connected to the associated I/O hardware by a pair of I/O Link Interface cables. Series C I/O
New form Factor AI, AO, DI, DO, LLMUX

Honeywell

PMIO
As supported by C200/C200E

Series C Fieldbus Interface FTEB connected Series A I/O


Serial Interface, Profibus Interface, DeviceNet Interface and Pulse Input

FTEB connections to AB PLCs

Experion System Overview Describe C300 and Its Connection

69

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 4: Series C I/O Options

Honeywell

Which Series A I/O type cannot be used as a FTEB connection to the C300 controller?
A) Serial Interface B) Profibus Interface C) Pulse Input D) Digital Input

The correct answer is: Yourcorrect answer is: Youranswer: The answer: Yes! The correct answer is 'D'. The Digital Input I/O type No. The correct answer is 'D'. The Digital Input I/O type Yes! The correct answer is 'D'. The Digital Input I/O type No. The correct answer is 'D'. The Digital Input I/O type You must answer the question before You not Click this questioncontinue must answer the question before YouIncorrectansweredthequestioncompletely FTEB connection Incorrect answer anywhere to Afamily as Correct --Clickanywhere tocontinue cannot be usedClickanywhereto A continue FTEB connection Correct answer this Series completely Youdid You --answeredthis correctly! did You Click the Series family not cannot be usedfromanywheretocontinue as from this correctly! continuing continuing controller. to C300 controller. to C300 Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
70

Clear

Experion System Overview Describe C300 and Its Connection

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

35

Summary When working with the C300 and its connections, remember:
The C300 performs regulatory, sequence and logic/device control

Honeywell

C300 Controller Module is mounted to its Input Output Termination Assembly (IOTA) For C300 Redundancy, Redundancy Modules are not needed C300 connects to the control and supervisory networks through Control Firewall C300 communicates with associated Series A I/Os through a Fault Tolerant Ethernet Bridge (FTEB) C300 does not contain a ControlNet interface and therefore cannot reside on a ControlNet supervisory network

Experion System Overview Describe C300 and Its Connection

71

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Conclusion Describe C300 and Its Connections

Honeywell

Completion Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material


Experion System Overview Describe C300 and Its Connection

72

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

36

Describe SCADA Controllers and Their Connections

Experion System Overview Describe SCADA Controllers and Their Connections

73

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Introduction

Honeywell

In this lesson, you will learn more about SCADA controllers and their Experion PKS network connections At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Identify SCADA controllers Describe the SCADA controller components and connections Describe Safety Manager Describe Server SCADA controller configuration

Experion System Overview Describe SCADA Controllers and Their Connections

74

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

37

Topics SCADA Controllers SCADA Controller Network Connections Safety Manager SCADA controller configuration

Honeywell

Experion System Overview Describe SCADA Controllers and Their Connections

75

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

SCADA Controllers
Human Interface Console Operations

Honeywell
OPC, Modbus, DH+, and many more interface types Serial, Ethernet, and Terminal Server connections Specific and Universal drivers Numerous controller manufacturers and models supported Controllers configured outside of Experion

LAN

ESV ACE

ControlNet

PM I/O

HART

Experion System Overview Describe SCADA Controllers and Their Connections

76

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

38

Topics SCADA Controllers SCADA Controller Network Connections Safety Manager SCADA Controller Configuration

Honeywell

Experion System Overview Describe SCADA Controllers and Their Connections

77

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

SCADA Serial Connections


Experion Station

Honeywell

Serial Adapter

Direct RS 232 or 422 or 485

Experion Server Terminal Server on Ethernet

RS 232 or 422

Connection Distance Bit rate Type Nodes RS 232 C 15 m upto 38.4Kbps Point to point 1 RS 422 RS 485 1200 m 1200 m upto 2.5 Mbps Point to point upto 2.5 Mbps
78

1 32/64

Multidrop

Addressing NA/Terminal Server Logical Port Numbers node number


EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Experion System Overview Describe SCADA Controllers and Their Connections

39

SCADA Ethernet Connections


Experion Station

Honeywell
Experion Server

Connection Distance Bit rate UTP 100m Coaxial 185m 10/100Mbps Thicknet 500m Fibre Optic 2000m, extensions repeaters
Experion System Overview Describe SCADA Controllers and Their Connections

Type

Nodes

Addressing

Bus

IP Address in 99 xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx channels/999 form controllers Same Class IP

79

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 1: SCADA vs. C200/C200E Controller Which statement about SCADA controllers is false? SCADA controllers:
A) Are single Ethernet connections, not Fault Tolerant Ethernet nodes B) Are programmed outside Experion PKS C) Communicate with the server by serial or Ethernet connection D) Are made by many different manufacturers E) Are Fault Tolerant Ethernet nodes

Honeywell

The The false statement is is "SCADA controllers Yourcorrectfalse statement "SCADA controllers are No. correctfalse statement "SCADA controllers are Yes! The answer is: The answer: YourThe false statement is is "SCADA controllers No. answer: Yes! The answer is: Fault Tolerant Ethernet before You are Fault Tolerant questionnodes". are answer thequestion nodes". Fault Tolerant Ethernet nodes". Ethernet before nodes". Youmust-Click anywhere to continue must answer Ethernet completely YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue IncorrectFault Tolerant questioncompletely Correct answer anywhereto continue Youdid You --answeredthis correctly! Correct answeranywhere to continue didnot -Click thisthis correctly! You Click anywhere to not Click this continuing continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit

Clear

Experion System Overview Describe SCADA Controllers and Their Connections

80

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

40

Topics SCADA Controllers SCADA Controller Network Connections Safety Manager SCADA controller configuration

Honeywell

Experion System Overview Describe SCADA Controllers and Their Connections

81

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Safety Manager
Human Interface Console Operations

Honeywell Safety Manager is based on Quadruple Modular Redundant (QMR) -2oo4D technology TUV approved On-line modification for
Critical control applications On-line Software migration/updates
PM I/O

Fault Tolerant Ethernet LAN

ESV

Safety Manager ACE

ControlNet

Reduced Engineering time & cost

HART

Telemetry support via satellites and routers


82
EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Experion System Overview Describe SCADA Controllers and Their Connections

41

Topics SCADA Controllers SCADA Controller Network Connections Safety Manager SCADA Controller Configuration

Honeywell

Experion System Overview Describe SCADA Controllers and Their Connections

83

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

SCADA Controllers Configuration

Honeywell

All SCADA controllers configured similarly


Channel One or more Controllers SCADA points Analog Status Accumulator

Experion System Overview Describe SCADA Controllers and Their Connections

84

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

42

Summary

Honeywell

SCADA controllers are different from a C200/C200E controller in these ways:


They are made by many different manufacturers They are single Ethernet connections, not FTE nodes They are programmed outside Experion PKS They communicate with the server through Ethernet or serial ports Their Experion PKS databases only load to the server The configuration of any SCADA controller involves a channel, controller(s) and Status, Analog, and Accumulator points

Experion System Overview Describe SCADA Controllers and Their Connections

85

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Conclusion Describe SCADA Controllers and their Connections

Honeywell

Completion Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material


Experion System Overview Describe SCADA Controllers and Their Connections

86

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

43

Identify Experion PKS Functions and Data Sources

Experion System Overview Identify Experion PKS Functions and Data Sources

87

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Introduction

Honeywell

In this lesson, you will learn about Experion PKS functions and data sources At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Identify system data sources Describe the Real Time Database functional components
Executive

Configuration

User Interface

Redundancy

Real Time Database

Acquisition & Control

Report Alarm & Event

History Collection

Experion System Overview Identify Experion PKS Functions and Data Sources

88

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

44

Topics Experion PKS Data Sources Real Time Database functional components

Honeywell

Experion System Overview Identify Experion PKS Functions and Data Sources

89

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

System Data Sources

Honeywell

SCADA Controllers Custom displays Alarm, Event displays C200, C200E, C300 and ACE

Trend displays

Group displays

Data accessed through points Points assigned to Assets Assets assigned to Operators
90

TPS integration DSA

OPC Computer/ Switches


EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Point Detail Displays

Reports

Experion System Overview Identify Experion PKS Functions and Data Sources

45

Question 1: Real Time Database What are the basic building blocks of the Real Time Database?
A) User-written applications B) Bricks C) Points D) Reports
Real Time Database

Honeywell

The correctanswer is: Yourcorrect Thebasic is: Incorrect.The basicbuilding blocks of the Real Correct! The Your answer: basic building blocks of the Real The answer: basicbuilding blocks of the Real Incorrect.The Correct! answer building blocks of the Real You must answer the question before are Points. You notTime Databasequestion before mustClick this question completely answer YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue IncorrectTime Database are tocontinue Correct answer anywhereto Points. Youdid You --answeredthis correctly! Correct --Clickanywhere tocontinue did You answeranywhere to continue not Click anywhere Click this this completely continuing correctly! continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
91

Clear

Experion System Overview Identify Experion PKS Functions and Data Sources

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Experion PKS Data Sources Real Time Database functional components

Honeywell

Experion System Overview Identify Experion PKS Functions and Data Sources

92

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

46

Experion PKS Server Software

Honeywell

Executive

Configuration

User Interface

Redundancy

Real Time Database

Acquisition & Control

Report Alarm & Event

History Collection

Experion System Overview Identify Experion PKS Functions and Data Sources

93

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Real Time Database Structure


History Collection

Honeywell

Process History Alarms Events


Alarm & Event

Acquisition & Control

Real Time Database


System Status Configuration Data

Controller Data

User Defined Data

Scripting and User Programs

Configuration

Experion System Overview Identify Experion PKS Functions and Data Sources

94

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

47

Question 2: Real Time Database Components Which of these is not a Real Time Database component?
A) Acquisition & Control B) Alarm & Event C) Control Builder D) History Collection E) User Interface
Real Time Database

Honeywell

The correct answer is: Yourcorrect answer is: Your answer: correct answer is Control Builder is is The answer: correct answer is 'C'. Control Builder is not Incorrect.The correct answer is 'C'.'C'. Control Builder not Correct! TheThe correct answer 'C'.'C'. Control Builder not Incorrect. The Incorrect.Theanswer the question before Builder is not Correct! The correct answer is 'C'. Control Builder is is Incorrect. correct answer is is Control You must answer the You You -Click anywhere to continue must Click before not componentthisof correctly! Database. YouIncorrectansweredofthisthetocontinue Database. Incorrect-componentof questioncompletely Correct answer anywhere Real Time nota -Click this question Time a component a the Real completely Youdid anotcomponentthistheto continue Database. Correct -answeredofthe correctly! Database. didnot answeranywhere Real Time You Click anywhere to continue question continuing Real Time continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit

Clear

Experion System Overview Identify Experion PKS Functions and Data Sources

95

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Summary Experion PKS data sources include:

Honeywell

SCADA controllers, C200, C200E, C300 and ACE, DSA servers, LCN, and OPC Points which are the basic building blocks of the Real Time Database

The Real Time Database has eight components:


Acquisition and Control Alarm and Event Executive Configuration History Collection Redundancy Report User Interface
Experion System Overview Identify Experion PKS Functions and Data Sources

96

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

48

Lab Example Experion Station Navigation

Honeywell

Experion System Overview Identify Experion PKS Functions and Data Sources

97

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Conclusion Identify Experion PKS Functions and Data Sources

Honeywell

Completion Certificate

Proceed to the Navigate Station lab exercise


Experion System Overview Identify Experion PKS Functions and Data Sources

98

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

49

Describe IKB Keyboard and It's Functions

Experion System Overview Describe IKB Keyboard and It's Functions

99

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Introduction

Honeywell

In this lesson, you will learn about the Integrated Keyboard (IKB) At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Identify IKB Describe the functions of IKB
Integrated Keyboard (IKB)

Experion System Overview Describe IKB Keyboard and It's Functions

100

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

50

Topics IKB Functions IKB Sections

Honeywell

Experion System Overview Describe IKB Keyboard and It's Functions

101

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Functions of the IKB Primary Functions of the IKB


Process Control Navigation between displays Indicate Alarms Indicate Status

Honeywell

Experion System Overview Describe IKB Keyboard and It's Functions

102

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

51

Sections of the IKB The Integrated Keyboard (IKB) has the following sections
Configurable Button Pad Full Travel Keyboard (a QWERTY keyboard) Operator Control Panel Optional Trackball ES-C ES-T ES-F ES-CE

Honeywell

The IKB can be used on


Configurable Button Pad Full Travel Keyboard

Provision to install Trackball Operator Control Panel

Experion System Overview Describe IKB Keyboard and It's Functions

103

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configurable Button Pad 79 configurable buttons are present at the top of the IKB

Honeywell

Configured by user to perform certain functions Invoke critical or frequently used displays Initiate cross-screen displays within a console Activate a particular Control Language program Station toolbar file (.stb) or LCN button file (.ko) configured for each station defines functions of the 79 buttons 40 configurable buttons have LEDs to indicate alarm condition in points, alarm groups, or assets

Red LED: Indicates that an urgent priority alarm exists

Yellow LED: Indicates that a high or low priority alarm exists


104

LED TEST button: Press to test all keyboard lamps

Experion System Overview Describe IKB Keyboard and It's Functions

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

52

Full Travel Keyboard Full Travel Keyboard is a standard typewriter keyboard

Honeywell

Perform tasks such as typing text, moving the cursor, and entering a number PF1 - PF17 keys (labeled in red) are found on IKBs connected through a serial OEP/IKB adapter 3 possible functions PF key is pressed alone Shift key is held and PF key is pressed Ctrl key is held and PF key is pressed

Experion System Overview Describe IKB Keyboard and It's Functions

105

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Operator Control Panel Fixed function hot keys are focus independent
ALM SUMM invokes Experion Alarm Summary display GROUP invokes Group display

Honeywell

Focus dependent keys


Action depends on whether Native Window or Station has focus MAN, AUTO, SP, OUT

6 user configurable buttons


Operator Display Keys

Alarm Keys

Six user configurable Keys

Navigation Keys

Status Keys

Controlling points, issuing commands and entering data

Experion System Overview Describe IKB Keyboard and It's Functions

106

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

53

IKB Keyswitch

Honeywell

Physical IKB keyswitch used to set the security level to operator, supervisor, or engineer
Experion station Native Window (ES-T) GUS displays (ES-T)

Requires operator based security and Signon Manager

Operator Supervisor

Engineer

Experion System Overview Describe IKB Keyboard and It's Functions

107

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

ES-T Integrated Keyboard Behavior


Action of user configured buttons can be controlled by
Experion (defined in station toolbar file (.stb)) OR TPN/LCN (defined in button configuration file (.ko)) OR Combination of both on a button by button basis

Honeywell

LEDs on user configured buttons can be controlled by


Experion (defined in station specific configuration in Configuration Studio) OR TPN/LCN (defined in button configuration file (.ko)) OR Combination of both on a button by button basis If both Experion and TPN/LCN try to control an LED, behavior will be unpredictable

Action of fixed function keys

Some keys such as CONS STATS and SYS STATS shared by Experion and TPN/LCN Defined in Knowledge Builder > Experion 400 > Configuration > Integrated Experion TPS Nodes (EST, ESVT, ACET) Users Guide > Managing Operations, Alarms, and Events > ES-T Keyboard Behavior

Station toolbar files and station specific configuration covered later in course
108
EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Experion System Overview Describe IKB Keyboard and It's Functions

54

ES-CE with TPS Extension IKB Behavior


Action of user configured buttons can be controlled by
Experion ONLY (defined in station toolbar file (.stb)) No TPN/LCN button configuration file (.ko) available

Honeywell

LEDs on user configured buttons can be controlled by


Experion ONLY (defined in station specific configuration in Configuration Studio) No TPN/LCN button configuration file (.ko) available

Action of fixed function keys


Keys such as CONS STATS and SYS STATS owned exclusively by Experion Defined in Knowledge Builder > Experion 400 > Configuration > Integrated Experion TPS Nodes (EST, ESVT, ACET) Users Guide > Configure Experion Database > Support TPS on Console Station Extension

Station toolbar files and station specific configuration covered later in course

Experion System Overview Describe IKB Keyboard and It's Functions

109

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 1:Node Type On which of the following node types can the IKB be used?
A) ES-C B) ES-T C) ES-F D) ES-CE E) All of the above

Honeywell

The correct answer is: Yourcorrect answer is: The answer: Youranswer: You did not answer correctly! the above' You answered answer is 'All the Yes!The correct answer is continueabove' No. The correct answer is 'All the No. The correct the question the You mustClick anywhere question above'. You did answer answer is 'All the above' Incorrectansweredthis this questiontheabove'. You The correct answer is 'All Yes!The answer answer to continue 'All No. No. The correct the question You mustcorrectthis correctly! before Incorrect--not answer this tois'Allbefore Correct Click anywhere to continueabove' IKBCorrect--Click with with ES-C,ES-CE,ES-F EST completely Clickanywhere to continue and anywhere The can be usedused ES-C,ES-CE,ES-F and and completely IKB IKB canusedused with ES-C,ES-CE,ES-F EST with ES-C,ES-CE,ES-F The can be be continuing IKB can be continuing and node types. ES-T node types. node types. ES-T node types. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
110

Clear

Experion System Overview Describe IKB Keyboard and It's Functions

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

55

Question 2: IKB LED

Honeywell

Each IKB has 40 configurable buttons with LEDs to indicate alarm condition in ___________?
A) Points B) Alarm Groups C) Assets D) All of the above

No. The correct answer is is 'All the above'. The Yes! answer: The correct answer is: YourThe correct answer is'All'All the above'. The No. correct answer is: Yes!The correct answer 'Allthe above'. The 40 Your The correct answer is the above'. The 40 The answer: configurable keys on IKBonIKBbeused to indicate 40 configurable on IKB can can be used to configurable keys keysthecanbecanbeforeindicate 40 configurable keysonquestion be to IKB used used to You must answer the question You must answer YouIncorrectansweredpoints,points,before and Incorrect answeranywhereto continue Correct Click anywhereto continue indicateconditions inthisthisin assets and alarm alarm not answerinthisquestioncontinue Youdid You --answeredthisincorrectly! Correct Click points, to continue did alarm Click not to completely indicateconditions anywhere points,assets and alarm You --Click anywhereassets and alarm alarmconditionsquestioncompletely conditions correctly! assets continuing continuing alarm groups. groups. alarm groups. groups. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
111

Clear

Experion System Overview Describe IKB Keyboard and It's Functions

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Summary of Integrated Keyboard IKB

Honeywell

Operator keyboard consisting of a configurable button pad, full travel keyboard, and an operator control panel Used for operation on ES-F/ES-C/ES-T/ES-CE stations Functions and Features Display navigation, process control, indicating alarms and status 79 configurable buttons defined by the Station toolbar file, .stb, the LCN button file, .ko, or a combination of both 40 configurable buttons have LEDs that can be used to indicate alarm conditions 3 keyboard contacts can be configured for horn annunciation IKB key switch can be used to change the security level in Station, Native Window and GUS displays

Experion System Overview Describe IKB Keyboard and It's Functions

112

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

56

Conclusion Describe IKB Keyboards and Their Functions

Honeywell

Completion Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material


Experion System Overview Describe IKB Keyboard and It's Functions

113

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Experion System Overview Describe IKB Keyboard and It's Functions

114

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

57

R400:Describe Experion Databases

Experion System Overview R400:Describe Experion Databases

115

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Introduction

Honeywell

In this module we will learn about the various databases in Experion R400 system At the end of this module you will be able to
Identify the databases in Experion system Describe the information stored in databases Describe the tools that are used to access the databases
SAM EMDB ERDB QDB
User3 User6

User6

RTDB User5
STN01

User4

mngr

Experion System Overview R400:Describe Experion Databases

116

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

58

Where Databases Exist


ES-F SAM
User3 User6

Honeywell Active Directory (AD)


AD
User1 User5

ES-C SAM
User3 User6

Domain Controllers

Security Account Manager (SAM)


Non-DCs (Servers, Stations, etc.)

RTDB

Real-Time DataBase (RTDB)


Experion Servers Replicated to Console Stations

SAM EMDB ERDB QDB


User3 User6

Enterprise Model DataBase (EMDB)


Experion Servers

User6 RTDB User5 User4


STN01

Engineering Repository DataBase (ERDB)


Experion Servers

mngr

Quick Builder Database


Experion Servers
117

Experion System Overview R400:Describe Experion Databases

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Active Directory (AD)


AD
User1 User5

Honeywell
AD
User1 User5

AD
User1 User5

Contains

Same on ALL DCs in Domain


Replicated

Users & Groups Group Policy Objects (GPOs) Computers Subnets, Sites DNS Zones

Standard Windows Database Accessed by several programs

Active Directory Users & Computers Active Directory Domains & Trusts Active Directory Sites & Services DNS (if Active Directory Integrated)

Experion System Overview R400:Describe Experion Databases

118

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

59

Security Account Manager (SAM)

SAM
User3 User6

Honeywell
Contains
Local Users and Groups

SAM
User3 User6

On all Non-Domain Controllers Different on every node

SAM
User3 User6

Standard Windows Database Right-click Computer Manage to access SAM

Could have users with the same name Different users (SIDs)

Experion System Overview R400:Describe Experion Databases

119

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Overview of Honeywell Databases One RTDB on every server One EMDB per system One ERDB on each server with C200/C200E and C300 One QDB on every server
By default
LCN Node PLC

Honeywell
Cluster 1

C300

EMDB ERDB QDB


C200/C200E

Cluster 2
LCN Node

RTDB
PLC

Cluster 3
C200/C200E

DSA
ERDB
PLC

QDB RTDB

QDB RTDB
120

C300

Experion System Overview R400:Describe Experion Databases

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

60

Real-Time DataBase (RTDB) Contains


ES-C ES-C
User1 RTDB User2 User3
STN01

Honeywell
Users & Groups Stations (Flex & Console) Assets Channels, Controllers, Points Lots more Experion stuff

RTDB

RTDB

mngr

On ALL Servers

A
User6 RTDB User5 User4
STN01

B
User6 RTDB User5 User4
STN01

Same on Redundant Pair Different on each Pair

Replicated to Console Stations


Read Only

Honeywell Specific Database


Many Files

mngr

mngr

Accessed with Station and Configuration Studio


*

Experion System Overview R400:Describe Experion Databases

121

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Enterprise Model DataBase (EMDB)


Server1 EMDB EMDB Server2

Honeywell Contains
Servers (System Model) Assets Alarm Groups Network Equipment

On one server per system


On both A & B if redundant Choose during installation of Experion Server software First server

Downloaded to the RTDB of all servers in the system Honeywell Specific Database
SQL Server DB
Server3

Accessed by Configuration Studio


*

Experion System Overview R400:Describe Experion Databases

122

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

61

Enterprise Model Database (EMDB)


Honeywell

The EMDB is a Single offline database, which resides on one server (in a system), and must be loaded to the real-time database on all Servers The EMDB Contains: System model
System Model Represents boundary of the system. System model is built by defining the servers that are part of (and those servers connected to but outside of) your system.

Asset model
Determine operator Scope of Responsibility (SOR) Equivalent of Units in LCN Hierarchical (Tree) structure

Alarm group model


Allows grouping of unrelated points for alarming purposes

System Definition and Configuration


Network equipment information Nodes, Switches

Experion System Overview R400:Describe Experion Databases

123

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

EMDB Entries Downloaded to RTDB

Honeywell

1 Changes to EMDB are made


using Configuration Studio (more on this later)

1 2
EMDB ERDB RTDB

Configuration Studio

2 Changes must be downloaded


to the RTDB to become effective

DSA
ERDB RTDB RTDB

Experion System Overview R400:Describe Experion Databases

124

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

62

Single Experion System One EMDB for all Servers

Honeywell

Single System Model One EMDB containing all cluster servers in a plant System1 Generally recommended (simplest) DSA allows servers to share data, alarms, S4 messages, history, etc. S2
S4 is non-publishing S1
EMDB

S3

Changes to the EMDB are downloaded to the RTDB of all four servers

Experion System Overview R400:Describe Experion Databases

125

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Engineering Repository Database (ERDB)


Server1 Server2

Honeywell

Contains

ERDB ERDB

On each server which is connected to C200/C200Es or C300s


On both A & B if redundant Choose during installation of Experion Server software

Control Strategies for C200/C200Es & C300s

ERDB ERDB

Downloaded to C200/C200Es & C300s Honeywell Specific Database


SQL Server DB Some (ex: Asset Assignment) downloaded to RTDB

Server3

Accessed by Configuration Studio


126

Experion System Overview R400:Describe Experion Databases

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

63

Quick Builder Database (QDB)


Server1 Server2

Honeywell Contains
Items built in Quick Builder (channels, controllers, points, printers, flex stations)

QDB QDB

QDB QDB

On ALL Servers
Same on Redundant Pair Different on each Pair

QDB QDB

Replicated to backup server using File Replication (more later) Downloaded to the local RTDB Joint Engine Technology (Jet) Database Accessed by Configuration Studio
Accesses the QDB file on the primary server
127
EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Server3

Experion System Overview R400:Describe Experion Databases

Brief Summary
Database AD SAM RTDB EMDB ERDB Number and Location of DB 1 / Domain All DCs All Non-DCs 1 / Every Server 1 / System 1 / Server with C200/C200E or C300 1 / Every Server Examples of Contents

Honeywell

Users, Groups, Computers, OUs, GPOs, Sites, Subnets, DNS Zones Local Users, Local Groups Users, Groups, Stations, Assets, Points, Channels, Controllers, Consoles, etc. Servers, Assets, Alarm Groups, Network Equipment Control Strategies for C200/C200E and C300 (Process points) Channels, Controllers, Points, Stations, Printers (SCADA points)
128
EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

QDB

Experion System Overview R400:Describe Experion Databases

64

Topic: Navigate Station


Contents
Use the Main Display Areas in Station ..................................................................................................3 Start Station ...........................................................................................................................................9 Use Display Navigation in Station .......................................................................................................13 Use Station for Data Display ...............................................................................................................19 Use Point Detail Display ......................................................................................................................25 Use Group Display...............................................................................................................................31 Use Trend Sets....................................................................................................................................37

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

This page was intentionally left blank.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Navigate Station Use the Main Display Areas in Station

Use the Main Display Areas in Station


Student Partition sheet Team ## Windows Login User Password System Name Server Alias Name Server Description Server Abbreviation Server Node Name Network Type E02ESV##_System E02ESV##_Server Experion PKS Server ESV## E02ESV## SINGLE/FTE Student

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Navigate Station Use the Main Display Areas in Station

This page was intentionally left blank.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Navigate Station Use the Main Display Areas in Station Prerequisites

Knowledge Builder available Partition Data Sheet

Introduction

The Station program provides the operations interface for the Experion Server. The operations interface is the same whether the station is a Flex, Console or Console Extension.
Main Idea Window Layout

When the Station program is running it provides a window for the displays requested by the operator. The Station window has the following main features:

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Navigate Station Use the Main Display Areas in Station .stn filename Menu Bar Current Display Title Message Zone Current Display File Name / Number Pull down menu Toolbar Command Zone

Navigation Bar (not applicable for some pages)

Display Region

Alarm Line

Server Date

Server Time

Process Alarm Summary Status System Alarm Summary Status

Message Summary Status Alert Summary Status

Server Hostname Station Number Security Level

Status Line

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Navigate Station Use the Main Display Areas in Station

Explanation
Item Title Bar Menu Bar Toolbar Message Zone Command Zone Display Region Navigation Bar Alarm Line Description Shows current Station connection properties file, current display title, and current display file name or number. This consists of a series of pull down navigation menus. A default menu is supplied, but it can be customized by the user. A row of graphical pushbuttons, which perform a variety of navigation and control functions. A default toolbar is supplied, but it can be customized by the user. An area of the screen where the Experion Server prompts for data input or displays messages. An area used for entering commands and responding to prompts for data input. The greatest portion of the screen displaying either a system page or a custom graphic. Displays hyperlinks to other pages. Always visible on Configuration pages, but not on all operations pages. Displays either the newest or the oldest highest priority unacknowledged alarm. The default setting is Newest, but this can be modified in the Alarm/Event Options tab in Server Wide Settings page in Station. Status Line Displays current system status information: Server Date / Time Process Alarm Summary Status System Alarm Summary Status Message Summary Status Date and time of the Experion Server Flashing Red Steady Red Blank Flashing Cyan Steady Cyan Blank Flashing Green Steady Green Blank Unacknowledged alarm(s) present Acknowledged alarm(s) present No alarms present Unacknowledged System alarm(s) present Acknowledged System alarm(s) present No system alarm(s) present Unacknowledged message(s) present Acknowledged message(s) present No message(s) present

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Navigate Station Use the Main Display Areas in Station Item Alert Summary Status Flashing Yellow Steady Yellow Blank Server Hostname Station Number Security Level Description Unacknowledged alert occurrence(s) present Acknowledged alert occurrence(s) present No alert occurrence(s) present

Hostname of Experion Server to which this Station is connected Station Number to which this Station is connected Security access level accessed by, or granted to, the current Station user

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Navigate Station Start Station

Start Station
Student Partition Sheet Team ## Windows Login User Password System Name Server Alias Name Server Description Server Abbreviation Server Node Name Network Type E02ESV##_System E02ESV##_Server Experion PKS Server ESV## E02ESV## SINGLE/FTE Student

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Navigate Station Start Station

This page was intentionally left blank.

10

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Navigate Station Start Station Prerequisites

Knowledge Builder available Partition Data Sheet

Introduction

Proceed with the lab exercise listed below. Ask your instructor for any assistance, if you are not sure what you are expected to do.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11

Navigate Station Start Station Procedure

In these steps, you will learn how to start and connect Station to the Server.
Step 1 Login to Windows with Student User. Action

ATTENTION Refer your partition sheet for password details.

2 3 4

Select Start > Programs > Honeywell Experion PKS > Server > Station Click on Security Level (bottom right on screen). Enter mngr into the password box. Examine the Station layout comparing it to the diagram and descriptions on the preceding pages.

12

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Navigate Station Use Display Navigation in Station

Use Display Navigation in Station


Student Partition sheet Team ## Windows Login User Password System Name Server Alias Name Server Description Server Abbreviation Server Node Name Network Type E02ESV##_System E02ESV##_Server Experion PKS Server ESV## E02ESV## SINGLE/FTE Student

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

13

Navigate Station Use Display Navigation in Station

This page was intentionally left blank.

14

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Navigate Station Use Display Navigation in Station Prerequisites

Knowledge Builder available Partition Data Sheet

Introduction

Experion Server provides a variety of methods for enabling the user to navigate from one display to another.
Main Idea pag nnn <Enter> <F5>nnn <Enter> nnn <Enter> FileName <Enter> grp nnn <F6>nnn nnn tnd nnn <F7> nnn nnn <Page Up> The Page Up key in keyboard or button in toolbar calls up the previous sequential display or previous set of data requiring the same display. The Page Down key in keyboard or button in toolbar calls up the next sequential display or next set of data requiring the same display. For example, a Group or Trend. This option can be configured for custom graphics. User Created Graphical Pushbutton Function Keys Display Forward Using HMIWeb Display Builder it is possible to add pushbutton to custom displays which, when clicked, calls up a specified display. The Station keyboard contains a number of standard and user programmable function keys. A keyboard overlay is usually used at a standard keyboard. Available from the toolbar, this feature allows the recent displays to be re-displayed in forward display order. Note the drop-down which allows picking a display from the list of recent displays. Note: This option is also available in the right-click short-cut menu in custom displays. Display Backward Available from the toolbar, this feature allows the recent displays to be re-displayed in backward display order. Note the drop-down which allows picking a display from the list of recent displays. Note: This option is also available in the right-click short-cut menu in custom displays. Entering any of these commands will display Trend number nnn. To display a named page, enter its filename. (Filename and <Enter>) The .htm extension must only be entered if the filename comprises of numbers only. Entering any of these commands will display Group number nnn. Entering any of these commands will call up display named nnn.htm or numbered nnn.

<Page Down>

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

15

Navigate Station Use Display Navigation in Station Reload Display Available from the toolbar, this feature allows the current display to be re-displayed from the current file. Note: This option is also available in the right-click short-cut menu in custom displays.

16

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Navigate Station Use Display Navigation in Station Practice

On successful completion of this exercise the student will be able to call up a specified display using the methods listed previously in this Student Guide.
Step 1 Login to Windows with Student User. Action

ATTENTION Refer your partition sheet for password details.

Display the Product Output display page by entering the following display name in the Command Zone: D_100 <Enter> Locate the buttons E-100 and T-100 on the display. These buttons are configured to link directly to other displays. Click on T-100. Note the new page file name in the title bar.

4 5

Practice navigation using other buttons on the displays. or press <F8> several times and note that the pages displayed are the Click reverse sequence of those you have just been viewing.

Use <Page Up> and <Page Down> to view the pages D_100, T_100, and E_100. Note that custom displays cannot be viewed in this way unless configured to respond to these keys.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

17

Navigate Station Use Display Navigation in Station

This page was intentionally left blank.

18

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Navigate Station Use Station for Data Display

Use Station for Data Display


Student Partition Sheet Team ## Windows Login User Password System Name Server Alias Name Server Description Server Abbreviation Server Node Name Network Type E02ESV##_System E02ESV##_Server Experion PKS Server ESV## E02ESV## SINGLE/FTE Student

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

19

Navigate Station Use Station for Data Display

This page was intentionally left blank.

20

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Navigate Station Use Station for Data Display Prerequisites

Knowledge Builder available Partition Data Sheet

Introduction

In System displays and Custom Graphics, data is displayed in the ways described below.
Main Idea Login to Windows with Student User. ATTENTION Refer your partition sheet for password details.

Analog Data Fields

The value of an analog parameter can be displayed in the following ways: as a boxed or plain numerical value or, as a sequence of shapes linked to the parameter value. ,

as a dynamically filled object, for example, a tank level or bar indicator,

Status Data Fields

The value of a status parameter can be displayed in the following ways: as a boxed or plain state description CLOSED, as a boxed or plain state value ,

as a combo box (if the parameter is OP) or, as a sequence of shapes linked to the state value.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

21

Navigate Station Use Station for Data Display Selecting a Field To select a field, click on it with the left mouse button. The field will be highlighted and its name and value displayed in the message area. If the access to the data is available, the selected field will be displayed with a black background. A white background indicates no access is available.

ATTENTION A black background does not necessarily imply that the current user has the authority to change the selected data field. This will be validated after the new data has been entered (Refer next page).

22

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Navigate Station Use Station for Data Display

Modifying an Analog Field

The following explanation details three methods of changing an analog data value: Select the field, enter the desired value and press <Enter>. Select the field and, from the toolbar or keyboard, use Raise. ( , <F9>) or Lower ( , <F10>).

Each function will raise or lower the selected analog value by a default of 1% of full scale. (This percentage is configurable from the Server-wide Station Settings page). Select the field and use either of the function keys. Fast Raise: <Alt>+<F9> Fast Lower: <Alt>+<F10> Each function will raise or lower the selected analog value by a default of 10% of full scale. (This percentage is configurable from the Server-wide Station Settings page).

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

23

Navigate Station Use Station for Data Display

Modifying a Status Field

The following explains three methods of changing a Status field:

Select the combo box and choose the required option from the resulting drop-down menu.

Select the combo box and choose Raise (<F9>) or Lower (<F10>) to drive the OP to the corresponding state as indicated on the Point Detail under the Scanning tab. Select any displayed parameter, of the required point, choose Control > Select Output and choose Raise (<F9>) or Lower (<F10>) to drive the OP to the corresponding state, as indicated in the Scanning tab of the Status Points Detail display. Note: The use of <F9> and <F10>, on a status parameter, raises a prompt near the status point parameter. Click Yes to complete the operation.

Control Confirmation

Any point operation will require confirmation if the associated point has the Control Confirmation option enabled. This can be verified from the Control Confirm checkbox in the Main tab of the Point Detail display. For example use of <F9> and <F10> on an analog parameter will prompt a Control confirmation dialog near the point parameter.

24

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Navigate Station Use Point Detail Display

Use Point Detail Display


Student Partition Sheet Team ## Windows Login User Password System Name Server Alias Name Server Description Server Abbreviation Server Node Name Network Type Sample SCADA Point Name E02ESV##_System E02ESV##_Server Experion PKS Server ESV## E02ESV## SINGLE/FTE LOWALARM## Student

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

25

Navigate Station Use Point Detail Display

This page was intentionally left blank.

26

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Navigate Station Use Point Detail Display Prerequisites

Knowledge Builder available Partition Data Sheet

Introduction

The Point Detail page shows all Point related information in a standardized and comprehensive form.
Main Idea Displaying a Point Detail page

There are various techniques to display the Point Detail page for a point depending on what you know about the point name (Point ID).
Know the Point ID Enter the following: either: Point_ID<F12> or, Point_ID and click on the tool bar,

where Point_ID is the required point name; Or, click on the toolbar, type in the point name and select the OK button.

Know where to find the Point Locate the display of a parameter related to the required point (for example, a diagram of a process element on custom graphic, or an alarm line message). Either Select the parameter and Click or, or, on the tool bar, Press <F12>

Double click on the parameter.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

27

Navigate Station Use Point Detail Display

Know Part of the Point ID Enter the following: either: Partial_Point_ID<F12> or: Partial_Point_ID and click on tool bar,

where Partial_Point_ID is the known leading characters of the required point name.

ATTENTION Do not Press<Enter>

Station will display a list of all the points (and any other database items) whose names start with the known characters. This list will include only those remote points that have been previously accessed by this Server. Double click the required Point ID to display its Detail page.

Paging through Point Details Using <Page Down> or <Page Up> while viewing a Point Detail will display the next or previous Point ID in alpha-numeric order.

28

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Navigate Station Use Point Detail Display

Proceed with the lab exercise listed below. Ask your Instructor for any assistance if you are not sure what you are expected to do.
Practice The purpose of this exercise is to provide familiarity with displaying Point Details. Step 1 Login to Windows with Student User. Action

ATTENTION Refer your partition sheet for password details.

2 3 4 5 6 7

If the Station security level is not mngr then click the Security Level (bottom right on screen). Enter mngr into the password entry box. Click the button in the Tool Bar.

Type Sinewave, and select OK to call up the point detail display. Sinewave is a SCADA Analog point. Click the various tabs across the top of the display to familiarize yourself with the various pages. Click the button in the Tool Bar.

Type Lowalarm##, and select OK to call up the point detail display. Lowalarm## is a SCADA Status point.

ATTENTION Refer your partition sheet for point name.

8 9

Select the OP combobox, and change the state of the point. Click the various tabs to familiarize yourself with the display.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

29

Navigate Station Use Point Detail Display Step 10 Call up display D_100. ATTENTION Make sure the Station access level is at MNGR. Action

11

Single click a point control parameter. This calls up the points faceplate. Note the push pin in the upper left corner. This keeps the faceplate visible as other displays are called up. Double click a point parameter to call up the points detail display. Note this is a CDA point (C200/C200E or C300 controller).

12

30

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Navigate Station Use Group Display

Use Group Display


Student Partition Sheet Team ## Windows Login User Password System Name Server Alias Name Server Description Server Abbreviation Server Node Name Network Type E02ESV##_System E02ESV##_Server Experion PKS Server ESV## E02ESV## SINGLE/FTE Student

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

31

Navigate Station Use Group Display

This page was intentionally left blank.

32

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Navigate Station Use Group Display Prerequisites

Knowledge Builder available Partition Data Sheet

Introduction What is a Group?

A group is a collection of up to 8 points of any type. Any point can be allocated to any group. A point can be allocated to any number of groups.

Main Idea Group Faceplates

Each points faceplate on a Group page depends on the point type. For each SCADA point type predefined formats are supplied. Customized formats can be used if required. Since there are no limits to the number or variety of parameters that can be contained within a process (C200/C200E/C300/ACE/SIM-C200) point, there are also no limits as to how such points can be displayed in Group pages. However, to simplify the task of system configuration a number of predefined formats (faceplates) are provided. More detail on the variety of parameters available can be obtained by attending the Experion CEE Implementation course.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

33

Navigate Station Use Group Display Displaying a Group

To display a Group: Either: In Station toolbar, click In the System Menu page, click on the Groups link; and in the Group Summary page, click to open the required group. Or: In Station toolbar, click and type nnn in the message zone; where nnn is the required Group number. Click OK. Press <F6> and enter nnn in the message zone, as done earlier. Type grp nnn in the command zone and press <Enter> key. Click View > Group Summary and click to open the required group. Group display function buttons, can be configured into custom graphics or function keys, on the keyboard.

Or: Or: Or: Or:

TIP <Page Down> or <Page Up> can be used to display the next or previous group. Group Trend The Group items can be displayed, as Group Trend or as Numeric History, in addition to the Group Detail.

34

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Navigate Station Use Group Display Practice

This lab navigates to a Group display.


Step 1 Login to Windows with Student User. Action

ATTENTION Refer your partition sheet for password details.

2 3

If the Station security level is not mngr then click on Security Level (bottom right of screen). Enter mngr into the password box. Click on 111. button in the Station toolbar. Type 111 and click OK to call up Group

4 5 6

Note the Faceplates in the Group Detail format. Use the View As combobox to view the Group Trend format. Navigation to other Groups is available using Group Number (select and enter the required Group Number, or use <Page Up> or <Page Down>) to the next Group in number sequence. Experiment with these navigating methods.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

35

Navigate Station Use Group Display

This page was intentionally left blank.

36

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Navigate Station Use Trend Sets

Use Trend Sets


Student Partition sheet Team ## Windows Login User Password System Name Server Alias Name Server Description Server Abbreviation Server Node Name Network Type E02ESV##_System E02ESV##_Server Experion PKS Server ESV## E02ESV## SINGLE/FTE Student

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

37

Navigate Station Use Trend Sets

This page was intentionally left blank.

38

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Navigate Station Use Trend Sets Prerequisites

Knowledge Builder available Partition Data Sheet

Introduction What is a Trend Set?

A Trend Set is a collection of up to 32 point parameters of any type displayed against time on a single trend page. Any point can be allocated to any Trend Set. Any point parameter can be allocated to any number of Trend Sets. ATTENTION Trend Set allocations are independent of Group allocations.

Main Idea Trend data and History files

If a point that is allocated to a pen on a trend is also assigned to history then the displayed pen will automatically display data from the requisite history file. If a point that is allocated to a pen on a trend is not assigned to history then the displayed pen be blank initially and will subsequently be updated in real time. ATTENTION Data trended in this way will not be added to the history files

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

39

Navigate Station Use Trend Sets

Displaying a Trend Set

To display a trend: Either: In Station toolbar, click and in the System Menu page click on the Trends link and in the Trend Summary page click to open the required trend Or: In Station toolbar, click and type nnn in the message zone where nnn is the required Trend number and click OK. Press <F7> and enter nnn in the message zone as done earlier Enter tnd nnn in the command zone and press <Enter> key Choose View > Trend Summary and click to open the required trend, Trend display function buttons can be configured into custom graphics or function keys on the keyboard.

Or: Or: Or: Or:

TIP <Page Down> or <Page Up> can be used to display the next or previous trend.

40

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Navigate Station Use Trend Sets

Practice

Proceed with the lab exercise listed below. Ask your Course Manager for any assistance if you are not sure what you are expected to do.
Trend Navigation

The following exercise provides familiarity with the general operations required to configure, view and manipulate Trends.
Step 1 Login to Windows with Student User. Action

ATTENTION Refer your partition sheet for password details.

2 3 4 5

If the Station security level is not mngr then click on the Security Level (bottom right of screen). Enter mngr into the password box. Click on button in the Station toolbar. Type 111 and click OK to call up Trend 111.

Examine the trend. Navigation to other Trends is available using Trend Number (select and enter the required Trend Number, or use <Page Up> or <Page Down> to the next Trend in number sequence. Experiment with these navigating methods. (Note: Trends 111 through 117 are configured.)

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

41

Navigate Station Use Trend Sets

This page was intentionally left blank.

42

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Identify Experion PKS Configuration Tools

Configuration Tools Identify Experion PKS Configuration Tools

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Introduction

Honeywell

In this lesson, you will learn about the tools used to configure Experion PKS components and connections At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Open Configuration Studio Explain the purpose of Configuration Studio and each of its tools Explain the data load destinations for each tool

Configuration Tools Identify Experion PKS Configuration Tools

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Introduction to Configuration Studio Configuration Studio Tools Data Load Destinations

Honeywell

Configuration Tools Identify Experion PKS Configuration Tools

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configuration Studio

Honeywell

A single integrated environment for configuration and engineering tasks Exposes a collection of configuration tools
Single point of entry for all configuration tasks Maps the proper tool to the task required

Configuration Tools Identify Experion PKS Configuration Tools

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configuration Studio Topology Configuration Studio is in line with Client-Server topology.


Client # 1 Configuration Studio EMB Client # 2 Configuration Studio EMB

Honeywell

System spanning across 3 Experion PKS servers

Server2 Server1 Configuration Studio EMB EMDB Admin

Server3

ERDB EMDB

ERDB

ERDB

Configuration Tools Identify Experion PKS Configuration Tools

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configuration Studio - Launch Configuration Studio


Configuration Studio can be run remotely Start All Programs Studio Honeywell Experion PKS

Honeywell

Configuration

Configuration Tools Identify Experion PKS Configuration Tools

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Introduction to Configuration Studio Configuration Studio Tools Data Load Destinations

Honeywell

Configuration Tools Identify Experion PKS Configuration Tools

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configuration Studio Tools are integrated at different levels


Tier 1 Full Integration User interface and functionality wholly contained within the Configuration Studio frame window Example: System Display Tier 2 Service Integration User interface and functionality contained within its own frame window Example: Enterprise Model Builder, Control Builder, Quick Builder Tier 3 Launch Integration User interface and functionality contained within its own frame window Example: HMIWeb Display Builder
Configuration Tools Identify Experion PKS Configuration Tools

Honeywell

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configuration Tools

Honeywell

Tools are launched from Configuration Studio

System Displays Tier 1 Integration

System Definition and Configuration tool Tier 1 Integration

Control Builder Tier 2 Integration


Configuration Tools Identify Experion PKS Configuration Tools

Quick Builder Tier 2 Integration


9

Enterprise Model Builder Tier 2 Integration

HMIWeb Display Builder Tier 3 Integration


EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Enterprise Model Builder System Level Configuration


Associated Servers For common system configuration and for DSA Assets Alarm Groups

Honeywell

One server contains Enterprise Model database (EMDB) for all associated servers
Configuration available remotely

Configuration Tools Identify Experion PKS Configuration Tools

10

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Enterprise Model Builder - Assets Configure Asset Model for System

Honeywell

Configuration Tools Identify Experion PKS Configuration Tools

11

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Enterprise Model Builder - Alarm Groups Configure Alarm Groups for System

Honeywell

Configuration Tools Identify Experion PKS Configuration Tools

12

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Quick Builder - Flex Stations and Printers


Quick Builder Station Stations and Printers Printers Station type Security type Printer Name -Set up is done in Windows System Displays Station customization Printer assignment.

Honeywell

Station type: Static or Rotary Security type: Station-based or Operator-based

Station customization: Single window or Multi window Menus, toolbars, keyboard shortcuts, alarm annunciation, Custom display path Web access Station appearance

Station.ini file for application level customization

Configuration Tools Identify Experion PKS Configuration Tools

13

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Quick Builder - SCADA Connections

Honeywell

Assets Channels

Quick Builder Assign points to assets Build Channels

System Displays Asset assignment

Controllers

Build Controllers

Points

Build Points

Configuration Tools Identify Experion PKS Configuration Tools

14

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Control Builder - C200/C200E Hardware


Control Builder CPM Configuration Redundancy Configuration IOM Configuration IOLIM Configuration PM IO Configuration PCIC Card Firmware Verification Define Control Processor module location Define redundancy module location Define rack and rail I/O module types and location Define IO Link module location Define PM I/O module types and location Configure PCIC card in server and ACE System Displays

Honeywell
Other

Use RSLinx Use Ntools

Configuration Tools Identify Experion PKS Configuration Tools

15

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Control Builder C200/C200E and ACE


Control Builder Assign points to assets Configure Control Execution Environment and assign to Control Processor (C200 / C200E and ACE) Configure regulatory control, device control, interlocks, sequential control

Honeywell
System Displays Asset Assignment

Assets Configure CEE

Control Modules (CM)

Sequential Control Modules (SCM)

Configure start up, shutdown and batch sequences

Configuration Tools Identify Experion PKS Configuration Tools

16

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

System Displays - TPS Integration


Direct configuration of Real Time Database Map TPS units to EPKS Assets in ESVT Configure DSA connection from ESVT to ESV Servers, if required Autopriming of TPS points is possible.

Honeywell

Configuration Tools Identify Experion PKS Configuration Tools

17

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

System Displays - OPC Advanced Client Configure OPCADVNCE System Interface OPC Server enhanced to support performance counters in Windows Performance Monitor Configure OPC progID and 3rd party Server name for both Data and Notifications Sources

Honeywell

Configuration Tools Identify Experion PKS Configuration Tools

18

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Browser

Honeywell

System wide search for references Where Used within different repository files and displays
Search the entire system for references to Points / Assets / Alarm Groups and Display shapes

Configuration Tools Identify Experion PKS Configuration Tools

19

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Diagnostic Studio

Honeywell

Diagnostic Studio is an optional feature which can be installed separately Diagnostic Studio is comprised of various tasks which fit into one of the following test capabilities:
Network Analysis Tests Host File Verification LCN Settings Verification NTP Settings Verification FTE Configuration Verification Security Analysis tests COM Server Settings Verification Link Domain Verification System Health Tests View latest test results created using System Health test Builder Password Setup Update all DCOM Servers and Windows Services with new password

Configuration Tools Identify Experion PKS Configuration Tools

20

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

10

Diagnostic Studio Diagnostic Studio is opened by clicking Start Programs Experion PKS Diagnostic Studio Diagnostic Studio Application Layout is as follows
Menu Bar

Honeywell Honeywell

Tool Bar

Configuration Tools Identify Experion PKS Configuration Tools

21

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

System Definition and Configuration Tool System Definition and Configuration Tool is part of the Configuration Studio
Defines the equipment included in an Experion systems System Status Display Node configuration Common configuration of multiple Nodes

Honeywell

System Definition and Configuration tool

Configuration Tools Identify Experion PKS Configuration Tools

22

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

11

Topics Introduction to Configuration Studio Configuration Studio Tools Data load destinations

Honeywell

Configuration Tools Identify Experion PKS Configuration Tools

23

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Data Load Destinations - Server Files

Honeywell

Three Main Folders in Server Data Structure

Client: Station Configuration and Operations Files

Server: Server Configuration and Operations Files

Engineering Tools: C200/C200E and C300 Configuration and Operations Files

Configuration Tools Identify Experion PKS Configuration Tools

24

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

12

Data Load Destinations System Display Tasks

Honeywell

Direct configuration of the Real Time Database

Configuration Tools Identify Experion PKS Configuration Tools

25

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Data Load Destinations - Enterprise Model Builder

Honeywell

Path of offline file on EMDB server

Load to include Experion


servers from offline EMDB file

Configuration Tools Identify Experion PKS Configuration Tools

26

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

13

Data Load Destinations - Quick Builder

Honeywell

Offline data location

Load to EPKS server:


Runtime location

Configure Data offline and

load to Real Time Database Excel for configuration

Copy and Paste to and from

Upload from Server to \qdb for


operational changes
27

Configuration Tools Identify Experion PKS Configuration Tools

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Data Load Destinations - HMIWeb Display Builder

Honeywell

File location

Build display files, load and run

Saved as .htm and supporting files Display files managed by system

Configuration Tools Identify Experion PKS Configuration Tools

28

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

14

Data Load Destinations - Control Builder

Honeywell

Configure Data Offline

Path of off-line files


Load to C200/C200E, C300, ACE and to EPKS Server from ER

Control Module (CM)

Upload from C200/C200E, C300, or ACE and to ER for operational changes


Sequential Control Module (SCM)
Configuration Tools Identify Experion PKS Configuration Tools

29

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Data Load Destinations - Control Builder

Honeywell

Monitor C300, C200/C200E or ACE


online

Control Module (CM)

Sequential Control Module (SCM)


30

Configuration Tools Identify Experion PKS Configuration Tools

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

15

Question 1: Configuring SCADA Controllers


A) Quick Builder B) Enterprise Model Builder C) Control Builder D) HMIWeb Display Builder

Honeywell

Which Configuration Studio tool is used to configure SCADA controllers?

SCADA Controllers

The correctanswer is: Yourcorrect Quick Builder is the tool used to configure Youranswer:QuickBuilder is the tool used to configure The answer: Incorrect. Quick Builder is the tool used to configure Correct! answer is: Correct! Incorrect.Quick Builder is the tool used to configure You must answer the question before You not Click anywhere to continue must answer question completely before YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue Incorrect answerSCADAquestioncompletely Correct --ClickSCADA controllers. Youdid You --answeredthis controllers. Correct answeranywhere to continue did You Click anywhere to continue not Click thisthiscorrectly! anywhere to this continuing correctly! continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit

Clear

Configuration Tools Identify Experion PKS Configuration Tools

31

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 2: Creating Assets Which Configuration Studio tool creates Assets?


A) Quick Builder B) Enterprise Model Builder C) Control Builder D) HMIWeb Display Builder

Honeywell

The correct answer created with Enterprise Model Yourcorrect answer is: created with Enterprise Correct! Assets are are created with Enterprise Incorrect. The answer:Assets is: Your answer:Assets created with Enterprise Model Correct! Assets are are Incorrect. You must answer Builder. question Model Builder. before You not Click ModelBuilder. continue must answerthequestion before question Builder. YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue Incorrect answer anywhereto continue Correct --Clickanywhere to continue Youdid You --answeredthis correctly! did You Click thisthis correctly! not Click anywhere to completely this Correct answeranywhere to completely continuing continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
32

Clear

Configuration Tools Identify Experion PKS Configuration Tools

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

16

Question 3: Configuring Flex Stations


A) Quick Builder B) Enterprise Model Builder C) Control Builder D) HMIWeb Display Builder

Honeywell

Which Configuration Studio tool is used to configure Flex Stations?

Incorrect.Flex stations are configured with Correct! Flex Incorrect.Flex stations Correct! answer is: The correctanswer is: are configured with YourcorrectFlexstations are configured with Youranswer: Quick Builder.configured with The answer: stations are Quick Builder. You must answer the question before You not Click anywhere to continue must answer question before question YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue Incorrect answer anywhereto continue Correct --Clickanywhere to continue Correct answerthisthis correctly! Youdid You --answeredthis correctly! did You Click anywhere to completely not Click this completely continuing continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
33

Clear

Configuration Tools Identify Experion PKS Configuration Tools

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 4: Configuring the C200 /C200E Which Configuration Studio tool is used to configure C200/C200E controllers?
A) Quick Builder B) Enterprise Model Builder C) Control Builder D) HMIWeb Display Builder

Honeywell

The correct answer is: Yourcorrect answer is: Youranswer: The C200 controller is configured with Control The answer: Incorrect. The Incorrect. with Control Correct! mustC200 C200 controller is configuredControl Builder. You The answer the question before Correct!You --C200controller istocontinue with The answer controller configured configured You mustClick anywhere Builder. before YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue with Control Builder. Incorrect -answeredthisquestioncompletely Correct answeranywhereistocontinue Builder. Youdid not answer anywhereto continue Correct -Click thisthiscorrectly! did You Click anywhereto completely not Click thisquestion continuing correctly! continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
34

Clear

Configuration Tools Identify Experion PKS Configuration Tools

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

17

Question 5: Server Files

Honeywell

Which folder in the server file structure contains the Experion PKS system configuration?
A) Client\Abstract B) Engineering Tools\System\ER C) Server\Data

Incorrect.The Server\Data folder contains the Experion Correct! The Server\Data folder contains the Experion Incorrect.The Server\Data folder contains the Experion Correct! The correctanswer is: Yourcorrect TheServer\Data folder contains the Experion Youranswer: The answer: answer is: configuration files. PKS system configuration files. You must PKS system question before You not Click anywhere to continue mustanswer thequestion before answer question YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue Incorrect answer anywhereto continue Correct --Clickanywhere to continue Youdid You --answeredthis correctly! did You Click anywhere to completely not Click this completely Correct answerthisthis correctly! continuing continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
35

Clear

Configuration Tools Identify Experion PKS Configuration Tools

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Summary Experion PKS Configuration Tools include:

Honeywell

Quick Builder to configure Flex Stations and printers as well as SCADA controllers - offline Enterprise Model Builder to configure Assets and Alarm Groups HMIWeb Display Builder Control Builder to configure C200/C200E, C300, and ACE offline configuration, online monitoring System Definition and Configuration Tool Diagnostic Studio

Configuration Tools Identify Experion PKS Configuration Tools

36

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

18

Conclusion Identify Experion PKS Configuration Tools

Honeywell

Completion Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material


Configuration Tools Identify Experion PKS Configuration Tools

37

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Configuration Tools Identify Experion PKS Configuration Tools

38

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

19

Describe Enterprise Model

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe Enterprise Model

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Introduction At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:


Explain the purpose of the Enterprise Model Identify where the Enterprise Model Database (EMDB) and the Enterprise Model Builder are located Describe the system model hierarchy
EMB EMB

Honeywell

In this lesson, you will learn about the Experion PKS Enterprise Model

ERDB
EMB
EMDB Admin

ERDB

EMDB ERDB

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe Enterprise Model

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Enterprise Model Overview Enterprise Model Database System Model Hierarchy

Honeywell

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe Enterprise Model

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Experion PKS Enterprise Model

Honeywell

The Experion PKS Enterprise Model is a framework that can be used by engineers, operators, and applications to model and view their plant or process
The system model - Represents the boundary of the system System model is built by defining: 1. Included Servers that are part of the common system configuration Common Asset model Common Alarm Group model

2. Servers not part of the common configuration but part of DSA network

The Experion PKS Enterprise Model addresses the complete enterprise consisting of multiple servers

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe Enterprise Model

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Experion PKS Enterprise Model

Honeywell

The Enterprise Model replaces the flat area based structure that was used prior to Experion PKS Release 210
The Enterprise Model is organized into a hierarchical (Tree) structure The Enterprise Model consists of a single offline database which is loaded to included Servers.

Configuration Studio is used to define the various components of the Enterprise Model

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe Enterprise Model

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 1: Enterprise Model Components Which of these is NOT a system model component?
A) Included Servers B) Asset Model C) Alarm Groups D) External servers included for DSA E) Flat area based model

Honeywell

The correct answer is: Yourcorrect answer is: The answer: 'Flat area based model' is not aasystem Your answer: 'Flat area based model' is not system Incorrect.The 'Flat area based model' is not aasystem Correct! The based model' is Incorrect.The 'Flat areaquestion before not system Correct! The You component. The question before You not answer thequestion completely answer modelmust--Clickanywhere to continue YouIncorrectansweredThesystemcontinuecomponentis Incorrect answer anywhere to continue Correct answerthisthiscorrectly! modelmustClick anywhere to continue component. the correctly! Youdid You --answeredthissystemmodel component is did You Click this question completely not Correct Click anywhere to model continuing continuing built with the following components: included DSA built with the following components: included DSA servers, asset model, alarm groups, and external servers, asset model, alarm groups, and external servers included for DSA. servers included for DSA. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe Enterprise Model

Clear
EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 2: System Model Which statement about the System Model is true?
A) The system model includes all servers in the DSA network B) The Common Asset model is not a part of the common system configuration C) Servers are a part of the common configuration but not part of the DSA network
EMB

Honeywell

EMB

ERDB
EMB
EMDB Admin

EMDB ERDB

The correctThesystem model includes all servers in YourcorrectThesystem model includes all servers inin Incorrect. The system model includes all servers in Incorrect. The system model includes all servers in Correct! answer is: Youranswer: system model includes all servers in The answer: system model includes all servers Correct! answer is: Incorrect. The Incorrect. The the must network.A maximum of ten You DSA network. themaximumbefore can be question before the not answer A question completely You DSA Click anywhere to continue must answer question of ten YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinuecan be Incorrect answer anywhereto continue Correct --Clickanywhere to continue Youdid You --answeredthis correctly! Correct answerthisthis correctly! did You Click connected.to completely not Click anywhere this continuing connected. continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
7

Clear

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe Enterprise Model

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Enterprise Model Overview Enterprise Model Database System Model Hierarchy

Honeywell

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe Enterprise Model

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Enterprise Model Architecture


Configure with Enterprise Model Builder (EMB)
Client
Configuration Studio

Honeywell

Access to the Enterprise Model is through Configuration Studio


Client
Configuration Studio

EMB

EMB

System including three Experion PKS servers

Server2 Server1
Configuration Studio

Server3

ERDB EMDB ERDB RTDB RTDB RTDB

ERDB

EMB EMDB Admin

Server hosting the Enterprise Model Database

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe Enterprise Model

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 3: Enterprise Model Architecture Which statement about the EMDB is true? It is
A) An online database that is loaded continuously during configuration B) An offline database that is downloaded to the included servers
EMB EMB

Honeywell

ERDB

ERDB

C) An offline database existing on multiple servers

EMB
EMDB Admin

EMDB ERDB

Incorrect. answer is: Incorrect. The Enterprise Model architecture Correct! The Correct! answer is: Yourcorrect The Enterprise Model architecture Incorrect. The Enterprise Model architecture Incorrect. The Enterprise Model architecture The answer:The Enterprise Model architecture Yourcorrect The Enterprise Model architecture answer: consists of an offline database that You must answerofflinedatabase that is question before consists answerthequestion completely of an You You -Click anywhere to continue must Click before YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinueis Incorrect--answeredthisquestioncompletely Correct answer anywhere to servers. Youdid downloadedanywhereto continue Correct answerthisthiscorrectly! didnot -Click anywhere tocontinue You Click this not continuing correctly! downloadedto included servers. to included continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
10

Clear

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe Enterprise Model

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Enterprise Model Overview Enterprise Model Database System Model Hierarchy

Honeywell

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe Enterprise Model

11

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

System Model Hierarchy


System Components System Name is top container Assets Alarm Groups Next is a list of servers spanned by the Enterprise Model Lower level components are populated for each server
System Name Servers spanned by Enterprise Model

Honeywell

Lower level components for each server

System Definition and Configuration Tool

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe Enterprise Model

12

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

System Model Hierarchy


System download Assets and Alarm Groups load to included Server database(s) for: Scope of responsibility (Station and Operator security) Alarm presentation

Honeywell

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe Enterprise Model

13

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

System Model Hierarchy


Included Server Configuration Components Station and Controller configuration and Status System Interface items Reports, Operating Groups, Trends, SCADA Algorithms, etc.

Honeywell

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe Enterprise Model

14

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 4: Configure Enterprise Model At the system level you configure


A) Assets B) Alarm groups C) Operating groups D) Both Assets and Alarm groups

Honeywell

Incorrect. Assets and alarm groups are configured atatthe Incorrect. Assets and alarm groups are configured at the Correct! answer is: Incorrect. Assets and alarm groups are configured at the the Incorrect. Assets and alarm groups are configured Correct! The correctAssetsand alarm groups are configured at the YourcorrectAssets and alarm groups are configured atthe The answer: Youranswer: and operating groups are configured at the system levelanswer is: systemmust answer the question before level are configured at the You must and operating groupsbefore You not Click anywhere to continue answer server question YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue Incorrect answer anywherelevel.completely Correct --Clickanywhere to continue Youdid You --answeredthis correctly! Correct answerthisthis correctly! did You Click anywherelevel. not Click thisquestioncontinue to server to completely continuing continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
15

Clear

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe Enterprise Model

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Summary

Honeywell

The Enterprise Model is a framework that can be used by engineers, operators, and applications to model and view their plant or process
Has a system model hierarchy in which assets and alarm groups are configured at the system level and downloaded to included servers Uses a system model framework that includes all servers in the DSA network Consists of a single offline database which is loaded to included Servers Employs Configuration Studio to configure both System level and Server level database items

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe Enterprise Model

16

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Conclusion Describe Enterprise Model

Honeywell

Completion Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material


Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe Enterprise Model

17

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe Enterprise Model

18

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Describe System Model Implementation

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe System Model Implementation

19

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Introduction

Honeywell

In this lesson, you will learn how to configure a system model using Configuration Studio At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Explain the purpose of Configuration Studio Identify where the Enterprise Model Database (EMDB) is located Describe how to implement a system model

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe System Model Implementation

20

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

10

Topics Introduction to Configuration Studio Implementing a System Model

Honeywell

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe System Model Implementation

21

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configuration Studio - Purpose

Honeywell

One common tool to launch other individual tools and configure Server database High Level Tasks include:
Configuring Server Database Configuring CEE-based devices Building HMIWeb Graphics Configuring OPC and System Interfaces Launching Diagnostic and Backup Tools Accessing Online documentation Configuring Network Status Display

Additional Database Enterprise Model Database (EMDB)


Includes Asset Model and Alarm Groups for all included servers EMDB configured with Enterprise Model Builder (EMB)

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe System Model Implementation

22

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

11

Configuration Studio - Topology Configuration Studio is in line with client-server technology


Client # 1 Configuration Studio EMB Client # 2 Configuration Studio EMB

Honeywell

Server2 Server1 Configuration Studio EMB EMDB Admin

Server3

ERDB EMDB ERDB RTDB RTDB

ERDB RTDB

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe System Model Implementation

23

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Introduction to Configuration Studio Implementing a System Model

Honeywell

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe System Model Implementation

24

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

12

Implementing a System Model Implementation Order 1. Launch Configuration Studio 2. Define SystemName 3. Add included system Experion servers to the hierarchy
Servers for Common System Configuration and for DSA

Honeywell

4. Download the System configuration to included servers 5. Build and download Asset Model to included Common Configuration servers Enterprise Model Builder 6. Launch individual tools to configure and build each server database
Quick Builder Control Builder HMIWeb Display Builder Server system displays

7. Build and download Alarm Groups (Optional) to included Common Configuration servers Enterprise Model Builder

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe System Model Implementation

25

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Launching Configuration Studio

Honeywell

Click Start >All Programs > Honeywell Experion PKS > Configuration Studio

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe System Model Implementation

26

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

13

Configuration Studio Initial Screen


System Level

Honeywell

Server Level

Server name hosting the Enterprise Model Database

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe System Model Implementation

27

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configuration Studio Logging In

Honeywell
Select System Name and click Connect

Note: Configuration Studio logs in automatically if the user is member of Experion integrated groups, which are added automatically during installation
Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe System Model Implementation

28

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

14

Configuration Studio Logon Box

Honeywell

Enter username and password created in Server

Select type of account (Explained in later module)

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe System Model Implementation

29

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configuration Studio Rename System

Honeywell

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe System Model Implementation

30

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

15

Question 1: Configuration Studio Local Targets


A) E24ESvxx_Server B) Team01_Server C) E20ESVxx_System D) SERVER_4

Honeywell

Based on the screen capture, which target allows you to build assets?

No. The correct answer is E20ESVxx_System. Tobuild the Yes! The answer is: No. answer: Yes! The answer is: The correctcorrect answer is E20ESVxx_System. To build YourThe correct answer is E20ESVxx_System. ToTo build Youranswer: The correctcorrect answer is E20ESVxx_System. build the assetsassetsneedneed to connect tosystemlevel levelhence the assets you need to connect system level leveland assetsyou need to connect to theto the system and hence the you you to connect to the before the system and and You must answer the question before You not -shouldanywhereto continue must answer thea question YouIncorrectyou should thiscorrectly! name such as Incorrect answer anywhereatocontinue such as Correct -answered pickcorrectly! name as hence -shouldanywhereto continue you Click this question name Correct answerthis questioncontinue such Youdid You -answered thisasystemcompletely such as did You you continuing systemname not Click pickpick to completely hence Click anywherea system you Click pick should system continuing E20ESVxx_System. E20ESVxx_System. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
31

Clear

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe System Model Implementation

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configuration Studio Add a Server

Honeywell

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe System Model Implementation

32

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

16

Configuration Studio Adding a Server


Intuitive name making it easier to identify the server Description of your server

Honeywell

Check if server not part of common system configuration added for DSA only Computer name of Experion server computer Check if the server being added is redundant

Check for DSA subscription only, for example eServer

Select network type connecting the server within the system

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe System Model Implementation

33

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configuration Studio Adding a Server

Honeywell

Server update message may be displayed when the server is added to the system. Click Yes.

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe System Model Implementation

34

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

17

Configuration Studio Adding a Server Migration of Asset Model / Alarm Groups dialog

Honeywell

If the server you are adding to the system already has an asset structure and / or alarm groups then Experion gives you the opportunity to upload those existing assets and alarm groups into the EMDB.

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe System Model Implementation

35

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configuration Studio Download System Configuration

Honeywell

List of included servers External servers are not included in Load list

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe System Model Implementation

36

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

18

Configuration Studio System Task Navigation

Honeywell

Configure Assets for the system Configure Alarms Groups for the system Rename the system Administer the system database Add a server to the system Load system configuration to servers System Wide Search Detailed Configuration Studio layout on next slide

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe System Model Implementation

37

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configuration Studio System Task Navigation

Honeywell

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe System Model Implementation

38

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

19

Configuration Studio Server Task Navigation

Honeywell

View server license details Search options Build Flex Stations Configure Flex Stations Configure Consoles Configure Console Stations Configure server-wide settings Build printers Configure printers

Build channels Build controllers Build points Configure trends Configure groups

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe System Model Implementation

39

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configuration Studio Server Task Navigation

Honeywell

Open Knowledge Builder help Backup & restore Knowledge Builder content

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe System Model Implementation

40

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

20

System Definition and Configuration

Honeywell

A Configuration Studio tool to define Computers and Network equipment that need to be monitored in the System Status Display
Includes Experion and non-Experion Nodes Even represents OPC servers as components in the display

Provides physical view of hardware.


Previously this information was only available on the System Management Display

This tool provides :


A platform for performing some node specific configuration support for common configuration of multiple nodes
Nodes in Workgroup Domain or Organizational Units

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe System Model Implementation

41

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

System Status Display Status Pane


Honeywell

Status pane can be invoked by clicking on the Show status pane button in the System Status Display page Status Pane allows the user to view the extended status of the System Component, within the System Status Tree, without leaving the page. Extended status for a particular system component will be displayed within a faceplate as a optional pane in the System Status Display

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe System Model Implementation

42

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

21

Adding Nodes for Monitoring In Configuration Studio, select Network and click on the Add or remove computers task Select the desired computer or computers to be monitored Click Load network configuration to servers The added nodes will appear in the System Status Display Extended status of that node can be seen in the Status Pane (Shown in previous slide)
Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe System Model Implementation

Honeywell

43

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

System Status Display Polled Status


Allows a user to see a polled view of the status of a component,

Honeywell

as opposed to an event driven view such as with alarms polled status indicating health of nodes together with aggregate alarm information for the node provides a comprehensive system status indication

UNKNOWN

DISABLED

FAILED

MARGINAL

OK
44

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe System Model Implementation

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

22

System Status Display Polled Status

Honeywell

Faceplates for Computer and Network tree summary info Detail displays for computers and network tree items such as switches

System Status Display supports:

FTE alarms are filtered against the appropriate nodes in the System Status Display Extended information about a selected item is shown in System Status tree so that navigation to a separate display is not required
Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe System Model Implementation

Series C Control Firewall information FTE Devices information

Statistics, firmware revisions, and other relevant information about the item
45
EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 2: Configuration Studio System Hierarchy

Honeywell

Which of these items do you add in Configuration Studio at the System level?
A) Experion PKS Console Stations B) 3rd Party OPC servers C) Honeywell C200/C200E controllers D) Experion PKS Servers included in the system for common configuration and for DSA

Yes! The correct answer is "Experion PKS No. The correct answer is "Experion PKS Yes! The correct answer is "Experion PKS No. The correct answer is "Experion PKS Servers included in the system for common Servers included in the system for common configuration and for DSA". At the system level The correct answer is: Yourcorrect answerfor DSA". At the system level configuration and is: The answer: Youranswer: you add both the included servers and the You must answerincluded servers and you add both theanywhereto continue You You -Click anywhere to continue must answerthe question before YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinuethe Incorrect--answeredthisquestioncompletely Correct answer anywhere to continue not -Click anywhere for before Youdidexternal serversthiscorrectly! didexternal servers question DSA. You Click this added for DSA. not Click Correct answerthis added to completely continuing correctly! continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
46

Clear

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe System Model Implementation

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

23

Summary Configuration Studio:


Is in line with client-server technology Is used to: Add included system Experion servers to the hierarchy Download the System configuration to included servers

Honeywell

Build and download Asset Model and Alarm Groups to included Common Configuration servers Add external servers for DSA Is the one common tool to launch other individual tools and configure Server database

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe System Model Implementation

47

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Lab Example Start Configuration Studio

Honeywell

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe System Model Implementation

48

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

24

Conclusion Describe System Model Implementation

Honeywell

Completion Certificate

Proceed to the Start Configuration Studio and Add an Included Server to System Hierarchy lab exercises
Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe System Model Implementation

49

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Introduction to Enterprise Model Describe System Model Implementation

50

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

25

Topic: Introduction to Enterprise Model


Contents
Start Configuration Studio .....................................................................................................................3

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

This page was intentionally left blank.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Introduction to Enterprise Model Start Configuration Studio

Start Configuration Studio


Student Partition Sheet Team ## Windows Login User Password System Name Server Alias Name Server Description Server Abbreviation Server Node Name Network Type E02ESV##_System E02ESV##_Server Experion PKS Server ESV## E02ESV## SINGLE/FTE Student

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Introduction to Enterprise Model Start Configuration Studio

This page was intentionally left blank.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Introduction to Enterprise Model Start Configuration Studio Prerequisites

Knowledge Builder available Partition Data Sheet

Introduction

During this lab, you will start Configuration Studio and connect to your system.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Introduction to Enterprise Model Start Configuration Studio Procedure

Perform the following procedures in EPKS Server.


Step Action

Start Configuration Studio and connect to the System 1 Login with User, Student, which is member of Product Administrators group

TIP Refer to your Student Partition Sheet for Windows Login details.

Click Start > All Programs > Honeywell Experion PKS > Configuration Studio.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Introduction to Enterprise Model Start Configuration Studio Step 3 Action Select your system name and click Show target details window button

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Introduction to Enterprise Model Start Configuration Studio Step 4 Action In the Connect window, in Local Targets tab, click on E02ESV##_System and verify that the ServerName highlighted in the lower half of the window is the server name specified in your partition sheet.

ATTENTION System Name and other details appearing in the above image may differ.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Introduction to Enterprise Model Start Configuration Studio Step Action

TIP When Configuration Studio is launched for the first time after a fresh installation of Experion PKS server, the machines node name is the default system name. This name is changed to SystemName when some item is downloaded to the system. During lab setup, a server was added and assets downloaded to the system. Also the name of the system was changed and hence the system name shown here will be as per the partition sheet

Click Connect. ATTENTION Note that you will not get any login screen to enter into the Configuration Studio. This is because Signon Manager has logged you into Configuration Studio as Student, which is a member of Product Administrators Group.

Close Configuration Studio.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Introduction to Enterprise Model Start Configuration Studio

This page was intentionally left blank.

10

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Describe Asset Model

Configuring Asset Model Describe Asset Model

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Introduction At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:


Identify an asset Explain the purpose of assignable and not-assignable assets Describe how to implement an asset model

Honeywell

In this lesson you will learn about the Experion PKS asset model

Precipitation

Train1

Train2

Pumps

Filter1

Valves1

Tank1

Configuring Asset Model Describe Asset Model

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Asset Model - Structure

Honeywell

An Experion PKS asset is a database entity that represents a particular physical item in the enterprise; for example, plant equipment, facility, or production line
Assets Filtration Precipitation

Train1

Train2

Train1

Train2

Pumps
PIC405 PI302

Filter1
PIC407 TIC205 PI506

Filter2
LC203 PI304

Valves2 Pumps
TIC907 PI809

Filter1 Valves1
PIC406 AC506 LL305

Tank1
TT555 LT203

FI309

FI305

TI607

FI301

TI405

TI404

LI308

Server 1
Configuring Asset Model Describe Asset Model

Server 2
3
EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

LI708

Asset Model Assignment


Assets Precipitation Train1 Pumps
Flow (FI301) Pressure (PI302)

Honeywell
Assets are defined as directly assignable or not-assignable
Not-assignable assets will have the same assignment as their parent asset Parent assets are default assignable Cannot be changed

Indicates assignable asset

Flow = item name

Points association

Points are associated with assets Asset association for FI301: Assets/Precipitation/Train1/Pumps

Points are directly referenced by tag name:


FI301

Filter1
Temperature (TIC205) Pressure (PI506)

Points are also referenced within the Asset Model using the Item Name and fully qualified asset path:
Assets/Precipitation/Train1/Pumps/Flow Any tags without valid asset assignment are grouped into Unassigned Items asset
EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Train2 Unassigned

Unassigned Items

Configuring Asset Model Describe Asset Model

Asset Model Assignable vs. Not-assignable Asset Scope of responsibility configuration screens
Indicate asset status Full intensity, pull down = directly assignable Half intensity, no pull down = not directly assignable

Honeywell

Directly assignable, by default

By default, all top-level parent assets are directly assignable Only the child assets can be configured for assignment

Configuring Asset Model Describe Asset Model

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Asset Model Assignable vs. Not-assignable Alarm Enable and Disable


Directly assignable can be enabled and disabled

Honeywell

Not directly assignable cannot be enabled and disabled follow parent asset

Not assignable Grey if sub-asset differs

Configuring Asset Model Describe Asset Model

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Asset Model Scope of Responsibility


Asset Models can be partitioned
Based on directly assignable assets Shaded portion in blue is one assignment Shaded portion in pink is another assignment

Honeywell
Assets

Filtration

Instead of giving access to 7 assets, assign access to 2 assets Filtration and Train1 for operators and/or operator stations Access to items assigned to Unassigned asset also need to configured for Operators and/or Stations

Train1

Train2

Pumps
PIC405 PI302

Filter1
PIC407 TIC205 PI506

Filter2
LC203 PI304

Valves2
PI809

FI301

FI309

Server 1

Server 2

Configuring Asset Model Describe Asset Model

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Planning Asset Models


The maximum number of assets allowed in the EMDB is 8000

Honeywell

Recommendations, guidelines and restrictions for asset models include:


The maximum number of assignable items in the system, including assignable assets, is 1000 10 levels of assets are possible EMB allows the user to directly open up the asset properties without having to locate the asset in the list of assets. Note: As a general principle, keep the asset model simple and small Make top 2 levels of assets assignable When making an asset assignable, also mark everything else above that level as assignable In naming assets, consider a standard naming convention for similar or identical items

Configuring Asset Model Describe Asset Model

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

FI305

TI405

Asset Model Asset Restrictions Configuring assets (and profiles) allows restricting access to:
Points Points associated with a particular asset Alarms

Honeywell

Operators see alarms only from points that fall within their profile Alarms can be disabled and enabled by assignable asset Custom displays and reports

Configuring Asset Model Describe Asset Model

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 1: Assets An asset is an Experion database entity that represents:


A) A field instrument B) A plant operator C) A physical item or area in an enterprise D) A piece of system hardware Pumps
TIC907

Honeywell

Precipitation

Train1

Train2

Filter1
PIC406 LL305

Valves1
AC506

Tank1
TT555 LT203

FI305

TI607

TI404

LI308

Incorrect.An asset isisaphysical item or aa Correct! An asset Incorrect.An asset isa physical item or Correct! An physical item or The correct answer assetis aaphysical item or aa Your correct answer is: items in one area of an The answer: of physical is: Your answer: of physical items in one area of an collection collection You mustItanswerthe question before You You Itis a anywhere to continue mustanswer enterprise.--Clickalogical question before YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue Incorrect answer anywhereto continue Correct answeranywhere to continue did not -Click logical correctly! of points and Click thisthisorganizer question completely enterprise.-answeredthisorganizer of points and is You Correct did You Click anywhere to completely not this continuing correctly! continuing alarms. alarms. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Server 2

Submit
10

LI708

Clear

Configuring Asset Model Describe Asset Model

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 2: Assets You can refer to a point in an asset model by:


A) Tag name or item name and fully qualified asset path B) Fully qualified asset path C) Item name and fully qualified asset path only D) Tag name only
Assets Precipitation Train1

Honeywell

Pumps
Flow (FI301) Pressure (PI302)

Filter1
Incorrect.A answercanbe referenced two different ways. Correct! A point can Correct! Incorrect.A answer is: The correctpoint can be referenced two different ways. Yourcorrect Apointcan be referenced two different ways. The answer: Tagname referenced two by the Item Youranswer: point is: be and the other is different ways. One is by the Tagname and the other is by the Item One is by the You must answer the question before You You -Click anywhereto continue must answer question completely question before YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue path. Incorrect---Clickanywherequalified asset Correct answerthe fully correctly! Youdid nameansweredthis correctly! asset path. didnot with anywhere to continue not Click this Correct answerthe this qualified You with anywhere to completely name Click thisfully to continue continuing continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.
Temperature (TIC205) Pressure (PI506)

Train2 Unassigned

Submit

Clear

Configuring Asset Model Describe Asset Model

11

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 3: Asset Models

Honeywell

Even though an asset is not assignable, it can be indirectly assigned because:


A) Item names need not be unique B) An asset can be directly assignable and not assignable in the same asset model C) It is an asset which consists of a single point D) It is assigned to a higher level asset which is directly assignable

Incorrect.An asset which isisnotassignable can be Correct! An asset which is not assignable can be Correct! An asset which Incorrect.An asset which isnot assignable can be not assignable can be Your correct assignedis: The answer:answer is: indirectly assigned when a higher level asset of Your correctanswer when a higher level asset of The answer: indirectly You must a component is directly assigned. answer the questionbefore whichnotis-Click anywhere to continue it -answered thequestioncompletely You must a component is directly answer before it Youwhichnotis-Click anywhere to continue Incorrect -answeredthis correctly! assigned. Correct Youdid You answer anywhere to continue Incorrect answerthisthis correctly! Correct Click anywhere to continue did You Click thisquestion completely question continuing continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
12

Clear

Configuring Asset Model Describe Asset Model

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Summary When configuring assets, remember:


Assets are collections of points and/or lower-ranking assets

Honeywell

Assets are arranged in a parent-child hierarchy called an asset model, which represents the physical production layout Child Assets are created either assignable or not-assignable Top-level Parent assets are directly assignable, by default Assignable assets can be configured to limit access and disable alarms Each asset must have a unique tag name and a unique complete path item name within a server Experion points are associated with assets and have a unique tag name and a unique complete path item name within a server Unassigned points go into the Unassigned Items asset

Configuring Asset Model Describe Asset Model

13

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Conclusion Describe Asset Model

Honeywell

Completion Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material


Configuring Asset Model Describe Asset Model

14

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Describe Configuration of Assets

Configuring Asset Model Describe Configuration of Assets

15

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Introduction In this lesson you will learn to configure Experion PKS assets At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:

Honeywell

Describe how to configure an asset Describe how to define a scope of responsibility that incorporates the asset

Configuring Asset Model Describe Configuration of Assets

16

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Configuring Assets Scope of Responsibility

Honeywell

Configuring Asset Model Describe Configuration of Assets

17

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configure Assets Configuration Studio Select System in the Configuration Explorer tree

Honeywell

Configuring Asset Model Describe Configuration of Assets

18

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configure Assets Enterprise Model Builder Building Assets


Add assets from File Menu Add assets as children of currently selected asset Drag and drop to move assets to a new parent Expand and collapse tree Copy and paste is supported with Rename dialog

Honeywell

Configuring Asset Model Describe Configuration of Assets

19

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configure Assets Main Tab Asset details


Tag Name Must be unique Up to 40 characters Item Name Common Name Can be repeated in different Parent assets Up to 40 characters Full Item Name Full Path to entity Up to 200 characters Directly assignable Check to make an asset assignable

Honeywell

By default, all top-level parent assets are directly assignable Only the child assets can be configured for assignment

Not directly assignable half intensity icon

Configuring Asset Model Describe Configuration of Assets

20

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

10

Configure Assets Identification Tab

Honeywell

Enter additional information

Asset creation and download details

Configuring Asset Model Describe Configuration of Assets

21

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configure Assets Load to System

Honeywell

Click to load the entire asset model to the system (All included Servers)

Configuring Asset Model Describe Configuration of Assets

22

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

11

Enterprise Model Builder Enhancements


New Item added, show status download Needed

Honeywell

An indication of the load and change status of an enterprise model


Fully downloaded enterprise model

Delta indicates modified Item download needed


Configuring Asset Model Describe Configuration of Assets

23

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Enterprise Model Builder Enhancements Configurable permission levels for

Honeywell

Set Preferences / Permissions Controls who changes the current preference settings Restricts the changing of permissions by non authorized users. Set this to the highest level, Manager Rename Tags Controls who renames the tag of an item after its creation Only a user with proper permissions can change the tag name.

Configuring Asset Model Describe Configuration of Assets

24

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

12

Enterprise Model Builder Enhancements

Honeywell

By default, the settings are At Least Engineer for both permissions.


User with access rights less than ENGR cannot set permissions or rename tags. Changes made to the permissions will take effect after restart of configuration studio

Permissions are universal for all models of the Enterprise Model Builder, and can be viewed and updated (assuming that the user has sufficient rights), from any Enterprise Model in the builder.

Configuring Asset Model Describe Configuration of Assets

25

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 1: Configuring Assets

Honeywell

Which item in this Configuration Explorer tree would you select to configure assets?
A) Servers B) E02ESVxx_System C) E02ESVxx_Server

The correct answer is: Yourcorrect answer is: Youranswer: The answer: Yes! Select the system for which you want to configure No. Select the system for which you want to configure Yes! Select the system for which you want to configure No. Select the system for which you want to configure You must answer the question before You not Click anywhere continue must the before YouIncorrectansweredcase,it istoE02ESVxx_System Incorrect answer anywheretoE02ESVxx_System Correct --Clickanywhere istocontinue assets. answercase,questioncompletely Click Youdid You --answeredthis correctly! Correct answerthisthis it to continue did You In this anywhere not In continuing correctly! questioncompletely assets. Click thisquestion continue this continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
26

Clear

Configuring Asset Model Describe Configuration of Assets

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

13

Topics Configuring Assets Scope of Responsibility

Honeywell

Configuring Asset Model Describe Configuration of Assets

27

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Assign Assets to Station / Consoles

Honeywell

Assign assets to flex stations / console stations / consoles

Configuring Asset Model Describe Configuration of Assets

28

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

14

Assign Assets to Operators or Windows Group Account

Honeywell

Assign assets to operator

Configuring Asset Model Describe Configuration of Assets

29

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Assign Points to Assets Quick Builder

Honeywell

Enter tag name of asset

Configuring Asset Model Describe Configuration of Assets

30

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

15

Assign Points to Assets Control Builder

Honeywell

Enter tag name or full item name of asset

Configuring Asset Model Describe Configuration of Assets

31

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Assign Displays to Assets HMIWeb Display Builder

Honeywell

Enter tag name of asset

Configuring Asset Model Describe Configuration of Assets

32

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

16

Assign Fieldbus/HART Devices to Assets (1)

Honeywell

Prior to R310, all system component devices, including Fieldbus and HART, had associated asset set to server point From R310 onwards, Fieldbus and HART devices can be mapped to an asset
Scope of Responsibility for the device will be determined by the asset assignment of the operator or station

Configuring Asset Model Describe Configuration of Assets

33

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Assign Fieldbus/HART Devices to Assets (2) Alarms and messages can be viewed and acknowledged if the associated asset is assigned to the operator or station

Honeywell

Asset assigned, Fieldbus device seen

Asset not assigned, Fieldbus device not seen

Configuring Asset Model Describe Configuration of Assets

34

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

17

Question 2: Asset Assignment Which item cannot be assigned to an asset?


A) SCADA points B) C200/C200E points C) Custom displays D) Printers E) Fieldbus/HART Devices Pumps
TIC907

Honeywell
Precipitation

Train1

Train2

Filter1 Valves1
PIC406 AC506 LL305

Tank1
TT555 LT203

FI305

TI607

TI404

LI308

Server 2
No. Printers are No. Printers The correct answer is: not assigned to an asset. Yourcorrect answerarenot assigned to an asset. Youranswer: answer: TheYes! Printers are is: assigned to an asset. No. Printers are not assigned to an asset. Yes! Printers are not question to an asset. No. Printers are the assigned to an not You must answer not assigned beforeasset. You You Click anywhere totocontinue mustClick this questioncontinue answer before YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue Incorrect--answeredthisquestioncompletely Correct answer anywheretotocontinue did not --Clickanywhere tocontinue. completely You Correct answeranywhere tocontinue. did You Click anywhere not Click anywhere Click this correctly! this continuing correctly! continuing continue. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to

Submit
35

LI708

Clear

Configuring Asset Model Describe Configuration of Assets

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Summary When configuring assets, remember:


Configure assets in Enterprise Model Builder

Honeywell

Assign assets to stations, consoles, and operators in Configuration Studio Assets follow the assignment of their parents for scope of responsibility Assign points to assets in Quick Builder (SCADA) and Control Builder (C300, C200/C200E and ACE) Assign displays to assets in HMIWeb Display Builder

Configuring Asset Model Describe Configuration of Assets

36

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

18

Lab Example Configure Parent and Child Assets

Honeywell

Configuring Asset Model Describe Configuration of Assets

37

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Conclusion Describe Configuration of Assets

Honeywell

Completion Certificate

Proceed to the Configure Parent and Child Assets lab exercise


Configuring Asset Model Describe Configuration of Assets

38

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

19

Topic: Configuring Asset Model


Contents
Configure Parent and Child Assets .......................................................................................................3

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

This page was intentionally left blank.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Configuring Asset Model Configure Parent and Child Assets

Configure Parent and Child Assets


Student Partition sheet Team ## Windows Login User Password System Name Asset 01 Tag Name Item Name Description Asset 02 Tag Name Item Name Description Asset 03 Tag Name Item Name Description Temp## Temp##_Item Temp Control ## Pumps## Pumps##_Item Pump Control ## Valves## Valves##_Item Flow Valves ## E02ESV##_System Student

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Configuring Asset Model Configure Parent and Child Assets

This page was intentionally left blank.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Configuring Asset Model Configure Parent and Child Assets Prerequisites

Configuration Studio and Enterprise Model Builder navigation knowledge EPKS Assets and Asset Model knowledge Knowledge Builder available Partition Data Sheet

Introduction

During this lab, you will configure two parent assets and one child asset. Note: Pay close attention to the asset tag names and item names. If your names do not agree with the lab specified names, when you build points later in the class you will get load errors and the points will go to the Unassigned Items asset. The point build partition sheets assume the assets are named according to this labs instruction.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Configuring Asset Model Configure Parent and Child Assets Procedure

Perform the following procedures in Configuration Studio.


Step Configure an Asset 1 Login to Windows with Student User if not already logged in. Action

ATTENTION Refer your partition sheet for password details.

2 3

Open Configuration Studio, if not already open. Connect to your System.

ATTENTION For System Name refer to your partition sheet. 4 In the left-side pane of the Configuration Explorer tab, ensure E02ESV##_System is selected.

ATTENTION Your screen might look different from the one shown in the picture above.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Configuring Asset Model Configure Parent and Child Assets Step 5 Action In the right-side pane of the Configuration Explorer tab, under System Tasks, click Configure Assets for this system.

In the Enterprise Model Builder window, select top level Assets and then click File > New ASSET. The ASSETS: ASSET Block Parameters window appears.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Configuring Asset Model Configure Parent and Child Assets Step 7 Action a. In the ASSETS:ASSET Block window, in the Main tab, type the Tag Name, Item Name and Description as given in your partition sheet for Valves##.

ATTENTION All user-defined assets created directly under the toplevel item Assets in hierarchy have The Directly Assignable check box selected by default. This asset and then its child assets, can be specifically assigned to an operator, station, or alarm group.

TIP Assignable assets can be individually assigned to an operator (or station), irrespective of the scope of responsibility defined for their parent assets. Additionally, alarms configured for assignable assets can be directly enabled or disabled.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Configuring Asset Model Configure Parent and Child Assets Step 8 Click OK. This configured asset appears under Assets in the Asset window, displayed by its Item Name. Action

ATTENTION Your asset tree may look different in that it may contain additional assets configured earlier during class setup.

9 10 11

Repeat steps 5 to 7 to create the second asset Pumps## specified in your partition sheet. Click on the Pumps##_Item asset. Click File > New ASSET.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Configuring Asset Model Configure Parent and Child Assets Step 12 Action Repeat above step 6 to add another asset Temp## specified in your partition sheet. Do not select the Directly Assignable checkbox. Repeat above step 7.

ATTENTION This asset Temp##_Item is a child asset of asset Pumps##_Item. Note that the Pumps##_Item asset (user-defined asset under top level item Assets) had the Directly Assignable option compulsorily selected, this is optional for its child asset Temp##_Item. Since we have configured Temp##_Item as NOT Directly Assignable, it will follow the assignment of its parent asset (Pumps##_Item). Note that its icon appears with half intensity in the tree view. 13 In Enterprise Model Builder window, click Tools > Load Entire Model.

10

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Configuring Asset Model Configure Parent and Child Assets Step 14 Action In the Enterprise Model Builder Load window, ensure that the Load check box corresponding to the server(s), into which this asset model is to be loaded, is selected and then click OK.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11

Configuring Asset Model Configure Parent and Child Assets Step 15 Action When loading begins, a Loading Asset window appears. When the asset model is successfully loaded, the Load Status of the corresponding server becomes Completed. When the Load Status is complete, click OK. If there is a load error, double click the message that appears under Details/Errors to see details. Fix the error and reload.

After Download

12

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Describe Alarm Groups

Alarm Groups Describe Alarm Groups

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Introduction In this lesson you will learn about Experion PKS alarm groups At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Explain the purpose of an alarm group Describe how to configure an alarm group Describe how to use an alarm group

Honeywell

Alarm Groups Describe Alarm Groups

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Alarm Group Purpose Alarm Group Configuration Alarm Group Operations

Honeywell

Alarm Groups Describe Alarm Groups

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Alarm Groups Big Picture Independent grouping of entities for purposes of alarm state aggregation
An Alarm Group provides the means to monitor a group of assets and/or data points otherwise unrelated to one another in the asset model

Honeywell
Assets Filtration

Train1

Train2

Can contain points and assets Pumps Each alarm group can be referenced as a point in the system In this example, all the flow related points in the Filtration area are grouped together under FilterFlowAlm alarm group Maximum 5000 alarm groups per server can be configured
PI301 FI302
Alarm Groups Describe Alarm Groups

Filter1
FIC405 TIC205 FIC407

Filter2
LC203

Valves2
PI309

FI506

Server 1

FilterFlowAlm
Alarm Group

FI304

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

FI809

TI405

Alarm Group - Aggregation


Alarm Count = 3

Honeywell Aggregation

Assets
Alarm Count = 3

Filtration
Alarm Count = 2

FlowFltr (FIC407)

Total number of alarms in each alarm state for each priority level Total unacknowledged and acknowledged alarms Default filtered as per scope of responsibility (SOR)
Alarm Count = 3

Train1
Alarm Count = 1

Pumps
PressureTr1 (PI301) FlowTr1 (FI302) Alarm Count = 1

Filter1
TemperatureFr1 (TIC205) Alarm Count = 0 FlowFr1 (FI506)

FilterFlowAlm
Alarm Group

Train2 Unassigned
5

Alarm Groups Describe Alarm Groups

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 1: Alarm Group Purpose Which statement is false?


A) An alarm group allows you to monitor a group of unrelated assets or data points in the asset model B) An alarm group can contain points and assets C) Each alarm group can be referenced as a point in the system D) Items in an alarm group must be in the same asset

Honeywell

The correct answer is: Yourcorrect answer is: The answer: Youranswer: Yes! The false statement is "" Items in an alarm No. The false statement is "" Items in an alarm No. The false statement is Items in an alarm Yes! The false statement is Items in an alarm You must answer the question before You mustClick anywhere to continue answer question before YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue groups Incorrect answerthe this correctly! Correct be in anywhere asset". group You ---bein anywhere asset". Alarm Youdid must-answeredthis correctly! Alarm groups Correct Click thissame to continue did must Click anywhere to completely You Click thisquestion completely not group not answerthe same to continue continuing continuing are created to span assets. are created to span assets. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
6

Clear

Alarm Groups Describe Alarm Groups

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Alarm Group Purpose Alarm Group Configuration Alarm Group Operations

Honeywell

Alarm Groups Describe Alarm Groups

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configure Alarm Group Configuration Studio Select System in the Configuration Explorer tree

Honeywell

Alarm Groups Describe Alarm Groups

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configure Alarm Group Main Tab Tag name


Must be unique Up to 40 characters Common name Up to 40 characters Full Path to entity Up to 200 characters Alarm Group must be associated with an Asset for SOR Tags (Points and Assets) to be assigned to Alarm Group Maximum of 500 items per group Can create larger groups using tree structure of Alarm Groups Model
9

Honeywell

Item Name

Full Item Name

Associated Asset

Number of Group Items

Alarm Groups Describe Alarm Groups

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configure Alarm Group Identification Tab

Honeywell

Block Comments for additional information

Alarm Group creation and download details

Alarm Groups Describe Alarm Groups

10

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configure Alarm Groups Load to System

Honeywell

Click to load the Alarm Group Model to the included servers

Alarm Groups Describe Alarm Groups

11

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 2: Alarm Group Configuration When configuring alarm groups in Configuration Studio, which characteristics do you identify on the Main tab?
A) Name, Description, Block Comments and Download details B) Tag name, Item name, Block comments and Download C) Tag name, Item name, Associated asset and Number of group items
Yes! The correct answer is C. The main tab contains the Tag No. The correct answer is C. The main tab contains the Tag Yes! The correct answer is C. The main tab contains the Tag No. The correct answer is C. The main tab contains the Tag name, Item name, Associated asset and Number of group Thename, Item name, Yourcorrect answer is: Associated asset and Number of group The answer: the Full Item Name is listed on the main tab, Yourcorrect answer is: Item Name is listed on the main tab, answer: items. Also, the Full Item Name is listed on the main tab, items. Also, the Full Item Name is listed on the main tab, items. Also, the Full question before items. Also, You mustwhich the question before You not which anywhereto continue mustanswer answer questioncontinue YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue entity. Incorrect answerdisplays correctly! Correct --Clickanywherethefull path to Youdid You --answeredthis correctly!pathto entity. Correct answerdisplaysthetofull did You Click anywhere to continue not Click thisthis Click anywhereto completely this completely continuing continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Honeywell

Submit

Clear

Alarm Groups Describe Alarm Groups

12

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Enterprise Model Builder Enhancements

Honeywell

An indication of the load and change status of an enterprise model

New Item added, show status Download Needed

Delta indicates modified Item

Fully Downloaded Enterprise Model

Alarm Groups Describe Alarm Groups

13

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Alarm Group Purpose Alarm Group Configuration Alarm Group Operations

Honeywell

Alarm Groups Describe Alarm Groups

14

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Alarm Groups Station Display

Honeywell

Double-click to go to point detail page of Alarm Group

Count of total alarms for each type of priority Items assigned to the Alarm Group
15

Alarm Groups Describe Alarm Groups

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Alarm Groups Station Alarm Summary Display

Honeywell

Single click to filter Summary for Alarm Group

Alarm Groups Describe Alarm Groups

16

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 3: Alarm Group Operations To see the alarm details display for an alarm group item:
A) Click OK B) Click the alarm group item in the location pane C) Double-click the Alarm Groups header in the location pane D) Double-click the alarm group item in the location pane

Honeywell

The correct answer is: is 'D'. Double-click the alarm Yourcorrect answer is: The answer: Your answer: Yes! The correct answer is 'D'. Double-click the alarm No. The correct answer is 'D'. Double-click the alarm Yes! The correct answer is 'D'. Double-click the alarm No. The correct answer You must answer the group item in Clicklocationquestioncompletely You not answer questiontobefore must the before YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue detail display Incorrect inthe locationpane to see the Correct --Clickanywhere to continue group item --answeredthisquestioncompletely Youdid You answer anywhereto continue detail display did You Click thisthiscorrectly! not Click anywhere to see the this pane Correct answeranywhere to continue continuing correctly! of the alarm group. continuing of the alarm group. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
17

Clear

Alarm Groups Describe Alarm Groups

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Summary When configuring alarm groups, remember:


Alarm groups can contain points and assets Each alarm group can be referenced as a point in the system Alarm groups are created to span assets

Honeywell

During configuration, alarm groups must be associated with an asset for scope of responsibility It is possible to create groups larger than 500 items using the tree structure of alarm groups model Use the Enterprise Model Builder to load the alarm group model to all of the included servers

Alarm Groups Describe Alarm Groups

18

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Lab Example Configure Alarm Groups

Honeywell

Alarm Groups Describe Alarm Groups

19

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Conclusion Describe Alarm Groups

Honeywell

Completion Certificate

Proceed to the Configure Alarm Groups lab exercise


Alarm Groups Describe Alarm Groups

20

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

10

Topic: Alarm Groups


Contents
Configure Alarm Groups ........................................................................................................................3

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

This page was intentionally left blank.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarm Groups Configure Alarm Groups

Configure Alarm Groups


Student Partition sheet Team ## Windows Login User Password System Name Tag Name Item Name Description Associated Asset Number of Group Items Group Item E02ESV##_System AQ_AlarmGroup## AQ_AlarmGroup##_Item Alarm Group for Asset AQ AQ 1 LOWALARM## Student

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Alarm Groups Configure Alarm Groups

This page was intentionally left blank.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarm Groups Configure Alarm Groups Prerequisites

Configuration Studio and Enterprise Model Builder navigation knowledge Alarm Group knowledge Knowledge Builder available Partition Data Sheet

Introduction

During this lab, you will configure an alarm group containing the one pre- configured point.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Alarm Groups Configure Alarm Groups Procedure

Perform the following procedures in EPKS Server:


Step Configure an Alarm Group 1 Login to Windows with Student User if not already logged in. Action

ATTENTION Refer your partition sheet for password details.

2 3

Open Configuration Studio, if not already open. Connect to your System.

ATTENTION For System Name refer partition sheet.

In the Configuration Explorer tab, in the left-side pane, ensure your System is selected.

ATTENTION For system name refer your partition sheet.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarm Groups Configure Alarm Groups Step 5 Action In the Configuration Explorer tab, in the right-side pane, under System Tasks, click Configure Alarm Groups for this system.

In the Enterprise Model Builder window, click File > New ALARMGROUP. The ALARMGROUP Block Parameters window appears.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Alarm Groups Configure Alarm Groups Step 7 Action In the GROUPS:ALARMGROUP Block, ALARMGROUP_### window, in the Main tab Type Tag Name, Item Name and Description, Associated Asset as specified in your partition sheet Enter the Number of Group Items as 1. Type the name of tag in the Group Items list as specified in your partition sheet. Leave Point Detail Page and Associated Display ports blank.

ATTENTION The point-picker button can be used to select the asset for the Associated Asset field and the points under the Group Items field instead of the user typing the tag names. There is an issue with the point-picker button in this release of R400. This issue will be fixed in a future release.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarm Groups Configure Alarm Groups Step 8 Click OK. This configured alarm group appears under Alarm Groups in the Alarm Groups window. Action

9 10

In the Enterprise Model Builder window, on the menu bar, click Tools > Load Entire Model. In the Enterprise Model Builder Load window, ensure that the Load check box corresponding to the server into which this asset model is to be loaded is selected and click OK.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Alarm Groups Configure Alarm Groups Step 11 Action a. When loading begins, a Loading AlarmGroup window appears. b. When the alarm group is successfully loaded, the Load Status of the corresponding server becomes Completed. c. Now click OK.

12

Open Station if not already open. Select Start Programs Honeywell Experion PKS Server Station.

10

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarm Groups Configure Alarm Groups Step 13 Action The security level in Station is Operator. Click on the current access level in the lower right corner of the station screen and enter mngr in the password box.

14

Enter the tagname LOWALARM## in the Command zone. Press <F12> or click the button to open the Point Detail page for this tag.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11

Alarm Groups Configure Alarm Groups Step 15 Action In the detail display page for the point LOWALARM## Verify that the MODE of the point is MANUAL Change the state of LOWALARM## to ON to create an alarm

12

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarm Groups Configure Alarm Groups Step 16 Action Call up the Alarm Summary and select the Location Pane.

17

Click on the push-pin in the Location Pane.

18

The alarm group AQ_AlarmGroup## appears under Alarm Groups, indicating 1 alarm.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

13

Alarm Groups Configure Alarm Groups Step 19 Action Click AQ_AlarmGroup## to view its alarm details in the right side of the window. Note the Location Tag column of the alarm details section shows AQ.

20

Double click AQ_AlarmGroup##_ITEM to call up the alarm group point detail display.

21

Return LOWALARM## to a no-alarm condition by setting output to OFF.

14

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Identify Station Types and Security Options

Flex Stations and Report Printers Identify Station Types and Security Options

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Introduction

Honeywell

In this lesson you will learn about Experion PKS station types and security options At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Identify the features of each station type Distinguish between station-based and operator-based security
ES-CE ES-C ES-C Experion Server ESV ES-F ES-F

C200/ C200E Controllers

Flex Stations and Report Printers Identify Station Types and Security Options

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Station Types System Access and Security

Honeywell

Flex Stations and Report Printers Identify Station Types and Security Options

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Station - Flex (ES-F) Maximum No of Flex Stations per Server is 60 Static Station
Continuously logged onto Server Dedicated License Used for Operations

Honeywell

Static

Rotary Station
Occasional use Shared license Logon takes the first available Rotary connection
Rotary

Configured in Quick Builder

Flex Stations and Report Printers Identify Station Types and Security Options

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Station - Console (ES-C, ES-T)


Station - Console (ES-C)
Continuously logged onto Server Directly connected to C200/C200E and C300 via FTE Requires file replication from Server database Configured similarly to System Interface Multi window functionality is standard functionality with each ES-C Separate license option vs. Flex station license
ES-CE ES-T ESVT ES-CE ES-C

Honeywell
Experion Server ESV

C200/C200E Controllers

ES-F

Station TPS (ES-T)


All of above mentioned features Direct connection to TPS
LCN

NIM PM

C200/C200E Controllers

Flex Stations and Report Printers Identify Station Types and Security Options

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Station Console Extension (ES-CE)


Station - Console Extension (ES-CE) Like a Flex Station except it connects directly to an ES-C instead of the Experion server 3 max per ES-C Economical way to extend the availability and functionality of the ES-C Station Console Extension (ES-CE, TPS software installed) Like a Flex Station except it connects directly to an ES-T instead of the Experion server Economical way to extend the availability and functionality of the ES-T Shares one native window among ES-T and its extensions
ES-CE ES-CE

Honeywell
ES-C

ES-T

Flex Stations and Report Printers Identify Station Types and Security Options

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 1: Experion PKS Station Types What is a characteristic of a Flex static station?
A) Continuously logged onto the server B) Occasionally logged onto the server C) Requires an Icon Station D) Is directly connected to C200/C200E controllers

Honeywell

Yes! The correct answer is 'A'. AAstatic station is No. The correct answer is 'A'. A static station is Yes! The correct answer is 'A'. A static station is No. The correct answer is 'A'. static station is continuously logged on to the server for continuously logged The correct answer is: on to the server for Yourcorrect answer is: Youranswer: A rotary station is logged on and The answer: operations. A rotary station is logged on and operations.answer the question before You must answer You You answer anywhere to continue loggedmusttheserver thisquestionforoccasional YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue Incorrect--answered as neededcontinue Correct theClickanywhereto continue did not --Clickanywhere to completely loggedoff Click anywhere to for off server as needed before You Correct answerthisthiscorrectly! occasional did You Click thisquestion completely not continuing correctly! continuing use. use. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
7

Clear

Flex Stations and Report Printers Identify Station Types and Security Options

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Station Types System Access and Security

Honeywell

Flex Stations and Report Printers Identify Station Types and Security Options

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Security and Access

Honeywell

System Access and Security Station based Traditional Accounts Log-in Assets No log-in Assigned to Station Oper Supv Engr Mngr Simplest to implement Lowest level of security Operator based Integrated Accounts EPKS Windows Group Accounts Windows log-in

Server log-in Windows log-in

Assigned to Operator View only Ack only Oper Supv Engr Mngr Operator specific assignment of assets Ease of administration for large number of operators Allows adding multiple operators by adding their Windows group to EPKS Server

Access levels

Considerations

Flex Stations and Report Printers Identify Station Types and Security Options

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 2: Experion PKS Station Security Options What are the two types of station security?
A) Server log-in and Windows log-in B) Fault Tolerant Ethernet and Control Net C) Online and Offline D) Station-based and Operator-based

Honeywell

The correct answer is: Yourcorrect answer is: Your answer: The answer: No. The correct answer is 'D'.'D'.The two types of station security Yes! The correct answer question two types of of station security No. You must answer the is 'D'. The two types station security are Yes! The correct answer 'D'.The two types of station security are The correct answer is is The before You You -Click anywhere must answer the question before YouIncorrect-answered Operator-based. This applies all station Correct answer anywhere to continue did not answerthis question completely areIncorrect-answered this correctly! This applies toto all station Station-based andanywhereto continueThis Correct -Click and Operator-based. YouStation-based and this correctly! This applies all station did You Click this question completely not Click Operator-based. areStation-basedcontinuing to continue applies toto all station Station-based andanywhere to continue Operator-based. continuing types: Flex, Console and Console Extension. Station-based types: Flex, Console and Console Extension. Station-based security requires no log-in for operators and assets are assigned security requires no log-in for operators and assets are assigned to the Station. Operator-based security requires a Server log-in to the Station. Operator-based security requires a Server log-in and assets are assigned to the operator. and assets are assigned to the operator. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
10

Clear

Flex Stations and Report Printers Identify Station Types and Security Options

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Summary Experion PKS station types:


Flex: Static and rotary Direct connect: Console (ES-C), TPS (ES-T) Console Extensions (ES-CE)

Honeywell

Experion PKS station security options:


Station-based: No log-in required for operations; assets assigned to station Simplest to implement : lowest level of security Operator-based: Station log-in required; assets assigned to operator Windows integrated accounts facilitate large numbers of operators
Flex Stations and Report Printers Identify Station Types and Security Options

11

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Lab Examples 1 of 3 Open a Project in Quick Builder

Honeywell

Flex Stations and Report Printers Identify Station Types and Security Options

12

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Lab Examples 2 of 3 Build Static and Rotary Stations

Honeywell

Flex Stations and Report Printers Identify Station Types and Security Options

13

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Lab Examples 3 of 3 Configure a Printer

Honeywell

Flex Stations and Report Printers Identify Station Types and Security Options

14

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Conclusion Identify Station Types and Security Options

Honeywell

Completion Certificate

Proceed to the Open a Project in Quick Builder, Build Static and Rotary Stations and Configure a Printer lab exercises
Flex Stations and Report Printers Identify Station Types and Security Options

15

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Flex Stations and Report Printers Identify Station Types and Security Options

16

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topic: Flex Stations and Report Printers


Contents
Open a Project in Quick Builder ............................................................................................................3 Build Static and Rotary Stations ..........................................................................................................29 Configure a Printer...............................................................................................................................51

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

This page was intentionally left blank.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Flex Stations and Report Printers Open a Project in Quick Builder

Open a Project in Quick Builder


Practice
Student Partition sheet Team ## Windows Login User Password System Name Server Name Server Node Name Upload Path Download Path E02ESV##_System E02ESV##_Server E02ESV## \\ E02ESV##\qbfiles\ \\ E02ESV##\qbfiles\ Student

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Flex Stations and Report Printers Open a Project in Quick Builder

This page was intentionally left blank.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Flex Stations and Report Printers Open a Project in Quick Builder Prerequisites

Configuration Studio navigation knowledge Quick Builder with an active Server connection Knowledge Builder available Partition sheet containing configuration data.

Introduction

During this lab, you will start Quick Builder and configure project options, server upload, download settings, and save the project for use in future labs.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Flex Stations and Report Printers Open a Project in Quick Builder Procedure

Perform the following procedures in Quick Builder.


Step Action

Open Quick Builder and Configure Project and Server options 1 Login to Windows with Student User if not already logged in. ATTENTION Refer your partition sheet for password details.

2 3

Open Configuration Studio, if not already open. Connect to your System. ATTENTION For System Name refer your partition sheet.

In the Configuration Explorer tab, on the left side of the screen, under System Name, click + symbol next to Servers, to expand the corresponding tree.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Flex Stations and Report Printers Open a Project in Quick Builder Step 5 Action Under Servers, click + symbol next to your Server Name to expand the corresponding tree.

ATTENTION System name and other details appearing in the above image may differ. For your Server Name, refer to the Student Partition sheet.

Under your Server Name, click Stations and Consoles.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Flex Stations and Report Printers Open a Project in Quick Builder Step 7 Action On the right side of the screen, in the Stations and Consoles section, click Build flex stations. This action will open the Quick builder configuration tool.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Flex Stations and Report Printers Open a Project in Quick Builder Step 8 Action If you are launching Quick Builder for the first time on your machine, an Enable Components window appears as shown below. If you do not see this screen, then go to step 9. If you do see this screen, go to step 10.

ATTENTION The Enable Components window appears only when Quick Builder is started the first time after installation. Quick Builder has the capability to configure all possible Server-Controller interfaces. In this lab, in the Enable Components window, you will select interfaces that are required for the current Quick Builder project. Components may be added or removed later by modifying this Quick Builder project. In the Enable Components tab, double-click the + symbol besides any item type to expand and view its sub-types.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Flex Stations and Report Printers Open a Project in Quick Builder Step 9 Click Tools > Component Manager. Action

10

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Flex Stations and Report Printers Open a Project in Quick Builder Step 10 Action Scroll down the Device tree and ensure that only OPC, Universal Modbus and User Scan Task device types are selected.

ATTENTION In the Modify Project window, click the + symbol beside any item type to expand and view its sub-types.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11

Flex Stations and Report Printers Open a Project in Quick Builder Step 11 Action Under Point, ensure all Point types checked in the figure below are selected.

ATTENTION Items in Bold Type are already incorporated into the Project.

12

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Flex Stations and Report Printers Open a Project in Quick Builder Step 12 Action Under ActionAlgo, ensure all ActionAlgo types are selected.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

13

Flex Stations and Report Printers Open a Project in Quick Builder Step 13 Action Under PVAlgo, ensure all PVAlgo types are selected.

14

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Flex Stations and Report Printers Open a Project in Quick Builder Step 14 Action Under Server and Station, ensure all types are selected.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

15

Flex Stations and Report Printers Open a Project in Quick Builder Step 15 Under Printer, click to select Printer. Action

16

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Flex Stations and Report Printers Open a Project in Quick Builder Step 16 Action Click OK on the following modify project dialog.

ATTENTION To modify these choices later, click Tools > Component Manager to invoke the Modify Project window. The Modify Project window has the same functionality as the Enable Components window. The Modify Project window seen by you may not match with screen capture shown above.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

17

Flex Stations and Report Printers Open a Project in Quick Builder Step 17 a. b. Action Examine the resulting project in Quick Builder: The choices are loaded into Quick Builder and the Project file, and Quick Builder opens ready for configuration. The top section contains the Menu bar and the Toolbar, used for selecting configuration functions, along with the currently open file designator.

ATTENTION By default, all Quick Builder configurations are stored in the QBDatabase.qdb file. This file is stored in following path: C:\Program Data\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Server\Data\qdb. When Quick Builder is started, this file is opened by default.

18

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Flex Stations and Report Printers Open a Project in Quick Builder Step 18 Action The left side of the form displays a menu of available item types that have been added to the project.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

19

Flex Stations and Report Printers Open a Project in Quick Builder Step 19 Action The Item types appearing in the lower left side of the screen have specific functions: The Server selection allows configuration of Server details such as the Download path. The Recycle Bin is the repository for deleted items.

TIP Until items are emptied from the Recycle Bin, usually by downloading the deletions, they are considered to still be part of the Project. If an item was erroneously deleted, it can be undeleted and restored in Quick Builder.

20

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Flex Stations and Report Printers Open a Project in Quick Builder Step 20 Action The right side of the form is divided into two regions. The top region displays the list of selected items configured in the project. If Points is selected, all the points currently configured appear.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

21

Flex Stations and Report Printers Open a Project in Quick Builder Step 21 Action The lower region, known as the Property Page, displays the properties of a selected item, or the item called up specifically by entering its name into the Jump Bar. The lowest section is the Status Line, where Quick Builder displays syntax mistakes made during configuration.

22

Click Servers at the lower left side of the screen to begin the server setup process.

22

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Flex Stations and Report Printers Open a Project in Quick Builder Step 23 Action a. Click Default Server item to view its configuration details. b. The Main tab in the server property pages is shown below.

TIP Description is optional and is used for comments about the Server and/or Project.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

23

Flex Stations and Report Printers Open a Project in Quick Builder Step 24 25 Click the Sizing tab. Click each box in the Limit column and type the numbers shown below. Quick Builder will alert you when you have, either by license or entered values, exceeded the limits defined in the Limit fields. Action

ATTENTION The Limit field can be used to specify your license limits. It can also be used to set limits less than those provided by the license, so that you can be alerted in advance to upgrade your license.

26

Click the Server Details tab.

24

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Flex Stations and Report Printers Open a Project in Quick Builder Step 27 Action Ensure that the Server Name is identical to the Server Node Name specified in your partition sheet.

TIP The Server Nameis the computer (or node) name of the Server in which the Quick Builder items are to be loaded. For server node name, refer to your partition sheet. The Download Pathpoints to the folder where items of this Quick Builder project will be downloaded. The Upload Pathpoints to the folder from which items of this Quick Builder project will be uploaded.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

25

Flex Stations and Report Printers Open a Project in Quick Builder Step 28 Click the Server Specific Options tab. Action

ATTENTION You do not have to manually save your entries, as Quick Builder continuously saves as you configure. This project QBDatabase.qdb is now ready to add and configure Channels, Printers, Controllers, and Points. Electronic Signatures is a licensed option that enforces change documentation. It is required in some industries for tracking purposes.

26

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Flex Stations and Report Printers Open a Project in Quick Builder Step 29 Click the History Options tab. Action

ATTENTION History Options tab presents the various options for Historization. It gives the history capture options for Standard, Fast, Extended and Exception History and the number of values these history types can hold.

30

Close Quick Builder.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

27

Flex Stations and Report Printers Open a Project in Quick Builder

This page was intentionally left blank.

28

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Flex Stations and Report Printers Build Static and Rotary Stations

Build Static and Rotary Stations


Practice
Student Partition sheet Team## Windows Login User Password System Name Static Station Number Static Station Name Static Station Description Rotary Station Number Rotary Station Name Rotary Station Description Operator ID Operator ID Password E02ESV##_System STN## Station_## Static Station ## STN(20+##) RStation_(20+##) Rotary Station (20+##) Team## 123456 Student

ATTENTION The Rotary Station Number is the number 20 added to your team number. For example, if you are Team 08, the Rotary Station Number will be STN28, the Rotary Station Name will be RStation_28, and the Rotary Station Description will be Rotary Station 28.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

29

Flex Stations and Report Printers Build Static and Rotary Stations

This page was intentionally left blank.

30

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Flex Stations and Report Printers Build Static and Rotary Stations Prerequisites

Configuration Studio knowledge. Quick Builder navigation knowledge. Quick Builder with an active server connection. Server license with room for additional stations. Knowledge Builder available. Station Navigation Knowledge Station with an active Server connection Partition Sheet containing configuration data.

Introduction

During this lab, you will configure a Station-based security Static Station and an Operator-based security Rotary Station in Quick Builder. Verify that additional Stations are permitted on your Server license. Configure Station## as Static with Station-based security. Configure RStation20+## as Rotary with Operator-based security. Download both Stations to the Server. Logon to each Station to verify correct configuration.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

31

Flex Stations and Report Printers Build Static and Rotary Stations Procedure

Obtain the following information using Station to verify if additional Stations are permitted by your License.
Step 1 Action Login to Windows with Student User if not already logged in.

ATTENTION Refer your partition sheet for password details.

Open Station Application, If you are at a Client PC: Click Start > All Programs > Honeywell Experion PKS > Client Software> Station or If you are at a Server: Click Start > All Programs > Honeywell Experion PKS > Server > Station.

3 4

Click Configure > Server License Details. In the General tab, under Server License, how many Flex Station Licenses does the system have? Answer: ______________________ How many Flex Station Licenses are presently in use? Answer: ______________________

32

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Flex Stations and Report Printers Build Static and Rotary Stations

Perform the following procedures in Quick Builder:


Step Configure a Static Station 1 2 Open Configuration Studio, if not already open. Connect to your System. ATTENTION For System Name, refer to your partition sheet. 3 In the Configuration Explorer tab, on the left side of the screen under System Name, click + symbol next to Servers, to expand the corresponding tree. Action

Under Servers, click + symbol next to your Server Name to expand the corresponding tree.

ATTENTION System name and other details appearing in the above image may differ. For your Server Name, refer to your partition sheet.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

33

Flex Stations and Report Printers Build Static and Rotary Stations Step 5 Action Under your Server Name, click Stations and Consoles.

On the right side of the screen, in the Stations and Consoles section, click Build flex stations to open Quick Builder Application.

In Quick Builder, click Edit > Add Items. Or Click the button on the tool bar at the top.

34

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Flex Stations and Report Printers Build Static and Rotary Stations Step 8 b. Under Type, select Static Station. Action a. In the Add Item(s) window, under Add Items, ensure Station is displayed.

ATTENTION The value shown next to Use Name is default and can be changed, as you will see in the next steps.

Click OK to add the Static Station to the Quick Builder project and to open the configuration form.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

35

Flex Stations and Report Printers Build Static and Rotary Stations Step 10 Action a. In the Main tab, enter Name, Description and Static Station Number from your partition sheet. b. Ensure that Operator-Based Security check box is not selected.

Leave unchecked Static Station Number

ATTENTION Clicking any other data entry box saves the previously entered data to your Project. This is true for all the data entry in Quick Builder. Changing to another Quick Builder screen also saves your entries.

36

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Flex Stations and Report Printers Build Static and Rotary Stations Step Configure a Rotary Station 11 Click Stations in the item types list in the left column. Action

12

Click Edit > Add Items. Or Click the button on the tool bar at the top.

13 14

In the Add Item(s) window, under Add Items, ensure Station is displayed. Under Type, select Rotary Station.

15

Click OK to add the Rotary Station to the Quick Builder project and to open the configuration form.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

37

Flex Stations and Report Printers Build Static and Rotary Stations Step 16 Action a. In the Main tab, type Name, Description and Rotary Station Number as specified in your partition sheet. b. Ensure that Operator-Based Security check box is selected.

Rotary Station Number

38

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Flex Stations and Report Printers Build Static and Rotary Stations Step Load Stations 17 Press and hold the <Ctrl> key and simultaneously click to select the Static and Rotary stations you just created. Action

ATTENTION Recall that you do not need to save prior to this step as Quick Builder performs a save at every screen change.

18 Click Download button, on the toolbar at the top of the window, to download the configured stations to the Experion PKS database.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

39

Flex Stations and Report Printers Build Static and Rotary Stations Step 19 Action a. In the Scope section of the Download window, ensure selected items only are selected. b. In the Summary section, verify that 1 Static Station and 1 Rotary Station are displayed. Also, click to clear the Rebuild Scan Tables option.

ATTENTION If the Summary displayed is not as expected, click Cancel and repeat the two previous steps. 20 If the summary is as shown, (1 Rotary and 1 Static Station) click OK to start download.

40

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Flex Stations and Report Printers Build Static and Rotary Stations Step 21 Action In the Results window, verify that the Download SUCCESSFUL message is displayed and click OK to close.

ATTENTION If there are build errors, the error file name is displayed in the Results window. Double-click the file name to view the error. Fix the error and repeat the download.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

41

Flex Stations and Report Printers Build Static and Rotary Stations Step Verify Station Connections 22 If you are at a Client PC: Click Start > All Programs > Honeywell Experion PKS > Client Software > Station or If you are at a Server: Click Start > All Programs > Honeywell Experion PKS > Server > Station 23 24 In the Station window, click View > System Status > Stations > Flex Stations. Verify that your Static and Rotary stations appear. (Scroll down to see your rotary station.) Action

ATTENTION The initial status is Failed, indicating that no one is logged in to the connection. Your Station Index number will be different than the one shown.

25

In Station, click Station > Connect

42

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Flex Stations and Report Printers Build Static and Rotary Stations Step 26 Action In the Connect window click on New Connection

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

43

Flex Stations and Report Printers Build Static and Rotary Stations Step 27 Action In the Create New Connection window, in the Connection tab next to Station number, type the Static Station Number (##) as specified in your partition sheet.

ATTENTION For Static Station Number, refer to your partition sheet.

28

In the Create New Connection window, click Save. Click Yes in the resulting window.

44

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Flex Stations and Report Printers Build Static and Rotary Stations Step 29 Action Type the file name as Sta## and click Save to save the new connection to the default directory. Replace ## with the Static Station Number in your partition sheet.

ATTENTION Station configuration file Sta##.stn is saved in the default path where station configuration files are stored C:\Program Data\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Client\Station.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

45

Flex Stations and Report Printers Build Static and Rotary Stations Step 30 Action Your .stn file will appear in the Connect window. Click on your newly created .stn file and then click connect to connect to your station.

46

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Flex Stations and Report Printers Build Static and Rotary Stations Step 31 Action In Station, click View > System Status > Stations > Flex Stations. Note that the connection access level is Oper since this station uses Station-based security.

32 33

In Station, click Station > Connect...In the resulting window, click New Connection. Next to Connection type, click to select Rotary Station (for casual use).

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

47

Flex Stations and Report Printers Build Static and Rotary Stations Step 34 Action Click Save and save the new connection as Rotary20+##. Login to the rotary station (replace 20+## with the Rotary Station Number in your partition sheet).

ATTENTION With a Rotary connection, you do not need to specify a station number in the Connection Properties window. The Server will log you into the first Rotary station available.

35

Note that no access level is displayed at connection since this station uses OperatorBased security.

No access level

48

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Flex Stations and Report Printers Build Static and Rotary Stations Step 36 Action In the Station Logon window, type User Name and Password. Team## is a Traditional Operator account so the Domain entry needs to be blank. Highlight the Computer name in the Domain entry and delete it. Click Sign On.

ATTENTION For User Name and Password, type the Operator ID and Operator ID Password respectively from your partition sheet. 37 After logon, note the access level. The access level is assigned to an Operator Account and a successful logon uses the assigned level.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

49

Flex Stations and Report Printers Build Static and Rotary Stations

This page was intentionally left blank.

50

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Flex Stations and Report Printers Configure a Printer

Configure a Printer
Practice
Student Partition sheet Team ## Windows Login User Password System Name Server Name Printer Name Printer Description E02ESV##_System E02ESV##_Server \\E02ESV##\[Share name] Experion Printer 1 Student

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

51

Flex Stations and Report Printers Configure a Printer

This page was intentionally left blank.

52

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Flex Stations and Report Printers Configure a Printer Prerequisites

Configuration Studio navigation knowledge Quick Builder Navigation knowledge Quick Builder with an active server connection Knowledge Builder available Printer connected to the Experion PKS Server, client machine, or network

Introduction

In this lab, you will configure a printer in Quick Builder for Experion reports. The printer can be connected to the LPT port of an Experion PKS server or a client machine; or alternatively, the printer could be connected directly to the network. Configure a printer in Quick Builder with the same name as in Windows. Download the printer to the server. Log on to Station to verify the correct configuration. If necessary, install the printer in Windows 2008. The name or share name given to the printer must not contain any spaces.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

53

Flex Stations and Report Printers Configure a Printer Procedure

Perform the following in Quick Builder:


Step Configure the Printer in Quick Builder 1 If not logged in already then login using Student user ATTENTION Refer your partition sheet for password details. Action

2 3

Open Configuration Studio, if not already open. Connect to your System. ATTENTION For System Name, refer to your partition sheet.

In the Configuration Explorer tab, on the left side of the screen under System Name, click + symbol next to Servers, to expand the corresponding tree.

54

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Flex Stations and Report Printers Configure a Printer Step 5 Action Under Servers, click + symbol next to your Server Name to expand the corresponding tree.

ATTENTION System name and other details appearing in the above image may differ. For Server Name, refer to your partition sheet.

Under your Server Name, click Printers.

On the right side of the screen, in the Printers section, click Build printers to open Quick Builder.

Click Edit > Add Items. Or Click the button on the tool bar at the top.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

55

Flex Stations and Report Printers Configure a Printer Step 9 Action In the Add Item(s) window, under Add Items, ensure Printer is displayed.

ATTENTION The value shown next to Use Name is default and can be changed, as you will see in step 10. 10 Under Type, ensure that Printer option is selected.

56

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Flex Stations and Report Printers Configure a Printer Step 11 Action Next to Use Name, type the printers name as specified in your partition sheet and click OK.

ATTENTION The name is the share name of the printer if the printer is not a Local Printer. In case of a network printer, the mngr Windows account must exist on the computer to which the printer is connected. Also this mngr account must have adequate sharing permissions for this printer.

12

Click OK. The printers property pages are displayed.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

57

Flex Stations and Report Printers Configure a Printer Step 13 Action In the Main tab next to Description, type Experion Printer 1.

14 15

In the Alarm/Event printer language option, ensure Normal is selected. Click Download button on the toolbar at the top of the window to download the printer to the Experion PKS database.

58

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Flex Stations and Report Printers Configure a Printer Step 16 Action a. In the Download window of the Scope section, ensure Selected items only are selected. b. In the Summary section, verify if 1 Printers is displayed.

17

Click OK.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

59

Flex Stations and Report Printers Configure a Printer Step 18 Action In the Results window, verify if Download SUCCESSFUL message is displayed and click OK to close.

ATTENTION In case there are build errors, the error file name is displayed in the Results window. Double-click the file name to view the error. Fix the error and repeat the download.

Verify Printer Connection 19 20 Open your Static Station, if not already open. In the Station window, click View > System Status > Printers

60

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Flex Stations and Report Printers Configure a Printer Step 21 Verify that your printer name appears. Action

22

At bottom right corner of Station, verify if the current user access level is Oper.

ATTENTION This lab uses Station-based security and the default access level is Oper. By default, higher access than Oper is needed to enable hardware. However, this access level can be set in the Security tab of the Server Wide Settings page.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

61

Flex Stations and Report Printers Configure a Printer Step 23 Action To change the access level, click Station > Logon.

24

In the Station Logon window next to Password, type mngr (the default Mngr access level password).

25

The access level will change from Oper to Mngr as shown below.

26

Click the Enable checkbox to enable the printer and verify if its status becomes green with an In service message.

62

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Flex Stations and Report Printers Configure a Printer Step 27 28 Action Click Configure > System Hardware > Printers. In Printer Summary, under Printer, click your printer hyperlink.

29

Note the font size setting for Reports and other Alarm/Event settings. Accept the defaults.

You have configured the printer successfully.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

63

Flex Stations and Report Printers Configure a Printer

64

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Describe Server-Wide Station Settings

Station Configuration Describe Server-Wide Station Settings

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Introduction (1)

Honeywell

In this lesson you will learn how to configure Experion PKS server-wide station settings At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Identify the stations governed by server-wide settings Locate the server-wide station settings in Configuration Studio Explain the purpose of the server-wide station settings found on the General, Summary Displays, Security, and IKB/OEP LED Settings tabs

Station Configuration Describe Server-Wide Station Settings

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Introduction (2) Server-wide settings apply to all connected stations Settings configurable
General (Explanation in this presentation) Security (Explanation in presentation and lab) Summary Displays (Explanation in presentation and lab) IKB/OEP LED settings (Explanation in this presentation)

Honeywell

Station Configuration Describe Server-Wide Station Settings

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configuration Studio Navigation Log on to Configuration Studio

Honeywell

Station Configuration Describe Server-Wide Station Settings

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Server Wide Settings General tab

Honeywell

<Alt> <F9> Raise <Alt> <F10> Lower

If selected, Select Timeout value applies to faceplate

Representation of bad value

If selected, default control confirmation will be NO

Message displayed in message zone for invalid parameters in HMIWeb displays

If checked, Enable callouts ,control confirmation information is displayed in a callout


5
EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Station Configuration Describe Server-Wide Station Settings

Server Wide Settings OPC Server Options (1)


Present entire Enterprise Model or only Asset/Point model to OPC clients Enable OPC client to read device

Honeywell
Disable SCADA device read via OPC

If enabled, OPC Alarm and Event Server will publish DSA alarms and messages along with local alarms, messages and events

OPC Client

OPC Server Cache Experion Server

Device Read

3rd Party PC DSA data, alarms and messages

Cache Read

OPC A/E Server

Alarms and messages Server 1 Alarms and messages Server 2 OPC Client

Experion Server 1
Station Configuration Describe Server-Wide Station Settings

Experion Server 2
6

3rd Party PC
EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Server Wide Settings OPC Server Options (2) Treat Date/Time values as local time

Honeywell

Experion uses Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) Time with no time zone and no daylight savings adjustments UTC is stored internally in Experion UTC time converted to local time by Server when displayed to the user Experion Server stores bias (minutes offset from UTC including daylight adjustment) when time is stored for history and events Server can reconstruct local time when required using the bias Local Time = UTC + bias

Does not effect Timestamps associated with data Alarms and events History

If enabled 1. Server date/time values are provided to OPC data access clients as local time (instead of UTC) 2. Date/time values written by OPC data access clients are taken as local time (instead of UTC time)

Station Configuration Describe Server-Wide Station Settings

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Mode Confirmation/Display Scripting

Honeywell

Enable mode change confirmation


If enabled, user must confirm change to Mode parameter made using a keyboard (IKB/OEP/12 Function)

Perform device read after a write


In R30X, Values written from a script on a graphic in Station update only after the display update cycle completed From R310, if the option Perform device read after a write is enabled, Values written from script for a Point. Parameter trigger a device read after write, and update the values in Station If the option is disabled, the behavior is same as in R30X
8

Station Configuration Describe Server-Wide Station Settings

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Server Wide Settings Faceplate Options (1) Automatically select most appropriate parameter Show values of intermediate tick marks
Enables faceplate and mode change auto-selection

Honeywell

Faceplate indicates EU values with tick marks along the length of indicator

Mode = Auto ; SP value selected

Mode = Manual ; OP value selected

Station Configuration Describe Server-Wide Station Settings

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Server Wide Settings Faceplate Options (2)

Honeywell

Enable Preferred SP: Option available to set a preferred set point (SP) for CDA (C200/C200E,C300 and ACE) tags only

Option to enable preferred SP value

Select to save SP=100 as Preferred SP


10

Station Configuration Describe Server-Wide Station Settings

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Server Wide Settings Faceplate Options (3)

Honeywell

Current SP Value (green filled arrow) Preferred SP Value (hollow green arrow)

Tool tip indicating SP related information

Select to clear Preferred SP value


11

Station Configuration Describe Server-Wide Station Settings

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Server-wide Settings Summary Displays tab

Honeywell

Station Configuration Describe Server-Wide Station Settings

12

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Server-wide Settings Summary Displays tab (Contd.)

Honeywell

Station Configuration Describe Server-Wide Station Settings

13

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Server-wide Settings Security tab

Honeywell
The minimum security level for enabling and disabling channels, controllers, points and printers.

If checked, access to Assets allowed only if an assignable asset is assigned to both operator and station

If checked, display scripts can control points using a security level that is higher than the current operator

If checked, Integrated Operator accounts of mngr or engr level are required for download of configuration from Configuration Studio, Quick Builder and Control Builder
14

Station Configuration Describe Server-Wide Station Settings

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Server-wide Settings IKB/OEP LED Settings

Honeywell

Specify LED color for urgent, high, low priority alarms Select to disable the use of SP/OUT keys or Alt+F11/Alt+F12 keys to change parameter focus to SP/OP Enable tapping of the raise or lower keys

Specify LED action for urgent, high, low priority alarms, messages and system alarms

Change the update rate for all display elements from Normal to Fast

Station Configuration Describe Server-Wide Station Settings

15

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Disable Server Handling of SP/OP Keys 1


Message Invalid operation

Honeywell

Use SP key on IKB/OEP. Use Alt+F11 on standard keyboard.

Use OUT key on IKB/OEP. Use Alt+F12 on standard keyboard.


Station Configuration Describe Server-Wide Station Settings

16

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Summary

Honeywell

Configuration Studio provides tabs for setting options that apply to all stations connected to the server
Flex stations both static and rotary Console stations Console extension stations Experion station TPS

Station Configuration Describe Server-Wide Station Settings

17

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 1: Station Types Which station type is governed by server wide station settings?

Honeywell

A) Flex static and rotary stations B) Console and Console Extension stations C) Experion Station TPS D) All connected Stations
Yes! The correct answer is 'D'. All stations connected to No. The correct answer is 'D'. All stations connected to Yes! The correct answer No. The correct answer The correct answer is: is 'D'. All stations connected to Yourcorrect answer is: is 'D'. All stations connected to The answer: are governed by the server wide station Your answer: the Server are governed by the server wide station the Server answer the question before You must answer settings. You not Click anywhere to continue must question YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue Incorrect answer anywhereto continue Correct --Clickanywhere to continue question before Youdid You --answeredthis correctly! Correct answerthisthis correctly! did You Click anywhere to completely not Click thissettings. completely continuing continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit

Clear

Station Configuration Describe Server-Wide Station Settings

18

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 2: Preferred SP

Honeywell

For which of the following point types can the Preferred SP value be set?
A) SCADA B) TPS C) CDA (C200/C200E, C300, ACE) D) All of the above

Yes! The correct answer is 'C'. The No. The correct answer is 'C'. The Yes! The correct answer is 'C'. The No. The correct answer is 'C'. The The Preferred SP value can be set only for Yourcorrect answer is: can be set only for answer: The Preferred SP value Yourcorrect answer is: answer: CDAmust answer thequestion before You must answer the C300,,ACE) point CDA(C200/C200E, C300 (C200/C200E, You not Click anywhere to continue before YouIncorrectanswered thisquestioncompletely Incorrect answer anywhereto continue Correct --Clickanywhere to ACE) point Youdid You --answered thiscorrectly! Correct answerthis questioncontinue did You Click types. correctly! not Click anywhere to continue this questioncompletely continuing types. continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
Station Configuration Describe Server-Wide Station Settings

Clear
EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

19

Question 3: IKB LED Alarm Colors

Honeywell

Where are the IKB LED colors for urgent, high and low priority alarms configured?

A) Server-wide Station Settings > IKB/OEP Settings tab B) Server-wide Station Settings > Summary Displays tab C) Station toolbar file (.stb) D) Server-wide Station Settings > General tab
No. The Correct answer is Server The Yes! The answer is: Yourcorrect answer is:answeris Server answer: No. TheCorrect answer is Server Yourcorrect Correct answer is Server The Yes! The Correct answer: Wide Settings-> IKB/OEPquestion Settings Wide did not You must answer the question before You Settings-> IKB/OEPquestion You You -Clickanswer thisto Settings answer You not anywhere Incorrect-answered the question before Correctdid Clickanswer thistocontinue Tab. must-IKB LED Alarm Colors can Correct IKBcompletelycorrectly! Incorrect-answeredthis correctly! can You Clickanywhere to continue anywhere continue this Tab.The Clickanywhere Colors The LED Alarm to continue continuing continuing be configured completelyServerWide from the Server Wide be configured from the Settings Page->IKB/OEP Settings Settings Page->IKB/OEP Settings Tab Tab

Submit

Clear

Station Configuration Describe Server-Wide Station Settings

20

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

10

Conclusion Describe Server-wide Station Settings

Honeywell

Completion Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material


Station Configuration Describe Server-Wide Station Settings

21

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Station Configuration Describe Server-Wide Station Settings

22

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

11

Describe Station-Specific Settings

Station Configuration Describe Station-Specific Settings

23

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Introduction

Honeywell

In this lesson you will learn how to configure Experion PKS stationspecific settings At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Locate the station-specific settings in Configuration Studio Explain the purpose of the station-specific settings found on the General, Assignment, and Operator Keyboard tabs

Station Configuration Describe Station-Specific Settings

24

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

12

Configuration Studio - Navigation Log on to system in Configuration Studio or Log on to specific server in Configuration Studio

Honeywell

Station Configuration Describe Station-Specific Settings

25

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Station-Specific Settings

Honeywell

Select the station to configure

Station Configuration Describe Station-Specific Settings

26

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

13

Station-Specific Settings General tab

Honeywell

Screen changes on Idle Timeout if checked

If different than Server wide default setting

Station Default Printers

Detailed in next slides

Station Configuration Describe Station-Specific Settings

27

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Station-Specific Settings General tab Associated Stations specific to Flex Stations

Honeywell

For stations in close proximity

Default call up screens for specific display types

Station Configuration Describe Station-Specific Settings

28

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

14

Station-Specific Settings General tab

Honeywell

Settings for alarm annunciation from this Station

Settings for messages and alerts from this Station Operator-based security consideration Station Failure Alarm Option

Station Configuration Describe Station-Specific Settings

29

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Station-Specific Settings Assignment tab Asset Assignment

Honeywell

Select restrictions Full access View and Acknowledge View Only. No access for each directly assignable asset

Station Configuration Describe Station-Specific Settings

30

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

15

Assign Point ID to LED (1) Configure Console or Flex Station


Operator Keyboard tab

Honeywell

Position of configurable LEDs on OEP and IKB

Station Configuration Describe Station-Specific Settings

31

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Assign Point ID to LED (2) Assign a point, alarm group, or asset to an LED

Honeywell

Station Configuration Describe Station-Specific Settings

32

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

16

Question 1: Station-Specific Settings

Honeywell

Station asset assignment is important for all these reasons except:

A) It determines scope of responsibility for station-based security B) It decides which asset will be annunciated from the station C) It determines which asset's alarms are annunciated when no one is logged on to an operator-based security station D) It determines scope of responsibility for managerlevel access
The correct answer is: Yourcorrect answer is: Youranswer: The answer: Correct! mustcorrect answer is 'D'. 'D'. Manager Incorrect. The correct answeris before Correct!TheThe correct answer 'D'.Manager level Incorrect. correct answer is is 'D'. Manager The You mustanswer the question Manager level You not -Clicka station-specific before YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue Incorrectis-answera thisquestioncompletely Correct answer anywhere to continue level accessnotcontinuing correctly! setting. access answerthisstation-specific a thiscorrectly!setting. Correct is Clickanywhere to continue Youdidaccess Clickaanywhereto continue did You is not anywhere to completely not Click station-specificsetting. level You --answeredstation-specific setting. access notcontinuing is notthisquestion Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.
33

Submit

Clear

Station Configuration Describe Station-Specific Settings

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Summary Configuration Studio provides tabs for setting station-specific configuration options such as:
Alarm annunciation options Default report printer Asset assignment LED assignment on IKB and OEP

Honeywell

Station Configuration Describe Station-Specific Settings

34

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

17

Conclusion Describe Station-specific Settings

Honeywell

Completion Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material


Station Configuration Describe Station-Specific Settings

35

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Station Configuration Describe Station-Specific Settings

36

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

18

Describe Station Connection Properties

Station Configuration Describe Station Connection Properties

37

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Introduction

Honeywell

In this lesson you will learn how to configure Experion PKS station connection properties At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Locate the connection properties in Station Explain the purpose of station connection properties

Station Configuration Describe Station Connection Properties

38

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

19

Station Connection Properties Navigation Station Connection Properties accessed from Station

Honeywell

Station Configuration Describe Station Connection Properties

39

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Station Specific Settings Connection Properties Connection Tab

Honeywell

Rotary connection: Station number not specified first available connection is used Server connection name from Hosts file

Static connection: Specify Station number

Used with SafeView

Station Configuration Describe Station Connection Properties

40

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

20

Station Specific Settings Connection Properties Connection Tab

Honeywell

Console station or Console Extension station Console Station name from Hosts file

Used with SafeView

Station Configuration Describe Station Connection Properties

41

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Station Specific Settings Connection Properties Connection Tab Advanced Settings

Honeywell

Alternate setup file for redundant server setup (Flex Station) Time station waits, after losing Server connection, before logging out

Time during which repeat key strokes are ignored after the key has been initially pressed Ignore select timeouts on faceplates; 1 = Select timeout ignored

Note: Additional items appear if Rotary Station is configured: Update times; Start display.

Station Configuration Describe Station Connection Properties

42

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

21

Station Specific Settings Connection Properties Displays Tab


Paths searched for displays Searched in the order listed

Honeywell

Check to search folders below those listed for Shape files

Background color for custom .dsp displays (No effect on HMIWeb displays.)

Station Configuration Describe Station Connection Properties

43

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Station Specific Settings Connection Properties Appearance Tab

Honeywell

Options for Station: Defaults shown

Check shown on next slide

Station Configuration Describe Station Connection Properties

44

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

22

Station Specific Settings Connection Properties Appearance Tab


Default Message Zone has been deactivated

Honeywell

Server messages appear as required

Station Configuration Describe Station Connection Properties

45

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Station Specific Settings Connection Properties Toolbars Tab


Standard Tool Bar choices

Honeywell

File that contains customization

Customization of Tool bar, Menu, and keyboard shortcuts covered in the next presentation

Customize Tool bar, Menu, and Keyboard shortcuts

Station Configuration Describe Station Connection Properties

46

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

23

Station Toolbar Files for IKB

Honeywell

Experion Station uses .STB (station toolbar) files to define the actions of the configurable buttons on the integrated keyboard
.STB file is configured in Stations Connection properties in the Toolbars tab Default path to store the .STB files is C:\Program Files\Honeywell\Experion

PKS\Client\System\R400

All .STB files can be customized

.STB Files for IKB keyboards

Station Configuration Describe Station Connection Properties

47

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Station Specific Settings Connection Properties Sounds Tab


Related to station configuration Audible Alarm setup

Honeywell

Station Configuration

Station Configuration Describe Station Connection Properties

48

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

24

Station Specific Settings Connection Properties Sounds Tab


Standard PC sound card and .wav files

Honeywell

Can use different .wav files for each priority

Standard PC Device connecting to COM Port

Station Configuration Describe Station Connection Properties

49

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Audible Alarm Annunciation in IKB

Honeywell

3 physical contacts in the IKB can be configured for horn annunciation


Configured in Stations Connection Properties window in Sounds tab Activate Audible Alarm annunciation for Console/Flex station For TPN/LCN alarms Contacts for horn annunciation must be configured the same in the NCF and Experion

Station Configuration Describe Station Connection Properties

50

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

25

Station Specific Settings Connection Properties Web Access Tab


Control Station web access

Honeywell

Add web access through custom displays

Station Configuration Describe Station Connection Properties

51

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Station Specific Settings Connection Properties Scripting Tab

Honeywell

Run Scripts at sign on. e.g., to call up a particular display

Station Configuration Describe Station Connection Properties

52

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

26

Question 1: Redundant Servers

Honeywell

The Auxiliary setup file entry in the Connection Properties configuration applies only to:
A) Flex stations in a non-redundant server setup B) Console extension stations connected to a console station C) Console stations in a redundant server setup D) Flex stations in a redundant server setup

The correct auxiliary Yourcorrect auxiliary setup file applies only to Incorrect.Theanswer is:setup file applies only to Correct! Theauxiliary setup file applies only to Youranswer: The answer: Incorrect.Theanswer is:setup file applies only to Correct! The auxiliary flex stations answerthe question before You must answer flex stationsin a anywhere to continue You not Clickaredundant server setup. must in redundant server setup. question before YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue Incorrect answer anywhere to continue Correct --Click anywhere to continue Correct answerthisthis correctly! Youdid You --answeredthis correctly! did You Click anywhere to completely not Click thisquestion completely continuing continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
53

Clear

Station Configuration Describe Station Connection Properties

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Summary

Honeywell

The Station Connection Properties tab configures multiple options relating to server-station connections:
Connection type (static, rotary, console) Displays Window appearance and behavior Alarm sounds Web access restrictions Initialization scripts

Station Configuration Describe Station Connection Properties

54

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

27

Conclusion Describe Station Connection Properties

Honeywell

Completion Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material


Station Configuration Describe Station Connection Properties

55

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Station Configuration Describe Station Connection Properties

56

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

28

Customize Station Menus and Toolbars

Station Configuration Customize Station Menus and Toolbars

57

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Introduction

Honeywell

In this lesson you will learn how to customize Experion PKS station menu, toolbar, and shortcut keys At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Create a custom menu Create a custom toolbar Customize keyboard shortcuts

Station Configuration Customize Station Menus and Toolbars

58

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

29

Topics Custom Menus Custom Toolbars Custom Keyboard shortcuts

Honeywell

Station Configuration Customize Station Menus and Toolbars

59

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Custom Menu Configuration Goal: Add custom drop-down menus to call up displays

Honeywell

Station Configuration Customize Station Menus and Toolbars

60

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

30

Creating a Custom Menu Configure Experion PKS custom menus, toolbars, and shortcut keys to provide direct access to operating displays Create a custom menu:
1. In Connection Properties, select the Toolbars tab 2. On the Toolbars tab, click Customize

Honeywell

Station Configuration Customize Station Menus and Toolbars

61

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Creating a Custom Menu


3. Select Header from the Available commands list in the Menu tab 4. Click Insert to add the command to Current Layout 5. Change the caption from Header to the new menu name--this is how the Debut and Hierarchy menu names were created 6. Click New Command to add commands to the Available commands list

Honeywell

Station Configuration Customize Station Menus and Toolbars

62

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

31

Adding a Command to a Custom Menu Add a command to the custom menu:


1. Enter the Name which will be shown in the Available Commands window 2. Assign a keyboard shortcut (optional) by selecting the port and performing the desired keystroke 3. Select the Action 4. Enter the Action support information 5. Click OK to save the command and return to Customize

Honeywell

Station Configuration Customize Station Menus and Toolbars

63

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Adding a Command to a Custom Menu


6. Select Overview from the Available Commands list 7. Select Hierarchy in Current layout 8. Click Insert. The command will be inserted under the current layout selected (Hierarchy) 9. Save the file (.stb), which closes this form 10.Save the Connection Properties file (.stn)

Honeywell

Station Configuration Customize Station Menus and Toolbars

64

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

32

Results Station toolbar has custom drop-down menu Overview is a command in the Hierarchy menu

Honeywell

Station Configuration Customize Station Menus and Toolbars

65

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Custom Menus Custom Toolbars Custom Keyboard Shortcuts

Honeywell

Station Configuration Customize Station Menus and Toolbars

66

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

33

Creating a Custom Toolbar Create a custom toolbar:


1. Select the Toolbars tab 2. Click New Command to add commands to the Available commands list

Honeywell

Station Configuration Customize Station Menus and Toolbars

67

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Creating a Custom Toolbar


3. Enter the Command name, Shortcut key and Action, as in Menu command configuration 4. Click Assign Icon to select a Toolbar icon to be associated with this command

Honeywell

Station Configuration Customize Station Menus and Toolbars

68

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

34

Creating a Custom Toolbar


5. Select an icon, or create one using Paint or another graphics package, to use with the Command

Honeywell

6. Click OK
Station Configuration Customize Station Menus and Toolbars

69

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Creating a Custom Toolbar Insert the command where you want it to appear in the Tool Bar:
1. Select the icon next to where the new icon will appear 2. Click Insert

Honeywell

Station Configuration Customize Station Menus and Toolbars

70

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

35

Question 1: Custom Menu & Toolbar Files

Honeywell

When you create a custom menu or toolbar, what is the extension of the file that is created?
A) .stb B) .stn C) .txt D) .tpt

Incorrect. Custom menus and toolbars are Correct! Custom is: The correctCustom is: YourcorrectCustom menus and toolbars are Incorrect. answer menus and toolbars are Correct! answer menus and toolbars are Your answer: The answer: defined the question You mustdefinedby .stb files. before You not Click anywhere to completely mustanswerby .stb answer question before YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue Incorrect answer anywhereto continue Correct --Clickanywherefiles.continue to Youdid You --answeredthis correctly! Correct answerthisthis correctly! did You Click anywhereto continue not Click thisquestion completely continuing continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
71

Clear

Station Configuration Customize Station Menus and Toolbars

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Custom Menus Custom Toolbars Custom Keyboard Shortcuts

Honeywell

Station Configuration Customize Station Menus and Toolbars

72

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

36

Creating a Keyboard shortcuts Configure Keyboard shortcuts:


1. Select the key to configure 2. Click Edit Command

Honeywell

Station Configuration Customize Station Menus and Toolbars

73

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Summary

Honeywell

Experion PKS menus, toolbars, and shortcut keys can be customized to provide direct access to operating displays by:
Adding drop-down menu items Adding command icons to the toolbar Adding functions to a keyboard keys

Station Configuration Customize Station Menus and Toolbars

74

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

37

Conclusion Customize Station Menus and Toolbars

Honeywell

Completion Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material


Station Configuration Customize Station Menus and Toolbars

75

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Station Configuration Customize Station Menus and Toolbars

76

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

38

Configure SCADA Connections

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure SCADA Connections

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Introduction In this lesson, you will learn to configure SCADA connections At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:

Honeywell

Explain components of SCADA connections: channels, controllers and points Describe the flow of SCADA data Explain capacity and performance parameters Channel Channel

Controller

Controller

Controller

Point Database

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure SCADA Connections

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Configuring Channels Configuring Controllers Configuring Extended Modbus Register Addressing Configuring Points SCADA Data Flow, Capacity and Performance

Honeywell

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure SCADA Connections

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configuring Channels

Honeywell

In an Experion PKS system, controllers connect to the server so the server can coordinate the monitoring and supervising of plant processes The communication links that connect SCADA controllers to the server are known as channels. Every SCADA controller in the system must be associated with a channel.

Channel Controller Experion PKS Server

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure SCADA Connections

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Channels Sizing and Connectivity Configuration

Honeywell

The Experion PKS server default: 90 channels



Can configure to accommodate 99 channels maximum Connectivity settings to the controller Serial, Ethernet (LANVendor) or Terminal server configured

A channel is configured in Quick Builder

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure SCADA Connections

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Channels Other Configuration Parameters

Honeywell
1 to 10 characters (no spaces) describing the type of controller Description for the connection type or PLC type. (Optional)

Limit at which the channel is declared to be marginal. Formula: 25 x (Square Root of the Number of Controllers on the channel) Limit at which the channel is declared to have failed. Formula: 2 x Marginal Limit

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure SCADA Connections

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Channels Other Configuration Parameters

Honeywell

Minimum time (msecs) the server must wait before writing to any controller on the channel, if the channel is on a serial port

Amount of time (in seconds) the server waits to connect to the controller before abandoning the connection Amount of time (in seconds) the server waits for a reply from the controller Unique item number currently assigned to this item by the Quick Builder project

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure SCADA Connections

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Port Settings

Honeywell

Connectivity settings to the controller Serial, Ethernet (LANVendor) or Terminal server The Redundant Port tab defines communication properties for the redundant channel
The redundant port settings, except for port name, must be the same as the Port tab

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure SCADA Connections

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 1: Configuring Channels A channel is a connection between:


A) A server and a printer B) A server and a C200/C200E controller C) A server and a SCADA controller D) A server and a station

Honeywell

Experion PKS Server

The correctanswer is:connects server and Yourcorrect Aanswer is:connects aaserver and aa Incorrect. A channel Correct! Your answer:channel connects server and The answer:Achannel connects aaserver and aa Incorrect.A channel Correct! You must answer the question before SCADA controller. You not Click anywhere to continue must answer controller. before question SCADA YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue Incorrect answer anywhereto continue Correct --Clickanywhere to continue Youdid You --answeredthis correctly! Correct answerthisthis correctly! did You Click anywhere to completely not Click thisquestion completely continuing continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
9

Clear

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure SCADA Connections

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Configuring Channels Configuring Controllers Configuring Extended Modbus Register Addressing Configuring Points SCADA Data Flow, Capacity and Performance

Honeywell

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure SCADA Connections

10

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configuring Controllers reading/writing digital and analog points

Honeywell

Controllers from different suppliers have different access layouts, for Configuration is specific to the Controller Make and Model
For example, a Honeywell S9000 vs. a Honeywell LCS620

Must assign every controller item built with Quick Builder to a channel of
a similar type

More complex physical controllers may need more than one controller
item defined, to fully access their databases

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure SCADA Connections

11

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Controllers Configuration Example for S9000

Honeywell
1 to 10 characters (no spaces) describing the type of controller Description of the PLC type assigned to a channel (Optional)

Channel used by the controller

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure SCADA Connections

12

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Controllers Other Configuration Parameters

Honeywell

IP address of the controller or the host name

The data table accessed by this controller. (Unique to S9000)

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure SCADA Connections

13

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Configuring Channels Configuring Controllers Configuring Extended Modbus Register Addressing Configuring Points SCADA Data Flow, Capacity and Performance

Honeywell

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure SCADA Connections

14

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

MODBUS Register Addressing

Honeywell

Experion R301 supports communicating with Third party devices via Modbus TCP but can only address registers up to 32767
Some of the new Modbus capable devices use registers up to 65535

Experion R310 and Experion R400 support extended Modbus register addressing Major components modified by this change are SCADA, Quick Builder, C200/C200E Serial Interface Module, FTA, and Control Builder This lesson will discuss changes to SCADA and Quick Builder subsystem only

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure SCADA Connections

15

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Quick Builder Enhancement

Honeywell

Quick Builder accommodates the addressing change using the Data table and Offset parameters Quick Builder TCP/IP interface allows multiple logical controllers

First Controller: Offset of zero is used for Modbus addresses 1 to 32,766 Second Controller: Negative Offset is used for Modbus addresses 32,767 to 65,535 (Enhancement) Derive the negative Offset and Diagnostic Address using the formula PLC Address = 65535 + Offset + Quick Builder Address

The two logical controllers combine to allow access to point addresses from 1 to 65,535

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure SCADA Connections

16

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Offset and Diagnostic Address Values

Honeywell

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure SCADA Connections

17

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Example 1

Honeywell

An Experion point is required to scan the hardware address 40001 and for diagnostic it should scan the addresses 50000-50001 To allow a Quick Builder address of 1 to represent the PLC hardware address 40001, offset is worked out by solving the following equation
40001 = 65535 + [Offset] + 1 40001 - 65535 - 1 = Offset = -25535

Diagnostic address is worked out by solving the following equation


50000 = 65535 - 25535 + [Quick Builder Address] 50000 - 65535 + 25535 = Quick Builder Address for the diagnostic scan = 10000

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure SCADA Connections

18

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Example 2

Honeywell

An Experion point is required to scan the address 33005 of a MODBUS PLC PLC Address = 65535 + Offset + Quick Builder Address (or) Quick Builder Address = PLC address 65535 Offset

Where Quick Builder Address is the Quick Builder source or destination address for that point

If the Offset is set to -33000, then If the Offset is set to -32768, then

Quick Builder Address = 33005 65535 (-33000) = 470

Quick Builder Address = 33005 65535 (-32768) = 238

Quick Builder Address, for a particular PLC Address, can be determined by manipulating the Offset value

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure SCADA Connections

19

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 2: Configuring Controllers Fill in the blank:

Honeywell

Every controller item built with Quick Builder has to be assigned to a _______________ of a similar type.
A) Channel B) Server C) Controller D) Station

The correct answer is: Yourcorrect answer is: The answer: Youranswer: Incorrect. Every controller item built with Quick Correct! Every controller item built with Quick Incorrect. Every controller item built with Quick Correct! Every controller item built with Quick You must answer the question before You mustClick this question completely question before Buildernot answerassignedcorrectly! has answer this YouIncorrectanswered thequestionchannel of a Incorrect answeranywheretoa continue Correct to be anywhere to continue Buildernot --to be anywhere to tocontinue of a has Click this Youdid You --answeredthis correctly! Correct Click assigned toa continue did You Click anywhereto channel completely continuing continuing similar type. similar type. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
20

Clear

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure SCADA Connections

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

10

Topics Configuring Channels Configuring Controllers Configuring Extended Modbus Register Addressing Configuring Points SCADA Data Flow, Capacity and Performance

Honeywell

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure SCADA Connections

21

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configuring Points

Honeywell

Experion PKS uses "points" to store information about field values or devices
The state of a pump; a temperature; the process variable of a control loop

Experion PKS records operator changes in parameter values for points as events
Visible in the Event Summary display

Alarms are also point events


Configurable priorities - Low, High, Urgent Visible in Alarm Summary as well as Event Summary

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure SCADA Connections

22

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

11

Point Complexity

Honeywell

Configure less complex points for monitoring a process parameter


An oven temperature; the state of a pump

Configure more sophisticated points to:


Monitor and provide access to a PID loop in a controller Generate alarms Collect historical data Run a server script to perform a task on change of value Start an application

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure SCADA Connections

23

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

SCADA Point Types Status Maps to digital signals


For example, the on-and-off states of a pump or motor

Honeywell

Analog Maps to continuous values


For example, pressures in a boiler or temperatures in a blast furnace

Accumulator Represents total values


For example, the volume of water that flows into a tank or through a turbine

SCADA point types have a fixed data structure Downloads from Quick Builder go to the server real-time database only, not to the SCADA Controller

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure SCADA Connections

24

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

12

Point Summary

Honeywell

Channel

Channel

Controller

Controller

Controller

Point Database

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure SCADA Connections

25

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 3: Configuring Points Which is a characteristic of an analog point type?


A) Maps to a Digital Signal B) Maps to continuous values C) Represents total values

Honeywell

TheIncorrect.Analog point types map to YourCorrect!answer is:pointtypesmap to correct Analog point types map to answer: TheIncorrect.Analog point types map to YourCorrect!answer is: correct Analog answer: continuous values, such as pressures in a continuous values, such question before a You must answer the as pressures in You You Click anywhere to completely must answer question furnace. before YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue Incorrect answer anywhereto continue Correct --Clickanywhereblastcontinue boiler ornot--answeredthisquestioncompletely Youdid ortemperaturesthiscorrectly! Correct Click this in acorrectly! didnot Click this to boiler You answer anywhereto continue temperatures in a blast furnace. continuing continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
26

Clear

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure SCADA Connections

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

13

Topics Configuring Channels Configuring Controllers Configuring Extended Modbus Registry Addressing Configuring Points SCADA Data Flow, Capacity and Performance

Honeywell

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure SCADA Connections

27

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Data Flow SCADA


Data Flow: Controlled by Server Data is pulled from and pushed to Controller
Read Input Scanned periodically

Honeywell

Acquisition & Control

Server Processing: Alarms (Time stamped at Server) Scanning Mechanism: Poll / Response Report by exception if supported by PLC

SCADA Controller
Write Output Followed by verification scan Scanned periodically

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure SCADA Connections

28

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

14

Capacity and Performance PLC SCADA Connections Capacity


90 channels default, max 99 100 controllers default, max 999 65000 points (depends on license)

Honeywell

Performance Considerations
Scanning is done in scan packets Goal = least number of scan packets Specify the least number of scan periods for a controller Guideline: configure one fast and one slow period per controller Arrange the parameters in contiguous registers in the controller Use unsolicited messaging, if supported by the controller

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure SCADA Connections

29

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 4: SCADA Connections

Honeywell

When you download SCADA connections from Quick Builder, the data is written to the:
A) Experion PKS Server B) SCADA Controller C) Experion PKS server and SCADA controller D) Microsoft Excel Spreadsheet

Incorrect. When you download SCADA Incorrect. When you download SCADA Correct! When you download SCADA connections Correct! When you download SCADA connections connections from Quick Builder, the data goes to connections The correctanswerQuick data goesto dataExperion Yourcorrect Builder, is: data goesthe the Experion from answer: from the Builder, to the goes to The Quick Builder, is: YourExperion PKS Server and not to the SCADA from answer: Quick answer the the Experion PKS Server and not to the SCADA the Server answer the the SCADA controller. PKS Serverand not to question before You must answer PKS must-Click anywhere to continue and You not Click controller. to continue question before YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue Incorrect answernot to the SCADA controller. Correct answeranywhere to continue controller. Youdid You --answeredthis correctly! did You Click thisthis correctly! not anywhere thisquestion completely Correct -Click anywhere to completely continuing continuing Click anywhere to continue. Clickanywhere to continue. anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue. Click

Submit
30

Clear

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure SCADA Connections

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

15

Summary In an Experion PKS system:


Connect controllers to the server so the server can coordinate the monitoring and supervising of all plant processes

Honeywell

Assign every controller item, built with Quick Builder, to a channel of similar type More complex physical controllers may need more than one controller item defined to fully access their databases Use status, analog and accumulator points to store information about field values or devices SCADA data flow is accomplished using scan packets: goal is to minimize the number of packets needed

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure SCADA Connections

31

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Lab Examples 1 of 2 Configure a Channel

Honeywell

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure SCADA Connections

32

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

16

Lab Examples 2 of 2 Configure a Controller

Honeywell

Controller

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure SCADA Connections

33

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Conclusion Configure SCADA Connections

Honeywell

Completion Certificate

Proceed to the Configure a Channel and Configure a Controller lab exercises


Channels, Controllers and Points Configure SCADA Connections

34

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

17

Topic: Channels, Controllers and Points


Contents
Configure a Channel..............................................................................................................................3 Configure a Controller..........................................................................................................................19

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

This page was intentionally left blank.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure a Channel

Configure a Channel
Practice
Student Partition Sheet Team ## Windows Login User Password System Name Channel Name Description Item Number Port Type E02ESV##_System HC900_CH## HC900 Channel CHN## LANVendor Student

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure a Channel

This page was intentionally left blank.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure a Channel Objective

Given a Quick Builder project: Add, configure, download, and verify operation of a Channel.

Prerequisites

Configuration Studio knowledge Quick Builder Navigation familiarization Quick Builder with an active server connection Knowledge Builder available HC900 controller connected and communicating to the Experion PKS server via Ethernet Partition Sheet containing configuration data

Introduction

In this lab, you will configure a channel in Quick Builder to communicate with the HC900 controller by doing the following: Configuring a Universal Modbus Ethernet channel Downloading the channel to the server database Verifying the load and channel status in Station From R310 Experion supports R4.0 of HC900 firmware. The R4.0 firmware provides an increase in the number of supported signal tags, variables, and the length of variable IDs.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure a Channel Procedure Step Configure a Channel 1 If not already logged in, then login with the Student Action

ATTENTION Refer your partition sheet for password details.

2 3

Open Configuration Studio, if not already open. Connect to your System.

ATTENTION Refer to the partition sheet for System Name.

Click on the + icon, beside the Servers object, and expand the Configuration Explorer tree.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure a Channel Step 5 Action Click on the + icon, beside the server, to expand the Configuration Explorer tree.

ATTENTION Refer to your partition sheet for your server Alias.

Click on Control Strategy.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure a Channel Step 7 Click on Build Channels. Action

TIP The Quick Builder application window will open displaying the channels page. Use the navigation pane to the left of the Quick Builder window to navigate to various configuration pages. From any page in Quick Builder, click on the Channels navigation button to return to the Channels configuration page.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure a Channel Step 8 Click the button. Action

Select Universal Modbus Channel from the Type list box. Enter the name from your partition sheet. Click OK.

ATTENTION The channel name can be 1 to 10 characters with no spaces and no double quotes. Use the name from your Partition Sheet.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure a Channel Step 9 Action In the resulting channel details form, enter the Description from your partition sheet. The Description can be 30 characters with spaces. The channel details appear as shown below.

ATTENTION Clicking any other data entry box saves the previously entered data to your Project. This is true for all the data entry in Quick Builder.

10

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure a Channel Step 10 Action Accept the defaults for Alarm Limits, Write Delay, and Timeout settings. Enter the Item Number from your partition sheet.

ATTENTION Item number is a unique ID for each item in the Experion PKS server database. Once you assign an item number to a channel, that number is not available for use by any other channel.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure a Channel Step 11 Action Select the Port tab to configure communication settings for the Universal Modbus channel. Select the Port Type, LANVendor, and leave the Port Name empty.

12

Select the Redundant Port tab and select the Port Type as None.

13

Click the database.

button to begin the channel download to the Experion PKS server

12

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure a Channel Step 14 Action Select the Selected Items Only option in the Download window. Verify that the Summary frame indicates the appropriate download item. Ensure that the Rebuild Scan Tables checkbox is NOT selected. Click OK.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

13

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure a Channel Step 15 If the download is successful, click OK. The Results (Successful/Errors) dialog lists any errors found during the download. Open the listed error files by double clicking a selected file. Action

If you have errors, double click the resulting error files to discover the problem. Fix the problem and reload.

14

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure a Channel Step Verify Loading of Universal Modbus HC900 Channel 16 Open your Static Station Sta##, if not already open. Action

17

Verify the access level is mngr. (Go to the next step if the access level is already mngr.) The Access Level is displayed in the lower right corner as shown below.

Change the access level by selecting Station > Logon from the menu bar.

Enter mngr (default) in the Password field and click OK.

The access level should now be Mngr as shown below.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

15

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure a Channel Step 18 Action Click View > System Status > Channels.

16

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure a Channel Step 19 Action Verify that the channel you just built is in the summary, similar to the entry shown below.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

17

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure a Channel Step 20 Action Select the Enable checkbox for this channel. The status LED turns green and remains green. However, there is no communication until the Controller is added. The Controller is added in the next lab.

ATTENTION Supv is the default minimum access level required to enable the channel.

18

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure a Controller

Configure a Controller
Practice
Student Partition sheet Team ## Windows Login User Password System Name Server Alias Controller Name Description Channel Name Controller Device Type Controller Device Identifier Controller IP address Teams 1, 2, 3, and 4 Controller IP address Teams 5, 6, 7, and 8 Controller IP address Teams 9, 10, 11, and 12 Controller Offset Item Number E02ESV##_System E02ESV##_Server HC900_## HC900 Controller HC900_CH## HC900 1 164.145.??.??(Obtain address from instructor.) 164.145.??.??(Obtain address from instructor.) 164.145.??.??(Obtain address from instructor.) 0 RTU0## Student

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

19

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure a Controller

This page was intentionally left blank.

20

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure a Controller Objective

Given a Quick Builder project: Add, configure, and download a controller Verify controller operations

Prerequisites

Knowledge of Configuration Studio Quick Builder navigation familiarization Quick Builder with an active server connection Knowledge Builder available HC900 controller connected to an Experion PKS server An HC900 Universal Modbus channel downloaded to the Server database

Introduction

In this lab, you will configure a logical Universal Modbus controller in Quick Builder to communicate with the HC900 physical controller. Configure a network-connected Universal Modbus controller to map to an HC900 controller. Download the controller to the server database. Verify the controller operation using the Station System Status page.

From R310 Experion supports R4.0 of HC900 firmware. The R4.0 firmware provides an increase in the number of supported signal tags, variables, and the length of variable IDs.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

21

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure a Controller Procedure Perform the following procedures in Quick Builder. Step Configure a Controller 1 If not already logged in, then login with the Student ATTENTION Refer your partition sheet for password details. Action

2 3

Open Configuration Studio, If not already open. Connect to your System. ATTENTION Refer to the partition sheet for System Name.

Click on the + icon next to the Servers object, and expand the Configuration Explorer tree.

22

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure a Controller Step 5 Action Click on the + icon, next to the server added into the System hierarchy, to expand the Configuration Explorer tree.

ATTENTION Refer to the partition sheet for your server Alias.

Click on Control Strategy.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

23

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure a Controller Step 7 Click on Build controllers. Action

TIP The Quick Builder application window will open displaying the Controllers configuration page.

24

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure a Controller Step 8 Click the Action button in the toolbar at the top.

Select the Universal Modbus Controller from the Type list box. Enter the Controller Name from your partition sheet in the Use Name field. Click OK.

ATTENTION The controller name can be from 1 to 10 characters (no spaces or double quotes).

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

25

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure a Controller Step 9 Action Enter the Description from your partition sheet. The Controller Details form appears as shown below.

10

Click the Channel Name arrow and select the channel you created in the previous lab.

ATTENTION The form adds a port for the IP Address after selecting the Ethernet-type Channel Name.

26

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure a Controller Step 11 Action Accept the defaults for the Alarm Limits.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

27

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure a Controller Step 12 Action Enter the Device Type, Device Identifier and IP Address for your assigned HC900 from your partition sheet.

ATTENTION The IP Address and Modbus Identifier (address) are configured in the HC900 using its configuration tool. Device Type is required, since the Universal Modbus driver supports many Honeywell controller types.

28

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure a Controller Step 13 Action Enter the Offset from your partition sheet.

ATTENTION If all parts of the HC900 database are to be accessed, multiple Logical Controllers with different offset settings are needed. For the upcoming Point Configuration labs, the parameters you will map will all use the same offset of zero, therefore, one Logical Controller is all you need to create.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

29

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure a Controller Step 14 Action Enter the Item Number from your partition sheet.

ATTENTION Item Number is a unique ID for each item in the Experion PKS server database. Once you assign an item number to a controller, that number is not available for use by any other controller.

30

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure a Controller Step 15 Action Click the Advanced tab. Enter 2 for the Time Sync Value.

TIP For a description of the Time Sync Value property, refer to Knowledge Builder, Experion R400 > Reference > Honeywell Universal Modbus Interface Reference > Universal Modbus controller configuration and addressing > Defining a Universal Modbus controller > Setting up time sync for UMC800 and HC 900 controllers.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

31

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure a Controller Step 16 Action button in the toolbar menu to download the controller to the Experion PKS Click the server database. Verify: The Selected items only option is selected. The Summary frame indicates the appropriate item.

17

Click OK.

32

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure a Controller Step 18 Action The download Results (Successful/Errors) screen appears as shown.

Click OK. If there are any errors during the download, error files appear in the list box. Double click to open the files.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

33

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure a Controller Step Verify operation of the Controller 19 20 Open your Static Station Sta##, if not already open. Select View > System Status. Select Controllers. Action

34

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure a Controller Step 21 Action Verify that your controller is listed with OK status.

22

Click the Channels tab on the left to open the Channel Status Summary page.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

35

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure a Controller Step 23 Action a. Verify the access level is mngr. (Skip this step if the access level is already mngr.) The Access Level is displayed in the lower right corner as shown below.

b. Change the access level by selecting Station > Logon from the menu bar.

c.

Enter mngr (default) in the Password field and click OK.

The access level should now be Mngr as shown below.

24

Click View > System Status > Channels.

36

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure a Controller Step 25 Action If not already enabled, click the Enable checkbox to start communication on the Channel. The status should be GREEN, which means OK (communicating successfully with the controller).

26

Click your HC900_CH## link to open the Channel Status page.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

37

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure a Controller Step 27 Action Verify that the Total requests counter is incrementing while the Total errors counter is zero or growing very slowly. This indicates that the channel and the controller are communicating successfully with the HC900 controller.

As the Total errors counter increments, the barometer will slowly reach the Marginal and then the Fail limit. As soon as the points are built and start scanning, the channel will heal itself. If you wish to reset the Total errors counter, simply disable and re-enable the channel.

ATTENTION No points are built, and therefore only the oneminute diagnostic scan is active. Total requests are only incremented once per minute. The errors are due to an HC900 socket watch-dog timer expiring, due to this slow communication scan. Once points are built (next lab), communication will speed up and the socket timer will be satisfied. Until then, errors will continue to accumulate. Note: The remaining steps are for information only. If you like, you can move on to the next lab at this point.
38

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure a Controller Step 28 Action When the error Barometer reaches the marginal limit, channel status goes to Marginal, and a High priority alarm is raised. Communication continues unchanged.

29

The alarm appears as shown below.

ATTENTION The controller has a similar barometer, and it also raises alarms.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

39

Channels, Controllers and Points Configure a Controller Step 30 Action When the error Barometer reaches the Fail limit (in approximately 10 minutes), an Urgent alarm is raised and the channel status goes to Failed. At that point, only the oneminute diagnostic scan continues. The Barometer stops accumulating so that any good communication will return the channel immediately to Marginal status.

31

The Failed alarm appears as shown.

Since the watchdog timer problem is intermittent, the channel status toggles between Failed and Marginal status. Leave the status as is. You will now build points.

40

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Distinguish Among SCADA Point Types

Configuring Points Distinguish Among SCADA Point Types

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Introduction In this lesson you will learn the SCADA point types At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Describe each point type Identify the information on the point faceplate Identify the information in the point detail displays

Honeywell

Configuring Points Distinguish Among SCADA Point Types

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Introduction Three SCADA point types for three specific functions


Analog Status Accumulator

Honeywell

Each maps to a specific data source type Each has a fixed data structure Each has optional extended capabilities:
Algorithms User-defined parameters Scripting

All are built with Quick Builder


Configuring Points Distinguish Among SCADA Point Types

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Analog Points Status Points Accumulator Points

Honeywell

Configuring Points Distinguish Among SCADA Point Types

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Analog Points Map to continuous-type data Fixed data structure Allow up to eight mapped parameters per point
PV SP OP Mode A1 A2 A3 A4
Configuring Points Distinguish Among SCADA Point Types

Honeywell

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Analog Points Faceplate Layout


PV 100% Range value Engineering Units PV 0% Range value Current SP Indicator

Honeywell

Current PV Indicator Current OP Indicator

Current SP

Alarm Acknowledge Button

Current PV Current OP

Current MODE Indicator

Configuring Points Distinguish Among SCADA Point Types

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Analog Point Detail Display General Page


Point not Scanned if unchecked Points Alarms disabled if unchecked

Honeywell

Points Associated Display -or <F2>

PV and/or Action Algorithm listing

Configuring Points Distinguish Among SCADA Point Types

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Analog Point Detail Display Scanning Page


Up to Eight Parameters mapped Clamp PV at Server-wide Clamp Limits if checked Check for Reverse acting valve: OP = %open Yes required for any parameter change Mapped location of read parameters

Honeywell
Mapped location of write parameter

Last time PV changed by more than Drift Deadband Operator-Based Security parameter Mode does not affect parameter access if checked

Configuring Points Distinguish Among SCADA Point Types

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Analog Point Detail Display Alarms Page

Honeywell

Up to Eight PV Limit Alarms Avoid Re-alarming PV out of range limits Urgent High Low Journal

Loop reacting too slowly

Parameter changes external to Server

1 15; 0 if not in use

Configuring Points Distinguish Among SCADA Point Types

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Analog Point Detail Display Alarms: Faceplate Functionality

Honeywell

Alarm indicator

PV High and PV HiHigh Limits

Alarm Priority Indicator -Flashing if Unacknowledged

PV Low and PVLoLow Limits

Alarm Acknowledge Button

Configuring Points Distinguish Among SCADA Point Types

10

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Analog Point Detail Display History Page


PV in different type Trend e.g., Line

Honeywell

Time Period

Scale Click on chart to see specific history data Time Scroll History Type

Specific Date\Time setting

Configuring Points Distinguish Among SCADA Point Types

11

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Analog Point Detail Display Auxiliary Page

Honeywell

Access to four auxiliary parameters

Configuring Points Distinguish Among SCADA Point Types

12

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Analog Points Status Points Accumulator Points

Honeywell

Configuring Points Distinguish Among SCADA Point Types

13

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Status Points Map to digital (on-off) type data Fixed data structure Allow up to three mapped parameters per point
PV OP Mode

Honeywell

1, 2, or 3 contiguous inputs
1 input = 2 states 2 inputs = 4 states 3 inputs = 8 states

Configuring Points Distinguish Among SCADA Point Types

14

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Status Points Faceplate Layout

Honeywell

Current PV

Alarm Acknowledge Button

Alarm State Indicator

Current OP

Current PV Current MODE Indicator

Configuring Points Distinguish Among SCADA Point Types

15

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Status Point Detail Display General Page

Honeywell

Configuring Points Distinguish Among SCADA Point Types

16

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Status Point Detail Display Scanning Page

Honeywell

Up to Three Parameters mapped

OP setup Yes required for any parameter change

Configuring Points Distinguish Among SCADA Point Types

17

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Status Point Detail Display Alarms Page

Honeywell
Eight state device may have more than one alarm state

Select states to alarm

Device reacts too slowly

Parameter changes external to server

Configuring Points Distinguish Among SCADA Point Types

18

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Status Point Detail Display History Page

Honeywell

Configuring Points Distinguish Among SCADA Point Types

19

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Analog Points Status Points Accumulator Points

Honeywell

Configuring Points Distinguish Among SCADA Point Types

20

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

10

Accumulator Points Maps to continuous-type data Fixed data structure Allows one mapped parameter per point
PV

Honeywell

Used to monitor a totalizer register that is reset in the PLC


Keeps a grand total using formula for PV PV(new) = PV(old) + (Scale factor )(Meter factor)(Raw counts)

Also used to monitor a device to keep track of total transitions

Configuring Points Distinguish Among SCADA Point Types

21

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Accumulator Points Faceplate Layout

Honeywell
Alarm Acknowledge Button

Current PV

Current PV (Total)

Configuring Points Distinguish Among SCADA Point Types

22

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

11

Accumulator Point Detail Display General Page

Honeywell

Multipliers for the raw PV for PV formula

Rollover value: set to highest raw count value

Configuring Points Distinguish Among SCADA Point Types

23

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Accumulator Point Detail Display Scanning Page

Honeywell

PV location

Configuring Points Distinguish Among SCADA Point Types

24

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

12

Accumulator Point Detail Display Alarms Page


Up to four alarms

Honeywell

Configuring Points Distinguish Among SCADA Point Types

25

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Accumulator Point Detail Display History Page

Honeywell

Configuring Points Distinguish Among SCADA Point Types

26

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

13

Question 1: Alarm Data For any SCADA point, alarms key off which parameter?
A) MD B) OP C) PV D) SP

Honeywell

The correct answer is: Yourcorrect answer is: Your answer: The answer: Correct! For any SCADA point pointthe Incorrect. any SCADA pointthe alarms Correct! mustForany SCADA point alarms Incorrect.For any SCADA the the You For answer the question before You alarms key anywhere to continue mustClick the the PV. answer question before YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue Incorrect-keyoff anywhere to continue Correct answer anywhere to continue alarms key anywhere off this questioncompletely Youdid You keyClickthe this correctly! Correct -answered the PV. to completely didnot --Click off PV. correctly! You answerthisthis not Click off PV. continuing continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
27

Clear

Configuring Points Distinguish Among SCADA Point Types

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 2: Parameters Which point type allows you to map up to 8 parameters?


A) Accumulator B) Analog C) Status

Honeywell

The correct answer is: Yourcorrect answer is: Your answer: The answer: Incorrect.The answer pointquestionbefore Correct! The answer thequestion 8before allows You must analog pointallows 8parameters. ItIthas Incorrect.Theanalog thequestioncontinue Correct! Theanalog pointallows completely has You not Click anywhere to 8 parameters. Ithas must analog YouIncorrectansweredpointcorrectly! parameters. It has Incorrect answer anywhereto continue Correct --Clickanywhereallows 8 parameters. Youdid You --answeredthis thetocontinue did You Click thisthis correctly! not Click this questioncontinue completely the Correct answer anywhereto fourauxiliaries A1, A2, thePV, OP, SP, continuing thefour auxiliaries A1, A2, PV, OP, SP,Mode and Mode and continuing A3 and A4 as parameters. A3 and A4 as parameters. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
28

Clear

Configuring Points Distinguish Among SCADA Point Types

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

14

Question 3: Point States The PV of which point type has 2,4, 8 states?
A) Accumulator B) Analog C) Status

Honeywell

The correctStatuspoints are the ones with 2, 4 YourcorrectStatuspoints are the ones with 2, 4 4 Incorrect.Status points are the ones with 2, 4 Correct! answer is: The answer: Youranswer: Incorrect.Status points are the ones with 2, Correct! answer is: or 8 Youmust answer the question they have 1, You must answer on questionbefore or Incorrect--Click anywhere to continuehave 1, 8states depending on whethercompletely states they before YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue Correct depending thiswhethercompletely Youdid You answer anywhere to continue Correct -answered thiscorrectly! didnot answeranywhere to continue not Click anywhere You -Click this inputs.to Click thisquestion 2continuing correctly! and 3 inputs. 2continuing and 3 Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
29

Clear

Configuring Points Distinguish Among SCADA Point Types

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 4: Rollover values Which point type has a rollover value?


A) Accumulator B) Analog C) Status

Honeywell

Incorrect. answer is: Correct! answer is: The correctThe Accumulator point uses the rollover YourcorrectThe Accumulator point uses the rollover Incorrect.The Accumulator point uses the rollover Correct! The Youranswer: The answer: Accumulator point uses the rollover value. This answer the question before theserver You must rollover value indicates to value. ThisClick anywhere indicatesto the rollover question completely You not - answer value to continue must Click before YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue server Incorrect answer anywhere tobecompletely Correct -answeredthisquestion set to Youdid You -the rawanywhereto continue zero. Correct answerthisthiscorrectly! did You the continuing correctly! to zero. not when -Click anywhere tocontinue when Click this raw counts will be set counts continuing will Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
30

Clear

Configuring Points Distinguish Among SCADA Point Types

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

15

Summary Three SCADA point types are built with Quick Builder
Analog points map continuous data and have up to 8 parameters Status points have up to 3 on/off-type parameters per point Accumulator points map one parameter over time

Honeywell

Each of the three SCADA point types has optional extended capabilities
Algorithms User-defined parameters Scripting

Configuring Points Distinguish Among SCADA Point Types

31

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Conclusion Distinguish Among SCADA Point Types

Honeywell

Completion Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material


Configuring Points Distinguish Among SCADA Point Types

32

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

16

Describe the Fundamentals of Point Scripting

Configuring Points Describe the Fundamentals of Point Scripting

33

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Introduction In this lesson you will learn the fundamentals of point scripting At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Describe a script and its purpose Identify the editor to use for a script type Describe the Experion PKS script engines Identify the tools to diagnose script runtime errors

Honeywell

Configuring Points Describe the Fundamentals of Point Scripting

34

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

17

Topics Experion Script Basics Script Editors Script Engines Script Runtime Errors Script Debugging

Honeywell

Configuring Points Describe the Fundamentals of Point Scripting

35

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Experion Script Basics A script is a short program that performs a specific task

Honeywell

Written in Control Builder, Quick Builder, Station or Configuration Studio Written using the Visual Basic Script language Runs based on events taking place Optimized for 30 lines or less Five types of scripts: Point, Server, Report, Periodic, and Library Concentration in EXP02 is on point scripts Others are covered in Knowledge Builder -> Server Scripting Reference

Configuring Points Describe the Fundamentals of Point Scripting

36

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

18

Experion Script Basics Script Components


Objects and their properties Methods (actions) Events Syntax
Standard VB Script Experion Determined

Honeywell

Configuring Points Describe the Fundamentals of Point Scripting

37

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Experion Script Basics Events


Events for point scripts

Honeywell

Object Point

Event OnAlarm OnAlarmAcknowledge OnNormal OnTimer OnChange OnOperChange

Parameter

Configuring Points Describe the Fundamentals of Point Scripting

38

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

19

Question 1: Experion PKS Scripts Which statement is false? A script:


A) Is a short C++ program that runs based on events taking place B) Can be of type point, server, report, periodic or library C) Is optimized for thirty lines or less D) Has four basic components: objects and properties, methods or actions, events, and syntax
TheIncorrect.The false statement is "A script is short C++ YourCorrect!answer is: statement is "A script is aashort C++ correct The false answer: YourCorrect!answer is: statement is "A script is aashort C++ answer: TheIncorrect.The false statement is "A script is short C++ correct The false You must answerbased program thatanswerbasedonto continue runs You You -Click anywhere to continue must Click the question before program thatClickanywhere to continue runs this on to before YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue place". A script is Incorrect--answeredthisquestioncompletelyplace". A script is Correct answer anywhere events taking did not answerthisthiscorrectly! taking You Correct program. It question completely Basic language did You -Click anywhere events not continuing correctly! not a C++ program. Itis written using Visual Basic language continuing not a C++ is written using Visual and it runs based on events taking place. and it runs based on events taking place. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Honeywell

Submit
39

Clear

Configuring Points Describe the Fundamentals of Point Scripting

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Experion Script Basics Script Editors Script Engines Script Runtime Errors Script Debugging

Honeywell

Configuring Points Describe the Fundamentals of Point Scripting

40

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

20

Script Editors Type of script determines which editor to use


SCADA Point Script > Quick Builder CDA Point Script > Control Builder All other types > Station All editors have syntax error checking capability Quick Builder and Control Builder editors are identical

Honeywell

Configuring Points Describe the Fundamentals of Point Scripting

41

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Script Editor Quick Builder Editor Components


Event Pull-down Parameter callout for Parameter Scripts Comments (Green)

Honeywell

Script Engine selector Error: Missing Quotes the line is Red

Error explanation Experion Expression (Black) VB Syntax (Blue)

Configuring Points Describe the Fundamentals of Point Scripting

42

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

21

Question 2: Script Editors Which editor do you use to write a script for a SCADA point?
A) Control Builder B) Quick Builder C) Control Builder or Quick Builder because their editors are identical D) Station

Honeywell

The correct answer is: Your answer: The correct answer is: Your answer: Incorrect.Use answer the Builderscript editor Correct! Use the Quick Builder script editor Incorrect.Usethe Quick Builder script editor Correct! Usethe Quick question before You must answer You not Click anywhere to continue must the Quick Builder script editor question before YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue Incorrect answer anywhereto continue Correct --scriptsanywhereto points. completely to You Click thisquestion points. Youdid You --answeredthis correctly! Correct answeranywhere tocontinue did write Click thisthis correctly! to not scriptsfor SCADA completely write Click for SCADA continuing continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
43

Clear

Configuring Points Describe the Fundamentals of Point Scripting

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Experion Script Basics Script Editors Script Engines Script Runtime Errors Script Debugging

Honeywell

Configuring Points Describe the Fundamentals of Point Scripting

44

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

22

Experion Script Engines Scripts run in engines


20 engines for each server Each can run one script at a time Types of engines Automatic for robust running Manual for debugging and organizing related scripts 5 automatic and 15 manual engines Select the engine during script edit can be changed later Scripts run in the Server not the controller

Honeywell

Configuring Points Describe the Fundamentals of Point Scripting

45

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Experion Script Engines Engine Status


In Station: Configure Server Scripting Script Engines

Honeywell

Configuring Points Describe the Fundamentals of Point Scripting

46

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

23

Topics Experion Script Basics Script Editors Script Engines Script Runtime Errors Script Debugging

Honeywell

Configuring Points Describe the Fundamentals of Point Scripting

47

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Script Runtime Errors View the Script Engine status LED Examine the script in the editor

Honeywell

Configuring Points Describe the Fundamentals of Point Scripting

48

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

24

Script Runtime Errors C:\Program Data\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Server\Data\Log.txt Script engines report errors to Log.txt
View using Notepad snapshot View using Honeywell Log Viewer (HLV) live window View using Diagnostic Capture Tool - live window

Honeywell

Start > Programs > Honeywell Experion PKS > Server > Diagnostic

Tools > Diagnostic Capture Tool

Click Advanced

Configuring Points Describe the Fundamentals of Point Scripting

49

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Script Runtime Errors Diagnostic Capture Tool

Honeywell

Configuring Points Describe the Fundamentals of Point Scripting

50

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

25

Honeywell Log Viewer (HLV) Text-based server log viewing application replaced by HLV

Honeywell

Provides text highlighting, search and filter features for both live and archived Honeywell log files

Configuring Points Describe the Fundamentals of Point Scripting

51

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Honeywell Log Viewer (HLV)

Honeywell

Add filter strings Select log files to open

Select icon to view system processes and paranoids

Sorting options Server Log HMIWeb Log Log messages Separate filtered text by color

Configuring Points Describe the Fundamentals of Point Scripting

52

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

26

Question 3: Script Diagnostic Tools What is the best way to diagnose runtime errors?
A) Carefully review the script text B) Look at the engine status screen in Station C) Open log.txt to find error entry D) Launch HLV and find the error entry E) All of the above

Honeywell

The correct Even though Honeywell Log Viewer Yourcorrect answer is: Youranswer:Even though Honeywell Log Viewer The answer: though Honeywell Log Viewer Incorrect. answer is: Incorrect. Even though Honeywell Log Viewer Correct! Even though Honeywell Log Viewer Incorrect. Even Incorrect. Honeywell Log Correct! Even thoughquestion before Viewer You mustanswer thefind (HLV) must-Clickwaythequestionerror entry, all You is good answerto to find question before (HLV) isYougoodwaythisthiscorrectly! entry, allall (HLV)isaa goodwaythis find an error YouIncorrectansweredtofind correctly! entry, all Incorrect answeranywhere ancontinue Correcta good wayto questionerror (HLV) isYouanswer anywheretoerror entry, Youdid not --answeredthis anancontinue Correct -Clickanywhere to continue did a not Click anywhereto continue Click to completely completely continuing answers are valid. continuing valid. answers are valid. answers are answers are valid. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to tocontinue. Click anywhere continue. Click anywhere tocontinue.

Submit
53

Clear

Configuring Points Describe the Fundamentals of Point Scripting

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Experion Script Basics Script Editors Script Engines Script Runtime Errors Script Debugging

Honeywell

Configuring Points Describe the Fundamentals of Point Scripting

54

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

27

Debugging Options New option to debug scripts introduced in Experion R310

Honeywell

If the checkbox Run scripts in debug mode is enabled then scripts will run in debug mode User can access the script in Microsoft Script Debugger

Configuring Points Describe the Fundamentals of Point Scripting

55

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Microsoft Script Debugger

Honeywell

Server and point scripts can be viewed and debugged in Microsoft Script Debugger

Configuring Points Describe the Fundamentals of Point Scripting

56

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

28

Summary When writing point scripts, remember:


They are short programs that perform specific tasks SCADA point scripts are written in Quick Builder CDA point scripts are written in Control Builder All other types are written in Station Point scripts run in engines 20 engines for each server Script engines report errors to ..\Server\data\Log.txt View using Notepad snapshot Honeywell Log Viewer (HLV) live window View using Diagnostic Capture Tool - live window

Honeywell

Using the Run scripts in debug mode option, scripts can be viewed and debugged in Microsoft Script Debugger
Configuring Points Describe the Fundamentals of Point Scripting

57

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Lab Examples 1 of 2 Configure an Analog Point and Point Script

Honeywell

Configuring Points Describe the Fundamentals of Point Scripting

58

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

29

Lab Examples 2 of 2 Configure a Status Point and Point Script

Honeywell

Configuring Points Describe the Fundamentals of Point Scripting

59

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Conclusion Describe the Fundamentals of Point Scripting

Honeywell

Completion Certificate

Proceed to the Configure an Analog Point and Point Script and Configure a Status Point and Point Script lab exercises
Configuring Points Describe the Fundamentals of Point Scripting

60

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

30

Topic: Configuring Points


Contents
Configure an Analog Point and Point Script ..........................................................................................3 Configure a Status Point and Point Script ...........................................................................................39

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

This page was intentionally left blank.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Configuring Points Configure an Analog Point and Point Script

Configure an Analog Point and Point Script


Student Partition sheet Team ## Windows Login User Password System Name Server Alias Point name (Analog Point) Enterprise Model Item Name Description Parent asset PV Source Address Controller Name PV Source Address Location PV Scan Period Engineering Units 100%Range Value 0% Range Value Drift Deadband Group Number Position in Group Trend Number Position in Trend Trend Parameter Alarm Type PVHighHigh PVHigh PVLow PVLowLow Priority Urgent High Low Urgent E02ESV##_System E02ESV##_Server ANATEST## ANATEST##_Item Flow loop Valves## HC900_## LOOP ## PV 2 sec L/sec 200 0 0 ## 1 ## 1 PV Limit 195 185 25 5 HC900_## LOOP ## LSP1 LOOP ## LSP1 EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.
3

Student

(One space between each element of the address)

SP Source and Destination Address Controller SP Source Address Location SP Destination Address Location 11/5/2010

(One space between each element of the address)

Configuring Points Configure an Analog Point and Point Script

Student Partition sheet Team ## SP Scan Period OP Source and Destination Controller OP Source Address Location OP Destination Address Location OP scan period Mode (MD) Source and Destination Controller MD Source Address Location MD Destination Address Location MD Scan Period Auxiliary Parameter (A1) Name A1 Source and Destination Controller A1 Source Address Location A1 Destination Address Location A1 Scan Period Auxiliary Parameter (A2) Name A2 Source and Destination Controller A2 Source Address Location A2 Destination Address Location A2 Scan Period User defined Parameter Name User defined Link Type User Defined Value Type User Defined Initial Value 2 sec HC900_## LOOP ## OP LOOP ## OP 2 sec HC900_## LOOP ## MODEIN LOOP ## MODEIN 2 sec GAIN HC900_## LOOP ## GAIN1 (One space between each element of the address) LOOP ## GAIN1 2 sec RESET HC900_## LOOP ## RESET1 LOOP ## RESET1 2 sec USRVARIABLE Variable 16 bit signed integer (INT2) 0

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Configuring Points Configure an Analog Point and Point Script

Objective

Given a Quick Builder project: Add, configure, and download an analog point Configure a point script on the analog point Verify analog point operations Verify script operation

Prerequisites

Knowledge of Configuration Studio Quick Builder navigation familiarization Quick Builder with an active server connection Knowledge Builder available HC900 Universal Modbus channel and controller communicating to a Experion PKS server Partition sheet with point parameter data

Introduction

In this lab, you will use Quick Builder to configure an analog point to communicate to a PID loop in an HC900 controller. Add an analog point to your Project Configure the parameters for the analog point Configure the point script on the analog point Download the point to the Experion PKS server database Log on to station Enable your assigned script engine Verify the operation of the analog point for real field values Verify script operation

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Configuring Points Configure an Analog Point and Point Script Procedure

Perform the following procedures in Quick Builder.


Step Configure an Analog point 1 Login to Windows with Student User if not already logged in. Action

ATTENTION Refer your partition sheet for password details.

2 3

Open Configuration Studio. Connect to your System. ATTENTION Refer to the partition sheet for System Name

Click on the + icon beside the Servers object, and expand the Configuration Explorer tree.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Configuring Points Configure an Analog Point and Point Script Step 5 Action Click on the + icon beside the server to expand the Configuration Explorer tree.

ATTENTION Refer to partition sheet for your server Alias.

Click on Control Strategy.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Configuring Points Configure an Analog Point and Point Script Step 7 Action Click on Build Points in the SCADA Control section.

TIP Quick Builder application window will open displaying the Point configuration page.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Configuring Points Configure an Analog Point and Point Script Step 8 Click the Action button in the toolbar and select Analog Point from the Type list box.

Enter the Point Name, from your partition sheet, located at the beginning of this lab. (You might want to remove the partition sheet and keep it handy for the remainder of this exercise.) Click OK.

ATTENTION A Point Name: Must be unique Can contain up to 40 characters with at least one alpha character Cannot contain spaces, tabs, or any of the following special characters: (.), (,), (/), (\), (<), (>), (), (), (*), (;),(|),(:),(?); Is not case-sensitive, but does appear in upper and lowercase in Quick Builder and Station.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Configuring Points Configure an Analog Point and Point Script Step 9 Action In the Main tab, enter the Description from your partition sheet.

ATTENTION Point parameters are taken from your partition sheet. Point Descriptions can be 132 characters maximum, including spaces. Selecting any other data entry box saves the previously entered data. This is true for all the data entry boxes in Quick Builder.

10

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Configuring Points Configure an Analog Point and Point Script Step 10 Action Enter the Parent Asset from your partition sheet.

11

Click the

(PV Source Address) button to open Address Builder.

12

Click the Address Type arrow and select Controller.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11

Configuring Points Configure an Analog Point and Point Script Step 13 Action Click the Controller arrow, and select the Controller built in the previous lab. The controller name is also specified on your partition sheet.

12

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Configuring Points Configure an Analog Point and Point Script Step 14 Action Enter the PV Source Address Location from your partition sheet in the Address field. Click OK to save the data to the PV Source box and close the Address Builder.

ATTENTION The Address parameter syntax and format varies from one controller type to another. Knowledge Builder contains specific information for the various controllers that can be connected to the Experion PKS server.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

13

Configuring Points Configure an Analog Point and Point Script Step 15 Action Click the PV Scan Period arrow and select the PV Scan Period (the frequency that the server scans the controller for the parameter value) from your partition sheet.

ATTENTION You can select scan periods of 1 to 3600 seconds.

16

Enter the Engineering Units, 100% Range Value, and 0% Range Value, Drift Deadband from your partition sheet.

ATTENTION Drift deadband specifies the percentage change in a parameter's value that is significant enough to require processing. Drift deadband eliminates unnecessary processing of analog point parameters, and therefore, reduces system load. The deadband value is expressed as a percentage of the point range.

17

Accept the defaults for the remaining parameters.

ATTENTION PV and Action Algos are covered in a later lab

14

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Configuring Points Configure an Analog Point and Point Script Step 18 Action Verify the Scanning Enabled checkbox is selected. This checkbox causes the Server to start updating the database, from the controller registers, as soon as the point is downloaded.

Verify the Clamp PV checkbox is selected.

ATTENTION For Analog points, server-wide PV Clamp limits can be configured in the Point Processing tab in the Message & Point Processing page. (In Station application click Configure > Alarm Event Management > Message and Point Processing)

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

15

Configuring Points Configure an Analog Point and Point Script Step 19 Action Click the Display tab and enter the Group and Trend data from your partition sheet in the appropriate fields.

ATTENTION A Group is identified by an integer between 1 and 16,000. Each group has 8 slots or positions. A Trend is identified by an integer between 1 and 3000. Each Trend has 32 positions.

16

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Configuring Points Configure an Analog Point and Point Script Step 20 Action Click the Alarms tab to specify the alarm settings for the point. Click the Alarm Type drop-down arrow and select the alarm type as listed on your partition sheet. Click the Priority arrow and select the priority as listed on your partition sheet. Enter the Limit for each Alarm Type as specified in your partition sheet. Continue selecting data for the remaining alarm types and priorities as listed on your partition sheet.

ATTENTION The Alarms tab specifies the characteristics of up to eight alarms, which an analog point can generate. Only four alarms are being used in this lab. Sub-priority ranges from 15 (highest) to 1 (lowest) and defines relative priority within Urgent, High, and Low categories. A default zero (0) indicates that sub priority is not being used.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

17

Configuring Points Configure an Analog Point and Point Script Step 21 Action Click the Control tab to define the control-related parameters for the point. Enter Setpoint (SP) Source Address and Dest Address from your partition sheet. Click the Scan Period (secs) arrow and select 2.

ATTENTION Enter the full address in the Source and Dest address button and use Address Builder fields, or click the to enter the addresses as shown below.

18

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Configuring Points Configure an Analog Point and Point Script Step 22 Action Enter the Output (OP) Source Address and Dest Address from your partition sheet. Click the Scan Period (secs) arrow and select 2.

23

Enter the Mode (MD) Source Address and Dest Address from your partition sheet. Set the Scan Period at 2 seconds.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

19

Configuring Points Configure an Analog Point and Point Script Step 24 Action Enter the remaining parameter values as shown below.

ATTENTION If the Disable mode checking on output checkbox is selected, an operator can change the OP value regardless of the points mode. Otherwise the server checks the point mode before allowing an operator to change the output value.

20

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Configuring Points Configure an Analog Point and Point Script Step 25 Action Click the Auxiliary tab to map up to four auxilary parameters for this point (applicable only to Analog points). These auxiliary parameters can be used to read (Source) additional data from and write (Destination) additional data to the controller. For example, mapping to tuning constants for a PID loop. We will use two for Gain and Reset.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

21

Configuring Points Configure an Analog Point and Point Script Step 26 Action Enter the Parameter Name, Source Address, Destination and Scan Period for A1 and A2 from your partition sheet. button and use Address Builder to enter the assigned addresses Click the similar to those shown below.

GAIN:

RESET:

22

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Configuring Points Configure an Analog Point and Point Script Step 27 Select PV in parameters list. Click Fast histroy checkbox and specify Collection Rate as 5 seconds Click Standard history checkbox and specify Collection Rate as 1 minutes Action Click the History tab to define the points history related properties.

ATTENTION The history type and the collection rates configured here are specific to this lab. You can specify these values as per your site requirements. A Gating Point is specified when you dont wish to collect history for a particular parameter on a continuous basis. Only when the specified Gating Point Status-type parameter is in the specified state is history collected Exception history type is introduced in Experion PKS R400. In this history, the value is stored only when there is a change in value. The data types such as string, double, time are supported by this history type. 28 Similarly select the Fast and Standard history types with collection rates of 5 seconds and 1 minute respectively for parameters SP, OP, A1 and A2

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

23

Configuring Points Configure an Analog Point and Point Script Step 29 Action Click the Scripts tab to attach scripts that run based on certain events taking place. Click Create New or Edit Existing Server Scripts to open the script editor window.

ATTENTION Scripts are optional additions to Points, which allow user-defined functionality to be added to the Experion PKS server.

30

Click the Event arrow and select OnAlarm. Click the Script Engine arrow and select Script Engine #. (your team number)

24

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Configuring Points Configure an Analog Point and Point Script Step 31 Enter the script as shown below : This script will be attached to your analog point when the point is downloaded. It generates an event whenever an unacknowledged alarm exists on your analog point. Action

ATTENTION Scripts do not need to be compiled. If the script does not run after you load this point, check for typing errors, correct any typing errors, and reload your point. Refer to the Server Scripting Reference in Knowledge Builder for extensive information on Experion PKS server scripting.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

25

Configuring Points Configure an Analog Point and Point Script Step 32 Action Click the Event arrow and select OnAcknowledge. Click the Script Engine arrow and select Script Engine #.

33

Enter the script as shown below. When an alarm is acknowledged on your analog point, the script will set the SP to a value of 50 if the point is in Low alarm. Otherwise the SP value will be adjusted to half of its original value.

Click OK when you are finished typing.

26

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Configuring Points Configure an Analog Point and Point Script Step 34 Action Click the User Defined tab to create parameters for the selected point.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

27

Configuring Points Configure an Analog Point and Point Script Step 35 Click Parameter name: Link type: Value type: Initial value: and enter the following parameter details: USRVARIABLE Variable 16 bit signed integer (INT2) 0 Action

Click the Update on Upload checkbox. This checkbox uploads the value, currently in the server, to Quick Builder. Keep Never download initial value to the server checkbox unchecked. If selected initial value is not downloaded to server database.

ATTENTION User-defined parameters are optional additional parameters created to add user-specified data storage in the server database. In this procedure, a numeric holds a number for use in scripts, graphics, reports, and so forth. This parameter is referred to as tagname.USRVARIABLE

28

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Configuring Points Configure an Analog Point and Point Script Step 36 Select USRVARIABLE in parameters list Select Fast history type and specify Collection rate as 5 seconds Select Standard history type and specify Collection rate as 1 minutes Action Click Histroy tab to specify history type for user defined parameter.

ATTENTION Observe that Exception history type is not available for user defined parameters.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

29

Configuring Points Configure an Analog Point and Point Script Step 37 Action Click the button in the toolbar menu to download the Analog Point to the Experion PKS server database. Verify that the Selected items only option is chosen. Verify that the Summary frame indicates the appropriate load item. Click OK.

38

30

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Configuring Points Configure an Analog Point and Point Script Step 39 After a successful load, click OK. The download Results (Successful/Errors) screen appears as shown. If there are any errors during the download, error files appear in the list box. Action

NOTE: If you have errors, double click the resulting error files to discover the problem, and then fix the problem and reload.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

31

Configuring Points Configure an Analog Point and Point Script Step 40 Action Verify that the Last Modified and Last Downloaded dates in the Main tab are updated.

32

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Configuring Points Configure an Analog Point and Point Script Step Verify operation of the Analog point 41 42 43 From the System Menu select System Configuration. Open your Static Station, if not already open. If not already at Mngr access, logon using mngr as the password. Action

44

Click on Script Engines under Server Scripting.

45

Click Manual Engines.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

33

Configuring Points Configure an Analog Point and Point Script Step 46 Action Click the Enabled checkbox next to your assigned script engine, Engine #.

ATTENTION If your script is loaded, engine status should change to Running after the engine is enabled.

47

Enter the tagname you created in the Command field. Press <F12> or click the button to open the Point Detail page for this tag.

48

Enter ANATESTXX in Go to Detail for and click OK

49

Verify the OnAlarm script: Change the Mode to MAN. Change the OP to 98. (Click the OP and enter 98.)

Wait for the PV HiHigh alarm, but do not acknowledge. 50 Click the flashing Alarm box at the lower edge of Station to open the Alarm Summary.

51

A PVHI and a PVHH alarm will be present in the Alarm Summary

34

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Configuring Points Configure an Analog Point and Point Script Step 52 Action To verify that the script created an event, navigate to the Event Summary. Select View > Events > Event Summary

There will be two events generated in the Event Summary with the description Operator You Have Problems. Two OnAlarm events occurred on the point AnatestXX: one event for the PVHI alarm and a second event for the PVHH alarm. Thus two events with the description Operator You Have Problems are generated in the Event Summary. If the events are not present, troubleshoot the script. Hints: View your Script Engine to see if it has run-time errors. Go back into Quick Builder and look for typing errors in your script. Look at the Server Log, log.txt from (C:\ProgramData\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Server\Data), to see run-time error details. After correcting the script, re-download the point and re-check its operation. 53 Return to the point detail page for AnatestXX (see step 44). Change the OP to 50 to bring the point out of alarm. Click the Alarm Acknowledge button on the point faceplate to acknowledge the alarms.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

35

Configuring Points Configure an Analog Point and Point Script Step 54 Verify the OnAcknowledge script: Change the mode (MD) to Auto. Change the setpoint (SP) to 190. Wait for the PV High alarm to appear. Click the Alarm Acknowledge button on the point faceplate. Action

Result: The SP value is set to 95, half its original value. If the SP value is not halved, troubleshoot the script. Hints: View your Script Engine to see if it has run-time errors. Go back into Quick Builder and look for typing errors in your script. Look at the Server Log, log.txt from (C:\Program Data\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Server\Data), to see run-time error details. After correcting the script, re-download the point and re-check its operation.

55

Verify the OnAcknowledge script: Result: The SP value is set to 50 which will bring the point out of low alarm. If the SP value is not set to 50, troubleshoot the script. Hints: View your Script Engine to see if it has run-time errors. Go back into Quick Builder and look for typing errors in your script. Look at the Server Log, log.txt from (C:\Program Data\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Server\Data), to see run-time error details. After correcting the script, re-download the point and re-check its operation. Change the setpoint (SP) to 10. Wait for the PV Low alarm to appear. Click the Alarm Acknowledge button on the point faceplate.

56

Click

and enter ## to call up Group ##.

Verify that ANATEST## is in position 1.

36

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Configuring Points Configure an Analog Point and Point Script Step 57 Click the Auxiliary tab. Change the SP to 150. Experiment with different tuning constants. Return the GAIN to 0.7 and the RESET to 0.1. Action Double-click the Tagname to call up the Detail display

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

37

Configuring Points Configure an Analog Point and Point Script

This page was intentionally left blank.

38

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Configuring Points Configure a Status Point and Point Script

Configure a Status Point and Point Script


Practice
Student Partition sheet Team ## Windows Login User Password System Name Server Alias Point name (Status Point) Enterprise Model Item Name Description Parent Asset PV Source Address Controller Name PV Source Address Location PV Scan Period Number of States State 1 Descriptor State 0 Descriptor Group Number Position in Group Trend Number Position in Trend OFF Alarm Checked E02ESV##_System E02ESV##_Server STATEST## STATEST##_Item Pump ## Start/Stop Pumps## HC900_## MATH_VAR ## VALUE (One space between each element of the address) 2 sec 2 ON OFF ## 2 ## 2 Priority HC900_## MATH_VAR ## VALUE (One space between each element of the address) MATH_VAR ## VALUE 2 sec 2 Latched 0 1 EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.
39

Student

Urgent

OP Source and Destination Controller OP Source Address Location OP Destination Address Location OP Scan Period Number of Output States Pulse Width OP State 0 OP State 1 11/5/2010

Configuring Points Configure a Status Point and Point Script

Student Partition sheet Team ## User Defined Parameter Name User Defined Link Type User Defined Value Type User Defined Initial Value User Defined History Type COUNT Variable 16 bit signed integer (INT2) 0 Fast

40

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Configuring Points Configure a Status Point and Point Script

Objective

Given a Quick Builder project:

Add, configure, and download a status point and point script Verify the operation of a status point

Prerequisites

Knowledge of Configuration Studio. Quick Builder navigation familiarization Configuration Studio with an active server connection Knowledge Builder available HC900 Universal Modbus channel and controller communicating to an Experion PKS server Partition sheet with point parameter data

Introduction

In this lab, you will use Quick Builder to configure a status point to communicate to a device control block in the HC900 controller. Add a status point to your project. Configure parameters for the status point from your partition sheet. Configure a point script on the status point. Download the point to an Experion PKS server. Log on to station. Verify the operation of the status point for real field values.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

41

Configuring Points Configure a Status Point and Point Script Procedure

Perform the following procedures in Quick Builder:


Step Configure a Status point 1 Login to Windows with Student User if not already logged in. Action

ATTENTION Refer your partition sheet for password details.

2 3

Open Configuration Studio. Connect to your System. ATTENTION Refer to your partition sheet for details about the System Name

Click on the + icon, beside the Servers object, to expand the Configuration Explorer tree.

42

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Configuring Points Configure a Status Point and Point Script Step 5 Action Click on the + icon, beside the server in the System hierarchy, to expand the Server Configuration Explorer tree.

ATTENTION Refer to the partition sheet for your server Alias.

Click on Control Strategy.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

43

Configuring Points Configure a Status Point and Point Script Step 7 Action Click on Build Points in the SCADA Control section.

TIP The Quick Builder application window will open displaying the Points configuration page.

44

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Configuring Points Configure a Status Point and Point Script Step 8 Click the Click OK. Action button and select Status Point from the Type list box.

Enter the Point Name in the Use Name field (from your partition sheet).

ATTENTION Point naming conventions are the same for all types of points.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

45

Configuring Points Configure a Status Point and Point Script Step 9 Click the Main tab. Enter the Description and Parent Asset from your partition sheet. Action

10

Enter the PV Source Address from your partition sheet, using the Address Builder. Click (PV Source Address button) to open the Address Builder.

46

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Configuring Points Configure a Status Point and Point Script Step 11 Action Click the Address Type arrow and select Controller. Enter the Controller Name and Location from your partition sheet in the appropriate fields. This will be similar to the entries shown below. Click OK.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

47

Configuring Points Configure a Status Point and Point Script Step 12 Set the PV Scan Period to 2 seconds. Set the Number of States to 2. Action

48

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Configuring Points Configure a Status Point and Point Script Step 13 Action Enter ON for State 1 and OFF for State 0 as shown below:

ATTENTION A state descriptor can have a maximum of eight characters (no spaces). State Descriptors are normally used for operations and need to reflect the states of the device in question.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

49

Configuring Points Configure a Status Point and Point Script Step 14 Action Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters.

15

Click the Display tab. Enter the Group and Trend data from your partition sheet into the appropriate fields. Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters.

50

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Configuring Points Configure a Status Point and Point Script Step 16 Click the Alarms tab. Click the OFF Alarm checkbox. Click the OFF Alarm Priority arrow and select Urgent. Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters. Action

ATTENTION External Change Alarms checkboxes: If selected, an alarm is raised if the parameter changes without the change being initiated from the server. Re-alarm on state transition checkbox: If selected, an alarm is raised whenever the PV changes to another alarm state. For example, if you configure States 7 and 8 as alarm states, an alarm is raised if the PV changes to State 7, and another alarm is raised if the state changes to State 8.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

51

Configuring Points Configure a Status Point and Point Script Step 17 Action Click the Control tab to define the control-related parameters for the point. Enter the OP Source Address and Destination Address from your partition sheet in the appropriate fields. Set the OP Scan Period (secs) to 2. Set the Normal Mode to MAN. Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters.

18

Click History tab Select PV in the Parameters list Select Fast history type and specify Collection Rate as 5 seconds Select Standard history type and specify Collection Rate as 1 minutes

52

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Configuring Points Configure a Status Point and Point Script Step 19 Click Add Action Click the User Defined tab to create your own parameters for the selected point.

20

Enter the Parameter name, Link type, Value type and Initial value from your partition sheet in the appropriate fields.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

53

Configuring Points Configure a Status Point and Point Script Step 21 Click Histroy tab Select user defined parameter Count in parameter list Select Fast history type and specify Collection Rate as 5 seconds Action

22

Click the Scripts tab. Click Create New or Edit Existing Server Scripts.

54

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Configuring Points Configure a Status Point and Point Script Step 23 Action Click the Event arrow and select the OnChange event for the PV. Click the Script Engine arrow and select Script Engine #. (# is your Team number.) Type the script as shown: If StrComp (EventInfo.value, ON, vbTextCompare) = 0 Then ParamValue (Statest##.Count) = ParamValue (Statest##.Count) + 1 End If Click OK.

ATTENTION The script window does not display the entire script without scrolling. This script requires that the state descriptor for your point Statest## be ON (case sensitive).

24

Click the

button to download the Status Point to the Experion PKS database.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

55

Configuring Points Configure a Status Point and Point Script Step 25 Click the Selected items only option. Verify that the Summary frame indicates the appropriate load item. Click OK. Action

The download Results (Successful/Errors) screen appears as shown. If there are any errors during the download, error files appear in the list box. Double-click to open, fix the error files and reload.

Click OK.

56

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Configuring Points Configure a Status Point and Point Script Step 26 Action Verify that the Last Modified and Last Downloaded dates in the Main tab are updated.

Verify operation of Status point 27 28 29 Open Station, if not already open. Logon as mngr. Ensure that your assigned Script Engine, Engine #, is Enabled. (Configure -> Server Scripting -> Script Engines. Click the Manual Engines tab) Type the Tagname of your status point in the Command field. Press <F12> or click the button to open the Point Details page for this tag.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

57

Configuring Points Configure a Status Point and Point Script Step 30 Enter name of the point and click OK Action

31

Change OP to ON. Verify that the PV changes to ON. Change OP to OFF. Verify that the PV follows. Repeat the ON-OFF cycle.

32 33 34

Verify the Script: Return to Quick Builder and select your Status Point. Click the Click OK. Upload button (with your Status Point selected).

Verify that the Summary frame references 1Status Point.

58

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Configuring Points Configure a Status Point and Point Script Step 35 Click OK after the successful upload. Action

36

Click the User Defined tab for your status point, Verify that the Value or Reference is 2 or more; resulting from the ON-OFF cycles you performed.

ATTENTION If the Value is not 2 or greater, verify your script typing against the example. Fix any errors and re-download the status point

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

59

Configuring Points Configure a Status Point and Point Script

Sample File Listings PV OnChange Sample script file If StrComp(EventInfo.value, "ON", vbTextCompare) = 0 Then paramValue("STATEST##.Count") = ParamValue("STATEST##.Count") + 1 End If NOTE: The PV changing state triggers this script. It tracks the number of times the PV goes to ON, and records the number in the User Defined parameter Count. The script requires that the point state descriptor enumeration be ON (case sensitive).

60

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Describe Quick Builder Functionality

Quick Builder Functionality Describe Quick Builder Functionality

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Introduction In this lesson you will learn more of the Quick Builder functions At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Streamline how you configure similar points Explain the download functions Change the layout of columns in the summary pane Filter points by point type

Honeywell

Quick Builder Functionality Describe Quick Builder Functionality

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Introduction Quick Builder Functions


Configuration of similar points Using Quick Builder Using Microsoft Excel Download Functionality Download summary Download Deletions checkbox Rebuild Scan Tables checkbox Change/Arrange columns in summary pane Filtering and sorting large project files

Honeywell

Quick Builder Functionality Describe Quick Builder Functionality

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Configuring Similar Points Download Functionality Changing the Summary Pane View

Honeywell

Quick Builder Functionality Describe Quick Builder Functionality

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configuration of Similar Points Using Quick Builder


Select point to be template Edit > Duplicate Items

Honeywell

Quick Builder Functionality Describe Quick Builder Functionality

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configuration of Similar Points Using Quick Builder In duplicate form:


Enter the number of points to configure

Honeywell

Use either the existing name or a new name as the base

Add incremental identifier and/or suffix

Verify the results of the setup; Click OK

Quick Builder Functionality Describe Quick Builder Functionality

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configuration of Similar Points Using Quick Builder


Group edit the points Select all points to be group edited Input shared parameters all selected points will be updated from the entries

Honeywell

Note: Parameters in white are common, parameters in gray are not common; can edit both

Quick Builder Functionality Describe Quick Builder Functionality

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configuration of Similar Points Using Microsoft Excel


Select point to be template Edit > Copy Items

Honeywell

Quick Builder Functionality Describe Quick Builder Functionality

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configuration of Similar Points Using Microsoft Excel


In Excel Select top left cell Select Paste

Honeywell

Quick Builder Functionality Describe Quick Builder Functionality

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configuration of Similar Points Using Microsoft Excel


Parameter label header inserted in row 1 Point parameters inserted in row 2

Honeywell

Quick Builder Functionality Describe Quick Builder Functionality

10

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configuration of Similar Points Using Microsoft Excel


Copy-paste in Excel to add as many points as required Edit common and unique parameters in Excel

Honeywell

Quick Builder Functionality Describe Quick Builder Functionality

11

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configuration of Similar Points Using Microsoft Excel


Select the new points and the header Select Copy

Honeywell

Quick Builder Functionality Describe Quick Builder Functionality

12

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configuration of Similar Points Using Microsoft Excel


Return to Quick Builder Edit > Paste Items

Honeywell

Quick Builder Functionality Describe Quick Builder Functionality

13

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 1: Configure Similar Points To build similar SCADA points, you can use:
A) Enterprise Model Builder and Microsoft Excel B) HMIWeb Display Builder and Microsoft Excel C) Quick Builder and Microsoft Excel

Honeywell

Yes! The correct answer is 'C'. To build No. The correct answer is 'C'. To build The Your answer: answer is 'C'. To build No. The answer is: Yes! The correct is: Thecorrectcorrect answer is 'C'. To build correct answer Your answer: similar must answer the question before You must answer you can useQuick similarSCADA points, you can usebefore SCADA points, Quick You You -Click anywhere to continue YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue Incorrect--answeredthisquestioncompletely Correct answerMicrosoft to continue not -Click thisthiscorrectly! question YoudidBuilderClickanywhere Excel. Correct answerMicrosoft Excel. didBuilderand anywhere to continue You Click anywhere to completely not continuing correctly! and this continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit

Clear

Quick Builder Functionality Describe Quick Builder Functionality

14

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Configuring Similar Points Download Functionality Changing the Summary Pane View

Honeywell

Quick Builder Functionality Describe Quick Builder Functionality

15

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Download Functionality Download Summary


Verify that Quick Builder is downloading what you want
Selected items

Honeywell

Load entire server database Load all modified items Verify before selecting OK; If not OK, cancel and re-select items
Quick Builder Functionality Describe Quick Builder Functionality

16

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Download Functionality Download Deletions checkbox


Normally checked Clears items in the Recycle bin from Project and from Server on any download

Honeywell

Quick Builder Functionality Describe Quick Builder Functionality

17

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Download Functionality Rebuild Scan Tables


Applies to Channels, Controllers, and Points Function to try to add new items to existing scan packets If not checked, saves time if errors in configuration encountered Can immediately fix errors -- no waiting When errors fixed, must load with box checked OK to always leave checked

Honeywell

Quick Builder Functionality Describe Quick Builder Functionality

18

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 2: Download Functionality

Honeywell

When downloading in Quick Builder, the rebuild scan tables checkbox does NOT apply to:
A) Channels B) Points C) Controllers D) Stations

Yes! The correct answer is 'D'. The rebuild No. The correct answer is 'D'. The rebuild The correctansweranswer is 'D'. The rebuild Yourcorrectcorrectanswer is 'D'. The rebuild Yes! The correct is: No. The answer is: The answer: Your answer: scanmust answer thedoesnot apply to scantables function question before tables function You must answer does not apply to You not Click this toquestion before YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue Incorrect answer anywhere to continue Correct -Click anywhere to continue stations but-Clickanywhere to continue Youdid You --answeredthis channels, points Correct answer anywhere to completely did You it applies question completely not Click this to correctly! stations butit appliesthis channels, points continuing correctly! continuing and controllers. and controllers. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit

Clear

Quick Builder Functionality Describe Quick Builder Functionality

19

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Configuring Similar Points Download Functionality Changing the Summary Pane View

Honeywell

Quick Builder Functionality Describe Quick Builder Functionality

20

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

10

Change/Arrange Columns View > Change/Arrange Columns

Honeywell

Quick Builder Functionality Describe Quick Builder Functionality

21

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Change/Arrange Columns Result

Honeywell

Quick Builder Functionality Describe Quick Builder Functionality

22

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

11

Filtering and Sorting Large Project Files View > Filter


Filter by point type

Honeywell

Filter by parameter

Quick Builder Functionality Describe Quick Builder Functionality

23

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Filtering and Sorting Large Project Files Result

Honeywell

Quick Builder Functionality Describe Quick Builder Functionality

24

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

12

Question 3: Changing the Summary Pane View

Honeywell

In Quick Builder, you can show fields in a particular order by going to:
A) View > Change/Arrange columns B) View > Filter C) View > Log files D) View > Refresh

The correct answer is: Yourcorrect answer is: Youranswer: answer: The The correct answer is 'A'. Fields can be Yes! The correct answer is 'A'. Fields can be No. The correct answer is 'A'. Fields can be Yes! The correct answer question before be No. You must answer the is 'A'. Fields can You not -Click anywhere to completely answer question arrangedmust-Clickanywhere to continue YouIncorrectanswered thequestionbybefore Incorrect answer anywhere to continue Correct any particular order continue arrangedin --answeredthis order by selecting in Youdid You any particular correctly!selecting did You Click anywhere to continue not Click thisquestion completely Correct answerthisthis correctly! continuing continuing the Change/Arrange columns item from the the Change/Arrange columns item from the View menu. View menu. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit

Clear

Quick Builder Functionality Describe Quick Builder Functionality

25

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Summary Quick Builder Functions


Configuration of similar points Using Quick Builder Using Microsoft Excel Download Functionality Download summary Download Deletions checkbox Rebuild Scan Tables checkbox Change/Arrange columns in summary pane Filtering and sorting large project files

Honeywell

Quick Builder Functionality Describe Quick Builder Functionality

26

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

13

Conclusion Describe Quick Builder Functionality

Honeywell

Completion Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material


Quick Builder Functionality Describe Quick Builder Functionality

27

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Quick Builder Functionality Describe Quick Builder Functionality

28

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

14

Topic: Alarm Setup in Server


Contents
Configure Server Wide Alarm Properties ..............................................................................................3

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

This page was intentionally left blank.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarm Setup in Server Configure Server Wide Alarm Properties

Configure Server Wide Alarm Properties


Student Partition sheet Team ## Windows Login User Password System Name Server Alias Name Server Description Server Abbreviation Server Node Name Network Type Sample Analog Point E02ESV##_System E02ESV##_Server Experion PKS Server ESV## E02ESV## SINGLE/FTE ANATEST## Student

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Alarm Setup in Server Configure Server Wide Alarm Properties

This page was intentionally left blank.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarm Setup in Server Configure Server Wide Alarm Properties

Practice
Prerequisites

Station Navigation Familiarization Knowledge Builder Available.

Introduction

In this lab, you will use Station to configure server-wide alarm properties.

Navigate to the server-wide alarm configuration displays in Station. Modify the alarm colors and other parameters. Verify the settings in the Experion PKS server.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Alarm Setup in Server Configure Server Wide Alarm Properties Procedure

Perform the following procedures in Station. (Note that Configuration Studio System Configuration screens are also available in Station. In normal practice, Configuration Studio would be used for configuration while verification would be done in Station. We are working only in Station here to expedite the lab exercise.)
Step Configure Alarm Appearance for all Stations 1 Login to Windows with Student User if not already logged in. Action

ATTENTION Refer your partition sheet for password details.

2 3 4

Open your Station, if not already open. Change your access level to Mngr. Click the System Menu button or press <F1> to open the System Menu.

Click System Configuration (located at the lower right area of the Menu).

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarm Setup in Server Configure Server Wide Alarm Properties Step 6 Action Click Server Wide Settings in the resulting System Configuration Menu.

ATTENTION Server wide Alarm settings can also be done through Configuration Studio > Alarms and Event Management> Configure Alarm Processing

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Alarm Setup in Server Configure Server Wide Alarm Properties Step 7 Click the Summary Displays tab. Action

Click the Alarm Processing hyperlink, to open the Alarm Configuration window. Click on Alarm Appearance Tab.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarm Setup in Server Configure Server Wide Alarm Properties Step 9 Action Change the Urgent priority alarm Color to Bright Green.

Click the High priority pull down and change the color to Dark Blue.

10 11

Call up the point ANATEST## in Station. Change the OP (MAN mode) of ANATEST## to 98 to generate alarms. This trips a PVHI alarm with High priority and a PVHH alarm with Urgent priority.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Alarm Setup in Server Configure Server Wide Alarm Properties Step 12 Action Select View > Alarms to open the Alarm summary display.

TIP Clicking on the Alarm indicator at the bottom will also open the alarm summary page.

13

The alarm colors displayed in the summary are now the modified colors.

Click the

icon twice to return to the Alarm Colors configuration page.

10

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarm Setup in Server Configure Server Wide Alarm Properties Step 14 Action Click the Use these colors for points on displays checkbox to display the modified colors in the Alarm Status Bar and the Point Detail, Group and Custom displays.

15

Click the Restore Defaults button to return the alarm color settings to the system default colors. De-select the checkbox for the option Use these colors for points on displays

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11

Alarm Setup in Server Configure Server Wide Alarm Properties Step Action

Configure Alarm Processing options for all Stations Connected to a Server 16 Click the Alarm Processing tab.

17

Enter 5 in the Audible active time. This option indicates that when an alarm occurs it will be audible for a period of 5 seconds, unless the operator silences the alarm by acknowledging it before the 5 seconds have passed.

ATTENTION With the above configuration, if the PC speaker/Sound card/Relay board for a particular station is enabled and an alarm occurs in the system, then the audible alarm sounds for 5 seconds.

12

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarm Setup in Server Configure Server Wide Alarm Properties Step 18 Enter 15 in the Audible re-alarm time. Action

ATTENTION With the above configuration, until the annunciator is silenced or the alarm acknowledged, the alarm repeats the following cycle: the alarm sounds for 5 seconds (as configured in the previous step), waits for 15 seconds before sounding again for 5 seconds (as configured here).

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

13

Alarm Setup in Server Configure Server Wide Alarm Properties Step 19 Open Server-Wide Settings On Summary Displays Tab, click the Alarm line shows: arrow and select Highest priority, Newest unacknowledged, Process Alarm. Action

ATTENTION Selecting these options in the Alarm Line Configuration, displays the latest, highest priority, unacknowledged Process Alarm, in the alarm line as shown below. Instead of the Process Alarm, if the user selects Any Alarm from the drop down menu, the Alarm Line will consider Process and System Alarms.

20

On Server Wide Settings Page, on Summary Displays Tab, click the Full page acknowledgement down arrow and select Supv. This sets the minimum security level to supervisor to acknowledge a full page of alarms.

14

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarm Setup in Server Configure Server Wide Alarm Properties Step 21 22 Action Press <F3> to open the Alarm Summary page. Type bye in the Command Zone and press ENTER. This changes your access level to Oper.

23

Since the Full-page acknowledgement has been set to Supv, note that the Acknowledge Page button in the Alarm Summary page is unavailable (dimmed).

ATTENTION With the Full Page Alarm Acknowledgement button disabled, the operator can only acknowledge one alarm at a time. 24 Click Configure > System Hardware > Server Wide Settings. Click the Summary Displays tab and return the Full page acknowledgement to Oper (mngr level required to do this change).

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

15

Alarm Setup in Server Configure Server Wide Alarm Properties Step Action

Configure Security Settings for all Stations Connected to a Server 25 Click the Security tab.

26

Minimum Security Level Required This sets the minimum access level required to enable or disable channels, controllers, points and printers.

16

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarm Setup in Server Configure Server Wide Alarm Properties Step 27 Click on mngr. Action tab of Minimum security level required and change the security level to

ATTENTION Change your Stations access level to mngr. (Mngr access level is required in station for this step.)

28

Change the station access level back to Operator.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

17

Alarm Setup in Server Configure Server Wide Alarm Properties Step 29 Action Click on Configure > System Hardware > Channels.

18

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarm Setup in Server Configure Server Wide Alarm Properties Step 30 Action Click on the Channel configured for the HC900 controller.

ATTENTION The name of the channel may differ from the one shown in the figure above.

31

Click on the Status Details tab.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

19

Alarm Setup in Server Configure Server Wide Alarm Properties Step 32 Click to Disable the Channel. Action

ATTENTION An error message will occur stating Higher security level required.

20

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarm Setup in Server Configure Server Wide Alarm Properties Step 33 Action Click on Configure > System Hardware > Server Wide Settings.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

21

Alarm Setup in Server Configure Server Wide Alarm Properties Step 34 Click on the Security tab. Change the Minimum security level back to Operator (Before you can make this change you will need to change the access level on Station to mngr). Action

22

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarm Setup in Server Configure Server Wide Alarm Properties Step 35 36 Change access level in Station to Oper. Click Configure > System Hardware > Channels. Click on the Channel configured for the HC900 controller. Action

Click on Status Details.

Click on the Status options to uncheck the Enable box.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

23

Alarm Setup in Server Configure Server Wide Alarm Properties Step 37 The channel has been disabled. Action Click View > System Status > Channels.

ATTENTION Re-enable the channel before exiting this page.

24

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarm Setup in Server Configure Server Wide Alarm Properties Step Configure Alarm Point Processing 38 While logged on at the Mngr level, select Configure > Alarm Event Management > Alarms in the Station menu. Action

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

25

Alarm Setup in Server Configure Server Wide Alarm Properties Step 39 Action Under this, on the Alarm Processing tab, click to clear the Alarms enabled serverwide checkbox. This disables all alarms for the server.

40

Press <F3> to open the Alarm Summary page. All the alarm status indications in the Alarm Summary are dimmed.

26

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarm Setup in Server Configure Server Wide Alarm Properties Step 41 Action Click the Acknowledge Page button to acknowledge all the alarms on the Summary page. All alarms, whether returned to normal state or not, are acknowledged and erased from the Alarm Summary.

42

Page back and re-check the Alarms enabled server-wide checkbox.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

27

Alarm Setup in Server Configure Server Wide Alarm Properties Step Configure External Alarm Notification 43 Select Configure > Alarm Event Management > Alarms in the Station menu. Select the Alarm Forwarding Tab. Action

Click the Low checkbox. Click the

button to open the Point Browser window.

The point browser window appears. Click on show filter

28

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarm Setup in Server Configure Server Wide Alarm Properties Step 44 Action Scroll the Description list and select the asset AQ_item.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

29

Alarm Setup in Server Configure Server Wide Alarm Properties Step 45 Select LOWALARM##. Click Apply. Click Close. Action

46

Click the Parameter arrow and select OP from the list.

30

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarm Setup in Server Configure Server Wide Alarm Properties Step 47 Action Change the OP (MAN mode) of ANATEST## to 10 to generate a PV Low alarm which is configured to be low priority.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

31

Alarm Setup in Server Configure Server Wide Alarm Properties Step 48 Action Call up the Point Detail for LOWALARM## and verify the PV changed to ON. LOWALARM## is now configured to monitor the Server low alarms. If its OP were mapped to a controller register (wired to an annunciator), that annunciator would signify Low alarms. ATTENTION LOWALARM## has been configured to generate an urgent priority alarm when in the ON state.

32

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarm Setup in Server Configure Server Wide Alarm Properties Step 49 Action Press the <F4> key to Silence any annunciation in the system. Note that the Silence function causes LOWALARM## to return to the 0 State. ATTENTION Silence or any Acknowledge of any alarm will cause all configured external alarm points to return to the zero state.

50

Return to the Alarms page, click on Alarm Processing Tab. Click to select the Unanswered alarms enabled checkbox. Click the Unanswered alarms assignable asset arrow and select /Assets/UNACK_item. Enter 00:02:00 in the Alarm Acknowledgement period field for 2 minutes.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

33

Alarm Setup in Server Configure Server Wide Alarm Properties Step 51 Action Change ANATEST##.OP to 50 to clear the previous alarm and then change it back to 10 to create the PV Low, low priority, alarm. Press <F3> to open the Alarm Summary. Wait two minutes for the PVLO alarm to appear in the UNACK_Item asset with Urgent priority and the description, ALARM UNANSWERED.

Acknowledge the page.

ATTENTION Unanswered alarms display in the Summary with Unacknowledged, but return to normal status. They clear on acknowledgement.

52

Return to the Alarms Page. Click the Alarm Processing tab.

34

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarm Setup in Server Configure Server Wide Alarm Properties Step 53 Action Uncheck the Unanswered alarms enabled checkbox.

54

Click the Alarm Priority Elevation enabled checkbox. Enter 00:02:00 in Low to High. Enter 00:02:00 in High to Urgent.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

35

Alarm Setup in Server Configure Server Wide Alarm Properties Step 55 Action Change ANATEST##.OP to 50 to clear the previous alarm, then change it back to 10 to create the PV Low, low priority alarm. Wait four minutes. Select View > Events >Event Summary.

The Event Summary page displays events that list the entries for alarm priorities raised from Low to High or High to Urgent.

56

Press <F3> to browse to the Alarm Summary page. The alarm condition of PVLO will not change. The alarm priorities for the PVLO alarms are raised from Low to High and then from High to Urgent priority.

36

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarm Setup in Server Configure Server Wide Alarm Properties Step 57 Action Return to Alarm Processing tab and clear the Alarm Priority Elevation enabled checkbox.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

37

Alarm Setup in Server Configure Server Wide Alarm Properties

This page was intentionally left blank.

38

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Describe Operator-Based Security

Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Introduction

Honeywell

In this lesson, you will learn about Experion PKS operator-based security At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Describe how security, control levels, and asset assignments limit operator access Explain the security features in the operator sign on procedure Describe integrated accounts and how they are administered

Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Scope of Responsibility Common Security Model Signing On Integrated Accounts

Honeywell

Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Security Levels

Honeywell

Experion PKS provides configurable security levels, control levels and asset assignments for operator profiles Up to six security levels limit operator access to Experion PKS functions:
Level 1 - View Only Level 2 - Ack Only: View Only with alarm acknowledge Level 3 - Oper: Level 2 plus control of field parameters Level 4 - Supv: Level 3 plus field parameters of level 4; standard system configuration such as reports Level 5 - Engr: Level 4 plus user configured Level 5 field parameters Level 6 Mngr: Unlimited access

Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Control Levels limit operator control of individual points

Honeywell

Operator sign-on/sign-off security provides up to 255 control levels, to


Control actions to a given point are only allowed if the control level configured in the operator profile exceeds the level assigned to the point Applies to all access levels including manager

Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Assets Asset assignments limit operator access to:


Points Alarms Reports Graphics

Honeywell

Asset profiles can be created:


Plant assets enabled or disabled for control around configurable time and date criteria

Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Time Access Operator can be granted day and time wise access using the Time access tab in Operator configuration

Honeywell

Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Station Access

Honeywell

Operator can be granted or denied access to a Station using the Station access tab in Operator configuration

Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 1: Scope of Responsibility Which statement is false? The control level:


A) Allows operator control restrictions for individual points B) Applies only to operator based security C) Does not apply to the manager level D) Is a number between 0 and 255

Honeywell

The The The false statementis 'C'. Managers are Yourcorrect answer is: is 'C'. 'C'. Managers given No.Yes!The false statement 'C'.Managers are are Yes! false Yourcorrect statement answer: The answer: statement No. Thefalseanswer is: is is Managers are given the highest level of security securitybeforerestricted given the highest level of but theybut they You the level of security security are theIncorrect-answered thequestioncompletely are given must-Click anywherebut theybut restricted highest answer this questioncontinue You You answer the ofcorrectly! are must answer questionbefore YouIncorrectby Clickanywhereto continuethey are Correct highest anywhere to continue not answer level question completely Click control Correct -answeredthis level continue Youdidrestricted continuing correctly! didrestrictedby anywhereto settings. You bycontrol level settings. not -Click this control this level settings. by control to level continuing settings. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
9

Clear

Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Scope of Responsibility Common Security Model Signing On Integrated Accounts

Honeywell

Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

10

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Experion Security Roles

Honeywell

Specific set of privileges, permissions, and policies can be assigned on a user-by-user basis Roles are used to define sets of users that have common responsibilities and thus common security needs In Experion PKS R400 the roles are implemented using Windows Groups Product Administrator Roles that carry forward from R3xx:
Operator Engineer Supervisor Continuous Control Intimate user ER Admin - Ack View-Only user - View-Only user - Program - Point Builder

Roles discontinued from prior releases:

Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

11

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Role Descriptions
Used to define the set of operations a user is allowed to perform All operations within Experion are enabled by role Roles are evolving to be discrete rather than hierarchical
Role
Windows Administr ator

Honeywell
Description
Configure and maintain the Operating System and network: software installation, network settings, account creation and maintenance Product Administers Honeywell Experion Administr software: SQL administration, HCI and ator other component configuration Engineering functions: display creation Engineer and deployment, CAB block development, point definition Supervisor Privileged operational activities Operator Normal operational activities Ack View- View privilege plus acknowledge Only user alarms View-Only View privilege user User No Experion privilege Non-interactive accounts that may be used for the identity of services that do Server/Ser not fit with Microsofts built-in vice accounts and servers/COM servers that need an identity to RunAs
12
EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

R400 Role Equivalence


This table here provides the role equivalence within various Experion applications set by default in R400
Role System Administrator Product Administrator Engineer Supervisor Operator Ack View-only User View-Only user User Server/Service MNGR ENGR SUPV OPER ACK ONLY VIEW ONLY Operator Security Windows Local Groups Administrators Product Administrators Local Engineers Local Supervisors Local Operators Local ACK view only users Local view only users Users Local Servers

Honeywell

Windows Global (Domain) Groups Domain Admins DCS Administrators Engineers Supervisors Operators Ack View Only Users View Only Users Domain Users Domain Servers

Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

13

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Security Changes in R400


Built-in Administrator disabled by default Local group Honeywell Administrators is now Product Administrators Windows local account MNGR is reserved for servers not allowed to be interactive Several accounts are no longer created by Experion Better separation of roles Local lockdown procedure has been removed Roles are pre-populated in Experion operator database
On clean installs only

Honeywell
Role
Product Administrator Engineer Supervisor Operator Ack View Only View Only

Operator Security Levels


MNGR ENGR SUPV OPER ACK ONLY VIEW ONLY

Use Experion Command prompt to execute all Experion specific commands


Launch Experion command prompt from Start Programs Honeywell Experion PKS Server Diagnostics Experion Command Prompt
14
EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

Topics Scope of Responsibility Common Security Model Signing On Integrated Accounts

Honeywell

Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

15

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Passwords and masked (showing asterisks instead of actual password)

Honeywell

An operator password may consist of 5 to 40 alphanumeric characters Operators may change their own passwords

Utility: chgpsw from Station Command line (for Operator-based Security)

New passwords cannot be the same as the last 10 passwords used in the previous 3 months (configurable)
Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

16

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Sign on

Honeywell

Sign on is ID and Password

Dialog box appears automatically at connection on Operator-based security station

Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

17

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Sign on for a configurable lock-out period

Honeywell

When signing on, three unsuccessful attempts will lock the operator out Once signed on (logged on), an operator can sign off (log off) at any
time or is automatically signed off after a configurable period of inactivity

Individual operator profiles including security levels, control levels and


asset assignments are activated when operators sign on the system Any actions initiated by an operator are logged in the event database with an operator identifier

Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

18

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 2: Sign on To sign on to an operator-based security station, you need:


A) ID and Password B) Password only C) You don't need to sign on to operator based security station D) Date and time

Honeywell

Yes! The correct answer is 'A'. To sign on to an No. The correct answer is 'A'. To sign on to an Yes! The correct answer is 'A'. To sign on to an No. The correct answer is 'A'. To sign on to an The correct answer is: station you need an ID and Yourcorrect answer is: operator-based security station you need an ID and Youranswer: The answer: operator-based security You must answer the question before password. before You not Click anywhere to continue must answer password. question YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue Incorrect answer anywhereto continue Correct --Clickanywhere to continue Youdid You --answeredthis correctly! Correct answerthisthis correctly! did You Click anywhere to completely not Click thisquestion completely continuing continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
19

Clear

Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Scope of Responsibility Common Security Model Signing On Integrated Accounts

Honeywell

Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

20

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

10

Integrated Accounts accounts directly with Windows accounts Password

Honeywell

Another important feature in Experion is the ability to integrate operator Windows user account ID and Password = Experion Operator ID and
Windows Account ID

Password discovered from Windows

Assign appropriate Security level

Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

21

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Experion PKS Windows Group Accounts

Honeywell

Windows Groups can also be defined as Experion PKS accounts All similar plant operator accounts can be categorized into a Windows
Group, which can be assigned an appropriate operator profile in Experion PKS

Windows Group ID

Assign appropriate Security level

Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

22

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

11

Windows Domain and controlled directly from Windows Domain Controller

Honeywell

Experion PKS operators and Windows Group accounts can be managed

Facilitates administration of large operator groups

Enter Windows Domain name If not using Windows Domain, leave blank

Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

23

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Sign-on Administration

Honeywell

Manage operator
accounts

Password change requirements Security level for operator configuration Operator security login scheme Integrated security policy
If selected, operators can change the password for their Windows account in Station

Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

24

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

12

Passwords - Consideration both of the following options are configured

Honeywell

Operators can change their passwords for integrated accounts only if

Windows operator account properties -unchecked

Option Checked
25

Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Sign-On Integrated Accounts

Honeywell

Sign-on is ID, Password and Domain

Click Options Select or enter Windows Domain name


If not using domains, use anything but <None> Computer name of Server is usually used
Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

26

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

13

Single Signon

Honeywell

Option with integrated


accounts:

If Windows logon is also Experion operator integrated account or grouplogon to Station is automatic Only way to log out of Station is to log out of Windows, unless Signon Manager is used Also applies to Configuration Studio logon
Click Checkbox to enable

Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

27

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Signon Manager Installation

Honeywell

Option with Integrated Accounts, Groups and Single Sign on:


Optionally installed on Flex stations (ES-F), Console stations (ES-C) and Console Extension stations (ES-CE) Always installed on Experion Station TPS (ES-T)

Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

28

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

14

Signon Manager Installation Post Base Installation Optionally installed from Experion Application Software DVD

Honeywell

Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

29

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Signon Manager(1) applications or computer

Honeywell

Change the current user without having to shut down and restart any
Windows Login user Click Sign On

Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

30

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

15

Signon Manager (2) to shut down and restart any applications or computer
Click Sign On/Override

Honeywell

Temporarily override the current user security credentials without having

Sign On or Override

1: Sign On Previous signed on user is signed off automatically and new user is signed on 2: Override Click End Override to return to earlier signed on user

Override User

Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

31

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configure Signon Manager Open Configuration Utility


Click Start All Programs Honeywell Experion PKS Management Configuration Utility

Honeywell
System

Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

32

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

16

Options Tab Configure the text color and back ground color

Honeywell

Auto-hide Signon Manager bar


33

Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Options Tab Support Terminal Server Sessions

Honeywell

Checkbox is available only on Windows Server computers that support Terminal Server
Checked by default, on computers that support Terminal Server
When option is enabled, 1. 2. Each session has its own sign on bar Users of each session may set the privilege of the sign on aware application on their desktop via Sign on Manager

When this option is disabled, 1. Only the single session assigned to the screen on that computer will have a Sign on Bar to control the privilege of the Signon-aware applications 2. No Sign on Bar for other sessions, and their applications will operate with the privilege of the user logged in to that session
Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

34

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

17

KeyLevel Tab

Honeywell

Applicable only for Experion TPS systems using Integrated Keyboard (IKB)
Physical IKB key level changes used to set the security level in Experion Station

Trust Key level changes from IKB


Allows quick access change without delay of typing User ID and password using QWERTY keys

Operator Supervisor Engineer

Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

35

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

ID Reader Settings Card Reader support is added to Signon Manager

Honeywell

Card type supported ACS ACR120 USB Smart Card Reader Card type ACS ACR120 does not require port configuration Cards can be programmed using Signon Manager/Smart Card Editor Open Smart Card Editor Start All Programs Honeywell Experion PKS System Management ACS120 Smart Card Editor

Select supported card reader to attach to Signon Manager


Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

36

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

18

ID Reader Settings (Contd.)

Honeywell

Select to restrict manual signon when card reader device is active Select to allow override operation using Ctl+Alt key when signed in with card Select to allow automatic signoff when card is removed. Else, user needs to manually signoff
37

If option is selected, and user signon fails using card, user will be allowed to enter the password manually If selected, users are prompted for user id, password, and PIN. If signon succeeds and card is still in reader, credentials are written to smart card If selected, credentials on smart card can be updated when users cannot signon using current credentials on card but are able to provide other credentials to sign on successfully
EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

IKB Switch Value


Honeywell

Applicable with Operator-based security IKB key switch can be used to set the security level in Experion, Native Window and GUS displays
Security settings will be as per the table below

Physical IKB key level changes take effect only if the signed on user has a lower access level than the IKB key level switch
If signed on user has a higher access level privilege, then moving the physical IKB key level switch to a lower access level has no effect
IKB Key Switch Value No IKB EPKS Calculated Value VIEW ONLY2 ACK ONLY2 OPER SUPV ENGR MNGR VIEW ONLY ACK ONLY OPER SUPV ENGR MNGR OPER1 VIEW ONLY3 ACK ONLY3 OPER SUPV ENGR MNGR SUPV SUPV SUPV SUPV SUPV SUPV SUPV ENGR ENGR ENGR ENGR ENGR ENGR ENGR

1. When IKB Key Switch is in OPER position it is considered to be not in use, so EPKS calculated value is used. 2. Only applicable when using Operator Based security. 3. Only cases where lower security level is used. EPKS value is used even though IKB has a higher value. This is a result of note 1, and allows for note 2 operation when Operators are configured with these security levels and an IKB is in use.

Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

38

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

19

Idle Timeout Timeouts tab provides two timeout options idle & override

Honeywell

Idle Timeout : If Sign on Manager does not detect any activity and the idle time exceeds the configured value, any existing sign on and override will end
Timer to indicate idle timeout

No Activity

Warning before timeout

Return to Default login after timeout


Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

39

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Override Timeout Fixed duration for change of access level


Override operation starts the override timer After the override time elapses, the override operation ends

Honeywell

Override user

Signon user

Windows login

Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

40

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

20

Adjust Override Timeout Interval

Honeywell

User can adjust override timeout duration while performing Override


Additional field in sign on dialog box that allows user to enter desired override timeout value

Enter maximum value for override duration selection on the Sign on dialog box

In this case, up to 60 minutes can be selected

Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

41

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Timeout Warnings

Honeywell

Three warning mechanisms can be configured to notify the user before an idle or override timeout occurs

The Sign on bar, in Auto-hide mode by default, becomes visible if this option is selected

Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

42

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

21

Question 3: Integrated Accounts


A) Sign on requires ID and Control Level for Integrated Accounts B) You must shut down and restart your computer after changing the current user in Sign on Manager C) It is possible to integrate operator accounts directly with Windows accounts D) Operators can never change their password for Integrated accounts

Honeywell

Which of the following statements about Integrated Accounts is true?

Yes! The correct answer is 'C'. An important feature in No. The correct answer is 'C'. An important feature in No. The Yes! The correct answer feature The correctanswer is: Yourcorrectcorrectanswer is 'C'. An important feature in Your answer: The answer: the ability tois 'C'. An important accountsin Experion isanswer is: tointegrate operator accounts Experion is answer the question before integrate operator You must the ability question before You not -Click anywhere to continue must answer YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue Incorrectdirectlyanywhere to continue Correct answer anywhere to continue Click withWindows accounts. Youdid You --answeredthis correctly! Correct directlywith question completely did You answerthisthis correctly! not -Click anywhere to completely Click this Windows accounts. continuing continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
43

Clear

Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 4: Override Timer

Honeywell

Which of the following statements about Override Timeout is false?


A) Override timer will start when it detects no activity B) Override timer will start when the override operation is performed C) Signon Manager allows user to select desired override timeout value if 'User may select timeout up to' option is configured D) After override timer elapses, the override operation ends
Yes! The false statement is 'A'. The Override No. The false No. The answer is: Yes! The false Yourcorrectfalsestatement is 'A'. The Override The correctanswer is: The answer: statement is 'A'. The Override Youranswer: statement is 'A'. The Override timer will start as soon as the override operation timerYou must answer the the override operation will start as soon as question before You not Clickperformed. to continue must answer question before question is YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncompletely Incorrect answer anywhereto continue Correct --Clickperformed. to continue Youdid You --answeredthis correctly! Correct answeranywhere to continue did You Clickanywhere not Click thisthis correctly! this completely is anywhere continuing continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit

Clear

Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

44

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

22

Summary Experion PKS operator-based security:

Honeywell

Experion provides configurable security levels, control levels and asset assignments for operator profiles Up to six security levels limit operator access to Experion functions Individual operator profiles, including security levels, control levels and asset assignments, activate when operators sign on the system An important feature in Experion is the ability to integrate operator accounts directly with Windows accounts - If Windows logon is also Experion operator integrated account or group account, and Single Signon is enabled, logon to Station is automatic - Idle timeout and override timeout can be configured for signed on user - Warning mechanism can be configured to notify the user before an idle or override timeout occurs - IKB key switch can be used to change the security level in Station, Native Window and GUS displays
Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

45

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Lab Examples 1 of 2 Configure Asset Restrictions

Honeywell

Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

46

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

23

Lab Examples 2 of 2 Configure Asset Profiles

Honeywell

Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

47

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Conclusion Describe Operator-based Security

Honeywell

Completion Certificate

Proceed to the Configure Asset Restrictions and Configure Asset Profiles lab exercises
Assets and Operators Describe Operator-Based Security

48

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

24

R400:Describe Users in Experion System

Assets and Operators R400:Describe Users in Experion System

49

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Users Provide Two Levels of Protection

Honeywell
Station

Configuration Studio

Native Window

Assets and Operators R400:Describe Users in Experion System

50

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

25

How are Users Used? Logon to Windows Logon to Station


Operator Security Only Determines Security Level

Honeywell
Station

Configuration Studio

Logon to Configuration Studio Run Services & DCOM Servers


Programs
Native Window

Determine Access Level in Native Window

Assets and Operators R400:Describe Users in Experion System

51

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Databases Where User Accounts Exist


SAM
User2 User6

Honeywell

AD
User1 User5

Active Directory (AD)


Only on Domain Controllers Same on all DCs in same Domain

Security Account Manager (SAM)


On all non-DCs (Servers, Stations, etc.) Different entries on each node
SAM
User3 User6

Real-Time DataBase (RTDB)


On all Experion Servers Same on Redundant Pair Different entries on Different Servers
User6 User5 User4

Realtime Database STN01

mngr

Assets and Operators R400:Describe Users in Experion System

52

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

26

Application Used to Add/Remove/Modify User Accounts


SAM
User2 User6

Honeywell

AD
User1 User5

Active Directory Users and Computers

Computer Management
SAM
User3 User6

Realtime Database STN01

User6 User5 User4

Configuration Studio (or Station)

mngr

Assets and Operators R400:Describe Users in Experion System

53

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Types of Users
SAM
User2 User6

Honeywell
AD
User1 User5

AD Only
Available only on systems with a domain Ex: User1

SAM Only
Ex: User2, User3
SAM
User3 User6

Classic (RTDB Only)


Ex: User4

AD Integrated
Ex: User5
User6 User5 User4

Sam Integrated
Ex: User6

Realtime Database STN01

mngr

Assets and Operators R400:Describe Users in Experion System

54

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

27

How are Users Used? (Reprise)


SAM
User2 User6

Honeywell
User MUST exist in AD or SAM AD, SAM, AD Integrated, SAM Integrated User MUST exist in RTDB AD Integrated, SAM Integrated, Classic User MUST exist in RTDB AD Integrated, SAM Integrated, Classic User MUST exist in AD or SAM AD or SAM & Proxy File

AD
User1 User5

Logon to Windows

Logon to Station (Operator Sec Only) Logon to Configuration Studio

SAM
User3 User6

Run Services & DCOM Servers


User6 User5 User4

Determine Access Level in Native Win Determine Security Level in Station (Operator Security Only)
User definition in RTDB
*

Realtime Database STN01

mngr

Assets and Operators R400:Describe Users in Experion System

55

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Domain Selection for Station/Configuration Studio Logon


SAM
User2 User6

Honeywell

AD
User1 User5

AD Only, SAM Only


Cannot logon to Configuration Studio

Classic
User4 <Traditional Operator Security> Domain

AD Integrated
User5
ESVT7PB

SAM
User3 User6

Sam Integrated
User6 Server EMDB server if connecting to system
User6 User5 User4

Realtime Database STN01

mngr

User4 User6 User5


56
EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Assets and Operators R400:Describe Users in Experion System

28

Building Integrated vs. Classic Accounts


SAM
User2 User6

Honeywell

AD
User1 User5

Use Windows account


Select for Integrated Account Not selected for Classic Account

Domain
Blank for SAM Integrated Domain for AD Integrated
SAM
User3 User6

Integrated with SAM

Realtime Database STN01

User6 User5 User4

Integrated with AD * Classic Account

mngr

* non-TPN connected systems only


Assets and Operators R400:Describe Users in Experion System

57

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configure Classic Accounts Step One (and only) In Configuration Studio (or Station)

Honeywell

Select Operator Definition

Enter the Operator (User) Name Change the User Password

RTDB

User6 User5 User4

Assign Security Level Assign Control Level

Assign Assets (different tab)

Assets and Operators R400:Describe Users in Experion System

58

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

29

Building AD Integrated Accounts


SAM
User2 User6

Honeywell

AD

User1 User5

1. Add Windows User first 2. Add RTDB User second


SAM
User3 User6

Realtime Database STN01

User6 User5 User4

mngr

Assets and Operators R400:Describe Users in Experion System

59

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Building SAM Integrated Accounts


SAM
User2 User6

Honeywell

AD
User1 User5

SAM

1. 2.

Add Windows User first Add RTDB User second

User3 User6

2
Realtime Database STN01

User6 User5 User4

mngr

Assets and Operators R400:Describe Users in Experion System

60

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

30

More Work for SAM Integrated Accounts


SAM AD
User1 User5 User2 User6

Honeywell

SAM
User3 User6

Realtime Database STN01

User6 User5 User4

User6 in server SAM required to create integrated account Must build User6 in each client SAM to be able to logon to Station (operator based security)
Required on ES-C Required on ES-F & ES-CE only if Single Signon enabled More on Single Signon later

mngr

Assets and Operators R400:Describe Users in Experion System

61

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Pre-Defined RTDB User mngr


Default user for logon to Configuration Studio Should NOT be integrated with the mngr in SAM
SAM
mngr

Honeywell

Mngr
Realtime Database

Assets and Operators R400:Describe Users in Experion System

62

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

31

Which mngr Are You Talking About?

Honeywell

There are two mngr accounts, and one mngr security level password Domain selected to logon to Config Studio or to Station (operator based)
SAM AD
Used by Services & DCOM Servers to logon Created during installation Windows user account Password entered during installation (class: ac Pays 1) Cannot logon to Configuration Studio or Station Used to logon to Configuration Studio and Station Created during installation Classic account Password = mngr1 (default not entered during install) Domain=<Traditional Operator Security> Used to gain mngr security level w / Sta. based security Created during installation Password = mngr (default), not user account Cannot logon to Configuration Studio or Station
63
EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

SAM
mngr

mngr
Realtime Database STN01

mngr

More on More on this later this later

Assets and Operators R400:Describe Users in Experion System

Access to Applications (Ex: Print Server) mngr


SAM SAM

Honeywell mngr
Printer

EPKS/ESVT

Print Server

All requests made by the EPKS/ESVT to other applications over the network use the mngr Windows account and its password Any computer running an application (In this case a Print Server), must have the mngr account with the same password as on EPKS/ESVT computer

Assets and Operators R400:Describe Users in Experion System

64

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

32

Group Account Decreases Work Integrated Groups


SAM
Local Engineers locEng1 locEng2 locEng3 locEng10

Honeywell vs. Integrated Operators


SAM
Local Engineers locEng1 locEng2 locEng3 locEng10

AD
Engineers engr1 engr2 engr3 engr10

AD
Engineers engr1 engr2 engr3 engr10

SAM
Local Engineers locEng1 locEng2 locEng3 locEng10 Local Engineers Engineers

SAM
Local Engineers locEng1 locEng2 locEng3 locEng10 locEng1 locEng2 locEng3 locEng10 engr1 engr2 engr3 engr10

Assets and Operators R400:Describe Users in Experion System

65

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Concept Windows Group Account Reduces the number of users that need to be built in Experion
No need to configure individual operators in Experion

Honeywell

Define a group with the same name as a Windows group


Global (AD) or local (SAM)

All the members belonging to the Windows Group can logon to the system (Station, Signon Manager) Members of multiple groups
Get highest security level Can operate points in assets assigned to any group
SAM
Local Engineers

AD
Engineers

Assets are assigned to the group A Security level is assigned to the group
Integrated with SAM

Local Engineers
RTDB STN01

Engineers

Integrated with AD
mngr

Assets and Operators R400:Describe Users in Experion System

66

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

33

Integrated User Also Member of Integrated Group


SAM
Local Engineers locEng1 locEng2 locEng3 locEng10

Honeywell

AD
Engineers engr1 engr2 engr3 engr10

engr1 is a member of an integrated group (Engineers) engr1 is also defined as an integrated user Asset assignment and security level depend on selection shown:

SAM
Local Engineers locEng1 locEng2 locEng3 locEng10 locEng1 Local Engineers engr1 Engineers

Selected use only operator assignments Not Selected use only group assignments Same for locEng1
67
EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Assets and Operators R400:Describe Users in Experion System

Building AD Integrated Groups


SAM
Local Engineers

Honeywell Build Group in Active Directory first


Honeywell Defined or Custom Add Users

AD
Engineers

Build Group in RTDB second


Enter Domain Name
SAM
Local Engineers

Local Engineers
RTDB

Engineers

Assets and Operators R400:Describe Users in Experion System

68

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

34

Building SAM Integrated Groups


SAM
Local Engineers

Honeywell Build Group in SAM first


Honeywell Defined or Custom Add Users and Global Groups

AD
Engineers

Build Group in RTDB second


Leave Domain field blank

SAM
Local Engineers

Local Engineers Engineers

RTDB

Assets and Operators R400:Describe Users in Experion System

69

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Pre-defined Groups in RTDB

Honeywell

In Experion R400 some Honeywell Groups are automatically added to RTDB during installation
SAM
Mngr Product Administrator Local Engineer Local Supervisor Local Operator Local Ack View Only Users Local View Only Users

Mngr Product Administrator Realtime Database Local Engineer Local Supervisor Local Operator Local Ack View Only Users Local View Only Users

Assets and Operators R400:Describe Users in Experion System

70

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

35

Summary

Honeywell

Users reside in Active Directory, Security Account Manager and Real Time Database AD only, SAM only, Classic, AD Integrated and SAM Integrated are the types of users Mngr user is by default created in RTDB and it is different than the mngr user in SAM Groups contain one or more users with same privileges In Experion R400 some Honeywell groups are automatically created in RTDB at the time of installation

Assets and Operators R400:Describe Users in Experion System

71

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Assets and Operators R400:Describe Users in Experion System

72

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

36

Topic: Assets and Operators


Contents
Configure Asset Restrictions .................................................................................................................3 Configure Asset Profiles ......................................................................................................................33

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

This page was intentionally left blank.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Restrictions

Configure Asset Restrictions


Practice
Student Partition sheet Team## Windows Login User Password System Name Server Alias Asset Name Asset Description Operator ID User Name Operator ID Password Static Station Number Rotary Station Name E02ESV##_System E02ESV##_Server Pumps## Team## lab asset Team## 123456 ## Rotary## Student

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Restrictions

This page was intentionally left blank.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Restrictions Prerequisites

Knowledge of Configuration Studio. Station navigation familiarization Station-based security station connected to a Server MNGR - Station access password Knowledge Builder available Operator-based security station configured Partition data sheet

Introduction

During this lab, you will use Configuration Studio to configure asset restrictions that apply to Stations and Operators.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Restrictions Procedure

Perform the following procedures in Configuration Studio:


Step Configure Asset Restrictions for a Station 1 Login to Windows with Student User if not already logged in. Action

ATTENTION Refer your partition sheet for password details.

2 3

Open Configuration Studio, if not already open. Connect to your System. ATTENTION Refer to the partition sheet for details about the System Name and User Login.

Click on the + icon beside Servers object.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Restrictions Step 5 Action Click on the + icon beside your assigned server to expand the Configuration Explorer tree.

ATTENTION Refer to partition sheet for your server Alias.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Restrictions Step 6 Action In your assigned Server Configuration tree: Click on Stations and Consoles.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Restrictions Step 7 Click on Configure flex stations. Action

ATTENTION The System display application window will open.

Click on your Static Station Station_## as stated in partition sheet.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Restrictions Step 9 Click on the Assignment tab. Action

10

Click the + icon next to Assets (if the asset list is not already expanded).

10

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Restrictions Step 11 Click on the Full access. Action icon at the side of the asset name Pumps##_item. Click on

Click on Valves##_item and select Full access.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Restrictions Step 12 Action

ATTENTION

There are four levels of Restrictions for an Asset in station. 1. Full access. 2. View and acknowledge: Operator can only acknowledge alarms from that asset. Operators cannot change the set point, output or any other parameter of any points assigned to the asset. 3. View only: Operator cannot acknowledge alarms from that asset or change any of the parameters of a point from the asset. 4. No access

The icon indicates that the asset adjacent to the icon has not been assigned to the particular station. (No access)

icon indicates that the asset adjacent to the The icon has been assigned with Full access.

13 14

Open Station##, if not already open. Select Station > Logon from the Menu bar.

12

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Restrictions Step 15 Action In the Station Logon screen, type mngr in lowercase. Click OK.

16

Verify that you have manager access level.

17 18 19 20

Call up your Group Display. Change the OP of ANATEST## to 93 (Mode MAN) to create a PV High alarm. Change the state of STATEST## to OFF, the configured alarm state. Click on the icon to open the System Menu.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

13

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Restrictions Step 21 Sign on at the Oper access level: Click the Mngr access level designator in the lower right corner. Type oper in the resulting pop-up. Click OK. Action

14

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Restrictions Step 22 Action Navigate to the Alarm Summary page and try to acknowledge the ANATEST## alarm. 1. Right click on the alarm from the summary list. 2. Click on Acknowledge Alarm from the pop-up. The alarm should be acknowledged, since the asset Valves##_item to which the point ANATEST## is assigned, has been assigned to the station.

TIP Alternate Acknowledge: click the alarm from the summary list and press <F4> to acknowledge.

23

Open Configuration Studio, if not already open. Connect to your System.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

15

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Restrictions Step 24 Action Return to the Configuration Explorer tree, if necessary.

Select your Server. Click Stations and Consoles. Click Configure flex stations.

ATTENTION Refer to previous steps if you need help.

25

Click on your Static Station Station ##.

26

Click the Assignment tab.

16

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Restrictions Step 27 Action Click the + icon adjacent to Assets (if the asset list is not already open). Click on the icon at the side of the asset named Valves##_item.

Click on View and acknowledge. Click on Pumps##_item Select View and acknowledge.

28 29

Open Station, if not already open. Log on as Oper (password oper).

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

17

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Restrictions Step 30 Call up Group ##. Try to change the MODE of ANATEST##. Note the message that appears in the Station Message zone. Action

31

Click the Alarm Summary button

Select the alarm and press <F4> to attempt to acknowledge the alarm for STATEST##. You should be successful since you have View and acknowledge restrictions. If you have View only restrictions for an Asset, the message shown in the previous step appears if you try to control a point in that asset. The following message appears if you try to acknowledge an alarm in a View only Asset:

18

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Restrictions Step 32 Action Return to the Flex Station Configuration page in Configuration Studio For your Station##, in the Assignment tab, assign Full Access to the assets AQ_Item, Pumps##_Item, and Valves##_Item.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

19

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Restrictions Step Assign an Asset and Asset Restrictions to an Operator 33 34 Return to the Configuration Explorer tab of Configuration Studio. Click on System Access in your assigned server tree. Action

20

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Restrictions Step 35 Action Click on Configure operators and Windows group accounts

ATTENTION The System display tab will open.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

21

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Restrictions Step 36 Action Click on your Operator ID, Team ## (refer to the partition sheet).

22

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Restrictions Step 37 Action Click on the Assignment tab. Note that your Operator, Team##, will not be of Type Traditional Operator as it is an integrated account.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

23

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Restrictions Step 38 Action Click on the + icon adjacent to Assets to expand the list of assets. Click the icon adjacent to Pumps##_item and select View only. Select the View only option for Valves##_item.

ATTENTION Make sure that no other asset is assigned to the operator Team##.

39 40

Open Station, if not already open. Select Station > Connect from the Station menu bar.

24

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Restrictions Step 41 Action Select the connection you created in the Build Stations module for operator-based security (Rotary##). Click Connect.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

25

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Restrictions Step 42 Action Use Signon Manager to log in as Team##.

26

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Restrictions Step 43 Action Enter the Operator ID for the User Name, and the Operator ID Password for the Password in the log-on box, as instructed in the Partition sheet. If the computer name is in the Domain entry box highlight it and delete it. Click OK. Click on Enter System Menu at the bottom of the display.

ATTENTION Team ## is a Traditional operator account. (Domain = <None> or is blank)

44

Navigate to the Alarm Summary page. Right Click on ANATESTXX Alarm and press the Acknowledge Alarm button.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

27

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Restrictions Step 45 Action Watch the Message Zone for the message:

The other two restrictions of View and acknowledge and Full access are available for Operator Asset assignment, and they work the same as in Station Based security. Those levels are not configured in this lab. 46 Select Configure > System Hardware > Server Wide Settings from the Station menu bar. There is another Operator-based security use for Assets.

47

Sign on as Mngr (User Name: mngr; Password: mngr1; Domain: <Blank>).

28

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Restrictions Step 48 Select the Security tab. Action

49

Select the System Security Options checkbox as shown below

50

Close the Station application.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

29

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Restrictions Step 51 Action Open Configuration Studio, if not already open. Navigate to the option Configure flex stations as shown earlier. Select the rotary station that was built in earlier labs. Select the Assignment tab. Click the Pump##_item asset and select No access.

ATTENTION Mngr access level will be required to change the asset assignment.

TIP Refer to previous steps for help. 52 53 Logon to your Rotary Station as Team## User Name: Team##; Password: 123456; Domain: <None> or is blank. Even though Pumps##_item is assigned to Team ##, you will not see any alarms from the asset since the asset Pumps##_item is not assigned to this Station. Select View > Alarms from the Station menu bar to open the Alarm Summary page.

54

Go to Group ##. Try to change the State of STATEST##. NOTE: The Message Zone.

30

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Restrictions Step 55 Action Return to Configure -> System Hardware -> Server Wide Settings. Select the Security tab.

56

Uncheck the System Security Options checkbox.

ATTENTION Mngr level required (mngr, mngr1, Domain:<None> or is blank).

57

Close your Rotary Station.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

31

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Restrictions

This page was intentionally left blank.

32

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Profiles

Configure Asset Profiles


Practice
Student Partition sheet Team## Windows Login User Password System Name Alias Asset List Number Asset List Name Asset List Description Asset List Assignable Asset Asset Time Period Number Asset Time Period Name Asset Time Period Description Asset Time Period Assignable Asset Operator ID Operator Password Asset Profile Number Asset Profile Name Asset Profile Description Asset Profile Assignable Asset E02ESV##_System E02ESV##_Server ## (For Team 01 this number is 16) Lab Asset List## Lab Asset List Pumps## ## (For Team 01 this number is 16) Lab Asset Time## Lab Asset Time Pumps## Team## 123456 ## (For Team 01 this number is 16) Lab Profile## Lab Profile Pumps## Student

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

33

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Profiles

This page was intentionally left blank.

34

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Profiles Prerequisites

Knowledge of Configuration Studio. Station navigation familiarization Station connected to a server MNGR Station access password Operator-based security station configured Knowledge Builder available Partition data sheet

Introduction

In this lab you will configure an Asset Profile, Asset List, and Asset Time Period. The Asset Profile will then be assigned to an operator. Configure an Asset List. Configure an Asset Time Period. Configure an Asset Profile.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

35

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Profiles Procedure

Perform the following procedures in Configuration Studio:


Step Configure an Asset List 1 Login to Windows with Student User if not already logged in. ATTENTION Refer your partition sheet for password details. Action

2 3

Open Configuration Studio, if not already open. Connect to your System. ATTENTION Refer to the partition sheet for details about the System Name.

Click on the + icon besides Servers object and expand the Configuration Explorer tree.

36

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Profiles Step 5 Action Click on the + icon, beside the server added into the System hierarchy, to expand the Configuration Explorer tree.

ATTENTION Refer to partition sheet for your server Alias.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

37

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Profiles Step 6 Click on System Access Action

38

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Profiles Step 7 Click on Configure asset lists. Action

ATTENTION The System display tab will open. 8 Click your assigned list number, from your partition sheet, in the Asset Lists panel to navigate to the definition page.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

39

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Profiles Step 9 Action Enter the Name, Description, and Assignable Asset for this Asset List from your partition sheet. Drop down the Assignable Asset list by clicking the browse button and select Assets/pumps##_item.

Set the following asset access levels : Click the icon adjacent to the AQ_item asset.

Select View Only. Click on icon adjacent to the Pumps##_item asset and select Full access.

40

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Profiles Step 10 Click the Back button. Action

You will see the new asset list configured.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

41

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Profiles Step Configuring Time Periods 11 Click the Time Periods tab. Action

42

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Profiles Step 12 Action Click the empty row number ##, listed on your partition sheet, to navigate to the Asset Time Period definition page.

13

Enter the Name, Description, and Assignable Asset for this Time Period from your partition sheet.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

43

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Profiles Step 14 Action Configure the Time Period Details check boxes, along with the Start Time and Stop Time as shown.

ATTENTION Stop Time must be greater than the corresponding Start Time.

44

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Profiles Step 15 Click the Back button. Action

The new Asset Time Period appears in the list.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

45

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Profiles Step Action

Configure Asset Profile to include the Asset List and Asset Time Period 16 Click the Profiles tab.

46

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Profiles Step 17 Action Click the index number ##, listed on your partition sheet, to open the Asset Profile configuration screen.

18

Enter the Name, Description, and Assignable Asset for this Asset Profile from your partition sheet.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

47

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Profiles Step 19 Click the Asset List drop-down arrow Action . .

Select the Lab Asset List## that you configured previously. Select the Lab Asset Time## that you configured previously.

Click the Asset Time Period drop-down arrow

This finishes the Asset Profile configuration.

48

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Profiles Step 20 Click the Back button. Action

The new Asset Profile appears in the list

21

Click on the Configuration Explorer tab.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

49

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Profiles Step Assign Asset Profile to an Operator 22 Click on System Access. Action

50

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Profiles Step 23 Action Click on Configure operators and Windows group accounts.

ATTENTION The System display tab will open.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

51

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Profiles Step 24 Click on Team##. Action

52

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Profiles Step 25 Click on the Assignment tab. Action

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

53

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Profiles Step 26 Click to select Asset profile. Action

54

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Profiles Step 27 Click the down arrow configured. Action icon and select the Asset Profile Lab Profile ## you just

28 29

Operator Team## now has access to the Assets and restrictions included in Lab Asset List ## at the times specified in Lab Asset Time ##. (Optional) Logon to the Rotary## with the Team## account. Verify the View only access to asset AQ_item (Sinewave point) and Full access to Pumps##_Item (STATEST##).

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

55

Assets and Operators Configure Asset Profiles

This page was intentionally left blank.

56

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Describe Console Functions

Console Functions Describe Console Functions

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Introduction In this lesson you will learn about Experion PKS consoles At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Explain the purpose of a console Identify the Experion PKS stations that can be part of a console Describe how to configure a console Describe how to operate from a console
ES-CE

Honeywell

Console
ES-C

Console Functions Describe Console Functions

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Console Purpose Console Configuration Console Operations

Honeywell

Console Functions Describe Console Functions

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Experion PKS Console Purpose (ES-C) and Console Extension Stations (ES-CE)

Honeywell

Provide a single workspace across a group of Console Stations Provide cross-station display invocation among stations that make up the console Provide console-wide alarm acknowledgement

Console Functions Describe Console Functions

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Experion PKS Console Architecture


Logical grouping of Console Stations (ES-C) and Console Extension Stations (ES-CE). Two Consoles shown here.

Honeywell

Console A
ES-F ES-CE ES-C Server ES-C

Console B
ES-CE ES-CE

Flex Stations cannot be part of a Console

Console Functions Describe Console Functions

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 1: Console Architecture Which of these cannot be part of a console?


A) Flex Station B) Console Station C) Console Extension Station
ES-F ES-CE ES-C

Honeywell

Server

The correct answer is: Yourcorrect answer is: Youranswer: The answer: No.You must correctanswer'A'.'A'. before cannot Yes! The correct answeris Flex stations The correct answer isquestion Flex stations Yes! not answer thequestion completely is No.Correct answer anywheretoFlexFlex stations The The correct answer is'A'. 'A'. stations You must answer thisquestion before YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue cannot Incorrect Click anywhere to continue Youdid You ---Clickanywhere Atocontinue made not Click anywhere this correctly! completely Correct Click this cannot be of -answered thisconsoleis made made up be did You answer console. Atocontinue up of continuing correctly! cannot be part console. A console is made up of up a bepart of a of continuing console is part part console. A a of a console. console is ofeitherconsole stations ororconsole extension either console stations orconsole extension either console stations or console extension of either console stations console extension stations. stations. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
6

Clear

Console Functions Describe Console Functions

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Console Purpose Console Configuration Console Operations

Honeywell

Console Functions Describe Console Functions

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Experion PKS Console Configuration A console can include the following combinations
A single Console Station A Console Station with a Console Extension Station Multiple Console Stations Multiple Console Stations with Console Extension Stations

Honeywell

A console is configured on a server Console Stations, belonging to the server, are added to the console
Console Extension Stations automatically become a part of the console Here, an ES-C is added to Console B Its two ES-CEs automatically become part of Console B
ES-C

Console B
ES-CE ES-CE

Console Functions Describe Console Functions

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Experion PKS Console Configuration

Honeywell

Log on to Configuration Studio

Click Configure Consoles

Click Stations and Consoles

Console Functions Describe Console Functions

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Experion PKS Console Configuration

Honeywell

Click on a blank row to call up Console configuration display

Enter a unique name

Settings apply to all Stations that are part of this console

Console Functions Describe Console Functions

10

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Experion PKS Console Configuration

Honeywell

Same options as available for individual stations Settings configured here are applicable to all stations that are part of the console and configured to use console settings

Console Functions Describe Console Functions

11

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Experion PKS Console Configuration

Honeywell

If Operator-based security is used the SOR of a Station or Console will not apply, unless the Server-wide setting is configured to check Station AND Operator Asset assignment.

Console Functions Describe Console Functions

12

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Experion PKS Console Configuration

Honeywell

Entries will be propagated to Stations, added to the Console, configured to use Console settings

Console Functions Describe Console Functions

13

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Experion PKS Console Station Purpose A console Station is Continuously logged onto Server Directly connected to C200/C200E and C300 via FTE Requires file replication from Server database Configured similarly to System Interface

Honeywell

Multi window functionality is standard functionality with each ES-C Separate license option vs. Flex station license

Console Functions Describe Console Functions

14

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Experion PKS Console Station Purpose A console Extension is Like a Flex Station except it connects directly to an ES-C instead of the Experion server 3 max per ES-C Economical way to extend the availability and functionality of the ES-C

Honeywell

Console Functions Describe Console Functions

15

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Experion PKS Console Station Configuration

Honeywell

Log on to Configuration Studio

Click Configure Console Stations

Click Stations and Consoles

Console Functions Describe Console Functions

16

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Experion PKS Console Station Configuration


Click on a blank row to call up Console Station Configuration display

Honeywell

Enter a unique name Check to enable Operator Based Security Update Rate Settings that apply to the Console Station
Console Functions Describe Console Functions

17

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Experion PKS Console Station Configuration

Honeywell

Assign to a Console

Enter the number of Console Extensions (Max 3)

Console Functions Describe Console Functions

18

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Experion PKS Console Station Configuration

Honeywell
Specifies the display called up on startup. If selected, when the idle timeout timer for the Station expires the display specified as the startup display is called up.. Audible Alarm/Station Failure Alarm options

Printer Assignments

Console Functions Describe Console Functions

19

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Experion PKS Console Station Configuration

Honeywell

If Operator-based security is used the SOR of a Station will not apply, unless the Serverwide setting is configured to check Station AND Operator Asset assignment.

Console Functions Describe Console Functions

20

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

10

Experion PKS Console Station Configuration

Honeywell

Operator Keyboard settings can be entered

Console Functions Describe Console Functions

21

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Experion PKS Console Station Status

Honeywell

Console Functions Describe Console Functions

22

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

11

Experion PKS Console Adding ES-C/ES-CEs to a Console

Honeywell

From Console Station configuration page, select a configured Console appropriate for this ES-C and its ES-CEs Unchecked

Alias used for cross screen display invocation

Console Functions Describe Console Functions

23

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Experion PKS Console Console Settings

Honeywell

Settings NOT applicable and cannot be modified

Checked

Console Functions Describe Console Functions

24

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

12

Question 2: Console Configuration A console station added to a console must:


A) Be configured separately from the console B) Use console's configuration C) Use the console's configuration or be configured separately
ES - CE

Honeywell
Console
ES -C

The correct answer is: Yourcorrect answer is: Youranswer: The answer: Yes! The correct answer is 'C'. AAconsole station added to aa No. The correct answer is 'C'. Abefore station added to a Yes! The correct answer is 'C'. A before station added to a No. The correct answer is 'C'. console You must answer the question console station added to You not answer question completely question console YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue Incorrect answer anywhere to continue Correct -Click anywhere to configuration or be configured consolemust-Clickanywhere to continue Correct answerthe this correctly! Youdid You --answeredthis correctly! did You Click this console's configuration or be configured not use anywhere to completely consolemustClick the console's continue must use this continuing continuing separately. You will still get console-wide alarm separately. You will still get console-wide alarm acknowledgement and cross screen displays. acknowledgement and cross screen displays. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
25

Clear

Console Functions Describe Console Functions

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Console Purpose Console Configuration Console Operations

Honeywell

Console Functions Describe Console Functions

26

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

13

Experion PKS Console Status

Honeywell

Console status can be viewed from the Console Status Summary display Status of the Console is determined from the state of the stations belonging to the Console Total number, of Stations belonging to the Console, is displayed

Click to view status of each station

Status
OK Marginal Failed Not Configured

Description
All Station instances operational One or more Station instances failed All of the station instances failed Console entry does not have console name configured

Console Functions Describe Console Functions

27

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Experion PKS Console Detail Status

Honeywell

Console Station node status

Console status

Connection status of each station instance

Current operator logged in, if operator signon enabled

Console Functions Describe Console Functions

28

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

14

Experion PKS Console Station Status Zone Console name field

Honeywell

Displayed on stations that are members of a console If Console status is marginal, a yellow LED will appear next to the Console name Clicking on the console name field calls up the Console Status display
Console name field

Console name field is not displayed on:


Console Station/Console Extension Station that is not a member of a Console Flex Station

Console Functions Describe Console Functions

29

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Experion PKS Console Alarm Acknowledgement Scope of Alarm acknowledgement for a console

Honeywell

Alarm Processing settings on Alarms Page, determine if the alarm acknowledgement scope is server wide (applies to all stations connected to a server) or if alarms must be acknowledged on each Console By default, At each console is enabled

Console Functions Describe Console Functions

30

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

15

Experion PKS Console Alarm Acknowledgement

Honeywell

When the setting is At each console, an alarm must be acknowledged by a member station of EACH console
The alarm also gets acknowledged on stations that are not a member of any Console

When Once (applies to all Stations) is enabled, an alarm received by a Console will be acknowledged when the alarm is acknowledged on any station within the cluster

Console Functions Describe Console Functions

31

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Console Alarm Acknowledgement Scenario 1

Honeywell

This scenario assumes that the Scope of Responsibility is same for all stations

Experion PKS Server

CStn01-1

CStn02-1

Flex Station

CStn03-1

CStn01-2 Console A

CStn02-2

CStn03-1 Console C

CStn02-3 Console B

Console Functions Describe Console Functions

32

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

16

Console Alarm Acknowledgement Scenario 2

Honeywell

This scenario assumes that the Scope of Responsibility is same for all stations

Experion PKS Server

CStn01-1

CStn02-1

Flex Station

CStn03-1

CStn01-2 Console A

CStn02-2

CStn03-1 Console C

CStn02-3 Console B

Console Functions Describe Console Functions

33

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Experion PKS Console Silence Functionality

Honeywell

Three options
Single Station only Silence actions will only occur on station where action occurred Single Station or single console (all Stations in console) Silence action from any station within a console will result in silence request being applied to all stations within that console only Silence action from any station which is not a part of console will result in silence request being applied only to the station where it occurred All Stations Silence action from any station, in a console or not in a console, will result in silence request being applied to all stations configured on the server
34

Console Functions Describe Console Functions

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

17

Alarm Priority Configuration for Consoles

Honeywell

Following priority configuration has been added in the Alarm Page under Alarm Enable tab:
Console Fail this alarm is raised when all stations in a console have failed Console Marginal this alarm is raised when one or more (but not all) stations in a console have failed Server or Console Station Unavailable Alarm is raised when a Console Station fails or loses communications

Console Functions Describe Console Functions

35

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Alarm Priority Defaults for Consoles

Honeywell

Following alarms have had their default priority changed to Journal, meaning they will be added to the event log, but alarms will not be raised:
Console Fail this alarm is raised when all stations in a console have failed Console Marginal this alarm is raised when one or more (but not all) stations in a console has failed

Console Functions Describe Console Functions

36

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

18

Experion PKS Console Cross Station Display Invocation

Honeywell

Ability to send displays from one station to another station within the same Console Two methods of cross station invocation exist
Operator has the ability to direct the current display to another station via a Preconfigured key Toolbar button Menu item HMIWeb displays button Operator has the ability to direct the next display call up to another station via a preconfigured key, toolbar button, menu item and station button objects in HMIWeb displays for the destination station

Console Functions Describe Console Functions

37

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Cross Station Display Invocation - Configuration


1 2

Honeywell

3 4

For sending the current display to another station select Current Display To For sending next display to another station select Next Display To
38
EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Console Functions Describe Console Functions

19

Question 3: Console Operations

Honeywell

When one or more, but not all, station instances has failed, the console status is considered ?
A) OK B) Marginal C) Failed D) Not Configured
Yes! The correct answer is 'B'. Station status is No. The correct answer Yes! The correct is: No. The answer is: status The correctansweransweris 'B'. Station status is Yourcorrectcorrectanswer is 'B'. Station status is The answer: Youranswer: marginal if is 'B'. Stationstation is considered marginal ifone or more station considered one or before You must answer the question more You You -Click anywhere to continue must answer question completely instances correctly! YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue Incorrect--answeredthisquestioncompletely Correct answer anywhereto continue did not answeranywhere to continue Click thisthisfailed. before You Correct -Click anywhere to did You Click this not instances correctly! continuingfailed. continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
39

Clear

Console Functions Describe Console Functions

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Summary Experion PKS Consoles:

Honeywell

Provide a single workspace across a group of Console Stations (ES-C) and Console Extension Stations (ES-CE), provide console-wide alarm acknowledgement and provide cross station display invocation A console can include: a single Console Station, a Console Station with a Console Extension Station, multiple Console Stations, or multiple Console Stations with Console Extension Stations. A console cannot include Flex Station. A console is configured on a server with Console Stations belonging to the server added to the console Status of the Console is determined from the state of the stations that belong to the Console Alarm settings determines if the alarm acknowledgement scope is server wide or if alarms must be acknowledged on each Console
40

Console Functions Describe Console Functions

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

20

Summary Experion PKS Console Stations:


Continuously logged onto Server Directly connected to C200/C200E and C300 via FTE A console Station is configured on a server

Honeywell

Console Functions Describe Console Functions

41

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Conclusion Describe Console Functions

Honeywell

Completion Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material


Console Functions Describe Console Functions

42

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

21

Topic: Console Functions


Contents
R400:Configure Console and Console Station......................................................................................3

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

This page was intentionally left blank.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Console Functions R400:Configure Console and Console Station

R400:Configure Console and Console Station


Student Partition sheet Team ## Windows Login User Password System Name Server Alias Supv Password Engr Password Console Name E02ESV##_System E02ESV##_Server supv engr Console A Student

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Console Functions R400:Configure Console and Console Station

This page was intentionally left blank.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Console Functions R400:Configure Console and Console Station Prerequisites

Configuration Studio Knowledge Station Navigation Familiarization Knowledge Builder Available.

Introduction

In this lab, you will use Configuration Studio to configure Console and Console Station. Navigate to Console Configuration Page to configure a Console Navigate to the Console Station Configuration Page to configure Console Station Monitor Status of Console Station

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Console Functions R400:Configure Console and Console Station Procedure

Perform the following steps on Experion Server.


Step Configure a Console 1 ATTENTION This lab is only for reference and cannot not be performed in class. (no actual console station) Action

Open Configuration Studio, if not already open. ATTENTION Note that the Console Configuration should be done on the Server.

Connect to your System. ATTENTION Refer to the partition sheet for System Name and login details.

Click on the + icon next to the Servers object, and expand the Configuration Explorer tree.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Console Functions R400:Configure Console and Console Station Step 5 Action Click on the + icon next to the server to expand the Configuration Explorer tree.

ATTENTION Refer to your partition sheet for your server Alias.

Click on Stations and Consoles.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Console Functions R400:Configure Console and Console Station Step 7 Action Click on Configure Consoles in the Task pane.

In the Console Configuration page, select a blank row

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Console Functions R400:Configure Console and Console Station Step 9 Action Click on Details tab and enter an appropriate Console Name. Select Operator sign-on required option

ATTENTION Operator Sign-on required: If selected indicates that operator-based security is used for Stations under this console and therefore operators are required to log on.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Console Functions R400:Configure Console and Console Station Step 10 Action Under the Assignment Tab, verify that the asset AQ_Item is given Full access.

Configure Console Station 11 Open Configuration Studio, if not already open.

ATTENTION Note that Console Station configuration must be done on the Server to which the Console Station is connected.

10

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Console Functions R400:Configure Console and Console Station Step 12 Connect to your System. ATTENTION Refer to the partition sheet for System Name and login details. Action

13

Click on the + icon next to the Servers object, and expand the Configuration Explorer tree.

14

Click on the + icon next to the server to expand the Configuration Explorer tree.

ATTENTION Refer to your partition sheet for your server Alias.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11

Console Functions R400:Configure Console and Console Station Step 15 Click on Stations and Consoles. Action

16

Click on Configure Console Stations in the Task pane.

12

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Console Functions R400:Configure Console and Console Station Step 17 Action In the Console Station Configuration page, select a blank row

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

13

Console Functions R400:Configure Console and Console Station Step 18 Action In the Console Station Configuration Page, under the Details Tab enter the Console Stations name against the Network Name. Select the previously configured Console (Console A) from the drop down menu.

ATTENTION If enabled, the Use Console Setting for Station Configuration setting will apply the settings of the Console to all the Console Stations and Console Extensions assigned to it. Against Console Extension Stations, there is a drop down. You can configure up to 3 Console Extensions for one Console Station.

14

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Console Functions R400:Configure Console and Console Station Step Connect to Console Station 19 ATTENTION Perform these steps on Console Station node Action

In Station application select Station Connect to the Console Station.

Connection Properties

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

15

Console Functions R400:Configure Console and Console Station Step 20 Action Observe that the Operator Sign on Window is opened in the Console Station.

Server Hostname

ATTENTION The Station Status Line shows the name of the Server to which the Console station is connected, the name of the Console to which it belongs and the name of the Console Station in the lower right hand corner. The operator Sign on Window would not have appeared if we had unchecked the Operator Sign On Required checkbox on the Console Configuration screen.

21

Enter the appropriate Username and password and login to the Console Station.

16

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Console Functions R400:Configure Console and Console Station Step Monitor the Status of the Console Station 22 In Station application select Configure System Hardware Console stations Action

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

17

Console Functions R400:Configure Console and Console Station Step 23 Action This will open the Console Station Configuration Window. Select the Console Station that we have configured previously during this lab.

24

To Monitor the Status of this Console Station click on Console Station Status.

18

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Console Functions R400:Configure Console and Console Station Step 25 Action This will open the Status Screen for the Console Station E02ESCXX. Observe the Health Status indicated by the colors of the LED symbols.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

19

Console Functions R400:Configure Console and Console Station

This page was intentionally left blank.

20

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Describe Event, Alarm, and Message Summary Customization

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Event, Alarm, and Message Summary Customization

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Introduction

Honeywell

In this lesson you will learn how to customize event, alarm and message summaries At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Filter and sort entries shown on the summaries Customize the layout of the summaries Configure security levels for customizing summaries

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Event, Alarm, and Message Summary Customization

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Introduction

Honeywell

Experion PKS Alarms and Events can originate from several sources:
C200/C200E and C300 Controllers, SCADA Controllers, DSA Servers, OPC Servers, TPS Integration, Fieldbus Devices

All come together in the same summary displays


Alarm list (containing alarms/alerts shown in Alarm, System and Alert summaries) has a limit of 4000 alarms For more information refer to Experion Operators Guide > Responding to alarms > Alarm list overflow
Indicates alarm list is full

Customization options are built into the summaries to allow effective use -- the same types of options for all four summaries: Event, Alarm, System Status and Message
Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Event, Alarm, and Message Summary Customization

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Customization Options Customize a summary by:


Filtering and sorting entries shown on the summary Organizing columns Showing or hiding the location pane Showing or hiding the details pane Enable tool tips in Location pane Display time and date in local time format

Honeywell

Save a customized view to use at a later time Print customized summaries in text format

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Event, Alarm, and Message Summary Customization

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Filtering and Sorting Customizing a Summary Layout Configuring Security Levels for Customization Enable Persistence on Summary Displays

Honeywell

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Event, Alarm, and Message Summary Customization

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Filtering and Sorting Filtering and sorting through column headings

Honeywell

Initially, events can only be filtered on the Date & Time, Location Tag, and Priority columns. Once you filter on one of these columns, you are able to filter on the other columns as well.

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Event, Alarm, and Message Summary Customization

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Filtering and Sorting Filtering and sorting through column headings


Alarms and System Status All columns available for filtering and sorting

Honeywell

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Event, Alarm, and Message Summary Customization

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Filtering and Sorting Filtering and sorting through column headings:


Messages All columns available for filtering and sorting

Honeywell

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Event, Alarm, and Message Summary Customization

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Filtering and Sorting Filtering and sorting through column headings:


Filter Applied

Honeywell

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Event, Alarm, and Message Summary Customization

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Display time and date in local time format

Honeywell

The date and time on the summary displays can be matched with local time and date format.

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Event, Alarm, and Message Summary Customization

10

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 1: Filtering and Sorting

Honeywell

Which summary cannot be filtered and sorted through all column headings?

A) Alarm summary B) Event summary C) Message summary D) Flex Station summary


The The correct answer is 'D'. You can sort though Yourcorrect answer is: is 'D'. You can sort through all Yes! The correct answer is 'D'. You can sort though No. correct answer is: is 'D'. You can sort through all Youranswer: The The correct answer No. The correct answer Yes! answer: column headings for all summaries except the Flex column headingsanywhere to continue summaries YouYou must-answeredthisquestioncompletely the Flex Incorrect answer anywhere to continue Correct answerfor allquestioncompletely did not Click thisthiscorrectly! except Incorrect--Click anywhere to continue Correct answeranywhere to before You Click this summary. correctly! YouYou You -answered thequestioncontinue did must answerthequestion before not Click Station summary. Station continuing continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit

Clear

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Event, Alarm, and Message Summary Customization

11

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Filtering and Sorting Customizing a Summary Layout Configuring Security Levels for Customization Enable Persistence on Summary Displays

Honeywell

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Event, Alarm, and Message Summary Customization

12

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Customizing Customizing icons


Show View Configuration pane Show Location pane Show Status pane Show Details pane Show Column organizer Print Print preview

Honeywell

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Event, Alarm, and Message Summary Customization

13

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Customizing Icons (1) Show Location pane

Honeywell

Number of alarms in each asset

Icon of Highest alarm in asset


14

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Event, Alarm, and Message Summary Customization

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Customizing Icons (2) Enable ToolTip on Location Pane

Honeywell

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Event, Alarm, and Message Summary Customization

15

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Customizing Icons (3) Show Details pane


Comments tab allows entry of comment text that is stored with the item in the event file

Honeywell

Alarm Count only one entry in summary

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Event, Alarm, and Message Summary Customization

16

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Customizing Icons (4)


CDA block alarm identification

Honeywell

Show Column Organizer


In R400, a Block column can be added in the Alarm and Event summaries through Column Organizer Indicates the C200/C200E,C300, and ACE block types, e.g. PIDA, DACA
CDA Block column

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Event, Alarm, and Message Summary Customization

17

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Customizing Icons (5) Show View Configuration panel


Save the customized view to use later

Honeywell

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Event, Alarm, and Message Summary Customization

18

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Customizing Icons (6) View Configuration with Location Filter


By default, Location filters are not saved as part of the view

Honeywell

To save the location filter as part of the view


Apply the required Location Tag filter Click Show View Configuration pane button on the toolbar Type the name of the view Select the Include location filter in view definition check box Click Save

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Event, Alarm, and Message Summary Customization

19

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Customizing Icons (7) Reset View

Honeywell

Resets the current operator view to the default view Applicable for Alarm, Event, Message and Alert Summary as well as System Status Display Clicking Reset View does not delete the configured view but just resets it

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Event, Alarm, and Message Summary Customization

20

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

10

Question 2: Customizing a Summary

Honeywell

You have created a customized summary. Which customizing icon do you click to save it?
A) Show Location Pane B) Show Column Organizer C) Show Details Pane D) Show View Configuration Pane
Yes! The correct answer is 'D'. To save aa No. The correct answer is 'D'. To save a No. The correct answer is 'D'. To save answer is The Yes! The correctis: Yourcorrect answer is: layout,'D'. To save a Youranswer: summary layout,click the Show answer: The correct answer customized summary customized click the Show You must answer the question before View ConfigurationtoPane. You not -Click anywhere must answer the question before YouIncorrectView Configurationtocontinue Incorrect answer anywheretoPane. Correct -answered this correctly! completely Youdid You -answered this correctly! Correct answeranywhere tocontinue did You -Click this questioncontinue not Click anywhere Click this questioncontinue completely continuing continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit

Clear

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Event, Alarm, and Message Summary Customization

21

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Filtering and Sorting Customizing a Summary Layout Configuring Security Levels for Customization Enable Persistence on Summary Displays

Honeywell

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Event, Alarm, and Message Summary Customization

22

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

11

Permissions to Customize Configure Access Level: Permissions for Customization Station Configure System Hardware Settings Summary Displays Tab Server Wide

Honeywell

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Event, Alarm, and Message Summary Customization

23

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 3: Permission to Customize

Honeywell

Who may have permission to customize alarm and event summaries?


A) Operators B) Supervisors C) Engineers D) Managers E) All of the above
Yes! The correct is: No. The correct answer is 'All of Yes! The answer is: TheNo.The correct answer is 'All of the above'. All of Yourcorrect correct answer is 'All of the above'. All of answer: The these can be configured 'All of the above'. All of Yourcorrectanswer answer is to havethe above'. All of answer: these can be configured to have permission in permission in You must answer the question before You not Click anywhere to continue must answer question before YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinueEvents Incorrect answer anywhereto continue Correct --Clickanywhere Alarms and Configuration anywhere Alarms Youdid You --answeredthis correctly! and Events Correct answerthisthis > to continue did You Click Studio correctly! not Click Studio > to completely Configuration thisquestion completely continuing Management > continuing Server-wide Alarm Event Options. Management > Server-wide Alarm Event Options. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit

Clear

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Event, Alarm, and Message Summary Customization

24

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

12

Topics Filtering and Sorting Customizing a Summary Layout Configuring Security Levels for Customization Enable Persistence on Summary Displays

Honeywell

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Event, Alarm, and Message Summary Customization

25

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Enable Persistence on Summary Displays (1)

Honeywell

Persistence is the option by which an operators customized view on a Station will be maintained on Alarm, Event and Message summaries even when operator navigates to other displays

Check to enable persistence

If de-selected, Operator changes to the view of a summary display are reset to the default view of that summary display, when operator navigates to other displays and returns back to the summary display If selected, When an operator changes the view on a summary display, this view is maintained if the operator navigates to another display and then returns to the summary display

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Event, Alarm, and Message Summary Customization

26

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

13

Enable Persistence on Summary Displays (2) Persistence option is set from Configure Wide Settings Summary Displays Tab
Option enabled by default More information available in

Honeywell Server

System Hardware

Server and Client Configuration Guide > Configuring Station and printers > Server wide settings

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Event, Alarm, and Message Summary Customization

27

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Summary
Event Alarm System Status Message

Honeywell

Experion PKS exhibits alarms and events in 4 summary displays

Summaries can be customized by:


Filtering and sorting entries Organizing columns Showing or hiding the location pane Showing or hiding the details pane

Enable Persistence on Summary displays to maintain customized view


Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Event, Alarm, and Message Summary Customization

28

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

14

Lab Example Customize Event, Alarm and Message Summaries

Honeywell

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Event, Alarm, and Message Summary Customization

29

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Conclusion

Honeywell

Describe Event, Alarm, and Message Summary Customization

Completion Certificate

Proceed to the Customize Event, Alarm and Message Summaries lab exercise
Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Event, Alarm, and Message Summary Customization

30

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

15

Describe Alarm Shelving Mechanism

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Alarm Shelving Mechanism

31

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Introduction In this lesson, you will learn the mechanism of Alarm Shelving At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Explain the Alarm Shelving mechanism Explain the behavior of Alarm Shelving With DSA In Console Stations In Consoles With OPC AE Client
Alarms PVHI

Honeywell

Acknowledged & Silenced

Shelved Alarms

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Alarm Shelving Mechanism

32

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

16

Topics Alarm Shelving Mechanism Alarm Shelving Configuration Alarm Shelving and DSA Alarm Shelving on Console Station Alarm Shelving in Consoles Alarm Shelving and OPC

Honeywell

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Alarm Shelving Mechanism

33

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

What is Alarm Shelving?

Honeywell

Alarm Shelving is used to temporarily remove an alarm from the normal alarm view
Used to remove Nuisance alarms / Irrelevant alarms due to maintenance work

When an alarm is shelved, Experion automatically:


Acknowledges the alarm Silences the alarm Removes the alarm Further instances of same alarm are combined with existing shelved alarm

Shelving action applies to a particular alarm and not for all alarms configured for a point

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Alarm Shelving Mechanism

34

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

17

Alarm Shelving Period Shelved alarm remain shelved until

Honeywell

Alarm is manually unshelved Alarm's shelving period elapses (Experion automatically unshelves the alarm)

Shelved alarm is automatically unshelved at the end of the shelving period


Alarm can be manually unshelved before shelving period has expired

If an alarm returns to normal while it is shelved


Alarm remains shelved until its shelving period elapses, or it is unshelved by the operator When unshelved it automatically disappears from the alarm list

If an alarm re-occurs while it is shelved,


Alarm remains shelved and remains acknowledged and silenced
35

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Alarm Shelving Mechanism

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Platform and Access Level Alarm Shelving can be performed on Experion Systems

Honeywell

SCADA, Process and TPS TPS will have no knowledge of the shelving state of an alarm TPS cannot indicate (via US/GUS/Native Window) if a TPS alarm is shelved Supported for DSA points Alerts can be shelved

Operator / Station with View and acknowledge or Full access SOR for an asset can perform shelving action to alarms of a point assigned to that asset

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Alarm Shelving Mechanism

36

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

18

Alarm Types and States Alarm Shelving can be performed on alarms of all point types
Process Alarms System Alarms Alerts

Honeywell

Alarms can be shelved when in the following states including any combinations of the following states:
Active/RTN alarms Acknowledged/unacknowledged alarms Disabled/enabled alarms Questionable/OK alarms Shelved/unshelved

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Alarm Shelving Mechanism

37

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Alarm Shelving Behaviour Before Shelving

Honeywell
Acknowledged & Silenced

East Tank

Alarm in the Alarm Summary

Alarms PVHI

Shelved Alarms

After Shelving
Acknowledged & Silenced East Tank Re-occurs PVHI No Alarm in the Alarm Summary Alarms PVHI

Shelved Alarms

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Alarm Shelving Mechanism

38

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

19

Question 1: Alarm Shelving What is Alarm Shelving?


A) The mechanism by which an alarm is temporarily removed from the 'all alarms' view of the Alarm Summary display B) The mechanism by which an alarm is permanently deleted from the 'all alarms' view of the Alarm Summary display C) The mechanism by which all alarms for a point are disabled from the point detail display
Yes! The correct answer is 'A'. Alarm Shelving is the mechanism by No. The correct answer is 'A'. Alarm Shelving is the mechanism by Yes! Yourcorrect answer is:'A'. Alarm Shelving is the mechanism by No. The correct answer is 'A'. Alarm Shelving is the mechanism by The answer: is Your answer: is: which an You musttemporarily removed from the 'all alarms' view of which analarm is temporarily question before alarm You notis Click this question completely'all alarms' view of mustanswer the removed from the answer the question before You Correct ---Clickanywhere to continue Incorrect answeranywhere to continue the AlarmIncorrectanswered this iscorrectly!used by operators to hide SummaryClick anywhere to continue Youdid You answer anywhere to continue did You Click thisItiscorrectly! not continuing typically the AlarmCorrect -answered this typically used by operators to hide Summarydisplay. Itquestion completely display. continuing "nuisance" alarms. "nuisance" alarms. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Honeywell

Acknowledged & Silenced PVHI Alarms Shelved Alarms

Submit
39

Clear

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Alarm Shelving Mechanism

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 2: Operator / Station

Honeywell

What access level is required to shelve an alarm of a point belonging to a particular asset?
A) View Only B) View and Acknowledge / Full Access C) No Access D) All of the above

The correct answer Yourcorrect answer is: The answer: Your answer: Yes! The correct answer is is: An Operator/Station with No. The correct answer is 'B'. An Operator/Station with Yes! TheYou correct answer is'B'. An Operator/Station with 'B'. No. The correct answer isthe thisOperator/Station with 'B'. An No. The correct did answer'B'. An Operator/Station with 'View You answeris 'B'. thisquestion before No. The Incorrect-answered thequestionrights correctanswer answerAn Operator/Station You not question must not is before 'View andYoumust-answeredthisquestionrightsto an with 'View Correctdid Clickanswer Access'continue You answer 'Full correctly! 'View and Acknowledge' anywhere to continue to anasset Acknowledge' anywhere to asset Correct Click anywhere to continue Incorrect-Click //'Full Access'continue You Click anywhere to this and Acknowledge' //-'FullAccess' rights to an asset can perform completelycorrectly! continuing and perform shelving action to alarms of aan asset can perform Acknowledge' 'Fullcompletely Access' rights to continuing can perform shelving action to alarms of apoint belonging can point shelving action to alarms of a point belonging tobelonging shelving action to alarms of asset. belonging to that asset. that asset. to that a point to that asset. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere Click anywhere to to continue. Click anywhere tocontinue. continue.

Submit
40

Clear

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Alarm Shelving Mechanism

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

20

Question 3 : Alarm Shelving Alarm Shelving actions can be performed on


A) Process alarms B) System alarms C) Alerts D) All of the above

Honeywell

Yes! The correct answer isis: of the above'. Alarm Shelving No. The correct answer is 'All of the above'. Alarm Shelving No. The correct answer is'All of the above'. Alarm Shelving Yes! The correct answer isis: of the above'. Alarm Shelving The correct answer 'All Your answer: answer: The correct answer 'All actions Yourbe performed on process alarms, system alarms actionscan be performed on process alarms, system alarms can must answer the question before You You You Click anywhere andthe question before You didmustanswer anywherecontinue Correct not--answerthis questioncontinue Incorrect answeredthis questioncompletely and this alerts. You didnotClickanywhere correctly! Correct--Click continuingto to continue Incorrect answeredthis correctly! You answer alerts. continue Click anywhere to to completely continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit

Clear

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Alarm Shelving Mechanism

41

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Alarm Shelving Mechanism Alarm Shelving Configuration Alarm Shelving and DSA Alarm Shelving on Console Station Alarm Shelving in Consoles Alarm Shelving and OPC

Honeywell

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Alarm Shelving Mechanism

42

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

21

Alarm Shelving Tab

Honeywell

Configure > Alarm and Event management > Alarms > Alarm Shelving

Default configuration Using Sub-priorities allows alarms within max priority to be excluded from shelving

20 reasons available with four preconfigured (can be changed)

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Alarm Shelving Mechanism

43

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Alarm Shelving Reasons


Alarm Shelving Reason
Nuisance Alarm

Honeywell
Max Time Max Priority Max SubPriority
15

Description

Default Time

Minimum Security Level required


Oper

Comments required

Prevent beyond shift boundary


No

Alarms which do not require a specific action/response from operator (Background alarms) Alarms that remain in their alarm state for an extended period of time after being acknowledged Alarms occurring due to maintenance work Alarms occurring due to long time maintenance work (e.g. 1 to 2 days)

2 hrs

8 hrs

Urgent

No

Standing Alarm

4 hrs

8 hrs

Urgent

15

Oper

No

No

Maintenance Maintenance long-term

1 day 1 week

1 week 3 weeks

Urgent Urgent

15 15

Oper Oper

No No

No No

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Alarm Shelving Mechanism

44

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

22

Shelving Time Default Time / Max Time: Default / Maximum time for which the alarm is shelved
When the time expires, alarm returns to its non-shelved state

Honeywell
30 minutes 1 Hour 2 Hours 4 Hours 8 Hours 12 Hours 1 Day 2 Days 3 Days 4 Days 5 Days 1 Week 2 Weeks 3 Weeks

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Alarm Shelving Mechanism

45

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Alarm Shelving Mechanism Alarm Shelving Configuration Alarm Shelving and DSA Alarm Shelving on Console Station Alarm Shelving in Consoles Alarm Shelving and OPC

Honeywell

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Alarm Shelving Mechanism

46

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

23

Distributed System Architecture (DSA) Settings

Honeywell

Shelved state of alarm is published to all subscribing servers via DSA


Depends on configuration of Alarm Acknowledgement /Shelving Policy System wide Any alarm shelving action initiated on one server is synchronized on all other DSA connected servers within the system Local Any alarm shelving action initiated on a server occurs only on that server

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Alarm Shelving Mechanism

47

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Alarm Shelving and DSA

Honeywell

Behaviour of alarm shelving via DSA similar to alarm acknowledgement via DSA
Events are generated when an alarm is shelved

In a system with servers in DSA with previous version of Experion, alarm shelving works as follows:
Alarm can be shelved on an Experion R400 server regardless of which server the alarm was generated on If an alarm is shelved on an Experion R400 server, the same alarm is acknowledged (not shelved) on servers with previous versions of Experion If an alarm reoccurs, it remains shelved on the Experion R400 server and is acknowledged on servers with previous versions of Experion

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Alarm Shelving Mechanism

48

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

24

Shelving an Alarm on the Publishing Server

Honeywell

Multiple servers all connected via DSA with policy of System wide acknowledgement / shelving enabled
When alarm originating from the local server is shelved on local server, Alarm is shelved on all servers in the system with same shelving period and shelving reason An event is generated on the local server
DSA Alarm
2 hours, Nuisance 2 hours, Nuisance

PVHI DSA PVHI Event Local Server DSA Remote Server 1


2 hours, Nuisance

PVHI

Remote Server 2

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Alarm Shelving Mechanism

49

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Shelving an Alarm on a Subscribing Server

Honeywell

Multiple servers all connected via DSA with a policy of System wide acknowledgement / shelving enabled
When an alarm originating from a remote server is shelved on the local server The alarm is shelved on all the other servers in the system with the same shelving period reason Event is generated on the local server where alarm is shelved and remote server where alarm originated
DSA
2 hours, Nuisance

Alarm

2 hours, Nuisance

PVHI DSA Event Remote Server 1


2 hours, Nuisance

PVHI Event Local Server

DSA PVHI

Remote Server 2
Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Alarm Shelving Mechanism

50

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

25

Shelving an Alarm Locally Multiple servers all connected via DSA with a policy of Local acknowledgement / shelving enabled

Honeywell

When an alarm originating from a remote server / local server is shelved, The alarm is shelved only on the local server An event is generated only on the local server where the alarm is shelved DSA
Alarm
2 hours, Nuisance

PVHI Event Local Server

DSA Remote Server 1

DSA

Remote Server 2

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Alarm Shelving Mechanism

51

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 4 : Alarm Shelving and DSA

Honeywell

Assume multiple servers are connected via DSA and the local acknowledgement / shelving option is selected . If an alarm originating from the local server is shelved on the local server then
A) An alarm is shelved on the local and remote server B) An alarm is shelved only on the remote server C) An alarm is shelved only on the local server D) A shelving related event will be generated on the remote server
Yes! Whencorrectanswer is: are connected via DSA and the 'local No. Whenanswer: servers are connected via DSA and the 'local No. The multiple servers are connected via DSA and the 'local Your multiple The multiple No. When answer: servers Yes! Yourcorrect answer is: are connected via DSA and the 'local No. Whenmultiple servers acknowledgement /shelving' option is selected, and, ififan alarm acknowledgement /shelving' option is selected, and, if an alarm acknowledgement /shelving' option is selected, and, if an alarm acknowledgement answer the question before and, an alarm You must /shelving' option is selected, You mustClick this question completely answer before originating from You -answered thequestioncontinueitwill be shelved on originating Incorrectlocal serverthisshelvedcompletely be shelved on YouIncorrect-answeredthisquestion then, it will Correct answeranywhere to continue originating from the answer anywhereto continue it will be shelved on originating from not local continuingshelvedthen, it will be shelved on from You local server is shelved then, the server is correctly! Youdid the --Clickanywhere to continue Correct local server is correctly! did the Click anywhere to then, not Click this is shelved continuing the local server only. the local server only. the local server only. the local server only. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.
52

Submit

Clear

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Alarm Shelving Mechanism

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

26

Topics Alarm Shelving Mechanism Alarm Shelving Mechanism Alarm Shelving and DSA Alarm Shelving on Console Station Alarm Shelving in Consoles Alarm Shelving and OPC

Honeywell

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Alarm Shelving Mechanism

53

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Alarm Shelving on Console Station Alarms can be shelved/unshelved on Console Station


Console Station ES-C

Honeywell
Experion Server (ESV)

All shelving functionality available on Console Station when associated Server is available Functionality unavailable on Console Station when associated Server is unavailable No Configuration changes in Alarm Shelving configuration page in Server Wide Settings (view only) No view of Event Summary Unable to create/generate reports (alarm summary report is the exception) Unable to record comment when shelving alarm Operator is restricted from selecting a reason that requires comments If all reasons require comments, then shelving is effectively disabled until server is available

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Alarm Shelving Mechanism

54

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

27

Topics Alarm Shelving Mechanism Alarm Shelving Mechanism Alarm Shelving and DSA Alarm Shelving on Console Station Alarm Shelving in Consoles Alarm Shelving and OPC

Honeywell

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Alarm Shelving Mechanism

55

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Alarm Shelving and Consoles

Honeywell

Alarm/Messages must be acknowledged policy applies for Alarm Shelving Alarms/Messages must be acknowledged At each Console
When an alarm is acknowledged/shelved in a Console, it is acknowledged/ shelved on all stations within that Console, and all stations not in a console

Alarms/Messages must be acknowledged Once (applies to all Stations)


When an alarm is acknowledged/shelved on a station the alarm is acknowledged or shelved on all stations in the cluster (Console/Console Extension/Flex)

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Alarm Shelving Mechanism

56

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

28

Scenario : Alarm Shelving in Consoles


Cluster A Console Scope Server A ACK/Shelved Console 1 Console Station A1* Shelve Alarm ACK/Shelved Console Station A2 ACK/Shelved Console 2 Console Station A3 Flex Station B1 ACK/Shelved Console Station B1 ACK/Shelved Cluster B Console Scope Server B ACK/Shelved

Honeywell
Cluster C Cluster Wide Scope Server C ACK/Shelved Console 3 Console Station C1 ACK/Shelved

DSA

Console Station B2 ACK/Shelved

DSA

Console Station C2 ACK/Shelved Console Station C3 ACK/Shelved Flex Station C1 ACK/Shelved

Not Shelved
Flex Station A1 ACK/Shelved

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Alarm Shelving Mechanism

57

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 5: Alarm Shelving in Console Station Which of the following statements is true? If the cluster server is unavailable then.
A) Alarms cannot be shelved from the Console Station B) Alarms can be shelved from Console Station but comments cannot be recorded when shelving an alarm C) Configuration changes can be made from Console Station in the Alarm Shelving tab in the Server Wide Settings display D) Events for alarms shelved from Console Station will be seen in the Event Summary display
Yes! The answer: answer is B. If the cluster server is not available No. The correct answer is B. If the cluster server is not available The correct answer is: Yourcorrect answer is: Yes! The answer: answer is B. If the cluster server is not available No. Thecorrect answer is B. If the cluster server is not available The correct Your correct then, alarms can be shelved from the Console Station but comments then, alarms can be shelved from the Console Station but comments cannot -Click this for shelved You must Yoube Clickanywhere before alarms. YouIncorrectanswered this correctly!continuing Incorrect beClick anywhere before alarms. Correct answer questionshelved cannot - recorded questioncontinue Correct answer anywhereto continue You mustanswerClickanywhereto continue Youdid not --answered this correctly!continuing did You recorded for to completely answerthe question to continue not the this question completely Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue. Console Station (ES-C)

Honeywell

Experion Server (ESV)

Submit
58

Clear

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Alarm Shelving Mechanism

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

29

Question 6: Alarm Shelving in Consoles

Honeywell

The alarm acknowledgement policy has been selected as At each Console. An alarm is shelved from Console Station A1 within Console 1. It will be shelved in Console Scope
A) All Stations in Console 1 B) Cluster Server C) All Flex Stations connected to cluster server D) All of the above
No. The correct is 'All of the above'. If the alarm Yes! The correct is 'All of the above'. If the alarm No. The correct is 'All of the above'. If the alarm Yes! The correct is 'All of the above'. If the alarm acknowledgement policy has been selected as At each acknowledgement policy has been selected as At each The correct answer Yourcorrect answer is: Your answer: The answer: Console and an alarmis: shelved from a Console Station Console and an alarmis shelved from a Console Station is You A1You must answer thenquestion before beshelved in withindid not answer the alarm will You mustClick anywhere alarm will answer this correctly! not question A1You You Console1 the thisto continuebe shelved in withinConsole1 then the question Incorrect-answered the question before Correctdid Clickanswer thisto continue Correct --Clickanywhere to continue You Clickanywhere to continue anywhere completely continuing "All Incorrect-answered this correctly! server", and "All "All stations within Console", "Cluster server", and "All completely "Cluster continuing "All stations within Console", "Cluster server", and "All stations within Console", "Cluster server", and "All "All stations within Console", flex stations connected to cluster server" flex stations connected to cluster server" Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue. Server A Console 1 Console Station A1* Shelve Alarm Console Station A2

Console 2 Console Station A3 Flex Station A1 Flex Station A2

Submit
59

Clear
EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Alarm Shelving Mechanism

Topics Alarm Shelving Mechanism Alarm Shelving Mechanism Alarm Shelving and DSA Alarm Shelving on Console Station Alarm Shelving in Consoles Alarm Shelving and OPC

Honeywell

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Alarm Shelving Mechanism

60

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

30

Alarm Shelving and OPC Alarm and Event

Honeywell

An alarm originating from the third party OPC AE (Alarm and Event) server can be shelved on the Experion server
Acknowledgement is sent to the third party OPC AE server for all reoccurrences of the alarm

Experion Server PVHIHI


lved She

OPC AE Server

PVHIHI Alarm Acknowledged

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Alarm Shelving Mechanism

61

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Conclusion Describe Alarm Shelving Mechanism

Honeywell

Completion Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material


Alarms and Event Notifications Describe Alarm Shelving Mechanism

62

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

31

Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

63

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Introduction In this lesson, you will learn how to configure Alarm Shelving At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Configure alarm shelving Shelve, unshelve, reshelve alarms and alerts Generate reports for shelving related actions
Acknowledged & Silenced

Honeywell

PVHI Alarms

Shelved Alarms

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

64

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

32

Topics Alarm Shelving Configuration Shelve Alarm Reshelve Alarm Alarm State Icon Unshelve Alarm Events and Reports

Honeywell

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

65

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Alarm Shelving Configuration

Honeywell

Configure

Alarm & Event Management Alarm Shelving

Alarms

20 reasons available with four preconfigured (can be changed) Default reason used for quick shelving
66

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

33

Enable Alarm Shelving

Honeywell

If selected the alarm shelving option is enabled

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

67

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Disable Alarm Shelving

Honeywell

If de-selected the alarm shelving option is disabled

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

68

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

34

Disable Quick Shelving

Honeywell

If option is cleared, user can shelve alarm without providing reason

Single button is broken into two buttons 1. Shelve alarm 2. Provide comments (optional)

Alarm will be shelved using the default reason set in Alarm Shelving tab

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

69

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Shelving Time Default Time / Max Time


Default / Maximum time for which the alarm is shelved for a particular reason When the time expires, alarm returns to its non-shelved state

Honeywell
30 minutes 1 Hour 2 Hours 4 Hours 8 Hours 12 Hours 1 Day 2 Days 3 Days 4 Days 5 Days 1 Week 2 Weeks 3 Weeks

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

70

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

35

Max Priority and Sub Priority Maximum priority and sub priority of alarms that can be shelved using a particular reason

Honeywell

Minimum security level an operator must have to use a particular reason to shelve an alarm

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

71

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Alarm Shelving Comments

Honeywell

OK button enabled (user can shelve alarm without providing comments)

User must enter comment to shelve alarm OK button is grayed out until comment is entered
Alarms and Event Notifications Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

72

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

36

Prevent Beyond Shift

Honeywell

Enable the Prevent beyond shift option if the operator must not be allowed to shelve an alarm beyond the end of the current shift

Configuration Studio: Schedules > Configure Shifts

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

73

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 1: Alarm Shelving Configuration Where is Alarm Shelving configured ?

Honeywell

A) Alarms Page B) Flex or Console Station Configuration page C) Server Wide Settings page D) Alarm Summary display

The correct answer is 'A'. Alarm Shelving TheYes! The correct is: Yourcorrect answer answer is 'A'. Alarm Shelving answer: TheYes! The correct is: Yourcorrect answer answer is 'A'. Alarm Shelving answer: No. The correct answer is 'A'. Alarm Shelving No. settings are configured in the Alarm Shelving tab settings areconfigured in the Alarm Shelving configured in the You must answer the question before settingsmustClick anywhere toAlarmShelving tab You not answer this questioncontinue answer before settingsare-answeredthe questioncompletely are configured in correctly! YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncompletely tab Incorrect---Click on this Alarmscontinue Correct located anywhere tocontinue Click anywhere tocontinue Correct located on the Alarms Page. Youdid Youlocated anywhere to Alarm Shelving tab did Youlocated on the Alarms Page. not answer on the correctly! Click this Alarms Page. this the continuing continuing located on the Alarms Page located on the Alarms Page. Page Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
74

Clear

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

37

Topics Alarm Shelving Configuration Shelve Alarm Reshelve Alarm Alarm State Icon Unshelve Alarm Events and Reports

Honeywell

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

75

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Alarm Shelving Displays

Honeywell

Alarms can be shelved on the Alarm Summary display and the System Status display

Alerts can be shelved from the Alert Summary display


76

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

38

Shelve Alarm

Honeywell

Shelve Alarm button disabled if no alarm is selected Shelved alarms count

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

77

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Shelve Alarm

Honeywell

Right-click and select Shelve Alarm

Select alarm and click Shelve Alarm

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

78

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

39

Alarm Shelving Dialog

Honeywell

Select Reason Select Alarm Shelving Period If enabled, alarm will unshelve when it returns to normal condition Enter comments

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

79

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

View Shelved Alarms

Honeywell

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

80

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

40

Details of Shelved Alarms

Honeywell

Shelved Alarms count

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

81

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 2: Alarm Shelving From which of the following locations can alarms be shelved?
A) Point Detail display B) Alarm Summary display C) Faceplate D) All of the above
Alarms

Honeywell

Acknowledged & Silenced

PVHI

Shelved Alarms

The correct answer is: Yourcorrect answer is: Youranswer: answer: The The correct answer is 'B'. Alarms/Alerts can Yes! The correct answer is 'B'. Alarms/Alerts can No. The correct answer is 'B'. Alarms/Alerts can Yes! The correct answer is 'B'. Alarms/Alerts can No. be shelved only from summary displays i.e. be shelved only from summary displays i.e. Alarm Correct -answered this correctly!continuing and AlarmSummary, Clickanywhereto and Alert Summary,System Status to continue You must You answer anywherebeforeAlert YouIncorrect--Clickanywhere before You Incorrect -answered this correctly!continuing must not answerquestion to continue Correct Click this questioncontinue answer System Status completely the question Youdid answer the displays. tocontinue did You Click anywhere not this question completely summary displays. summary Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
82

Clear

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

41

Question 3: Monitor Alarm Shelving

Honeywell

When an alarm is shelved from the Alarm Summary display, it can be monitored from _________________ in Alarm Summary?

A) 'all alarms' view B) 'urgent and high priority alarms' view C) 'shelved alarms' view D) 'unacknowledged alarms' view
The correct answer is: is 'C'. On shelving an alarm in Alarm Yourcorrect answer is: The The correct answer is 'C'. On shelving an alarm in Alarm Youranswer: Yes! answer: No. The correct answer is 'C'. On shelving an alarm in Alarm Yes! The correct answer is 'C'. On shelving an alarm in Alarm No. The correct answer Summary display it can be monitored from the 'shelved alarms' Summary displayanswered this correctly!continuing can from You must You --answered monitoredcontinue 'shelved alarms' YouIncorrect-itClickanywhere to continue Correct -Click be this correctly! the Youdid answerClickanywhere before did You not thisquestion completely question Correct Click this view. to completely You Incorrect answer anywherebefore continuing must not answerquestion to continue answerthe anywhere to continue the question view. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
83

Clear

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Alarm Shelving Configuration Shelve Alarm Reshelve Alarm Alarm State Icon Unshelve Alarm Events and Reports

Honeywell

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

84

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

42

Reshelve Alarm
reshelve the alarm by clicking Shelve Alarm

Honeywell

An alarm can be reshelved before its shelving time has elapsed

Remaining Time Increased

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

85

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Alarm Shelving Configuration Shelve Alarm Reshelve Alarm Alarm State Icon Unshelve Alarm Events and Reports

Honeywell

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

86

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

43

Icons for Shelved States


Icon Description
Shelved Active Urgent Alarm Shelved RTN Urgent Alarm Shelved Active High Alarm Shelved RTN High Alarm Shelved Active Low Alarm Shelved RTN Low Alarm Shelved Active Alert Shelved RTN Alert Shelved Point

Honeywell
Shown
Active urgent priority alarm in shelved state RTN urgent priority alarm in shelved state Active high priority alarm in shelved state RTN high priority alarm in shelved state Active low priority alarm in shelved state RTN low priority alarm in shelved state Active alert in shelved state RTN alert in shelved state Point has only shelved alarms

Displays
Alarm Summary, System Status Summary Alarm Summary, System Status Summary Alarm Summary, System Status Summary Alarm Summary, System Status Summary Alarm Summary, System Status Summary Alarm Summary, System Status Summary Alert Summary Display Alert Summary Display Location pane of Alarm, System Status and Alert Summary displays, Custom Displays, Faceplates and Detail displays.

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

87

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Shelved Alarm State Icon


Icon indicating shelved alarm state on Faceplate Icon indicating shelved alarm state

Honeywell

Icon indicating shelved alarm state on HMIWeb display


Alarms and Event Notifications Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

Icon indicating shelved alarm state on Detail display


88
EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

44

Location Pane Asset in location pane will indicate


Alarm count calculated without the shelved alarms Tool tip will display shelved alarm count

Honeywell

If asset has shelved alarms and no non-shelved alarms


Shelved icon is shown next to the asset

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

89

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Alarm Shelving Configuration Shelve Alarm Reshelve Alarm Alarm State Icon Unshelve Alarm Events and Reports

Honeywell

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

90

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

45

Unshelve Alarm

Honeywell

Unshelve alarm from shortcut menu or Unshelve Alarm button present in Alarm Summary display

Right-click and select Unshelve Alarm

Select alarm and click Unshelve Alarm

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

91

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Unshelve Alarm

Honeywell

Unshelving an alarm will remove the alarm from the shelved alarms list.
If the tag is still in alarm, it will return to the summary display If the tag is not in an alarm condition, it will be removed from the alarm summary

No Alarm

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

92

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

46

View Recently Unshelved Alarms

Honeywell

Standard view for unshelved active alarms, returned from the shelve state within the last hour

1. 2. 3.

Unshelved Time: Default column for this view Sorted to show alarm with latest unshelved alarms first Shows active alarms unshelved within last hour
93
EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

View All Alarms View all alarms: Shelved and Unshelved


Click here

Honeywell

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

94

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

47

Question 4: Unshelve Alarms

Honeywell

Which alarms can the user view from the recently unshelved alarms view in the Alarm Summary display?
A) Active alarms unshelved within the last hour B) Return to Normal alarms unshelved within last two hours C) Active alarms unshelved within the last two hours D) Return to Normal alarms unshelved within the last hour

The correct answer is: Yourcorrect answer is: Yes! answer: No. The Correct Answer is 'A'. User can view the active alarms unshelved The answer: Your The Correct Answer is 'A'. User can view the active alarms unshelved Yes! The Correct Answer is 'A'. User can view the active alarms unshelved No. The Correct Answer is 'A'. User can view the active alarms unshelved within the last hour in the recently unshelved alarms view in Alarm within the last hour in the recently unshelved alarms view in Alarm You must You -answered this correctly!continuing YouIncorrect-answered this correctly! Incorrect --Clickanywhere before Correct answerquestion to continue Youdid not answer anywhereto continue did You Click anywhereto completely not Summary question completely You mustanswerClickanywherebefore continuing Correct Click this questioncontinue answerthe question to continue the this display. Summarydisplay. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.
95

Submit

Clear

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Alarm Shelving Configuration Shelve Alarm Reshelve Alarm Alarm State Icon Unshelve Alarm Events and Reports

Honeywell

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

96

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

48

Events

Honeywell

All shelving actions are recorded in the Event Summary database

Action for shelved alarm

Action for unshelved alarm

Action for reshelved alarm

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

97

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Alarm Summary Report Generate a report in Alarm Summary

Honeywell

Alarm Summary report can be requested with the filter Shelved alarms to view only shelved alarms

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

98

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

49

Alarm and Event DSA Report Alarm and Event DSA report

Honeywell

Supports filtering on Action field Used to generate a report which details alarm shelving related actions

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

99

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 5: Alarm Shelving Events

Honeywell

When an alarm is shelved in the Alarm Summary display _________


A) An event is generated in Event Summary B) A message is generated in the Message Summary C) An alert is generated in the Alerts Summary D) All of the above

The correct answer is: Your correct answer is: The answer: Your answer: Yes! The correct answer is 'A'. Events are generated for each No. The correct answer is 'A'. Events are generated for each Yes! The correct answer is 'A'. Events are generated for each No. The correct answer is 'A'. Events are generated for each shelving action (Shelve, Unshelve, Reshelve) which can be shelving action (Shelve, Unshelve, Reshelve) which can be You must You -answered this correctly!continuing YouIncorrect-answered this correctly! Incorrect in Clickanywhere before Correct --Click question tocontinue seen Click question tocontinue You mustanswerClickanywherebefore continuing You Eventthis questioncompletely answerthe Summary continue the Summary completely Youdidseenanswer anywhereto display. Correct answerthis questioncontinue didnot inEventanywheretodisplay. not Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
100

Clear

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

50

Summary

Honeywell

Alarm Shelving is configured in Alarm Shelving tab in Alarms page Alarms can be shelved from the Alarm Summary/ System Status displays Alerts can be shelved from the Alerts Summary display Shelved Alarms/Alerts can be viewed using the
Shelved Alarms view / Shelved Alerts view

Unshelved Alarms/Alerts can be viewed using the


Recently Unshelved Alarms view / Recently Unshelved Alerts view Active unshelved alarms/alerts can be viewed within the past hour

Events are generated for every alarm/alert that is shelved/ unshelved / reshelved A report showing alarm shelving actions can be generated from the
Alarm Summary display Alarm and Event DSA report

Alarms and Event Notifications Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

101

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Conclusion

Honeywell

Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

Completion Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material


Alarms and Event Notifications Describe the Configuration and Operation of Alarm Shelving

102

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

51

Topic: Alarms and Event Notifications


Contents
Customize Event, Alarm, and Message Summaries .............................................................................3 Configure Alarm Shelving ....................................................................................................................27

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

This page was intentionally left blank.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarms and Event Notifications Customize Event, Alarm, and Message Summaries

Customize Event, Alarm, and Message Summaries


Practice
Student Partition sheet Team ## Windows Login User Password System Name Server Alias Supv Password Engr Password E02ESV##_System E02ESV##_Server supv engr Student

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Alarms and Event Notifications Customize Event, Alarm, and Message Summaries

This page was intentionally left blank.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarms and Event Notifications Customize Event, Alarm, and Message Summaries Prerequisites

Station Navigation familiarization Station connected to a server Knowledge Builder available

Introduction

During this lab, you will customize the Event Summary in Station. Customize Event Summary using various methods.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Alarms and Event Notifications Customize Event, Alarm, and Message Summaries Procedure

Perform the following procedures


Step Customize the Event Summary 1 Login to Windows with Student User if not already logged in. Action

ATTENTION Refer your partition sheet for password details.

2 3 4

Open your Static Station, if not already open. Logon with the password: mngr. Select View > Events > Event Summary from the Station menu bar. In the resulting Event Summary display, note the customizing icons at the upper right.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarms and Event Notifications Customize Event, Alarm, and Message Summaries Step 5 Action Click the Show Column Organizer button.

The Column Organizer window appears.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Alarms and Event Notifications Customize Event, Alarm, and Message Summaries Step 6 Action Scroll down and clear the Action checkbox to remove that column from the summary.

Click to select the Category checkbox and click Move Up enough times to place it above the Condition checkbox.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarms and Event Notifications Customize Event, Alarm, and Message Summaries Step 7 8 Action Select the Value checkbox and click Move Up enough times to place it above the Priority checkbox. Select the Block checkbox and click Move Up to place it below the Condition checkbox. ATTENTION Starting from R310, a Block field can be added to the Alarm and Event display summaries using the Column Organizer. This field displays the C200/C200E, C300 and ACE blocks.

9 10

Click OK. Note the new position of the Category, Block and Value columns.

11

Click the Location Tag column heading. Select (Custom Filter).

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Alarms and Event Notifications Customize Event, Alarm, and Message Summaries Step 12 Action From the Custom filter window select AQ_item and click OK. Note that only events for asset AQ appear.

13

Reduce the width of the Location Tag and Source columns.

10

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarms and Event Notifications Customize Event, Alarm, and Message Summaries Step 14 Action Click the Show View Configuration Pane button.

15

Enter your view name (Team##) in the Save current view as field.

You can save your views including options such as filtering and sorting, or column order and column width. Once the customizations are saved they need not be redone.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11

Alarms and Event Notifications Customize Event, Alarm, and Message Summaries Step 16 Action Select the two checkboxes as shown to include the asset filter in the custom view and to assign the view to a specific asset.

ATTENTION By default, Location filters are not saved as part of the view. To save the location filter as part of the view, the Include location filter in view definition checkbox must be selected. However, all other column filters like Date &Time, Source, Category, Condition, Priority etc. are by default saved as part of the view.

17

Enter asset AQ in the Assign view to location field.

ATTENTION You can restrict access to a view by assigning the view to an asset. Only those with access to the asset, in this case AQ, can access the view.

12

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarms and Event Notifications Customize Event, Alarm, and Message Summaries Step 18 Click Action icon to save your customized view.

19

Click the View combo box. Note that Team## appears in the list. If you did not have access to AQ, it would not appear in the list.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

13

Alarms and Event Notifications Customize Event, Alarm, and Message Summaries Step 20 Action Click the Reset View button on the toolbar. A Warning appears in the message bar. Click Yes to continue.

ATTENTION Note that on clicking Reset View the following changes we made in an earlier step have been reset: 1. Column Action was removed. 2. Column Category was selected. 3. Column Location Tag was filtered. 4. Column width of Location Tag and Source columns were reduced. 5. Column Value was moved up in order before the Priority column. Clicking Reset View does not delete the configured view but just resets it. The Team## view can still be applied by selecting it from the View drop-down, as shown below.

14

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarms and Event Notifications Customize Event, Alarm, and Message Summaries Step 21 Action The Persistence option in the Summary Displays tab on the Server-wide Station Settings display is enabled by default. Open the Server-wide Station Settings display (Configure System Hardware Server Wide Settings) and verify that the option Enable persistence on summary displays is checked.

ATTENTION If the persistence option is selected then, when an operator changes the view on a summary display, this view is maintained if the operator navigates to another display and then returns to the summary display. If deselected, the view is reset to the default summary view.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

15

Alarms and Event Notifications Customize Event, Alarm, and Message Summaries Step 22 In the Events Summary display, Click the View combo box. Select the Team## view. Action

23 Navigate to the System Menu page by clicking on the 24 25 icon in the Station toolbar. Navigate back to the Event Summary. The Team## View is still seen as the persistence option is enabled. Click Configure System Hardware Server Wide Settings.

Select the Summary Displays tab. De-select the option Enable persistence on summary displays.

26

Navigate to the Events Summary display. The Team## view is not seen. Instead the all recent events with live updates view will be seen, which is the default view for the Events Summary display. .

16

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarms and Event Notifications Customize Event, Alarm, and Message Summaries Step 27 Action Click the Show location pane button to call up the asset tree at the left as shown below.

28

In the Location pane, select Asset AQ_item to list only the events for that asset in the Event Summary.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

17

Alarms and Event Notifications Customize Event, Alarm, and Message Summaries Step 29 30 Action Select any event appearing in the summary window by clicking the event. Click the Show details pane button as indicated below.

31

The event details pane appears in the lower half of the Station window.

32

Click the Comments tab.

18

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarms and Event Notifications Customize Event, Alarm, and Message Summaries Step 33 Enter your comments as shown. Action

34

Click Save Comments.

The comment you entered is saved with the event.

ATTENTION Procedures and options for customizing the Alarm Summary and the Message Summary are identical to those of the Event Summary.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

19

Alarms and Event Notifications Customize Event, Alarm, and Message Summaries Step Restrict Customization through Access Levels 1 2 Open Configuration Studio, if not already open. Connect to your System. Action

ATTENTION Refer to the Partition Sheet for details.

Click on Stations and Consoles under your assigned server.. Click on Configure server wide station settings.

Select the Summary Displays tab.

20

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarms and Event Notifications Customize Event, Alarm, and Message Summaries Step 5 Action Configure the Alarm, Alert, Event, SOE and Message Summary Restrictions as shown below by clicking the icon each combo box and selecting from the drop down list. Note that we are excluding oper from any of these activities.

6 7

We will now test these settings. Open Station, if not already open, with oper level. Press <F3> to call up the Alarm Summary.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

21

Alarms and Event Notifications Customize Event, Alarm, and Message Summaries Step 8 Action Click the View target and select all alarms. Since the Full page acknowledgement and other customization commands have been set to Supv or higher, the Acknowledge Page button, command icons\panes, and filter pulldowns are dimmed as shown.

22

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarms and Event Notifications Customize Event, Alarm, and Message Summaries Step 9 Action At the OPER access level you can view different assets by clicking on the Show location pane button as shown below. At the OPER access level, you will not be able to perform any sorting or filtering functions because the access levels for Filtering and Sorting functions have been assigned to SUPV. Click on an asset in the location pane with OPER access level. The system will give you a message Server-wide security settings prevent filtering on the location pane.

10

Logon as Supv with password supv and click the Reload Page

. button.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

23

Alarms and Event Notifications Customize Event, Alarm, and Message Summaries Step 11 Click the column organizer icon. Action

The Column Organizer dialog box appears since supv is the configured minimum access level.

Click OK. 12 Sign on as engineer with password engr and click the Reload Page . button.

The Pause button becomes available according to the configuration, as shown below. Since the engineer access level is higher than the supervisor access level the Acknowledge Page button also remains highlighted.

13

Click the Pause button to stop the alarm summary screen from refreshing with the new alarms in the system. Note the appearance. Click Resume to refresh the alarm summary with the new alarms.

24

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarms and Event Notifications Customize Event, Alarm, and Message Summaries Step 14 Action Click the Show view configuration pane button. As configured, with Engr access, the saving view functions are enabled.

Close the window. 15 Change to Mngr access with password mngr. As configured, the print preview and printing buttons become enabled.

16

Click the Print Preview button.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

25

Alarms and Event Notifications Customize Event, Alarm, and Message Summaries Step 17 Action The Alarm Summary Print preview window appears.

18

Click Close.

26

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarms and Event Notifications Configure Alarm Shelving

Configure Alarm Shelving


Student Partition sheet Team ## Windows Login User Password System Name Server Alias Supv Password Engr Password E02ESV##_System E02ESV##_Server supv engr Student

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

27

Alarms and Event Notifications Configure Alarm Shelving

This page was intentionally left blank.

28

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarms and Event Notifications Configure Alarm Shelving Practice

Prerequisites

Station Navigation Familiarization Familiarization with the Alarm Summary display and Event Summary display Knowledge Builder Available.

Introduction

In this lab, you will use Configuration Studio to configure Alarm Shelving. Navigate to the Alarm Summary in Station to Shelve /Unshelve alarms Monitor Shelved/Unshelved alarms

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

29

Alarms and Event Notifications Configure Alarm Shelving Procedure Step Configure Alarm Shelving 1 Login to Windows with Student User if not already logged in. Action

ATTENTION Refer your partition sheet for password details.

2 3

Open Configuration Studio, if not already open. Connect to your System. ATTENTION Refer to the partition sheet for System Name and login details.

Click on the + icon next to the Servers object, and expand the Configuration Explorer tree.

30

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarms and Event Notifications Configure Alarm Shelving Step 5 Action Click on the + icon next to the server to expand the Configuration Explorer tree.

ATTENTION Refer to your partition sheet for your server Alias.

Click on System Access.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

31

Alarms and Event Notifications Configure Alarm Shelving Step 7 Action Click on Configure server wide security settings in the Task pane.

In the Server-wide Station Settings page, select the Summary Displays tab.

Click on Alarm Processing tab to open the Alarms Page

32

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarms and Event Notifications Configure Alarm Shelving Step 9 Action Under the Alarm Shelving Tab, verify that the Enable alarm shelving option is enabled.

ATTENTION Enable Alarm Shelving: If selected, the alarm shelving option is enabled and an operator can shelve/unshelve alarms. Disable Quick Shelving: If cleared, operators can shelve an alarm without having to specify a reason. In this case, the default reason is used.

10

Enable the Comment Required field for the Nuisance Alarm Reason. Change the Minimum Sec Level to Supv for the Nuisance Alarm Reason.

ATTENTION Each row specifies a reason for shelving an alarm, as well as the shelving conditions that apply to alarms that are shelved for that reason. Reasons 1 to 4 are preconfigured. Up to 20 reasons can be configured by the user. One reason can be specified as a Default reason. This default reason is used when a user performs a quick shelving operation.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

33

Alarms and Event Notifications Configure Alarm Shelving Step 11 Click the Configuration Explorer tab. Action

12

Select Stations and Consoles. Click Configure flex stations.

34

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarms and Event Notifications Configure Alarm Shelving Step 13 AQ_Item Pumps##_Item Valves##_Item. Action Assign your static station Station## full access to the following assets:

Shelve Alarm in Alarm Summary display 14 15 Open your Station##, if not already open. Verify that the security level in Station is OPER.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

35

Alarms and Event Notifications Configure Alarm Shelving Step 16 Action Call up the detail display for the point ANATEST##.

17

Verify that no alarms are present for the point ANATEST##. If any alarms are present, acknowledge the alarms and change the state of the point ANATEST## to show no alarms. Verify that the mode of ANATEST## is AUTO. Change the SP value to 190. Wait for a PV High alarm to occur.

18

In the point detail display of point ANATEST##:

19

Open the Alarm Summary display.

20

Click the Location tab.

Click on the push-pin so that the Location Pane remains open.

36

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarms and Event Notifications Configure Alarm Shelving Step 21 Action Right-click on the PVHI alarm for point ANATEST## with High priority and select Shelve Alarm.

ATTENTION Alarms can also be shelved by clicking the Shelve Alarm button at the bottom of the Alarm Summary display.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

37

Alarms and Event Notifications Configure Alarm Shelving Step 22 Action The Alarm Shelving Dialog window will open. Click on the Reason for Shelving drop-down. You will notice that the default alarm shelving reason Nuisance Alarm is not visible in the drop-down. In a previous step, the Minimum Sec Level was selected as SUPV. Thus, Nuisance Alarm is not available when the security level in Station is below SUPV. Click Cancel.

23

Change Stations access level to SUPV (Supervisor). (Password : supv)

24

Right-click on the PVHI alarm for point ANATESTXX with High priority and select Shelve Alarm.

38

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarms and Event Notifications Configure Alarm Shelving Step 25 Reason for Shelving Shelving Period Comments Click OK. Action In the Alarm Shelving Dialog window enter the following information. : Nuisance Alarm : 2 hours : Alarm Shelved

ATTENTION Shelving period: The time for which the alarm is shelved when using a particular reason. When the time expires, the alarm returns to its non-shelved state. Unshelve if the alarm returns to normal: If this option is enabled then, when the alarm returns to normal, it will be removed from the Shelved Alarms view in the Alarm Summary display.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

39

Alarms and Event Notifications Configure Alarm Shelving Step 26 Action The PVHI alarm for ANATEST## will be removed from the current view (all alarms) of the Alarm Summary display. ATTENTION Change the Minimum Sec Level in Step 10, back to OPER

Monitor Shelved Alarms 27 Select the View drop-down option on the Alarm Summary display. Click on shelved alarms.

40

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarms and Event Notifications Configure Alarm Shelving Step 28 Action The alarm will appear under the shelved alarms view in the Alarm Summary display.

ATTENTION

The icon indicates that an active high priority alarm has been shelved. next to the asset name in the Location The icon Pane indicates that a point belonging to the associated asset contains a shelved alarm. The shelved alarm icon will appear for an asset if it contains a shelved alarm and no non-shelved alarms.

29

Shelved Reason and Remaining Time are the 2 columns that appear by default in the Shelved Alarms view.

30

Click on the shelved alarm. Select the Show details pane option.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

41

Alarms and Event Notifications Configure Alarm Shelving Step 31 Action The General tab on the Alarm Details pane will show all details of the shelved alarm.

32

Select the Comments tab in the Alarm Details pane. The Existing comments field indicates Alarm Shelved.

33 34

Close the Alarm Details pane. The Shelved alarms count is shown at the bottom of the Alarm Summary display.

42

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarms and Event Notifications Configure Alarm Shelving Step 35 Action To perform a Reshelve operation, right-click on the shelved alarm in the display and select Shelve Alarm. Select Standing Alarm as the Reason for Shelving. Enter the Comments as shown below. Click OK. Notice the change in the Shelved Reason and Remaining Time columns. The remaining time has been reset to 4 hours.

ATTENTION When the shelving time for a shelved alarm is near completion, and if the user requires the alarm to stay shelved, then a Reshelve operation can be performed.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

43

Alarms and Event Notifications Configure Alarm Shelving Step 36 Action Double-click on the shelved alarm in the alarm summary display. The point detail display of the point ANATEST## will open. on the faceplate indicates that the point ANATEST## The alarm icon contains a shelved alarm and no active non-shelved alarms.

44

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarms and Event Notifications Configure Alarm Shelving Step 37 Action Select View > Events > Event Summary.

38

An event is generated when an alarm is shelved. Locate the event generated for shelving the alarm PVHI for point ANATEST##. Locate the event generated for reshelving the alarm PVHI for point ANATEST##.

ATTENTION A shelve alarm action is recorded in the Event Summary under the action SHELVE. A reshelve alarm action is recorded in the Event Summary under the action RESHELVE.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

45

Alarms and Event Notifications Configure Alarm Shelving Step Unshelve Alarms 39 40 Open the Alarm Summary display in Station, if not open. Select View > shelved alarms. Right-click on the shelved alarm for ANATEST## (PVHI, High Priority). Select Unshelve Alarm. Action

41

The alarm will be removed from the shelved alarms view in Alarm Summary.

42

Select View > (all alarms).

46

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Alarms and Event Notifications Configure Alarm Shelving Step 43 Action The PVHI alarm for ANATEST## will appear in the Alarm Summary display.

44

To view the recently unshelved alarm: select View > (recently unshelved alarms).

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

47

Alarms and Event Notifications Configure Alarm Shelving Step 45 Action The PVHI alarm for ANATEST## will be seen in the list of recently unshelved alarms. The Unshelved Time column will appear for the recently unshelved alarms view in Alarm Summary. The recently unshelved alarms view will list active alarms unshelved within the past hour.

46

Select View > Events > Event Summary. An UNSHELVE event is generated when the alarm is unshelved from Station.

48

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

List Report Types

Reports List Report Types

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Introduction In this lesson, you will learn about Experion PKS report types At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Identify pre-formatted and custom reports

Honeywell

Describe how to configure pre-formatted reports in Configuration Studio Identify report output files Describe how to configure a free format report in Configuration Studio Describe how to configure a report containing alarm shelving events
Custom Reports

Pre-formatted Reports
Reports List Report Types

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Report Types Report Configuration Report Output Free Format Report Microsoft Excel Report Alarm Shelving Events in Reports Point Attribute Report Asset Alarm Count Report Fieldbus Diagnostic Report

Honeywell

Reports List Report Types

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Report Overview Two Major Report Types


Pre-formatted Custom

Honeywell

Configuration Studio configures all Supervisor minimum access required Scheduled or run on request Printed on paper and to files, or to files only

Reports List Report Types

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Pre-formatted Reports
Nine Types
Alarm and Event Alarm and Event DSA Alarm Duration Asset alarm Count Cross Reference Fieldbus Diagnostics Point Attribute Sequence of Events Batch Report

Honeywell

Reports List Report Types

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Custom Reports Three Types


Microsoft Excel Free Format ODBC Data Exchange

Honeywell

Reports List Report Types

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 1: Experion PKS Report Types Which of these report types is not a custom report?
A) Cross Reference B) Free Format C) Microsoft Excel D) ODBC Data Exchange

Honeywell

The correct answer is: Yourcorrect answer is: Your answer: The answer: Incorrect.A ACrossReference report isisnotaacustom Correct! ACross Reference report is not custom You must answerReferencereport Incorrect.A-Click anywhere toreportisnot Correct! answer anywhere tocontinuenot custom Cross You not Cross Reference must answerthe question before question before YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue aacustom Incorrect answerthisthis correctly! Correct -Click anywhere to continue Correct Clickisanywhere tocontinue Youdid You --answeredthis correctly! report. did You Click thisquestion completely not completely report. It isa pre-formatted report. report. continuing It a pre-formatted continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
7

Clear

Reports List Report Types

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Report Types Report Configuration Report Output Free Format Report Microsoft Excel Report Alarm Shelving Events in Reports Point Attribute Report Asset Alarm Count Fieldbus Diagnostic Report

Honeywell

Reports List Report Types

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Report Configuration Three Configuration Pages in Configuration Studio


Definition Page Content Page Scripting Page

Honeywell

Reports List Report Types

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Report Configuration Definition Page

Honeywell

Click to view most recent report

Report History Check to allow on request Hour Shift Day Week Month Quarter Year

Reports List Report Types

10

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Report Configuration Content Page Specific to Report Type Being Configured

Honeywell

This option not supported by Experion PKS Enable to view timestamp with resolution of 0.1 millisecond
11

Reports List Report Types

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Report Configuration Events to Search

Honeywell

Events to search field has been included in Alarm and Event report and Alarm and Event DSA report
Location where Experion searches for events to include in the report

The options are


Online: Searches the SQL Server online event database Playback: Searches the SQL Server online event database and any archives that have been restored to the playback area
Location for searching events to be included in the report

Reports List Report Types

12

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Report Configuration Scripting Page

Honeywell

Run on completion of the report

Reports List Report Types

13

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Report Types Report Configuration Report Output Free Format Report Microsoft Excel Report Alarm Shelving Events in Reports Point Attribute Report Asset Alarm Count Report Fieldbus Diagnostic Report

Honeywell

Reports List Report Types

14

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Report Output

Honeywell

Two output files for each report overwritten each time the report is run
rptxxx.htm -- Used by Station to display On Request reports rptxxx text file viewable from Notepad (xxx is the report number) Path:

Report Number 001

Reports List Report Types

15

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 2: Report Output

Honeywell

Which statement is false? An Experion PKS report:


A) Can be saved to different locations using a script B) File name contains the report number C) Number changes each time the report is requested D) Output is a .htm and a text file E) Overwrites the previous file
Correct! TheThe false statement "is "" Number changes Incorrect. false statement is " is Number changes Correct! TheThe false statement Number changes each Incorrect. false statement is Number changes each The correct report isEach Each time the report thefile Youra time aanswer is:run". time the reportis run is run time correctaanswer isEach time the report report therun each answer: report The time Your answer:is run". time areport is run".is:run". Each time the is run is file each report You must answer the question before You not Click anywhere to continue must answer overwritten. before the is is question YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue Incorrect answer anywhereto continue Correct --Clickanywhere to continue thefile question completely file overwritten. Correct answerthisthiscorrectly! Youdid You --answeredthis overwritten. did You Click anywhere to completely not Click is overwritten. this is continuing correctly! continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.
16

Submit

Clear

Reports List Report Types

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Report Types Report Configuration Report Output Free Format Report Microsoft Excel Report Alarm Shelving Events in Reports Point Attribute Report Asset Alarm Count Report Fieldbus Diagnostic Report

Honeywell

Reports List Report Types

17

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Report Configuration - Free Format Report Two Steps:


Create a Report Definition file using a text editor (Notepad)

Honeywell

Configure the Definition, Content, and Scripting tabs for the Free Format Report Content tab references the Report Definition file Default path: C:\Program Data\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Server\User

.ffr is usual file extension

Reports List Report Types

18

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Report Configuration - Free Format Report Report Definition File


Contains commands to populate the report output Command syntax: F Index Point_ID Parameter Print_Format
Command Index number 1 to 999 (contains file format variables) Point Parameter Point name

Honeywell

Format of data

Reports List Report Types

19

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Report Configuration - Free Format Report Report Definition File


Common Commands

Honeywell

F Fetch Reads a point parameter value and stores the value as a Free Format variable. Multiple point history values can be read into successive free format variables. C Calculated Variable Definition Used to specify the print format, which is the result of the calculation. P Perform Calculation Used to specify the expression for a calculation on several Free Format variables. Can perform Addition, subtraction, multiplication, division and exponentiation operations. T Totalize history Enables history values for a point to be read from the database and totalized. The total is stored in the specified Free Format variable.
20

Reports List Report Types

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

10

Report Configuration - Free Format Report Report Definition File


Common Commands

Honeywell

L History maximum/minimum Enables the maximum and minimum history values for a point to be determined and stored into two successive Free Format variables. D History standard deviation Enables the standard deviation to be determined for history values for a point and then stored in a Free Format variable. G Give to Point Stores a value in a Free Format variable in the specified point parameter.

Reports List Report Types

21

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Report Configuration - Free Format Report

Honeywell

Report Definition File


Common Commands
B Start of report body Used at the end of the variable definition section to indicate the start of the formatting section of the report. Will include, in the report output, any lines following this entry. Used to specify the layout of the report, including headings and spacing.

Reports List Report Types

22

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

11

Question 3: Free Format Report

Honeywell

The best application to use to create a Free Format report definition file is:
A) MS Excel B) Notepad C) Quick Builder D) Station

Incorrect. The correct answer 'B'. The best Yes! The correct answer is is 'B'. The best Incorrect. The correct Yes! The correct The correct answer is: answer is 'B'. The best Yourcorrect answer is:answer is 'B'. The best The answer: Youranswer: application to use to create a free format report application to use to the question before report format You must answer create a free before You You answer anywhereto continue mustClick answer thisquestion YouIncorrectdefinitionfilequestioncontinue Incorrectdefinitionthis questioncontinue Correct -answered theis correctly! did not -answeredfile isNotepad. You Correct --Clickanywhere to continue did You answerthisthis correctly! not Click anywhere to completely Click anywhere to completely continuing Notepad. continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
23

Clear

Reports List Report Types

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Report Types Report Configuration Report Output Free Format Report Microsoft Excel Report Alarm Shelving Events in Reports Point Attribute Report Asset Alarm Count Report

Honeywell

Reports List Report Types

24

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

12

Microsoft Excel Report


In Experion R400, mngr account is non-interactive Before creating definition file for Microsoft Excel Report To enable mngr account

Honeywell

Mngr account is required to be enabled Microsoft Excel Data Exchange is required to be enabled using mngr account Login with user having administrative privileges Click Start Programs Administrative Tools Local Security Policy

Give Local User full access to Xldataex folder


25
EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Reports List Report Types

Microsoft Excel Report To enable Microsoft Excel Data Exchange


Login to Experion Server using mngr account Open command prompt with administrative privileges Run activatemede.vbs

Honeywell

Create definition file using Microsoft Excel Data Exchange Before configuring Microsoft Excel report
Login using administrative privileges Open Local Security Policy and disable mngr account

Configure Microsoft excel report using station


Reports List Report Types

26

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

13

Topics Report Types Report Configuration Report Output Free Format Report Microsoft Excel Report Alarm Shelving Events in Reports Point Attribute Report Asset Alarm Count Report

Honeywell

Reports List Report Types

27

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Alarm and Event DSA Report Alarm and Event DSA report

Honeywell

Supports filtering on Action field Use to generate a report which details alarm shelving related actions

Option checks if events are modified/deleted

Displays local server and other DSA connected servers


Reports List Report Types

28

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

14

Report for Shelved Alarm

Honeywell

Alarm and Event DSA report will generate a report of shelved alarms

Reports List Report Types

29

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Report Types Report Configuration Report Output Free Format Report Microsoft Excel Report Alarm Shelving Events in Reports Point Attribute Report Asset Alarm Count Report Fieldbus Diagnostic Report

Honeywell

Reports List Report Types

30

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

15

Enhancement in Point Attribute Report Point Attribute report enhanced to report

Honeywell

TPS points in the inhibit state CDA (C200/C200E, C300 and ACE) points in the JournalOnly state

Reports TPS points in Inhibit state

Reports CDA points in Journal Only state


Reports List Report Types

31

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Report Types Report Configuration Report Output Free Format Report Alarm Shelving Events in Reports Point Attribute Report Asset Alarm Count Report Fieldbus Diagnostic Report

Honeywell

Reports List Report Types

32

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

16

Asset Alarm Count Report

Honeywell

Report of number of alarms raised for an asset over user defined period
Count of alarms for the assets that are within scope of responsibility of logged in user can be displayed in report

Select Report type as Asset Alarm Count

Enter the Name and Title for the report Enter the Name and Title for the report

Reports List Report Types

33

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Asset Alarm Count Report

Honeywell

Enter the location for which alarm count must be reported

Enter the time period of report

Only user at MNGR level can configure this option


34

View assets within SOR of operator other than currently logged in operator

Reports List Report Types

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

17

Layout of Asset Alarm Count Report

Honeywell

Navigate to page 2 using toolbar

Report details

Contents of report

Reports List Report Types

35

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Report Types Report Configuration Report Output Free Format Report Microsoft Excel Report Alarm Shelving Events in Reports Point Attribute Report Asset Alarm Count Report Fieldbus Diagnostic Report

Honeywell

Reports List Report Types

36

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

18

Fieldbus Diagnostic Report

Honeywell

Fieldbus Diagnostic Report added in Experion PKS R400 provides a report output of diagnostic alarm for FF devices
Alarms grouped by Criticality Sorted in order of Criticality, Count, priority, and source of alarms

Useful for understanding the devices generating most critical diagnostic alarms
Select Fieldbus Diagnostics Report

Reports List Report Types

37

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Report Settings

Honeywell

For reports that produce event information, the field sizes for certain fields in the report can be specified by user
Report settings are not applicable for Alarm and Event DSA reports

In station click Configure

Reports

Reports Settings

In Experion R400 Timeout period for report can be specified

Reports List Report Types

38

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

19

Summary When you configure reports, remember:


The two major report types are pre-formatted (9 examples) and custom (3 examples) Configuration Studio configures all Requires supervisor or higher access Report output produces two files : an .htm and a text file Configuring a free format custom report involves 2 steps Create a Report Definition File with a text editor Configure the Definition, Content and Scripting tabs Alarm and Event DSA report used to generate reports with alarm shelving events
Reports List Report Types

Honeywell

39

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Lab Examples 1 of 7 Configure a Pre-formatted Report (Alarm and Event)

Honeywell

Reports List Report Types

40

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

20

Lab Examples 2 of 7 Configure a Pre-formatted Report (Cross Reference)

Honeywell

Reports List Report Types

41

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Lab Examples 3 of 7 Configure a Free Format Report

Honeywell

Reports List Report Types

42

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

21

Lab Examples 4 of 7 Configure Alarm and Event DSA report for shelved alarms

Honeywell

Reports List Report Types

43

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Lab Examples 5 of 7 Configure Point Attribute Report

Honeywell

Reports List Report Types

44

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

22

Lab Examples 6 of 7 Configure Asset Alarm Count Report

Honeywell

Reports List Report Types

45

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Conclusion List Report Types

Honeywell

Completion Certificate

Proceed to the Configure a Pre-formatted Report (Alarm and Event), Configure a Pre-formatted Report (Cross Reference), Configure a Free Format Report, and Configure Batch Reports lab exercises
Reports List Report Types

46

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

23

Topic: Reports
Contents
Configure Pre-Formatted Report (Alarm and Event).............................................................................3 Configure Pre-Formatted Report (Cross Reference) ..........................................................................15 Configure Free Format Report ............................................................................................................25 Configure Reports for Shelved Alarms ................................................................................................37 Configure Point Attribute Report..........................................................................................................51 Configure Asset Alarm Count Report ..................................................................................................61

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

This page was intentionally left blank.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Reports Configure Pre-Formatted Report (Alarm and Event)

Configure Pre-Formatted Report (Alarm and Event)


Practice
Student Partition sheet Team ## Windows Login User Password System Name Server Alias Report Index Number Report Name Title Asset E02ESV##_System E02ESV##_Server 1## ALMEVT1## Alarm and Event report for asset Pumps## Pumps## Student

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Reports Configure Pre-Formatted Report (Alarm and Event)

This page was intentionally left blank.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Reports Configure Pre-Formatted Report (Alarm and Event) Prerequisites

Configuration Studio Navigation familiarization Configuration Studio connected to a server SUPV or higher password Partition sheet with lab information

Introduction

During this lab, you will configure a pre-formatted report in Configuration Studio. Of the 9 types of pre-formatted reports, you will use the Alarm and Event report type. Configure an Alarm and Event Report.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Reports Configure Pre-Formatted Report (Alarm and Event) Procedure

Perform the following procedures in Configuration Studio:


Step Configure an Alarm and Event report 1 If not already logged in, login using Student user. ATTENTION Refer your partition sheet for password details. 2 3 Open Configuration Studio (if not already opened). Click Reports in Configuration tree under your assigned server and select Define reports. Action

Click the assigned Report Index Number listed in your partition sheet.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Reports Configure Pre-Formatted Report (Alarm and Event) Step 5 Action In the Definition tab, select Alarm and Event from the Report Type list.

Enter the report name as listed in your partition sheet in the Name field.

ATTENTION The Report Name can be up to 10 characters (no spaces) and must be unique to this report.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Reports Configure Pre-Formatted Report (Alarm and Event) Step 7 Action Enter the report title from your partition sheet in the Title field.

ATTENTION The Report Title can be up to 70 characters.

Click the Enable reporting on request checkbox.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Reports Configure Pre-Formatted Report (Alarm and Event) Step 9 Action Select the blank Destination option to cause the initial report output not to print.

10

Click the Content tab to configure the report details.

11

Click the Alarm or Event type arrow and select ALL.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Reports Configure Pre-Formatted Report (Alarm and Event) Step 12 Action Enter the Pumps## (Asset) from your partition sheet in the Asset field.

13

Enter an * (asterisk) in the Source field

10

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Reports Configure Pre-Formatted Report (Alarm and Event) Step 14 Action Enter an * (asterisk) in the Description field.

15

In the Occurring section, select the In the last option. In the Days fields: enter 0 for Days, 2 for Hours, and 0 for Minutes. Press [Enter].

ATTENTION If the Occurring section is not enabled, open Station, select Configure > Reports, then select your report number. Click the Content tab, then configure the Occurring section. Return to Configuration Studio for the next step. If the radio button is not enabled then click on the text near the radio button

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11

Reports Configure Pre-Formatted Report (Alarm and Event) Step 16 Click the Request button. Action

Wait while the report is in progress.

ATTENTION Change the state of point STATEST## (assigned to asset Pumps##) 3 to 4 times to generate alarms and events in the Server, which will appear in the report. Events to Search: Events to Search is the location where Experion searches for events to include in the report. The options are: Online: Searches the SQL Server online event database. Playback: Searches the SQL Server online event database and any archives that have been restored to the playback area. Sub-priority: This is the new option introduced in Experion PKS R400. Along with the alarm priority, the sub priority from 0 to 15 can also be defined for the alarm to be included in report

12

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Reports Configure Pre-Formatted Report (Alarm and Event) Step 17 The report appears on the screen. Action

18

Click the page.

button in Configuration Studio to return back to the report configuration (Destination Option arrow) and select a printer configured for

19

To print the report, click your system.

20 11/5/2010

Click the Request button. EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.


13

Reports Configure Pre-Formatted Report (Alarm and Event)

14

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Reports Configure Pre-Formatted Report (Cross Reference)

Configure Pre-Formatted Report (Cross Reference)


Practice
Student Partition sheet Team ## Windows Login User Password System Name Server Alias Report Index Number Report Name Title E02ESV##_System E02ESV##_Server 2## XRREFREP## Cross Reference Report Student

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

15

Reports Configure Pre-Formatted Report (Cross Reference)

This page was intentionally left blank.

16

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Reports Configure Pre-Formatted Report (Cross Reference) Objective

Given a Configuration Studio connected to an Experion PKS Server: Configure a Pre-Formatted Cross-Reference report.

Prerequisites

Configuration Studio Navigation familiarization Configuration Studio connected to a server Sinewave point pre-configured on a Server Knowledge Builder available

Introduction

During this lab, you will configure a pre-formatted report in Configuration Studio. Of the nine types of pre-formatted reports, you will use the Cross Reference Report Type. Configure a Cross Reference report.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

17

Reports Configure Pre-Formatted Report (Cross Reference) Procedure

Perform the following procedures in Configuration Studio:


Step Configure a Cross Reference Report 1 If not already logged in then login with Student user. ATTENTION Refer your partition sheet for password details. Action

2 3

Open Configuration Studio, if not already open. Click Reports in the Configuration tree under your assigned server.

Click Define Reports on the right hand side tasks pane.

18

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Reports Configure Pre-Formatted Report (Cross Reference) Step 5 Action Select the assigned report index number listed on your partition sheet.

In the Definition tab, click the Report type arrow and select Cross Reference.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

19

Reports Configure Pre-Formatted Report (Cross Reference) Step 7 Action In the Name field, enter the report name from your partition sheet.

ATTENTION The Report Name can be up to 10 characters (no spaces) and must be unique to this report.

Enter the report title from your partition sheet in the Title field.

20

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Reports Configure Pre-Formatted Report (Cross Reference) Step 9 Action Select the Enable reporting on request checkbox.

10

Select the blank Destination option to cause the initial report output not to print.

11

Click the Content tab. Uncheck Use previous Cross Reference file.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

21

Reports Configure Pre-Formatted Report (Cross Reference) Step 12 Enter the Point ID as Sinewave. Action

13

Click the Request button.

14

Wait for Request in progress message to appear.

ATTENTION The Cross Reference report creates the following files: List of Used Algorithm Blocks, Any Errors/Inconsistencies found in the database. When the Use previous Cross-Reference file checkbox is selected, the files generated by the cross-reference report are not updated.

22

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Reports Configure Pre-Formatted Report (Cross Reference) Step 15 The report appears on the screen. Action

16

Click the Back button in Configuration Studio to return to the report configuration page.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

23

Reports Configure Pre-Formatted Report (Cross Reference) Step 17 Click Definition tab To send the report to printer, click the Destination blank option arrow and select a printer configured in your system. Action

18

Click the Request button.

24

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Reports Configure Free Format Report

Configure Free Format Report


Practice
Student Partition sheet Team ## Windows Login User Password System Name Server Alias Report Number Report Name Title Report Definition File Name Asset E02ESV##_System E02ESV##_Server 4## FFRREP## 1 Minute Snapshot FFR TEAM_DEF##.FFR Pumps## Student

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

25

Reports Configure Free Format Report

This page was intentionally left blank.

26

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Reports Configure Free Format Report Objective

Given a Configuration Studio connected to an Experion PKS Server: Configure a Free-Format report

Prerequisites

Configuration Studio navigation familiarization Configuration Studio connected to a server Knowledge Builder available Data Partition Sheet available

Introduction

During this lab, you will configure a Free-Format Report in Configuration Studio. Configure a Free Format Report.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

27

Reports Configure Free Format Report Procedure Perform the following procedure in Notepad, Windows Explorer, and Configuration Studio Step Create the Free Format report definition file 1 Login to Windows with Student User. ATTENTION Refer your partition sheet for password details. 2 3 Select Start > Run and type Notepad into the Open data entry port to open Notepad as the Report Definition text editor. Create a file as detailed below, or type the sample file listing (located at the end of this procedure) in Notepad. Fetch the last 5 one-minute snapshots of SINEWAVE.PV. Calculate the average of the five values. In the body of the report, display the 5 history values in a row. Display the average on the line below. Use appropriate labeling to make the output user friendly. 4 When finished in Notepad, select File > Save As. Action

28

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Reports Configure Free Format Report Step 5 Action In the Save As dialog box, browse to C:\ProgramData\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Server\User. Enter the filename as TEAM_DEF##.FFR (refer to your Partition sheet). Click Save. ATTENTION The double quotes around the file name prevent Notepad from adding a .txt extension to the file name: TEAM_DEF##.FFR instead of TEAM_DEF##.FFR.TXT.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

29

Reports Configure Free Format Report Step 6 Select File > Exit to close. Action

Configure Free Format report in Configuration Studio 7 Make sure windows logged in user is Student Open Configuration Studio, if not already open and navigate to the report configuration page in your assigned server. 8 Scroll down and select your assigned Report Number (listed on your partition sheet) in the Reports page.

30

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Reports Configure Free Format Report Step 9 Action In the Definition tab, click the Report type arrow and select Free Format.

10

Enter the Report Name and Title (listed on your partition sheet) in the Name and Title fields.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

31

Reports Configure Free Format Report Step 11 Action Click the Enable reporting on request checkbox.

12

Select the blank Destination option to cause the initial report output not to print.

13

Click the Content tab.

32

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Reports Configure Free Format Report Step 14 Action Enter the path or the Definition Filename (see Note below) in the Definition File Path field. ATTENTION The default location for the definition file is C:\Program Data\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Server\user. If your definition file is located here, only the filename and extension are required in the Path field. If located elsewhere, the full path is required in the field.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

33

Reports Configure Free Format Report Step 15 Click the Request button. Action

The message Request in progress appears as shown below.

The report appears on the screen.

16

Click the Back button in Configuration Studio to return to the report configuration page

34

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Reports Configure Free Format Report Step 17 Action To send the report to a printer, click the Destination arrow and select a printer configured in your system.

18

Click Request.

Sample File Listing * Get last 5 1-MIN Snapshot values F 1 SINEWAVE PV F8.2 H1M (1) 5 C 7 F8.2

P 7 = ($1+$2+$3+$4+$5) /5 B: ----------------------------------------------------------------------THIS IS THE BODY OF THE FREE FORMAT REPORT ----------------------------------------------------------------------THE VALUES ARE

SINEWAVE.PV |'1

'|'2

'|'3

'|'4

'|'5

'|

AVERAGE

'7

'

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

35

Reports Configure Free Format Report

This page was intentionally left blank.

36

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Reports Configure Reports for Shelved Alarms

Configure Reports for Shelved Alarms


Practice
Student Partition sheet Team ## Windows Login User Password System Name Server Alias Report Index Number Report Name Title E02ESV##_System E02ESV##_Server 5## ASHELVE## Alarm shelving report ## Student

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

37

Reports Configure Reports for Shelved Alarms

This page was intentionally left blank.

38

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Reports Configure Reports for Shelved Alarms Prerequisites

Configuration Studio Navigation familiarization Configuration Studio connected to a server SUPV or higher password Partition sheet with lab information

Introduction

During this lab, you will configure a report for shelved alarms in Configuration Studio. Of the 9 types of pre-formatted reports, you will use the Alarm and Event DSA report type. Configure an Alarm and Event DSA Report.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

39

Reports Configure Reports for Shelved Alarms Procedure

Perform the following procedures in Configuration Studio:


Step Configure an Alarm and Event DSA report 1 If not already logged in then login using Student user. ATTENTION Refer your partition sheet for password details. Action

2 3

Open Configuration Studio (if not already opened). Click Reports in Configuration tree under your assigned server and select Define reports.

40

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Reports Configure Reports for Shelved Alarms Step 4 Action Click the assigned Report Index Number listed in your partition sheet.

In the Definition tab, select Alarm and Event DSA from the Report Type list.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

41

Reports Configure Reports for Shelved Alarms Step 6 Action Enter the report name as listed in your partition sheet in the Name field.

ATTENTION The Report Name can be up to 10 characters (no spaces) and must be unique to this report.

Enter the report title from your partition sheet in the Title field.

ATTENTION The Report Title can be up to 70 characters.

42

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Reports Configure Reports for Shelved Alarms Step 8 Action Click the Enable reporting on request checkbox.

Select the blank Destination option to cause the initial report output not to print. Let the File of type be Text

ATTENTION The supported file types are Text, MS Word, RTF, HTML, MS Excel 5, CSV and TSV.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

43

Reports Configure Reports for Shelved Alarms Step 10 Enter an * (asterisk) in the Source field. Enter the Action as *Shelve* as shown in screen capture below. Action Click the Content tab to configure the report details.

ATTENTION Location: To report on one or more particular assets within the SOR of the current user, the name of the asset can be specified. To report on all assets within the current user's SOR, leave this box blank

44

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Reports Configure Reports for Shelved Alarms Step 11 Action In the Occurring section, select the In the last option. In the Days fields: enter 1 for Days, 0 for Hours, and 0 for Minutes. Press <Enter>.

ATTENTION Events to Search: The location where Experion searches for events to include in the report. The options are: 1. Online: Searches the SQL Server online event database. 2. Playback: Searches the SQL Server online event database and any archives that have been restored to the playback area. Check for tampering of event data: If this option is enabled the system checks events for modifications or deletions.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

45

Reports Configure Reports for Shelved Alarms Step 12 Action Verify that your server is selected in the Servers list as shown below.

13 14

Open your Station##, if not already open. Change the SP value of point ANATEST## to create an alarm condition. Open the Alarm Summary display. Verify that the alarms for ANATEST## are present in the Alarm Summary display. Shelve the alarm for point ANATEST## with reason Nuisance Alarm. Unshelve the alarm for ANATEST##. Open the Alarm Summary display. Verify the alarms for the STATEST## are present in the Alarm Summary display. Shelve the alarm for point STATEST## with reason Standing Alarm.

Change the state of point STATEST## to create an alarm condition.

ATTENTION When Shelve and Unshelve operations are performed in the Alarm Summary display, events are generated in the Event Summary. These events are generated under the Action category Shelve and Unshelve. These events will be seen in the Alarm and Event DSA report because it is configured to collect events with the Action *Shelve*.

46

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Reports Configure Reports for Shelved Alarms Step 15 Action Open Station application and click Configure Reports Reports Select the Alarm shelving report configured in previous steps

16

Click the Request button.

ATTENTION Check for tampering of event data: Enable this option to check for modifications or deletions (tampering) of events.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

47

Reports Configure Reports for Shelved Alarms Step 17 Action The report appears on the screen. Using the arrow keys, navigate through the subsequent pages of the report

18

Click the back button in Station to return back to the report configuration page

48

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Reports Configure Reports for Shelved Alarms Step 19 To print the report, click your system. Action (Destination Option arrow) and select a printer configured to

20

Click the Request button.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

49

Reports Configure Reports for Shelved Alarms

This page was intentionally left blank.

50

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Reports Configure Point Attribute Report

Configure Point Attribute Report


Practice
Student Partition sheet Team ## Windows Login User Password System Name Server Alias Report Index Number Report Name Title E02ESV##_System E02ESV##_Server 6## PTATTRB## Point Attribute Report ## Student

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

51

Reports Configure Point Attribute Report

This page was intentionally left blank.

52

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Reports Configure Point Attribute Report Prerequisites

Configuration Studio Navigation familiarization Configuration Studio connected to a server SUPV or higher password Partition sheet with lab information

Introduction

In this lab, you will configure a Point Attribute report, to indicate CDA points with Journal Only alarms. A Point Attribute report lists all points with specified attributes, such as "off scan" or "alarm inhibited", or those points with a specified state. The various attributes of a point can be used for this report. The points that are in a specified state will be listed in the report for e.g. you can generate a report on all points that are off-scan, have alarms inhibited, have a bad PV, or are in manual mode. This report excludes remote and flexible points. From R310, the Point Attribute report type has been enhanced to include the Alarm Inhibit state for TPS points and the Journal Only state for CDA points (C200, C300, and ACE). In Experion R400 CDA points of C200E controller with Journal Only state can also be included in Point Attribute Report.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

53

Reports Configure Point Attribute Report Procedure

Perform the following procedures in Configuration Studio:


Step Action

Configure Journal Only Option for CDA points in Station 1 Login to Windows with Student User.

ATTENTION Refer your partition sheet for password details. 2 3 4 Open your static station, Station## if not already open. If access level in Station is not already at Mngr, logon using mngr as the password. Call up the point detail displays for the points 11_FC02, 11_FC01, 11_FC15 and check the Journal Only Option.

Configure a Point Attribute Report 5 Open Configuration Studio (if not already opened).

54

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Reports Configure Point Attribute Report Step 6 Action Click Reports in Configuration tree under your assigned server and select Define reports.

Click the assigned Report Index Number listed in your partition sheet.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

55

Reports Configure Point Attribute Report Step 8 Action In the Definition tab, select Point Attribute from the Report Type list.

Enter the report name as listed in your partition sheet in the Name field.

ATTENTION The Report Name can be up to 10 characters (no spaces) and must be unique to this report.

56

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Reports Configure Point Attribute Report Step 10 Action Enter the report title from your partition sheet in the Title field.

ATTENTION The Report Title can be up to 70 characters.

11

Click the Enable reporting on request checkbox.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

57

Reports Configure Point Attribute Report Step 12 Action Select the blank Destination option to cause the initial report output not to print.

13

Click the Content tab to configure the report details. Enter the Point ID(s) as 11*

14

Select the Attribute as Jrnl Only

58

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Reports Configure Point Attribute Report Step 15 Click Request button Action

16

The report appears on the screen. It will list the tags for which the Journal Only Option has been enabled.

17

Click the page

button in Configuration Studio to return back to the report configuration

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

59

Reports Configure Point Attribute Report Step 18 To print the report, click your system. Action (Destination Option arrow) and select a printer configured to

19

Click the Request button.

60

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Reports Configure Asset Alarm Count Report

Configure Asset Alarm Count Report


Practice
Student Partition sheet Team ## Windows Login User Password System Name Server Alias Report Index Number Report Name Title E02ESV##_System E02ESV##_Server 7## ASSALM## Asset Alarm Count report ## Student

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

61

Reports Configure Asset Alarm Count Report

This page was intentionally left blank.

62

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Reports Configure Asset Alarm Count Report Prerequisites

Configuration Studio Navigation familiarization Configuration Studio connected to a server SUPV or higher password Partition sheet with lab information

Introduction

In this lab, you will configure an Asset alarm count report, to include the number of alarms for the assets in the scope of responsibility of the particular operator. Asset Alarm Count Report is used to generate information on the number of alarms raised on assets, and the priority of those alarms. This report provides information in relation to assets that are within the Scope of Responsibility (SOR) of the currently logged on user.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

63

Reports Configure Asset Alarm Count Report Procedure

Perform the following procedures in Configuration Studio:


Step Configure Asset Alarm Count report 1 If not already logged on then login using Student user. ATTENTION Refer your partition sheet for password details. Action

2 3

Open Configuration Studio (if not already opened). Click Reports in Configuration tree under your assigned server and select Define reports.

64

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Reports Configure Asset Alarm Count Report Step 4 Action Click the assigned Report Index Number listed in your partition sheet.

In the Definition tab, select Asset Alarm Count from the Report Type list.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

65

Reports Configure Asset Alarm Count Report Step 6 Action Enter the report name as listed in your partition sheet in the Name field.

ATTENTION The Report Name can be up to 10 characters (no spaces) and must be unique to this report.

Enter the report title from your partition sheet in the Title field.

ATTENTION The Report Title can be up to 70 characters.

66

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Reports Configure Asset Alarm Count Report Step 8 Action Click the Enable reporting on request checkbox.

Select the blank Destination option to cause the initial report output not to print.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

67

Reports Configure Asset Alarm Count Report Step 10 Specify the operator ID as Team## Action Click the Content tab to configure the report details.

ATTENTION Location: To report on one or more particular assets within the SOR of the user specify the asset name or use wildcards. To report on all assets keep this box blank. Operator ID: This configuration setting is only available for users logged on at MNGR level. To report on assets within the scope of responsibility (SOR) of someone other than the current user, click that user's ID in the Operator ID drop-down list

68

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Reports Configure Asset Alarm Count Report Step 11 In the Occurring section Select In the last option Specify Days: 1 Hours: 0 Minutes: 0 Action

12 13

Open report configuration page in Station application. Click Request button

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

69

Reports Configure Asset Alarm Count Report Step 14 The report appears on the screen. Using the arrow keys, navigate through the subsequent pages of the report Action

15

Click the back button in Station to return back to the report configuration page

70

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Reports Configure Asset Alarm Count Report Step 16 To print the report, click your system. Action (Destination Option arrow) and select a printer configured to

17

Click the Request button.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

71

Reports Configure Asset Alarm Count Report

This page was intentionally left blank.

72

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Distinguish Between PV and Action Algorithms

Algorithms Distinguish Between PV and Action Algorithms

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Introduction In this lesson, you will learn about Experion PKS algorithms At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Identify PV algorithms and their purpose Identify Action algorithms and their purpose Identify the point types for which algorithms can be configured Explain the purpose of algorithm blocks and how to identify those available

Honeywell

Algorithms Distinguish Between PV and Action Algorithms

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics PV Algorithms Action Algorithms Algorithms and other point types Algorithm Blocks

Honeywell

Algorithms Distinguish Between PV and Action Algorithms

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

PV Algorithms PV algorithms either gather data or manipulate data PV algorithms are processed whenever the PV is scanned The result of the algorithm operation is usually stored in the PV of the point to which it is attached

Honeywell

Algorithms Distinguish Between PV and Action Algorithms

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

PV Algorithms The following PV algorithms are available:


General Arithmetic (Algo#4) Production (Algo#5) Run Hours (Algo#7) General Logic (Algo#10) Composite Alarm Processing (Algo#12) Integration (Algo#15) Cyclic Task Request (Algo#16) Piecewise Linearization (Algo#22) Maximum/Minimum (Algo#64) PV Value Transportation (Algo#68)

Honeywell

Algorithms Distinguish Between PV and Action Algorithms

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

PV Algorithms - Example

Honeywell

State 1 PUMPSTATUS.PV Status Tag

PUMPRUNHOUR.PV Analog Tag Gate

Track the number of hours that a pump runs Attach the Run Hours algorithm to a "dummy" analog point and gate it with the pump's run state The algorithm will store the total run hours in the dummy points PV

Algorithms Distinguish Between PV and Action Algorithms

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

PV Algorithms Dummy Point

Honeywell

Blank

Algorithms Distinguish Between PV and Action Algorithms

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 1: PV Algorithms
State 1 PUMPSTATUS.PV Status Tag PUMPRUNHOUR.PV Analog Tag Gate

Honeywell

A dummy point that runs a PV algorithm is different from a regular analog point because it has:
A) A controller B) A period, or update rate C) NO PV source address D) A PV parameter
Correct! The correct answer is 'C'. 'C'. Dummy Incorrect. correct answer is 'C'. Correct! The The correct answer is 'C'. Dummy TheIncorrect.The correct answer is Dummy points Yourcorrect answer is: The answer: source source addressDummy points Yourcorrect answer is: answer: have nohaveno PV addressaddresslike regular pointsnoPV source source like regular regular have must answer the question regular analog pointshave no PV address like before analog PV like You must answer You not Click anywhere do. completely question before analog points YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue Incorrect answer anywhere to continue Correct --Clickanywhere to continue Youdid You --answeredthis do.to continue Correct answerpoints correctly! did You Click thisthis do. to completely not Click anywhere do. analog points points thisquestion continuing correctly! continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit

Clear

Algorithms Distinguish Between PV and Action Algorithms

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics PV Algorithms Action Algorithms Algorithms and other point types Algorithm Blocks

Honeywell

Algorithms Distinguish Between PV and Action Algorithms

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Action Algorithms it is attached, changes

Honeywell

An action algorithm initiates an action when the PV, of the point to which Action algorithms attached to analog or accumulator points are

processed whenever the PV changes by more than the drift deadband for the point

Action algorithms attached to

status points are processed whenever the PV changes to the specified state

Algorithms Distinguish Between PV and Action Algorithms

10

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Action Algorithms The following Action algorithms are available:


Composite Alarm Initiation (Algo#11) Value Transportation (Algo#68) Status Change Task Request (Algo#69) Status Change Report Request (Algo#70) Queued Task Request (Algo#92: supersedes Algo#71) Status Value Transportation with Mapping (Algo#72) Status Change USKB LED Request (Algo#74) Status Point Notification (Algo#75) Analog Point Notification (Algo#76) Status Change Display Request (Algo#77) Group Control of Points (Algo#78) Status Change Alarm Group Inhibit (Algo#79) Status Change Alarm Area Inhibit (Algo#80)
Algorithms Distinguish Between PV and Action Algorithms

Honeywell

11

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Action Algorithm - Example

Honeywell

State 1

Print Report

Run a report when a status point changes to State 1

Attach the Status Change Report Request algorithm to the status point,
referencing the chosen report and State 1

Algorithms Distinguish Between PV and Action Algorithms

12

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics PV Algorithms Action Algorithms Algorithms and other point types Algorithm Blocks

Honeywell

Algorithms Distinguish Between PV and Action Algorithms

13

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Algorithms and Other Point Types

Honeywell

Algorithms cannot be configured for:



Flexible points or container points Experion PKS Process Controller points (CDA points)

Reference CDA points in algorithms attached to SCADA points

Point algorithm displays use internal database references, so for a DSA


remote point, log on to the remote server to view point algorithm configuration from station

Algorithms Distinguish Between PV and Action Algorithms

14

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 2: Action Algorithms Action algorithms can be attached to all of the following except:
A) Accumulator Points B) Analog Points C) CDA Points D) Status Points
State 1

Honeywell

Print Report

The correct answer is: Yourcorrect answer is: The answer: Youranswer: You must answer the question before Correct!not --Click anywhere to continue be Incorrect. Click ActionAction algorithms be attached You must answer algorithms continue Correct!notanswer anywhere to continue Incorrect.Actionthisquestion continue Actionalgorithms cannot before algorithms cannot be YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncannotbe Incorrect -answeredthisquestioncompletely Correct answeranywhere to cannot Youdid Youattachedthisthiscorrectly! attached did You Click anywhere to completely Correct -Click CDA CDAcorrectly! continuing to CDA CDApoints. continuing points. attachedto points. to to points. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
15

Clear

Algorithms Distinguish Between PV and Action Algorithms

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics PV Algorithms Action Algorithms Algorithms and other point types Algorithm Blocks

Honeywell

Algorithms Distinguish Between PV and Action Algorithms

16

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Algo Blocks Block or Algo Block

Honeywell

Most algorithms use a memory storage location called an Algorithm

Each Experion Server has 6000 Algo Blocks

Duplicate blocks checked only on download

Creates a Quick Builder load warning

To find available blocks:


alglst utility displays unused blocks
Cross Reference report creates a text file listing Algo Block usage

\ProgramData\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Server\Data\Report\algmap

Algorithms Distinguish Between PV and Action Algorithms

17

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 3: Algorithm Blocks

Honeywell

Which of these will not help you check for a free algorithm block number?
A) alglst utility B) Program Files\ Honeywell\ Experion PKS\ Server\ Data\ Report\ algmap C) Quick Builder

The correct answer is: Yourcorrect answer is: The answer: Youranswer: You must answer the will nothelp you question before Incorrect.Quick Builder will not help you check Correct! Quick Builder will not help you check You not -Click anywhere to help you must answer Incorrect.Quick Builder will not continue check Correct! Quick Builderquestioncontinue YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue check Incorrect--answeredthisquestioncompletely Correct answer anywhereto continue Click anywhere to before Youdid Youfree algorithm block number. Correct answeranywhere to completely did You -Click thisthiscorrectly! Click this continuing correctly! fornot free algorithm block number. continuing fora a Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
18

Clear

Algorithms Distinguish Between PV and Action Algorithms

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Summary When you configure algorithms, remember:

Honeywell

PV algorithms are attached to dummy analog points and either gather data or manipulate data Action Algorithms can be attached to analog, accumulator or status points and initiate an action when the PV of the point changes Algorithms cannot be configured for flexible points, container points or Experion PKS Process Controller points (CDA points) Most algorithms use a memory storage location called an Algorithm Block or Algo Block To find an available block: Use the alglst utility

Run a Cross Reference report

Algorithms Distinguish Between PV and Action Algorithms

19

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Lab Examples 1 of 2 Configure a PV Algorithm

Honeywell

Algorithms Distinguish Between PV and Action Algorithms

20

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

10

Lab Examples 2 of 2 Configure an Action Algorithm

Honeywell

Algorithms Distinguish Between PV and Action Algorithms

21

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Conclusion Distinguish Between PV and Action Algorithms

Honeywell

Completion Certificate

Proceed to the Configure a PV Algorithm and Configure an Action Algorithm lab exercises
Algorithms Distinguish Between PV and Action Algorithms

22

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

11

Topic: Algorithms
Contents
Configure PV Algorithm .........................................................................................................................3 Configure Action Algorithm..................................................................................................................29

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

This page was intentionally left blank.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Algorithms Configure PV Algorithm

Configure PV Algorithm
Practice
Student Partition sheet Team ## Windows Login User Password System Name Server Alias Point ID Description Asset Name Controller Name PV Scan Period Engineering Units 100% Range Value 0% Range Value PV Algo Group Number Position in Group Trend Number Position in Trend PV Algo Block Number Gating Source Gating State Shift Hours Destination E02ESV##_System E02ESV##_Server PVALG## Pump run hours Valves## HC900_## 2 sec Hours 500 0 Algo 7 Run Hours ## 3 ## 3 2## STATEST##.PV 1 PVALG##.A1 Student

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Algorithms Configure PV Algorithm

This page was intentionally left blank.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Algorithms Configure PV Algorithm Objective

Given a Quick Builder project: Add, configure, download, and verify operation of a PV Algorithm attached to an Analog Point

Prerequisites

Configuration Studio navigation knowledge Quick Builder navigation knowledge Quick Builder with an active server connection Analog point configured Knowledge Builder available HC900 system connected and communicating to the Experion PKS server Partition sheet with configuration data

Introduction

In this lab, you will configure in Quick Builder a PV Algorithm attached to an analog point Configure an Analog Point to operate a PV algorithm Add a PV Algorithm Configure the parameters of the PV Algorithm Download the point to Experion PKS server database Log on to station Verify the operation of the PV Algorithm

In this lab you will configure the built-in PV algorithm Algo 7 Run Hours. For an analog point with no PV source address defined, this algorithm accumulates run hours according to a given run indicator status point used as a gate. When the gating point parameter enters the specified state, the run hours are accumulated and sent to the PV parameter of the analog point. Additionally, shift hours can be totaled and stored as well as the PV of an associated point. This information can be readily accessed by the Free Format report. To use this algorithm, an analog point must have a scan period no greater than 60 seconds.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Algorithms Configure PV Algorithm Procedure

Perform the following procedures in Quick Builder:


Step Configure PV Algorithm 1 Login to Windows with Student User if not already logged in. ATTENTION Refer your partition sheet for password details. Action

2 3

Open Configuration Studio, if not already open. Connect to your System.

ATTENTION For System Name and Login account, refer your partition sheet.

In the Configuration Explorer tab, on the left side of the screen, under System Name, click + symbol next to Servers, to expand the corresponding tree.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Algorithms Configure PV Algorithm Step 5 Action Click on the + icon besides the server added into the System hierarchy, to expand the Configuration Explorer tree.

ATTENTION Refer to partition sheet for your server Alias.

Under your Server Name, click Control Strategy.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Algorithms Configure PV Algorithm Step 7 Action On the right side of the screen, in the SCADA Control section, click Build points.

TIP The Quick Builder application window opens.

Click the box.

button on the toolbar at the top and select Analog Point in the Type list

9 10

In the Use Name field, type the Point ID PVALG##, from your partition sheet. Click OK.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Algorithms Configure PV Algorithm Step 11 Action Click the Main tab and enter the Description and Parent Asset from your partition sheet as shown in figure below.

12

Click

besides PV Source Address to open the Address Builder.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Algorithms Configure PV Algorithm Step 13 Action Click the Address Type drop-down arrow and select Controller.

10

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Algorithms Configure PV Algorithm Step 14 Action Click the Controller drop-down arrow and select a previously built controller (refer to your partition sheet) and click OK.

ATTENTION No PV Location is defined. The PV will come from the Algorithm.

15

In the PV Scan Period box select 2.

ATTENTION This is the running frequency for the Algorithm.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11

Algorithms Configure PV Algorithm Step 16 Action a. Enter Hours as the Engineering Units. b. Change the 100% Range Value to 500. c. Verify that the Drift Deadband is 0.000 ensuring point processing on each scan.

17

Click the PV Algo arrow and select Algo 7 Run Hours.

ATTENTION For details about the functionality of this algorithm Algo 7 Run Hours, read the Introduction section at the beginning of this lab.

12

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Algorithms Configure PV Algorithm Step 18 Action a. Select the Scanning Enabled checkbox. b. Ensure Clamp PV option is not selected.

ATTENTION The Scanning Enabled option indicates that scanning is to be enabled as soon as the point is downloaded.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

13

Algorithms Configure PV Algorithm Step 19 Action a. Click the Display tab and enter the Group Number, Position in Group, Trend Number, and Position in Trend Set from your partition sheet into the appropriate fields. b. Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters.

20

a. Click the History tab to define the points history related properties. b. Select PV from Parameters list on the left, select the Fast and Std checkboxes, as shown below, to enable history collection. Select 5 seconds for the Fast collection rate and 1 minute for the Standard collection rate.

14

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Algorithms Configure PV Algorithm Step 21 Action Click the PV Algo tab to edit the algorithm properties.

TIP For details about the functionality of this algorithm Algo 7 Run Hours, read the Introduction section at the beginning of this lab.

22

To find an available Block No. a utility called alglst needs to be run from the Experion Command Prompt on the server. Select Start > Programs > Honeywell Experion PKS > Server > Diagnostics > Experion Command Prompt on the server. Select Allow from the User Account Control screen form.

23

At the C:\> prompt type the command: alglst 1 6000 > freealgo.txt and press <ENTER>. a. This command creates a file called freealgo.txt that contains a list of free algorithm blocks. b. It will be located directly under the C: drive.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

15

Algorithms Configure PV Algorithm Step 24 25 26 Action a. Open Windows Explorer and browse to the location of the freealgo.txt file. b. Double click freealgo.txt to open the file in Notepad. Verify that the PV Algo block number listed on your partition sheet appears in the list indicating that it is available to use. Enter the PV Algo block number from your partition sheet in the Block No. field.

27

Enter the Gating Source, PV, and the Gating State from your partition sheet into the appropriate fields.

16

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Algorithms Configure PV Algorithm Step 28 Action Enter the Shift Hours Destination from your partition sheet in the Shift Hours Destination fields for storing the shift values.

ATTENTION At the end of the shift, the PV algorithm will write the total run hours for the point (i.e. the duration for which tag STATEST##.PV had ON status during the shift) to the A1 (auxiliary) parameter of tag PVALG##.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

17

Algorithms Configure PV Algorithm Step 29 Action Select the Store Reset Timestamp in Descriptor checkbox.

ATTENTION The Store Reset Timestamp in Descriptor option writes the timestamp of the reset into the descriptor of the destination point.

Leave the Associated Point entry blank. 30 In Item List, select this analog point and click this Analog point to Experion PKS database. button on the toolbar to download

18

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Algorithms Configure PV Algorithm Step 31 Action a. In the Download window, verify the Selected items only option is selected and that the Summary frame indicates the appropriate item for the download. b. Click OK.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

19

Algorithms Configure PV Algorithm Step 32 Action The download Results (Successful/Errors) screen appears as shown. If there are any errors during the download, error files, which can be opened and examined by double clicking, appear in the list box. Click OK.

20

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Algorithms Configure PV Algorithm Step 33 Action Verify that the Last Modified and Last Downloaded dates in the Main tab are updated.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

21

Algorithms Configure PV Algorithm Step Verify operation of PV Algorithm 34 35 Open Configuration Studio, if not already open. Connect to your System. Action

ATTENTION Refer to the partition sheet for details about the System Name.

36

Click on the + icon besides Servers object and expand the Configuration Explorer tree.

37

Click on the + icon besides the server added into the System hierarchy, to expand the Configuration Explorer tree.

ATTENTION Refer to partition sheet for your server Alias.

22

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Algorithms Configure PV Algorithm Step 38 Action Click Schedules under server hierarchy.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

23

Algorithms Configure PV Algorithm Step 39 Click Configure shifts. Action

The following page opens. Enter the data as shown.

ATTENTION After every shift this algorithm will write the duration for which the point STATEST## had ON status in the A1 parameter of tag PVALG##. 40 Change the OP status of tag STATEST## to ON state.

24

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Algorithms Configure PV Algorithm Step 41 Action a. Type your analog point name, PVALG##, in the Command zone.

b. Press <F12> or click on the

button to open the Point Detail page for this tag.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

25

Algorithms Configure PV Algorithm Step 42 Action In the point detail page, double-click the PV Algorithm number to open the Algorithm Configuration Detail page.

26

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Algorithms Configure PV Algorithm Step 43 Action This page displays the current Run Hours at the top of the page.

ATTENTION If you click to select Reset the run hour calculation is reset to 0.00 hours.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

27

Algorithms Configure PV Algorithm Step 44 Action Return to the PVALG## Detail display and view its A1 parameter in the Auxiliary tab. The run hours total for the current shift will appear at the end of the shift.

ATTENTION The Current PV value of this PVALG## point is the total time that the tag STATEST## is in the ON state since the last reset. The instantaneous algorithm calculation result (i.e. Run Hours) is updated in the PV parameter of PVALG##. However this updated result will only be stored in A1 parameter of tag PVALG## when the shift ends.

28

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Algorithms Configure Action Algorithm

Configure Action Algorithm


Practice
Student Partition sheet Team ## Windows Login User Password System Name Server Alias Point Name Action Algo Algo Block Number Report to Request Report Request State E02ESVXX_System E02ESVXX_Server STATEST## Algo 70 Status change report 3## Use your Free Format Report index number used in previous lab. 1 Student

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

29

Algorithms Configure Action Algorithm

This page was intentionally left blank.

30

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Algorithms Configure Action Algorithm Objective

Given a Quick Builder project: Add, configure, download, and verify operation of an Action Algorithm attached to a status point.

Prerequisites

Configuration Studio and Quick Builder navigation knowledge Configuration Studio with an active server connection Status point configured Knowledge Builder available

Introduction

In this lab, you will configure in Quick Builder an Action Algorithm attached to a Status point. Call up your previously configured status point. Add an Action Algorithm to print a designated report when the status point changes state. Configure the Action Algorithm parameters. Download the point to an Experion PKS server database. Log on to Station. Verify the operation of the Action Algorithm.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

31

Algorithms Configure Action Algorithm Procedure

Perform the following procedures in Quick Builder:


Step Configure Action Algorithm 1 Login to Windows with Student User if not already logged in. Action

ATTENTION Refer your partition sheet for password details.

2 3

Open Configuration Studio, if not already open. Connect to your System. ATTENTION For System Name and Login refer your partition sheet.

In the Configuration Explorer tab, on the left side of the screen, under System Name, click + symbol next to Servers, to expand the corresponding tree.

32

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Algorithms Configure Action Algorithm Step 5 Action Click on the + icon besides your server to expand the Configuration Explorer tree.

ATTENTION Refer to partition sheet for your server Alias.

Under your Server Name, click Control Strategy.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

33

Algorithms Configure Action Algorithm Step 7 Action On the right side of the screen, in the SCADA Control section, click Build points.

TIP The Quick Builder application window opens.

34

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Algorithms Configure Action Algorithm Step 8 Action a. Click to select your Status Point STATEST## in the Item Name list box to open it for editing.

b. The Status Point STATEST## details are displayed in the property pages.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

35

Algorithms Configure Action Algorithm Step 9 Action Next to Action Algo click the down arrow Change Report from the list. and select Algo 70 Status

36

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Algorithms Configure Action Algorithm Step 10 Action Click the Action Algo tab to configure the Algo 70 parameters.

ATTENTION As a result of adding the Algo 70, a new tab Action Algo appears.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

37

Algorithms Configure Action Algorithm Step 11 Action To find an available Block No. a utility called alglist needs to be run in the Experion Command Prompt window on the Server. Select Start> Programs > Honeywell Experion PKS > Server > Diagnostics > Experion Command Prompt. Select Allow on the User Account Control screenform.

38

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Algorithms Configure Action Algorithm Step 12 Action At the C:\ prompt type the command: alglst 1 6000 > freealgo.txt This command creates the file, freealgo.txt, which contains a list of free algorithm blocks. a. The file created by the above command will be located directly under C:

13 14 15

a. Open Windows Explorer and browse to the freealgo.txt file b. Double-click freealgo.txt to open the file in Notepad. Verify that the Algo Block number listed in your partition sheet appears in the list indicating that the number is available to use. Enter the Algo Block Number from your partition sheet.

16

From your partition sheet, enter the Report to Request number and the Report Request State, which triggers the report request, in the appropriate fields.

ATTENTION For Report to Request number and the Report Request State refer your partition sheet.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

39

Algorithms Configure Action Algorithm Step 17 Action button in the toolbar menu to download the status point to the Click the Experion PKS database. Verify that the Selected items only checkbox is selected, and verify that the Summary frame indicates the appropriate load item. a. Click OK.

18

40

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Algorithms Configure Action Algorithm Step 19 After a successful load, click OK. a. The download Results (Successful/Errors) screen appears as shown. b. If there are any errors during the download, the error files appear in the list box. Double click the error files, fix the problem, and then reload. Action

20

Verify that the Last Modified and Last Downloaded dates in the Main tab are updated.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

41

Algorithms Configure Action Algorithm Step Verify the operation of Action Algorithm 21 22 Open your Static Station if not already open and login with Manager (mngr) access. a. Enter the Statest## in the Command Zone. b. Press <F12> or click on the for this tag. button to open the Point Detail page Action

42

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Algorithms Configure Action Algorithm Step 23 Action Double -click the Action Algorithm number displayed to open the Algorithm Configuration Detail page.

24

The Detail page for the algorithm appears as shown.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

43

Algorithms Configure Action Algorithm Step 25 26 Action Return to the General page of the Statest## Detail and change the point OP state to ON. Verify the report was generated. Locate the report output file and verify its last time and date. (C:\ProgramData\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Server\Data\Report\ rptxxx)

44

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Identify History Archive Configuration Options

History Archive Options Identify History Archive Configuration Options

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Introduction

Honeywell

In this lesson you will learn about the Experion PKS history archive At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Identify the history archive location, file structure, history types, and file sizes Describe how to configure history archiving Indicate where you can view archive data

History Archive Options Identify History Archive Configuration Options

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics History Archive Basics History Archiving Configuration History Archive Operation

Honeywell

History Archive Options Identify History Archive Configuration Options

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

History Archive Basics

Honeywell

Archiving making copies of circular history files for long-term storage Configured in Configuration Studio history type and file destination Default file destination
Specified during server software load Default is a registry entry changeable using Server Configuration Panel

Configuration Choices:
Retain archives in the default location space considerations Move to a configured location after a specified number of days Delete archive files after a specified number of days

History Archive Options Identify History Archive Configuration Options

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

History Archive Basics File Structure


Folder created for each history file Folder Name: ayYYYYmMMdDDhHHmNNtTT

Honeywell

History Archive Options Identify History Archive Configuration Options

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

History Archive Basics History types and default file sizes

Honeywell

History Archive Options Identify History Archive Configuration Options

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

History Archive Basics History Collection Rates


History Type Fast Standard Averages (based on Standard history rates) Extended Exception Max Collection Rates 8 8 4 3 16 Default Collection Rates 5**, 10, 15, 20, 30 seconds 1**, 2, 5, 10, 30 minutes 6, 60, 480, 1440 minutes 1, 8, 24 hours 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 seconds 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 minutes 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 24 hours

Honeywell

No of User configurable Collection rates 3 3 NA NA NA

NA Not Applicable; A Applicable **The 5 second default collection rate for Fast History can be changed to 1 second, and the 1 minute collection for Standard History can be changed to 30 seconds if necessary. Note, however, that changing the collection rates in this way can place an additional load on the process control network
History Archive Options Identify History Archive Configuration Options

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 1: Archive Storage Options Which is NOT a storage option for history archive data?
A) Deleting the data after a specified number of days B) Moving the data to a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet C) Moving the data to a specified file location D) Retaining the data in the default archive location
The correct answer is: Yourcorrect answer is: The answer: Your answer: Incorrect. The correct answer is 'B'. Data cannot Incorrect. The cannot be questionbefore cannot You must answer the question'B'. Data Correct! Data correctthis directlycompletely to You You -Click anywhere Microsoft Excel must answer answer is exported Correct! Dataexported todirectlycompletely cannot question before exported YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue to a Incorrect--answered thiscorrectly! Correct answer anywhere to continue be not -Click anywhere Microsoft Youdid directlyClickanywhereto continueExcel a Correct answerthis betoa to continue did directly exported spreadsheet. not Click Excel correctly! be You continuing a to Microsoft this spreadsheet. continuing Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. spreadsheet. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Honeywell

Submit
8

Clear

History Archive Options Identify History Archive Configuration Options

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics History Archive Basics History Archiving Configuration History Archive Operation

Honeywell

History Archive Options Identify History Archive Configuration Options

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configuration Configuration Studio Configure in Configuration Studio

Honeywell

History Archive Options Identify History Archive Configuration Options

10

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configuration History Archive Configuration Display

Honeywell

Check the type of history to archive

History Archive Options Identify History Archive Configuration Options

11

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configuration History Archive Configuration Display


For each type of history decide on storage option

Honeywell

Decide the number of days to move or delete

History Archive Options Identify History Archive Configuration Options

12

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configuration For Move Option:

Honeywell

For Retain Option:

Type of alarm priority when limit is reached

History Archive Options Identify History Archive Configuration Options

13

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Disk Space Calculation


For Move and Retain Options: Storage space calculations Total Storage Requirements (bytes) =

Honeywell

(((N1+N2+N3+N4+N5+5)*(PS*6+8))+((N6+1)*(PF*6+8))+((N7 +N8+N9+3)*(PE*6+8)))*2
PS PF PE N1 to N5 N6 N7 to N9 Number of point parameters that can be assigned to standard history Number of point parameters that can be assigned to fast history Number of point parameters that can be assigned to extended history Number of samples retained by each of the standard history files (N1 = 1-minute snapshots, N2 = 6-minute averages, and so on) Number of samples of history retained for the fast history interval number of samples retained by each of the extended history files (N7 = 1-hour snapshots, N8 = 8-hour snapshots, and N9 = 24-hour snapshots)

For Exception history, allocate 500MB for each data file


This size is independent of the number of parameters assigned to Exception history

History Archive Options Identify History Archive Configuration Options

14

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 2 : Archive Configuration Options Using archive management, you can do any of these except:
A) Delete the history archives after a specified number of days B) Move the history archive to a specified location after a specified number of days C) Retain the history archive and copy it to a specified location after a specified number of days D) Retain the history archive until the free disk space falls below a specified amount
The correct answer is: Yourcorrect answer is: Youranswer: The answer: Incorrect. The correct answeris 'C'. You mustanswer correctanswer before Using archive Incorrect. The management, is 'C'. question before Correct! mustanswer anywhereto continue can delete, move or archive You not answerthe questioncontinue Using archive question Correct!Usingansweredmanagement,you retain the history or YouIncorrectansweredthedelete, move or can delete, move Incorrect -Click thisthiscorrectly! you Correct answer anywhere to continue management, youanywhere to move Correct Click can questioncompletely Youdid You ---Clickanywhere to continue retain the history did Using archive this You Click this delete, completely not management, continuing correctly! you can retain the history archive. You cannot or continuing retain the history archive. You cannotretain and copy thea the archive. You cannot retain and copy the retain and copy to a archive. You cannot retain andto a location. copy the history archive to history archive history archive to a location. history archive location. location. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Honeywell

Submit

Clear

History Archive Options Identify History Archive Configuration Options

15

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics History Archive Basics History Archiving Configuration History Archive Operation

Honeywell

History Archive Options Identify History Archive Configuration Options

16

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configuration To View Archive Data

Honeywell

Restore data from the Move location to: C:\ProgramData\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Server\Data\RestoredArchives (Or to: \RestoredArchives at your specified archive location) View in Station Trend Displays

Using the date and time selector select appropriate date and time

History Archive Options Identify History Archive Configuration Options

17

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Summary

Honeywell

Configuration Studio lets you set options for archiving circular history files. You can:
Retain archives in the default location Move archives to a configured location after a specified number of days Delete archive files after a specified number of days Select standard, extended or fast history types View archives in station trend displays

Specify the default file destination during the Server software load

History Archive Options Identify History Archive Configuration Options

18

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Conclusion Identify History Archive Configuration Options

Honeywell

Completion Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material


History Archive Options Identify History Archive Configuration Options

19

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

History Archive Options Identify History Archive Configuration Options

20

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

10

R400: Describe Scalable history configuration

History Archive Options R400: Describe Scalable history configuration

21

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Introduction In this module we will learn about enhancements for history configuration introduced in Experion PKS R400 At the end of this module you will be able to
Describe Exception History type Identify the history rates and offsets available Describe history configuration

Honeywell

History Archive Options R400: Describe Scalable history configuration

22

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

11

History Collection Experion can be configured to store the values of points at predetermined intervals to create a history of process values
This process is known as history collection

Honeywell

Historical information of point can be added to trend display in station for monitoring by operators History collection types
Till Experion R310 only periodic history type was available for history collection Periodic history collection types Standard Fast Extended

In Experion R400 exception history type is introduced

History Archive Options R400: Describe Scalable history configuration

23

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

History Enhancements Overview A new Exception history type is added to store string values

Honeywell

Cannot be trended, but will be able to give string history data to HDA and ODBC clients Only stores values when the value or quality of the source item changes

Experion History now supports more data types


String, Double, Time

Multiple history rates and offsets are available


Experion Historian supports multiple fast and standard history rates
History Archive Options R400: Describe Scalable history configuration

24

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

12

Exception History configuration Experion PKS R400 does not support exception history for CDA points,
The option within Control Builder, to enable exception history is disabled

Honeywell

Exception History option is available for selection in Quick Builder For SCADA points, exception history can be configured using Quick builder and station

Currently the Exception History option is not supported for selection in Control Builder
History Archive Options R400: Describe Scalable history configuration

25

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

History Collection Rates


History Type Fast Standard Averages (based on Standard history rates) Extended Exception Max Collection Rates 8 8 4 3 16 Default Collection Rates 5**, 10, 15, 20, 30 seconds 1**, 2, 5, 10, 30 minutes 6, 60, 480, 1440 minutes 1, 8, 24 hours 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 seconds 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 minutes 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 24 hours

Honeywell
No of User configurable Collection rates 3 3 NA NA NA

NA Not Applicable; A Applicable **The 5 second default collection rate for Fast History can be changed to 1 second, and the 1 minute collection for Standard History can be changed to 30 seconds if necessary. Note, however, that changing the collection rates in this way can place an additional load on the process control network

History Archive Options R400: Describe Scalable history configuration

26

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

13

History Collection Rates

Honeywell

For Fast and Standard history maximum 8 collection rates can be defined

Fastest Collection rate can be specified to 30 seconds or 1 minute User configurable history collection rates Fastest Collection rate can be specified to 1 or 5 seconds User configurable history collection rates
History Archive Options R400: Describe Scalable history configuration

27

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Offset Group Offset group specifies a predefined delay Delays the data collection by a specified time
Reduces the impact of history collection processes on the performance of the control system

Honeywell

Offset groups can be used only in standard and exception history


Sixteen offset groups are available

Offset group is configured in station


Configure History History Assignment History Offsets tab
16 User Configurable Offset groups with description for each group

History Archive Options R400: Describe Scalable history configuration

28

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

14

History Configuration in Station


Used to find the point in the list of configured points Gating Configuration LED ON when Gating is configured for the point

Honeywell

Add Point and Parameter to the selected history type

History Archive Options R400: Describe Scalable history configuration

29

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 1

Honeywell

For which of the following history types history offsets can be configured?
A) Fast history only B) Standard and Exception history C) Extended and Standard history D) Standard history only

Yes! The correct answer is 'B'. The history No. The correctanswer correct answer is 'B'. The history YourcorrectYes!The correct answer is 'B'. The history No. The answer: The correct answer is 'B'. The history Youranswer: The is: answer is: offsets can be configuredfor Standard and You must answer be configuredbefore question before offsets can You not Click anywhere to continue must answerthequestion completely question for Standard and YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue Incorrect answer anywhereto continue Correct --Clickanywhere to history. Exception history. Youdid You --answeredthis correctly! Correct answerthisthis correctly! did You Click anywhere tocontinue not Click this continuing Exception completely continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
30

Clear

History Archive Options R400: Describe Scalable history configuration

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

15

Summary

Honeywell

New history type called Exception History is introduced in Experion R400 Additional history collection rates are available History offsets can be configured for Standard and Exception history History configuration is enhanced to find the point parameter and add point parameter to history configuration

History Archive Options R400: Describe Scalable history configuration

31

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Conclusion Describe History Configuration

Honeywell

Completion Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material


History Archive Options R400: Describe Scalable history configuration

32

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

16

Topic: History Archive Options


Contents
R400:Configure History Assignment .....................................................................................................3 R400:Configure History Archiving .......................................................................................................15

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

This page was intentionally left blank.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

History Archive Options R400:Configure History Assignment

R400:Configure History Assignment


Practice
Student Partition sheet Team ## Windows Login User Password System Name Server Alias Point Name E02ESV##_System E02ESV##_Server LOWALARM## Student

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

History Archive Options R400:Configure History Assignment

This page was intentionally left blank.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

History Archive Options R400:Configure History Assignment Objective

Given a Experion Server Assign point to history using Configuration Studio.

Prerequisites

Configuration Studio navigation knowledge Configuration Studio with an active server connection Knowledge Builder available

Introduction

In this lab, you will assign the point parameter to Standard and Fast history type. You will also observe the history values in trend display.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

History Archive Options R400:Configure History Assignment Procedure

Perform the following procedure


Step Configure History Collection 1 Login to Windows with Student User if not already logged in. Action

ATTENTION Refer your partition sheet for password details.

2 3

Open Configuration Studio, if not already open. Connect to your System. ATTENTION For System Name refer your partition sheet.

In the Configuration Explorer tab, on the left side of the screen, under System Name, click + symbol next to Servers, to expand the corresponding tree.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

History Archive Options R400:Configure History Assignment Step 5 Action Click on the + icon besides your server to expand the Configuration Explorer tree.

ATTENTION Refer to partition sheet for your server Alias.

Under your Server Name, click History.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

History Archive Options R400:Configure History Assignment Step 7 Action On the right side of the screen, click Standard History Collection

Select History Intervals option

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

History Archive Options R400:Configure History Assignment Step 9 Action Keep the Fastest collection rate to 1 minute

ATTENTION Observe that the fastest collection rate can be set to 30 seconds or 1minute. Three collection rates are user configurable.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

History Archive Options R400:Configure History Assignment Step 10 Action On Fast History tab, keep fastest collection rate as 5 seconds

ATTENTION Observe that the fastest collection rate can be set to 1 second or 5 seconds and three collection rates are user configurable.

10

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

History Archive Options R400:Configure History Assignment Step 11 Action Select History Assignment option Enter ANATEST## in the find option. Enter the parameter as PV. Click Find

12

Observe that the message is displayed

The History configuration for the ANATEST## point is displayed.

ATTENTION In the Configure Analog Point lab, some parameters of point ANATEST## are assigned to history.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11

History Archive Options R400:Configure History Assignment Step 13 Action Specify LOWALARM## point in the Add option. Enter parameter as PV. Keep the default collection rate as 1Minute. Click Add

ATTENTION The history collection rates configured on History Intervals page for standard history and fast history are reflected in the Rates combo box on History Assignment page

12

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

History Archive Options R400:Configure History Assignment Step 14 Action Observe that the LOWALARM## point gets added to blank row in history assignment list.

ATTENTION Observe that the offset can also be configured for the point parameter

15

Similarly assign LOWALARM## point to Fast History

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

13

History Archive Options R400:Configure History Assignment Step 16 Open Trend ## Observe that the history values for point LOWALARM## is displayed on trend Action

ATTENTION As LOWALARM## is assigned to Standard and Fast history, at each interval of history collection rate, value of the PV parameter is stored in Experion historian.

14

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

History Archive Options R400:Configure History Archiving

R400:Configure History Archiving


Practice
Student Partition sheet Team ## Windows Login User Password System Name Server Alias E02ESV##_System E02ESV##_Server Student

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

15

History Archive Options R400:Configure History Archiving

This page was intentionally left blank.

16

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

History Archive Options R400:Configure History Archiving Objective

Given a Experion Server Configure History archive

Prerequisites

Configuration Studio navigation knowledge Configuration Studio with an active server connection Points configured and assigned to history Knowledge Builder available

Introduction

In this lab, you will configure history archive.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

17

History Archive Options R400:Configure History Archiving Procedure

Perform the following procedures


Step Configure History Archive 1 Login to Windows with Student User if not already logged in. Action

ATTENTION Refer your partition sheet for password details.

2 3

Open Configuration Studio, if not already open. Connect to your System. ATTENTION For System Name and Login refer your partition sheet.

In the Configuration Explorer tab, on the left side of the screen, under System Name, click + symbol next to Servers, to expand the corresponding tree.

18

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

History Archive Options R400:Configure History Archiving Step 5 Action Click on the + icon besides your server to expand the Configuration Explorer tree.

ATTENTION Refer to partition sheet for your server Alias.

Select History

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

19

History Archive Options R400:Configure History Archiving Step 7 Action In the right hand pane select Configure history archiving

Select history intervals as shown below for history archiving Keep Archive Management option as Retain

ATTENTION When the history types to archive are selected by default first history archive is created and the date and time of the next archive is shown.

TIP To start archiving before the scheduled time select Archive All Now option

20

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

History Archive Options R400:Configure History Archiving Step 9 Action Browse to C:\ProgramData\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Server\data\Archive Observe that the history archive folders are created for each history type.

TIP If Archive Management option is selected as Move then history archive folders will be moved from Archive folder to the location specified by user after specified time. If Archive Management option is selected as Delete then history archive folders will deleted from Archive folder after specified time

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

21

History Archive Options R400:Configure History Archiving

This page was intentionally left blank.

22

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Identify Event Archiving Configuration Options

Event Archive Options Identify Event Archiving Configuration Options

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Introduction

Honeywell

In this lesson, you will learn about Experion PKS Event Archiving At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Identify the need for Event Archiving in Experion Understand Event Archiving in Experion Describe how to configure Event Archiving Describe how to restore Events Understand Sequence of Events (SOE) Describe SOE Journaling to SQL Server Events Database Describe how to generate SOE Event Reports

Event Archive Options Identify Event Archiving Configuration Options

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Event Archiving Concepts Event Archiving Configuration and Status Monitoring Event Archiving Considerations Sequence Of Events (SOE)

Honeywell

Event Archive Options Identify Event Archiving Configuration Options

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Need for Event Archiving

Honeywell

Experion stores every event, such as a point status change or an operator action, in an event journal
Events are collected in the Experion real time database, and are periodically copied to an SQL Server online event database for queries and reporting

Events are kept in the SQL database for a specified period, after which the oldest events are progressively deleted
To retain events for more than a few weeks, Event Archiving must be configured

Event Archiving periodically captures events from the event journal and places them in archive files
Archive files can be used for reporting and diagnostic purposes

Experion provides a playback facility, to run reports on events that have been restored from archives
Event Archive Options Identify Event Archiving Configuration Options

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Event Archiving

Honeywell

Events are archived from the SQL Server database according to a specified schedule

Events are archived either automatically or manually when an alarm alerts the operator to archive events at appropriate intervals If necessary, an early archive can be performed (that is, before the scheduled archive or the low disk space limit is reached)

The contents of an archive are verified automatically when the archive process is complete

The status (success or failure) of the archive is logged in the Event Summary, and the operator is notified with a message Archived events can be restored at any time and standard Experion reports can be used to access this information
5
EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Event Archive Options Identify Event Archiving Configuration Options

Question 1: Event Archiving Event Archiving periodically captures events:


A) From Events Journal to Event Database archive files B) From System Database to SQL Server Online Database C) From Events Database to Events Journal D) From SQL Server Online Database to System Database

Honeywell

The correct answer is: Yourcorrect answer is: The answer: Your answer: Incorrect. The correct answer is 'A'. You must answer the question beforeEvent Archiving Incorrect.Archiving periodicallyis 'A'. The correct answer before You must answer question completely Correct! You -answered thequestioncontinue YouIncorrect-answeredthisquestioncompletely events from the Incorrect captures events to continue Event Archiving Correct Correct!Event-Clickanywhere to continue Event Click this periodically captures Archiving Youdid not answer anywhere from the Events Journal from the Correct captures events to did You Click thisthiscorrectly!captures events to the not periodically -Click anywhere to continue continuing correctly! periodicallyanswer anywherefrom the Events Journalto the Events continuing the Events Database. Events Journal to Database. Database. Journal to the Events Events Database. Events Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit

Clear

Event Archive Options Identify Event Archiving Configuration Options

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Event Archiving Concepts Event Archiving Configuration and Status Monitoring Event Archiving Considerations Sequence Of Events (SOE)

Honeywell

Event Archive Options Identify Event Archiving Configuration Options

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Event Archiving Configuration & Operations Configure Event Archiving in Station


Click Configure > Alarm Event Management > Event Archiving

Honeywell

For Event Archiving operations, in Station


Click View > Events > Event Archiving

Event Archive Options Identify Event Archiving Configuration Options

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Event Archiving Configuration (1)


Online Events
Keep events online for: Specify period of time on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis for retaining events online before being deleted

Honeywell

Disk space required at current event rate Estimated disk space required for online events is calculated, considering current rate of events occurring in the system, and time period for which events are retained Raise alarm if disk space falls below Minimum disk space allowed before an alarm is raised
Event Archive Options Identify Event Archiving Configuration Options

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Event Archiving Configuration (2) Event Archiving


Create an archive Specify the period to archive events on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis When archive is due, Set archiving to start automatically Raise a Time to archive alarm to alert the operator to manually initiate archiving

Honeywell

Event Archive Options Identify Event Archiving Configuration Options

10

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Event Archiving Configuration (3) Event Archiving

Honeywell

Create archive in directory Specify location to store event archiving files Use a UNC (Universal Naming Convention) path rather than mapping drive on a local computer. e.g use \\<server_name>\<archive_folder> instead of f:\archive If blank, events will be archived to the default location C:\ ProgramData\ Honeywell\ Experion PKS\ Server\ Data\ evtarch\ backup

Alarm Priorities
Specify if an alarm of Urgent, High, or Low priority should occur to indicate Time to archive Event archiving error

Privacy
Access events are deleted when they are older than the number of days specified
Event Archive Options Identify Event Archiving Configuration Options

11

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Archive Using FileSystem Events are archived using FileSystem FileSystem archives events to:
Local disk Network file server

Honeywell

Events can be manually archived using FileSystem from a Station running on either an Experion server or a client computer

Event Archive Options Identify Event Archiving Configuration Options

12

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Event Collection / Archiving Status (1) Archiving Status

Honeywell

Event Archiving status: Shows current status of events collection and archiving Current event rate: Hourly average calculated on the previous 24 hours. This is updated every hour. Last scheduled archive: The last date and time that an archive ran. Next archive scheduled for: The date and time of the next scheduled archive. Calculated, using the last archive date and time and the configured schedule.

To manually start archiving, click the Archive Now button.


Forces an archive before the scheduled archive or before the low disk space limit is reached.
Event Archive Options Identify Event Archiving Configuration Options

13

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Event Collection / Archiving Status (2)

Honeywell

Event Archiving Operations page shows the status of event collection and archiving

Status OK Overload Failed Full Disk Synchronizing

Description Event collection and archiving is operating as required. Events collection is overloaded. If this state continues for extended periods of time, contact Honeywell support. Events collection has failed There is not enough disk space to continue events collection. Events collection is stopped until sufficient disk space is available. Events collections is temporarily stopped while servers are synchronizing

Event Archive Options Identify Event Archiving Configuration Options

14

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Restoring Events

Honeywell

Archived events can be restored so that they are available for reporting and diagnostic purposes.

Event archives are restored to a playback database and:


Are available for reporting Can be viewed in the Event Summary page

Event Archive Options Identify Event Archiving Configuration Options

15

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Restoring Events, continued

Honeywell

The Event Archiving Operations page displays a list of restored archives.

Event Archive Options Identify Event Archiving Configuration Options

16

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 2: Archive Path If no location is specified in the Create archive in directory box:
A) Events archiving will not be performed B) An urgent priority alarm is raised C) An error is displayed in the Experion PKS Server Log D) Events are archived to the location C:\ Program Data\ Honeywell\ Experion PKS\ Server\ Data\ evtarch\ backup
Incorrect.The correct answer isis'D'.IfIfno location isis Correct! The correct answer is 'D'. If no location is Incorrect.The correct answer is'D'. Ifno location is Correct! The correct answer 'D'. no location specified in specified answer archive in directory' box then The correctanswer is: Yourcorrectin'Create is: Youranswer: archivedarchive location C:\Program The answer:'Create to the in directory' box then events are archived to the location C:\Program events are answer the question before You must answer You not Data\Honeywell\Experion mustClick this question completely question before YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue Incorrect answer anywhereto continue Correct --Clickanywhere to continue Youdid You --answeredthis correctly! Correct answeranywhere to continue did You Data\Honeywell\Experion not Click anywhere to completely Click this this continuing correctly! continuing PKS\Server\Data\evtarch\backup. PKS\Server\Data\evtarch\backup. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Honeywell

Submit
17

Clear

Event Archive Options Identify Event Archiving Configuration Options

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 3: Archive Using Event Archiving archives events using:


A) Experion Backup and Restore B) SYSBACKUP utility C) FileSystem D) SYSBLD utility

Honeywell

The correctanswer is: answer is'C'. Event Archiving YourcorrectThecorrect answer isis'C'.Event Archiving Incorrect.The correct Correct! The Your answer: correct answer 'C'. Event Archiving The answer: correct answer is 'C'. Event Archiving Incorrect.The Correct! answer is: archives events using FileSystem. FileSystem archives FileSystem. FileSystem You must events usingquestionbefore question before You not answer thequestion drive answer archivesmust-Clickanywherehardcontinue a Network YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue a Network Incorrect answer anywherehardcompletely Correct -Click anywhereto continueor archivesevents to the localcorrectly! or events continuing to this Correct answerthisthis to drive Youdid You --answeredthis correctly! did You Click the local to continue not Click anywhereto completely continuing File Server. File Server. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
18

Clear

Event Archive Options Identify Event Archiving Configuration Options

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 4: Archive Status

Honeywell

Which of the following Archiving Status details does the Operations page display:
A) Event Archiving Status B) Current event rate C) Last scheduled archive D) Next archive scheduled for E) All of the above

The correct answer is: Yourcorrect answer is: Your answer: The answer: Incorrect. The correct answer is 'E'. All of the Incorrect. All of the abovequestion before the correct answer is 'E'. Correct! Theanswerabovearchiving All of You must of the the archivingstatus Correct! All Click anywhere to continue You not answer question completely must before above archiving statusthe questiondisplayed YouIncorrectanswered this correctly! status Incorrect answer anywhere arecontinue Correct --Click this details tocontinue above archiving statusdetails tocontinue Correct answer anywhere Youdid You --answered the correctly! page. did You Click thisthe Operations not Click on question displayed details are displayedanywheretoarecompletely continuing details are displayedon this Operations page. continuing on the Operations page. on the Operations page. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
19

Clear

Event Archive Options Identify Event Archiving Configuration Options

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Event Archiving Concepts Event Archiving Configuration and Status Monitoring Event Archiving Considerations Sequence Of Events (SOE)

Honeywell

Event Archive Options Identify Event Archiving Configuration Options

20

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

10

Event Archiving Considerations To configure event archiving, identify the following:


Period of time events are kept online before being deleted Time of day to archive events on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis Use automatic archiving or raise an alarm when archiving is due

Honeywell

Event Archive Options Identify Event Archiving Configuration Options

21

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Event Archiving Considerations, continued Performance Considerations:

Honeywell

The more events retained in the online SQL Server event database, the greater the negative impact on CPU performance of the server While Honeywell recommends that no more than five million events be kept online, these must be restricted to the minimum required Best practice would be to identify the minimum number of events to meet the business requirements for reporting Event archives can always be restored to meet any ad-hoc reporting requirements

Event Archive Options Identify Event Archiving Configuration Options

22

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

11

Disk Space Considerations Disk Space Estimation Requirements:


Estimate of the events generated per day Duration that events are to be kept online Average event size (approximately 2000 bytes per event)

Honeywell

For more details on estimating space requirements, refer to Knowledge Builder: Experion R400 > Configuration > Server and Client Configuration Guide > Event Archiving > Methods of Archiving > Space requirements

Event Archive Options Identify Event Archiving Configuration Options

23

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Event Archiving Concepts Event Archiving Configuration and Status Monitoring Event Archiving Considerations Sequence Of Events (SOE)

Honeywell

Event Archive Options Identify Event Archiving Configuration Options

24

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

12

Sequence of Events

Honeywell

Sequence of Events (SOE) points are used to report the order of occurrence of digital state changes. By default, Experion supports 1000 SOEs, however this can be increased to 32767 events by using the Sysbld utility, provided free disk space is available (0.25 kilobytes per SOE). SOE Summary can be viewed in the Station.

Event Archive Options Identify Event Archiving Configuration Options

25

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

SOE Journaling to SQL Server Events Database

Honeywell

Some controllers can time-stamp events to millisecond resolution When this SOE capability is used, Sequence of Events (SOEs) are journaled to
Experion event file (and therefore the SQL Server events database) SOE file in server

Sequence of Events reports can be configured to report a list of events from this server file for selected points, during a selected time span SOEs may also be archived (as part of event archiving) and are available in
Alarm & Event reports and SOE reports

Reports of SOEs are shown in the next slide


26

Event Archive Options Identify Event Archiving Configuration Options

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

13

SOE Event Reports

Honeywell

SOEs appear in Alarm and Event Reports as well as SOE Reports

SOEs in Alarm and Event Report

SOEs in SOE Report

Event Archive Options Identify Event Archiving Configuration Options

27

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

SOE Security & Printer Configuration

Honeywell

Security for the SOE Summary Display is configured in the Server wide Station Settings page, Alarm/Event tab in Station.

The Sequence of Events Printer is configured in the Alarms page, Alarm Forwarding tab
Event Archive Options Identify Event Archiving Configuration Options

28

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

14

Question 5: Sequence of Events SOEs are journaled to:


A) Experion Event File B) SQL Server events database C) SOE file in server D) All of the above

Honeywell

The correct answer is: Yourcorrect answer is: The answer: Youranswer: Incorrect.The answer the question before above'. Correct! Theanswer answeris 'All of the above'. You must correct answeris Incorrect.Thecorrect answer tois'Allbefore above'. Correct! Thecorrect answer to 'All of the correct question You not Click anywhere is completely must Click question of the YouIncorrectanswered thequestion'Allof the above'. Incorrect answer anywhere to continue Correct --Clickanywhere to continue Youdid You -are journaled to thecontinue Event did You answeredthis correctly! not Click anywhere Experion this completely Correct answerthisthiscorrectly! The SOEs -are journaled to thecontinue Event continuing The SOEs Experion continuing File, SQL Server events database and SOE file File, SQL Server events database and SOE file server. server. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
29

Clear

Event Archive Options Identify Event Archiving Configuration Options

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Summary Event Archiving in Experion:

Honeywell

Periodically captures events from the event journal and places them into an archive file Allows the archived events to be used for reporting and diagnostic purposes

Events are archived either automatically, or manually when an alarm alerts the operator to archive events at appropriate intervals FileSystem archives events to:
Local disk Network file server

Sequence of Events (SOE) points are used to report the order of occurrence of digital state changes

Event Archive Options Identify Event Archiving Configuration Options

30

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

15

Conclusion Identify Event Archiving Configuration Options

Honeywell

Completion Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course materials.


Event Archive Options Identify Event Archiving Configuration Options

31

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Event Archive Options Identify Event Archiving Configuration Options

32

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

16

Topic: Event Archive Options


Contents
R400:Configure Event Archiving ...........................................................................................................3

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

This page was intentionally left blank.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Event Archive Options R400:Configure Event Archiving

R400:Configure Event Archiving


Practice
Student Partition sheet Team ## Windows Login User Password System Name Server Alias E02ESV##_System E02ESV##_Server Student

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Event Archive Options R400:Configure Event Archiving

This page was intentionally left blank.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Event Archive Options R400:Configure Event Archiving Objective

Given a Experion Server Configure Event Archiving

Prerequisites

Configuration Studio navigation knowledge Configuration Studio with an active server connection Knowledge Builder available

Introduction

In this lab, you will configure and create Event archive. You will also restore the old event archive.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Event Archive Options R400:Configure Event Archiving Procedure

Perform the following procedure


Step Create Event Archive 1 Login to Windows with Student User if not already logged in. Action

ATTENTION Refer your partition sheet for password details.

2 3

Open Configuration Studio, if not already open. Connect to your System. ATTENTION For System Name refer your partition sheet.

In the Configuration Explorer tab, on the left side of the screen, under System Name, click + symbol next to Servers, to expand the corresponding tree.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Event Archive Options R400:Configure Event Archiving Step 5 Action Click on the + icon besides your server to expand the Configuration Explorer tree.

ATTENTION Refer to partition sheet for your server Alias.

Under your Server Name, click Alarms and Event Management.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Event Archive Options R400:Configure Event Archiving Step 7 Action On the right side of the screen, click Configure Event Archiving

If not already selected then select Create an archive option

ATTENTION As per this configuration every 2 weeks the events will be archived to the default location

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Event Archive Options R400:Configure Event Archiving Step 9 Open Station application. Click Configure Archiving Alarm and Event Management Configure Event Action

Click Operations tab To immediately archive the events select Archive Now

10

Select Yes to perform manual archive

11

Wait till the archive is in progress

12

After completing the archive operation, Archive completes successfully message is displayed

13

Observe the archive operation events in Events summary

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Event Archive Options R400:Configure Event Archiving Step 14 Action Observe the event archive file is stored to the default location C:\ProgramData\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Server\Data\evtarch\Backup

ATTENTION At your site, the ProgramData folder will be the hidden folder.

Restore Event Archive 15 On Operations tab select Restore

10

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Event Archive Options R400:Configure Event Archiving Step 16 Browse to the C:\Student folder. Select the event archive file and click open Action

ATTENTION In class, we will restore the archive stored in the Student folder. At your site you can restore archive from the default location C:\ProgramData\Honeywell\ExperionPKS\Server\Data\ evtarch\Backup

17

Wait till the events get restored

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11

Event Archive Options R400:Configure Event Archiving Step 18 Action After completing the operation Restore complete message appears

19

The restored archive is listed with the start date and end date of archive

20

Observe Event Restore successful event appears in Events summary

12

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Event Archive Options R400:Configure Event Archiving Step 21 Action Open station and change access level to mngr. Click on Date & Time column and select Custom Filter option

22

Select Date as 9th Aug 2010

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

13

Event Archive Options R400:Configure Event Archiving Step 23 Action Observe that you can view the events on the date 9th Aug 2010

ATTENTION The restored archive contains the events on the date 9th Aug 2010 and hence you are able to view the events on that date

14

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Describe DSP Trends

Groups and Trends Describe DSP Trends

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Introduction In this lesson, you will learn about:


Trend and their types supported by Experion Configuring alarm counts on trends

Honeywell

Groups and Trends Describe DSP Trends

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Trend Types Configure Alarm Counts on Trends

Honeywell

Groups and Trends Describe DSP Trends

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

DSP Trend Types To configure trends in Configuration Studio


Click on Trends and Groups > Configure Trends link

Honeywell

To view trends in Station


Click View > Trend Summary

All trend types except Standard are DSP files These DSP trends are essential for trending points from legacy systems like S9000 that are being read by Experion DSP Trend Types are:
Single Dual Triple X-Y S9000 SPP UMAX SPP

Groups and Trends Describe DSP Trends

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Trend Types Configure Alarm Counts on Trends

Honeywell

Groups and Trends Describe DSP Trends

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Add Alarm Counts to Trend


In Experion R400, user can view detailed Alarm Metrics
Alarm counts on trends Displays trend of current number of alarms over a period of time for Points/Assets/Alarm Groups

Honeywell

Alarm Counts on a Trend

Configuration steps

Historize and trending alarm counts Possible to trend counts on individual points, assets and alarm groups Parameters that can be trended are: Total Alarms Total Alerts Total Messages Total Active Unacknowledged Alarms Total High Acknowledged Alarms Total Urgent returned to Normal Alarms Total Shelved Alerts Total Unacknowledged Informational Messages Configure point/assets in Experion History Configure trend
6

Groups and Trends Describe DSP Trends

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configuration for Alarm Counts on a Trend (Contd)

Honeywell

Trends can be viewed in Tabular History format

Points with alarm count parameters added to system trend


Groups and Trends Describe DSP Trends

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 1: DSP Trend Types Which of the following is not a DSP Trend Type?
A) Single B) Dual C) Triple D) Standard E) X-Y

Honeywell

The correct answer is: is 'D'. Standard is not a DSP Yourcorrect answer is: is 'D'. Standard is not a DSP Your The correct answer is 'D'. Standard is not a DSP The answer: Yes! The correct answer is 'D'. Standard is not a DSP No. The correct answer Yes! answer: No. The correct answer You must answer trend type. before You not Click anywhere to continue must answerthequestion before thequestion question YouIncorrectansweredtrendcorrectly! Incorrect answer anywhereto continue Correct --Clickanywhere to continue Correct answerthisthis type. continue Youdid You --answeredthis correctly! did You Click anywhere to completely not Click this question completely continuing continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
8

Clear

Groups and Trends Describe DSP Trends

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Summary DSP Trend Types:


Single Dual Triple X-Y S9000 SPP UMAX SPP

Honeywell

In Experion R400, alarm counts for assets, points and alarm groups can be added to trend
Groups and Trends Describe DSP Trends

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Lab Examples 1 of 2 Configure Groups

Honeywell

Groups and Trends Describe DSP Trends

10

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Lab Examples 2 of 2 Configure Trends

Honeywell

Groups and Trends Describe DSP Trends

11

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Conclusion Describe DSP Trends

Honeywell

Completion Certificate

Proceed to the next lesson in your course material


Groups and Trends Describe DSP Trends

12

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topic: Groups and Trends


Contents
Configure Groups ..................................................................................................................................3 Configure Trends .................................................................................................................................17

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

This page was intentionally left blank.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Groups and Trends Configure Groups

Configure Groups
Practice
Student Partition Sheet Team ## Windows Login User Password System Name Group number Server Alias E02ESV##_System 2## E02ESV##_Server Student

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Groups and Trends Configure Groups

This page was intentionally left blank.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Groups and Trends Configure Groups Objective

Given a Configuration Studio connected to an Experion PKS Server: Configure Groups

Prerequisites

Knowledge of Configuration Studio Station navigation familiarization Station connected to a server Knowledge Builder available

Introduction

During this lab, you will configure a Group in Configuration Studio, add point parameters to the group for the group trend, and set security level for modifying the group properties. Configure Groups.

Note: The Parallel Operation Keyboard (POK) can be used to simultaneously operate the control loops from a group display. During abnormal plant situations, more than one operator can use this feature, to control multiple loops from a single physical keyboard at the same time. The POK contains 8 groups of keys Each group contains 4 keys: MAN, NORM, Raise, Lower Each group on POK is aligned with corresponding faceplate in group

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Groups and Trends Configure Groups Procedure

Perform the following procedures in Configuration Studio:


Step Configure a Group 1 Login to Windows with Student User if not already logged in. ATTENTION Refer your partition sheet for password details. Action

2 3

If not already open, start Configuration Studio and connect to your System. Click on Trends and Groups under the server hierarchy for your server.

ATTENTION Refer to your partition sheet for server Alias.

Click on Configure groups.

ATTENTION The System display tab will open.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Groups and Trends Configure Groups Step 5 Action Scroll down and click the Group number in the Groups page to open the Definition page.

ATTENTION Refer to the partition sheet for details about the group number.

Enter Pressure Loops ## in the Title field.

ATTENTION The Title can be a maximum of 30 characters including spaces and symbols.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Groups and Trends Configure Groups Step 7 Click the window. Action button in position 1 (under the Point ID section) to open the Point Browser

The Point Browser appears as shown in the following example. Click on show filter.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Groups and Trends Configure Groups Step 8 Action Under Description, a list of all the assets configured in the system will appear. Scroll down the Description list. Click on the asset AQ_item.

ATTENTION The Description list specifies the assets configured on the system. The list of points assigned to the asset will be shown in the window above, on selecting the asset name.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Groups and Trends Configure Groups Step 9 Select the SINEWAVE option in the list. Click Apply. Action

ATTENTION The tag SINEWAVE is assigned to asset AQ_item. The point can also be selected by directly entering the tag name in the point browser.

10

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Groups and Trends Configure Groups Step 10 11 Click Close. Click the Parameter for Trend arrow next to the Sinewave Point ID and select PV. Action

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11

Groups and Trends Configure Groups Step 12 Action Click the MNGR or ENGR security level required to change group checkbox for the security level.

ATTENTION Now, only the ENGR or MNGR access levels can change this groups properties. Without this setting, a SUPV access level (but not OPER) could also modify the Group Properties.

12

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Groups and Trends Configure Groups Step 13 In Station select Configure Action Trends and Groups Groups Select the group configured in previous steps.

14

Click the View Group link to open the Detail Display for this group.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

13

Groups and Trends Configure Groups Step 15 Action The group detail page appears as shown

ATTENTION Seven other tags could be added to this group belonging to the same or different assets. Groups are not asset restricted.

14

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Groups and Trends Configure Groups Step 16 Action Click the View As arrow and select Group Trend.

The PV of Sinewave now appears in the trend.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

15

Groups and Trends Configure Groups Step 17 Action Click the Interval arrow and select 5 sec to smooth out the curve.

ATTENTION In order to see parameter history either in a trend or numeric format, the parameter must be configured for history collection. If not configured for history collection, the trend builds with real-time data as long as the trend is called up on Station.

16

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Groups and Trends Configure Trends

Configure Trends
Practice
Student Partition Sheet Team ## Windows Login User Password System Name Trend Index Number Server Alias E02ESV##_System 2## E02ESV##_Server Student

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

17

Groups and Trends Configure Trends

This page was intentionally left blank.

18

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Groups and Trends Configure Trends Objective

Given a Configuration Studio connected to an Experion PKS Server: Configure Trends

Prerequisites

Knowledge of Configuration Studio Station navigation familiarization Station connected to a server Knowledge Builder available

Introduction

During this lab, you will configure a Trend, add point parameters to a Trend group, and set security levels for modifying the Trend properties in Configuration Studio Configure Trends

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

19

Groups and Trends Configure Trends Procedure

Perform the following procedures in Station:


Step Configure a Trend 1 Login to Windows with Student User if not already logged in. ATTENTION Refer your partition sheet for password details. Action

2 3 4

Launch Station application (if not already open). Change the access level to mngr. Click Configure > Trend and Group Displays > Trends. The Trend Configuration Summary page is displayed.

20

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Groups and Trends Configure Trends Step 5 Action Page down until you see your Trend Index Number. Click the blank Title area next to Trend Index Number to open the Configuration page.

ATTENTION Trend configuration is allowed at the Operator access level. Refer to your partition sheet for Trend Index Number.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

21

Groups and Trends Configure Trends Step 6 Action Enter System Sinewave in the Title field. Ensure the Trend Type is Standard. Click the down arrow in the Sample Interval box and select 5 sec. Click the down arrow in the Period box and select 20 Minutes. Ensure the Individual scales in % check box is selected.

ATTENTION Standard Trend Type is the only HMI system trend available while the remaining trend types are DSP trends. The Individual scales option is useful for trends with multiple points plotted. When Individual scale is selected, each point within the same trend will be plotted in its own range. This will be seen in detail later in this lab.

22

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Groups and Trends Configure Trends Step 7 Action Enter 0 in the first Trend range box (lower limit) field and 10000 in the second box (upper limit).

Ensure that the MNGR or ENGR security level required to change traces checkbox is NOT selected.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

23

Groups and Trends Configure Trends Step 9 Click the Action button in the Point ID box to open the Point Browser window.

The Point Browser appears as shown. Click on show filter link.

24

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Groups and Trends Configure Trends Step 10 Action In the Description box, a list of all the assets configured in the system will appear. Scroll down the Description list. Click the + symbol next to Assets. Select AQ_item.

ATTENTION The Description list specifies the assets configured on the system. When the asset name is selected, the list of points assigned to the asset will be shown in the window above.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

25

Groups and Trends Configure Trends Step 11 Select the SINEWAVE option in the list. Click Apply. Action

ATTENTION The tag SINEWAVE is assigned to asset AQ_item. The point can also be selected by directly entering the tag name in the point browser.

12

Click Close.

26

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Groups and Trends Configure Trends Step 13 Action In the Parameter column, click the drop-down arrow next to Sinewave and select PV.

ATTENTION After clicking the Parameter drop-down arrow, type the letter P to quickly jump to the list of parameters beginning with P. Scroll down until PV is shown.

14

Click the Trend button in the Station toolbar. Enter your trend number and select OK.

15

The Trend is displayed in Station.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

27

Groups and Trends Configure Trends Step 16 Action In the Trend display, specify the following details in the second row of the legend. Point ID = ANATEST## (either type or select using Point Browser) Parameter = PV Note that when the Parameter is specified, the plot is automatically selected in the Pen column. Click on the color link of this point. This launches the Color palette. Select a color of your choice. This points values will be plotted in the selected color. 17 Observe that the Save button on the top-right corner is enabled with the comment (Modified) displayed.

This indicates that the original trend configuration has been modified in the Trend (runtime) display. Click the Save button to save this configuration change. 18 The Trend appears as shown below:

28

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Groups and Trends Configure Trends Step 19 Action View the Legend at the bottom of the trend. Plot Number Pen Color

The details of the legend are described below: Plot Number: Number of the plot within the trend (1-32). Pen: Display/hide the plot in the trend. Pen Color: Displays the current color assigned to the pen. When clicked, the color palette is launched allowing the pen color to be selected. Point ID & Parameter: Displays the point id and parameter being plotted. Description: Displays the description of the point. Low Scale and High Scale: The configured minimum and maximum Y-axis scale for the plot is displayed. This can also be entered by the user. Reference Value, Current Value: These are runtime and configured values of the specified point.

ATTENTION Click the Show Legend button on the top-right corner to show or hide the legend.

The System Trend from R310 supports the plotting of up to 32 points in a single trend. Selecting a point in the legend highlights its trace, making it easier to distinguish. Double clicking on the points plot number in the legend launches the point detail display.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

29

Groups and Trends Configure Trends Step 20 Action In the Trend Display page, click the Select scale drop-down menu to select the Individual scales in EU and to display the trend in EU (engineering units).

In the legend, click each point and observe its range in the Y-axis of the trend.

SINEWAVE.PV

ANATESTXX.PV

Note that the Low and High Scale values of both points in engineering units are different. Although both points are plotted in a single trend, they are plotted in their individual ranges. This is possible because the Individual Scales check box was selected when the Trend System Sinewave was configured. ATTENTION Click the Configure Trend button, on the top-right corner of the Trend Display page, to show the trend configuration page.

Now select Single Scale for all plots and click View Trend to see the difference in the plots. Return the configuration to Individual Scale.

30

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Groups and Trends Configure Trends Step 21 Action Click on any point in the trend and view the reference line inserted at that point.

In the Legend pane view, notice the Reference Value of both points plotted along with the timestamp.

ATTENTION Click the Remove reference line button to remove the reference line from the plot area.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

31

Groups and Trends Configure Trends Step 22 Action Notice the Time Selector at the bottom-right corner of the trend display. This Time Selector can be used to view historized values for the point. The Show Time Selector drop down list can be used to position the Time Selector on the trend. Time Selector Show Time Selector drop down list

The user may select the date and time to view the plot for the duration starting from (Specified Date & Time Time Period of the trend) to the (Specified Date & Time). Note on specifying the date and time, plotting of the trend is Paused. This is done so that the user can leisurely view and analyze the plot for the specified duration.

Once the user is done with the analysis, the user may click the Resume live updates button to view current values (live updates) being plotted.

ATTENTION The date and time specified in the Time Selector may be current time or past time only. Plots for past time will only be seen if the specified point parameters were historized for that duration. If PHD-Experion Integration is configured and the specified point parameters were historized in PHD, then for the duration exceeding Experions history storage, the history values will automatically be retrieved from the PHD server and plotted in the trend. Since time is the X-axis of the trend, history values can also be seen by dragging the horizontal scroll bar backwards along X-axis.

32

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Groups and Trends Configure Trends Step 23 Action Click the Select View drop-down in the top-right corner of the Trend Display.

Note that by default the View Trend Only view is displayed. 24 View Trend with Events The View Trend with Events shows the Trend with Event Summary information. Click on the Event icon displayed along the X-axis, and details of that event are highlighted in the Events pane.

Event Icon

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

33

Groups and Trends Configure Trends Step 25 View Trend with Tabular History The View Trend with Tabular History shows the Trend with numeric history values of the point parameters plotted in that trend. Click to insert a reference line in the trend, and the numeric history of both point parameters at that instant are highlighted. Action

26

Try out the following trend options:

Line and Bar chart display.

at the top-left corner of the Trend

Zoom in, Zoom Out and Reset zoom level corner of the Trend Display.

at the bottom right

Zoom in will zoom in by 25% of the visible range. If a reference line is visible, the zooming is centered on the reference line. Zoom out will zoom out by 25% of the visible range. If a reference line is visible, the zooming is centered on the reference line. 27 In Trend display specify the following details in third row Point ID = SINEWAVE Parameter = TotalAlarms Click Save to save the trend display

34

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Groups and Trends Configure Trends Step 28 Action Observe that the total number of alarms for SINEWAVE point are displayed and are plotted on trend

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

35

Groups and Trends Configure Trends Step 29 Call up the Trend display 112. Action

This trend display has been configured for CEE type points From R310, the Engineering Units for TPS/SCADA/CEE type of points will be displayed with the Current Value on the Experion Server and Console Station.

36

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Use Experion Data in Other Applications

Data Extraction for Other Uses Use Experion Data in Other Applications

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Introduction

Honeywell

In this lesson you will learn how to use Experion PKS data in other applications At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Identify the applications in which you can use Experion PKS data Describe how you can copy and paste data from station trend to Microsoft applications Describe how to use point parameter and historical data from server databases in a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet

Data Extraction for Other Uses Use Experion Data in Other Applications

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Copying and Pasting from Station trend displays

Honeywell

Microsoft Excel Data Exchange Option Description and Requirements Excel Data Exchange Wizard Excel Data Exchange Formulas OPC Mechanisms covered in a later lesson ODBC Data Exchange Option covered in Knowledge Builder ODBC Driver Option covered in Knowledge Builder

Data Extraction for Other Uses Use Experion Data in Other Applications

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Cut and Paste From Station Trend Displays In Station


Click any trend page chart Select Edit >Copy to copy the data values to the clipboard

Honeywell

Open Microsoft Excel (or Word, Notepad, etc.).


Choose Edit > Paste

Values are Static


No Updates

Data Extraction for Other Uses Use Experion Data in Other Applications

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 1: Copy and Paste from Station Trend Displays

Honeywell

Which of the following statements is true? When copying from Station Trend Displays:
A) Data from the trend page chart cannot be copied into Microsoft Excel B) The values are not dynamic C) Data values are not copied to the clipboard

The correct answer is: Yourcorrect answer is: Youranswer: The answer: Yes! The correct answer is 'B'. When copying data No. The correct answer is 'B'. When copying data Yes! The correct answerquestion before is 'B'. When copying data No. The correct answer is 'B'. When copying data You must answer the question before You not Click this question completely must the from Station Click anywhere the continue YouIncorrectansweredDisplaystocontinue are static. Incorrect answer anywhere to continue Correct --answerDisplays thevalues from You --answeredthis correctly! Trend this correctly! Correct answer anywhere to completely YoudidStationClickanywhere to continue are static. did You Trend this question values not Click continuing continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
5

Clear

Data Extraction for Other Uses Use Experion Data in Other Applications

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Copying and Pasting from Station trend displays Excel Data Exchange Option Description and Requirements Excel Data Exchange Wizard Excel Data Exchange Formulas

Honeywell

Data Extraction for Other Uses Use Experion Data in Other Applications

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Excel Data Exchange Option

Honeywell

Allows the capture of real-time point and point history values from Experion PKS for display in a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet Configuration can be done using a built in wizard or using cell formulas Data displayed in Excel may be static or updated dynamically The Excel Data Exchange Option allows the user to retrieve point parameter and / or historical data from any Experion Server database on the network.
Read/write access to point parameter values Read-only access to history data Read/write access to Experion PKS database files (user files)

Data Extraction for Other Uses Use Experion Data in Other Applications

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Excel Data Exchange Option Requires the Network Server option

Honeywell

Excel Data Exchange - supplied on the Experion PKS Applications DVD Microsoft Office 2007/ Microsoft Office 2010 is the qualified Excel version (Excel 2007/ Excel 2010)

Data Extraction for Other Uses Use Experion Data in Other Applications

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Verify Excel Data Exchange is Enabled (1) To verify Microsoft Excel Data Exchange is installed
Open Microsoft Excel Select Office button Click Excel Options

Honeywell

Data Extraction for Other Uses Use Experion Data in Other Applications

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Verify Excel Data Exchange is Enabled (2)

Honeywell

Select Add-Ins in Excel Options window Verify Microsoft Excel Data Exchange option is present in Add-Ins

Data Extraction for Other Uses Use Experion Data in Other Applications

10

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 2: Excel Data Exchange Option Which is NOT true about the Excel Data Exchange option?
A) Requires the Network Server option B) Captured data can be static or dynamically updated C) Can only use the Excel Data Exchange Wizard D) Allows the capture of real-time point value and history information from Experion PKS
The correct answer is: Yourcorrect answer is: Youranswer: statement is 'C'. The Excel Data Exchange option The answer: statement is 'C'. The Excel Data Exchange option Yes! The false statement is 'C'. The Excel Data Exchange option No. The false statement is 'C'. The Excel Data Exchange option Yes! The false No. The false You you to use the question before answer You mustto use this question completely allows must-Click anywhere to continue Exchange Wizard or cell the Data YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue ExchangeWizard or cell Incorrect answereither questioncompletely Correct -Click anywhere to continue allowsnot answer anywhere Excelbefore you answer this correctly! Correct Click either correctly! Data to Youdid You --answeredthis thetocontinue did You Click anywhere Excel not this continuing formulas. continuing formulas. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.
11

Honeywell

Submit

Clear

Data Extraction for Other Uses Use Experion Data in Other Applications

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics Copying and Pasting from Station trend displays Excel Data Exchange Option Description and Requirements Excel Data Exchange Wizard Excel Data Exchange Formulas

Honeywell

Data Extraction for Other Uses Use Experion Data in Other Applications

12

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Excel Data Exchange Wizard (1) Start from an Excel spreadsheet


Add-Ins> Microsoft Excel Data Exchange >Wizard

Honeywell

Data Extraction for Other Uses Use Experion Data in Other Applications

13

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Enable Excel Data Exchange If Microsoft Excel Data Exchange is not present
Browse to the file C:\Program Files\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Client\Xldataex \activatemede.vbs

Honeywell

Double-click activatemede.vbs

Data Extraction for Other Uses Use Experion Data in Other Applications

14

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Excel Data Exchange Wizard (2) Start from an Excel spreadsheet


Add-Ins> Microsoft Excel Data Exchange >Wizard

Honeywell

Data Extraction for Other Uses Use Experion Data in Other Applications

15

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Excel Data Exchange Wizard (3) Enter point parameters to capture


Host name, not IP address

Honeywell

C300 and C200/C200E : use FB.Parameter

Data Extraction for Other Uses Use Experion Data in Other Applications

16

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Excel Data Exchange Wizard (4) Configure Display Arrangement and Options: Point Values

Honeywell

Display with parameter value Values are a snapshot with no updates if checked

Do not uncheck

Display Information based on specified arrangement Click to display data


Data Extraction for Other Uses Use Experion Data in Other Applications

17

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Excel Data Exchange Wizard (5) Horizontal Arrangement:

Honeywell

Data Extraction for Other Uses Use Experion Data in Other Applications

18

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Excel Data Exchange Wizard (6) Vertical Arrangement:

Honeywell

Data Extraction for Other Uses Use Experion Data in Other Applications

19

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Excel Data Exchange Wizard (7) History


Use for pasted or updated data

Honeywell

Use for pasted data

Data Extraction for Other Uses Use Experion Data in Other Applications

20

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

10

Excel Data Exchange Wizard (8) Configure Display Arrangement and Options:
History Values

Honeywell

Display Options related to history data

Do not uncheck

Click Finish to view data

Data Extraction for Other Uses Use Experion Data in Other Applications

21

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Excel Data Exchange Wizard (9) Horizontal Arrangement: Date/Time Selection

Honeywell

Data Extraction for Other Uses Use Experion Data in Other Applications

22

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

11

Excel Data Exchange Wizard (10) Vertical Arrangement: Date/Time Selection

Honeywell

Data Extraction for Other Uses Use Experion Data in Other Applications

23

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Excel Data Exchange Wizard (11) Horizontal Arrangement: Offset Selection

Honeywell

Data Extraction for Other Uses Use Experion Data in Other Applications

24

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

12

Excel Data Exchange Wizard (12) Updating Non-pasted Data:

Honeywell

Add-Ins > Microsoft Excel Data Exchange > Set Recalculation Interval
The recalculation interval is the time between the end of one spreadsheet calculation and the start of the next Preset intervals of 5 seconds and 30 seconds are available Optionally, enter your own interval

Automatic recalculation of the values can be turned off by choosing:

Add-Ins> Microsoft Excel Data Exchange > Stop Recalculation

Data Extraction for Other Uses Use Experion Data in Other Applications

25

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 3: Excel Data Exchange Wizard

Honeywell

Which statement is false? When you check the Paste values box in the Microsoft Excel Data Exchange Wizard:
A) Point values are pasted in a spreadsheet B) Point values are dynamically updated C) Point values are not updated D) The spreadsheet is static

No.Yes!When answer is: 'B'. When you check the the Yes! false answer is The correct answer is the paste values box in paste Yourcorrect you check 'B'. When you check in the No.Theanswer: check the paste values box thepaste The false Youranswer:you The When answer is: Microsoftbox in the Microsoft Excel Datapoint values values must answerExchange Wizard, point values values must answerExchange Wizard, Exchange Microsoftbox in DataMicrosoft Excel before You Excel the the question Data Exchange You Excel Datathis questioncontinue before YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue Incorrect answer anywheredynamically Correct -Click anywhere toupdated. completely Wizard, You --answeredthisquestioncompletely are Click are correctly! this Youdid notareClickdynamicallytocontinue updated. Correct answeranywhere dynamically did You Click dynamicallytocontinue not not this not Wizard,point-valuesanywheretoupdated. updated. point valuesare not not continuing correctly! continuing Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
26

Clear

Data Extraction for Other Uses Use Experion Data in Other Applications

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

13

Topics Copying and Pasting from Station trend displays Excel Data Exchange Option Description and Requirements Excel Data Exchange Wizard Excel Data Exchange Formulas

Honeywell

Data Extraction for Other Uses Use Experion Data in Other Applications

27

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Excel Data Exchange Formulas (1) Enter a formula directly into a spreadsheet cell
In the Microsoft Excel spreadsheet select a cell, or range of cells, where the data must appear Click fx in the Tool Bar Select User Defined to view the functions Scroll through the Function Name list Choose required function Click OK to display the formula configuration form
Data Extraction for Other Uses Use Experion Data in Other Applications

Honeywell

28

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

14

Excel Data Exchange Formulas (2) Enter the required details and click OK

Honeywell

The required data should now be displayed in the spreadsheet cell or range of cells

Data Extraction for Other Uses Use Experion Data in Other Applications

29

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 4: Excel Data Exchange Formulas

Honeywell

When entering a formula directly into a spreadsheet cell, which Function category should be selected?
A) Statistical B) Financial C) Database D) User Defined

Yes! The correct answer is "User Defined". Using the No. The correct answer is "User Defined". Using the Yes! The correct is: No. The answer is: The correctansweransweris "User Defined". Using the Yourcorrectcorrectanswer is "User Defined". Using the The answer: Your answer: Function Wizard allows you to choose the required Function Wizard allowsquestion before the required you to choose You must answer the question before You not answerthequestioncontinue the formulamust-Clickanywhere toDefined list YouIncorrectansweredthequestioncontinue and display Incorrect answer anywhere to continue Correct -Click thisthis correctly! formulanameClickanywhere tocontinue namefrom from User Youdid You --answeredthis correctly! list and display did You Click this User to completely not completely Correct answer anywhere Defined continuing continuing the required data in the spreadsheet cell or range of the required data in the spreadsheet cell or range of cells. cells. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
30

Clear

Data Extraction for Other Uses Use Experion Data in Other Applications

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

15

Summary

Honeywell

When extracting Experion PKS data for use in other applications, remember:
When copying data from Station Trend Displays, the values are static The Excel Data Exchange option allows the capture of real-time point value and history information from Experion PKS When you check the paste values box in the Microsoft Excel Data Exchange Wizard, point values are not dynamically updated Using the Function Wizard allows you to choose the required formula name from the User Defined list and display the required data in the spreadsheet cell or range of cells

Data Extraction for Other Uses Use Experion Data in Other Applications

31

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Lab Example Configure Microsoft Excel Data Exchange

Honeywell

Data Extraction for Other Uses Use Experion Data in Other Applications

32

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

16

Conclusion Use Experion Data in Other Applications

Honeywell

Completion Certificate

Proceed to the Configure Microsoft Excel Data Exchange lab exercise


Data Extraction for Other Uses Use Experion Data in Other Applications

33

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Data Extraction for Other Uses Use Experion Data in Other Applications

34

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

17

Topic: Data Extraction for Other Uses


Contents
Configure Microsoft Excel Data Exchange ............................................................................................3

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

This page was intentionally left blank.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Data Extraction for Other Uses Configure Microsoft Excel Data Exchange

Configure Microsoft Excel Data Exchange


Student Partition Sheet Team ## Windows Login User Password System Name Server Alias Name Server Description Server Abbreviation Server Node Name Network Type E02ESV##_System E02ESV##_Server Experion PKS Server ESV## E02ESV## SINGLE/FTE Student

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Data Extraction for Other Uses Configure Microsoft Excel Data Exchange

This page was intentionally left blank.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Data Extraction for Other Uses Configure Microsoft Excel Data Exchange

Practice
Objective

Given an EXCEL spreadsheet connected to an Experion PKS Server: Configure an EXCEL Data Exchange connection the Experion PKS Server to: 1. Return the current PV of Sinewave along with the tagname, parameter, and server name. 2. Return the last 5 one-minute PV snapshots for Sinewave along with the tagname, parameter, server name, and offsets. 3. Use Excel to calculate the average of the current PV and the one minute snap shots. 4. Configure a 10 second update period for the spreadsheet. Save the spreadsheet to the \Server\user folder.

Prerequisites

Excel Data Exchange included in Server license Excel and Excel Data Exchange installed on client Basic knowledge of Excel Knowledge Builder available Sinewave tag built with Standard history configured for the PV

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Data Extraction for Other Uses Configure Microsoft Excel Data Exchange Introduction

During this lab, you will configure an Excel Data Exchange spreadsheet accessing Experion PKS data. Open Excel and access Excel Data Exchange. Select a cell and use the Wizard to map to Sinewave.PV. Display the PV along with the Tagname, Parameter name, and Server name in one row. Select a cell and use the Wizard to map to the last 5 one-minute snapshots of Sinewave.PV. Display each value and offset, along with the Tagname, Parameter name, and Server name, in two rows. Select a cell and configure Excel to calculate the average of all the PV values, both current and history. Label the cell Average PV. Configure the spreadsheet for a 10 second update period. Save the spreadsheet to the \Server\user folder as Team##.xls.
ATTENTION The procedures that follow are for reference. If you are familiar with Excel, you can try the lab on your own, working from the Objectives and Introduction. If Microsoft Excel Data Exchange was not activated during Experion installation, you can activate it as follows: a. If the MS Excel application is open, close it. b. In Windows Explorer, browse to the C:\Program Files\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Client\Xldataex. c. Double-click to execute the activatemede.vbs file. d. Now open the MS Excel application. An entry of Microsoft Excel Data Exchange must appear in the Add-Ins menu in MS Excel.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Data Extraction for Other Uses Configure Microsoft Excel Data Exchange

Procedure

Perform the following procedures in Excel.


Step Configure Link to Sinewave.PV 1 Login to Windows with Student User if not already logged in. ATTENTION Refer your partition sheet for password details. Action

2 3

Click Start > All Programs > Microsoft Office > Microsoft Office Excel 2007 Click cell B2.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Data Extraction for Other Uses Configure Microsoft Excel Data Exchange Step 4 Action On the menu bar, click Add-Ins > Microsoft Excel Data Exchange > Wizard

Select the Get point values from server(s) option Click Next

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Data Extraction for Other Uses Configure Microsoft Excel Data Exchange Step 6 Server: Point ID: Click Add. Action Type the data for Sinewave.PV from your server: E02ESV## (## is your team number.) Sinewave

Point Parameter: PV

ATTENTION Sinewave.PV is a built-in tag in Experion that stores system Sinewave details.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Data Extraction for Other Uses Configure Microsoft Excel Data Exchange Step 7 Click Next. Action

Select the choices shown below and then click Finish.

Verify the data in the spreadsheet. You may need to modify some column spacing.

10

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Data Extraction for Other Uses Configure Microsoft Excel Data Exchange Step Action

Configure Link to Sinewave.PV for One Minute Snapshots 10 11 12 Click cell B4. Select Add-Ins > Microsoft Excel Data Exchange > Wizard Select the Get history values from server(s) option and click Next.

13

Input the data for Sinewave.PV from your server and click Add.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11

Data Extraction for Other Uses Configure Microsoft Excel Data Exchange Step 14 15 Click Next. Select and enter the choices shown and then click Next. Action

16

Select the choices shown and then click Finish.

12

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Data Extraction for Other Uses Configure Microsoft Excel Data Exchange Step 17 Verify the data in the spreadsheet. Action

Use Excel to Calculate the PV Average. 18 19 Click Cell B7 and type Average PV. a. Click Cell E7. b. Click Formulas > Auto Sum >More Functions.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

13

Data Extraction for Other Uses Configure Microsoft Excel Data Exchange Step 20 Action a. Click the drop down to select Statistical category. e. Under Select a function, select AVERAGE. f. Click OK.

14

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Data Extraction for Other Uses Configure Microsoft Excel Data Exchange Step 21 Action Enter the cells from which to calculate the average. Click OK.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

15

Data Extraction for Other Uses Configure Microsoft Excel Data Exchange Step 22 Verify the average in the spreadsheet. Action

Set the Update Rate. 23 24 Select Add-Ins > Microsoft Excel Data Exchange > Set Recalculation Interval Enter 10 for the New Interval (secs).

25 26

Verify that the values update every 10 seconds. Save your spreadsheet to C:\Program Data\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Server\User using filename Team##.

16

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Describe Distributed System Architecture

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Introduction

Honeywell

In this lesson you will learn about Distributed System Architecture (DSA) At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Identify the purpose of DSA and how it works Describe how to configure servers and assets for DSA Describe how to operate points in a DSA network
Server 1 FIC21

Server3

DSA
Server2 LIC41

TIC31

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics DSA Basics DSA Server Configuration DSA Asset Configuration DSA Operation

Honeywell

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Big Picture

Honeywell

Stations connect to only one server Stations may want to display point data/history for points in another server Stations may need to operate points from another server
Server 1

FIC21

Server3

DSA
Server2

TIC31

LIC41

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Distributed System Architecture

Honeywell

Location A

FIC101.PIDA.PV
Dynamic Cache

The Distributed System Architecture (DSA) option enables multiple Experion PKS servers to share data, alarms, messages, and history without the need for duplicate configuration on any server
Configured using existing displays DSA provides a global name space for access to all point information in the system Supports redundant networks and servers In R400, number of DSA connected servers is increased to 31

Location C

FIC101.PIDA.PV
Dynamic Cache

Controller
FIC101.PIDA.PV

FIC101.PIDA.PV
Dynamic Cache

Location B

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Distributed System Architecture

Honeywell

When accessing a remote point for the first time, the local server asks the configured servers in the system for the data owner of the point After determining the data owner, the local server automatically creates a cache reference, in the local database, known as a "cache point" Point IDs can be the same on two servers participating in DSA
Point IDs must be unique within any one server Point IDs on two servers must not belong to the same asset Access Point IDs using the full name, including the server alias name, therefore, the full name for each Point ID will be different For example, you can have the point ID FIC123 on ServerNorth as well as on ServerSouth. Because Experion PKS will identify one as ServerNorth:FIC123 and the other as ServerSouth:FIC123, each point ID is unique within the system

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Distributed System Architecture - Operation

Honeywell

Point detail is available immediately, after configuration anywhere within the DSA network, where access is allowed The Experion PKS caching infrastructure automatically subscribes to the point and any or all parameters, as required. When no longer required, the infrastructure automatically un-subscribes

Location A FIC101.PIDA.PV
Dynamic Cache

Controlle r

FIC101.PIDA.PV
Dynamic Cache

FIC101.PIDA.PV

Location B

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

DSA Central Control Room (CCR)


DSA central control room is introduced in Experion PKS R400 It contains an Experion server that can subscribe to 60 remote Experion servers connected to the process
It is licensed option
Central Control room (CCR) Experion server

Honeywell

Publishing data to CCR server

Experion server in CCR


Not connected to process It can be redundant Has its own EMDB All remote servers are external to EMDB of Experion server in CCR
Subscribing data from Server 2 Remote Server 1 Remote Server 2 Remote Server 60

Remote servers can be DSA connected to each other


Maximum number of 30

Up to 60 remote (publisher) servers can be connected

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 1: DSA Basics

Honeywell

The DSA option enables multiple Experion PKS servers to share which of the following without the need for duplicate configuration on any server?
A) Point data, custom displays, messages and history B) Point data, alarms, messages and history C) Point data, messages, operator security accounts and history
The correct answer is: Yourcorrect answer is: Your answer: The answer: Yes! Themustanswer the is 'B'. Thebeforeoption enables multiple No.Youmust answer thequestion beforeoptionenables multiple You correct answer is 'B'. The DSA Yes!The correct answer iscorrectly!DSAoption enables multiple No. The correct answer is 'B'. The DSA option enables multiple The correct this The DSA YouIncorrect-answeredthisquestioncompletely Incorrect --servers this correctly! Correct Click answer 'B'. continue Youdid You answer anywhereto pointdata, Correct Clickanywhere to continue did You Click anywhere to completely Experionnot -answeredto questioncontinue alarms, messages and PKS servers toshare point data, continuing Experionnot answer anywhereto continue alarms, messages and PKS Click this question share continuing history. A distributed system architecture does this by providing a history. A distributed system architecture does this by providing a global name space for access to all information in the system. global name space for access to all information in the system. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Location A

Dynamic Cache

Location B

Dynamic Cache

Submit
9

Clear

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics DSA Basics DSA Server Configuration DSA Asset Configuration DSA Operation

Honeywell

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

10

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Distributed System Architecture - Configuration

Honeywell

Make sure the mngr account passwords are the same on all DSA connected servers Add servers in Configuration Studio and configure DSA in Station
Enter Node Name, Network Type, specify if External to system, etc.

Configure Assets for the remote server on your local server (Assets whose data to access) Assign Assets to operators and/or stations
Operators or stations that have the assets in their SOR automatically have access to remote point

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

11

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configuration Example

Honeywell

Configuration on the following pages is performed at E02ESVXX and is for the example shown below
E02ESVXX and E02ESV2XX are the server computer names of two Experion servers Asset A1 Sinewave1
Publisher

E02ESV2XX

E02ESVXX

DSA
Subscriber

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

12

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Add Server - DSA Configuration Studio

Honeywell

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

13

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Add Server - Options for New Server


Check if server is to use a different System Configuration, (Asset Model and Alarm Group configuration). i.e., Check if the server being added uses a different EMDB than this server

Honeywell

(Exclusive or)
Check if the server being added is subscription only, for example an eServer

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

14

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Add Server - Options for New Server


If selected: Manually build Assets on this server; Configuring the database of the server being added is not possible from this system If selected: Import Assets of the server being added; Configuring the database of the server being added is possible from this system If both the options are unchecked: Import Assets of the server being added; Configuring the database of the server being added is possible from this system

Honeywell

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

15

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Add Server - Load Configuration

Honeywell

E02ESV2XX_Server is an external server, hence it is not expandable in tree view (no + sign) and its icon is smaller than the included server icons

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

16

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configure DSA Display Page in Station Display Distributed Server Page

Honeywell

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

17

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Select Server

Honeywell

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

18

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configure DSA Configuration Tab FTE is not same as Dual Network


If FTE then do not select Server Connected via Dual Network

Honeywell

Following Pages

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

19

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configure DSA Alarm and Data Subscriptions Configure the Type of Subscription
Information to be gathered from the publishing server

Honeywell

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

20

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

10

Sharing Points in DSA Points from remote server/s are cached on local server

Honeywell

Cached points do not count against the licensed point count on local server Cached points do count against the total limit of 250000 points Total number of cached points must not be greater then 200000

Systems with large number of points (system & process) result in sharing points across DSA that are not required ESV3 ESV2

25000 Process Points +65000 SCADA Points + 500 System Points

DS A

ESV1
DS A
20000 Process Points +60000 SCADA points + 500 System Points TOTAL Points 90500 + 90500 + 80500 = 261500 This is 11500 points above the total system limit
EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

25000 Process Points +65000 SCADA Points + 500 System Points


Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

21

Subscription to System Tree and System Alarms

Honeywell

Prior to R310, no option was available to unsubscribe to System Tree & System Alarms from remote server From R310, user can select /deselect subscription to System Tree and System Alarms
Disabling subscription to System Tree & System Alarms significantly reduces total DSA points cached

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

22

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

11

DSA Behavior Prior to R310 E02ESVXX


System Tree and Alarms

Honeywell E02ESV2XX DSA


Publish/Subscribe

Publish/Subscribe

Process Data and Alarms

E02ESVXX
System Tree and Alarms

E02ESV2XX

Subscriber

DSA
Process Data and Alarms

Publisher

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

23

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

DSA Behavior From R310 (1) E02ESVXX


System Tree and Alarms

Honeywell E02ESV2XX

Publish/Subscribe

DSA
Process Data and Alarms

Publish/Subscribe

E02ESVXX will subscribe to System Tree and System Alarms from E02ESV2XX Server

E02ESV2XX will subscribe to System Tree and System Alarms from E02ESVXX Server

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

24

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

12

DSA Behavior From R310 (2)

Honeywell

E02ESVXX

System Tree and Alarms

E02ESV2XX

System Tree and Alarms

Publish/Subscribe

DSA
Process Data and Alarms

Publish/Subscribe

E02ESVXX will subscribe to System Tree and System Alarms from E02ESV2XX Server

E02ESV2XX will not subscribe to System Tree and System Alarms from E02ESVXX Server

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

25

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Subscription to System Tree and Alarms Enabled


System Tree of DSA connected server E02ESV2XX_Server seen in System Status display of local server

Honeywell

System alarms of DSA connected server E02ESV2XX_Server seen in System Status display of local server

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

26

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

13

Subscription to System Tree and Alarms Disabled


System Tree of DSA connected server E02ESV2XX_Server not seen in System Status display of local server

Honeywell

System alarms of DSA connected server E02ESV2XX_Server not seen in System Status display of local server

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

27

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configure DSA Multicast Communication

Honeywell

Each server knows the status of the other servers and the links between them Communication between servers can happen two ways:
Via Multicasting (Default) Select Multicast unless there is a router between the servers Via Unicasting

Enable or disable the above checkbox to toggle between Unicasting and Multicasting

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

28

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

14

Configure DSA Tuning Tab Leave All Entries as Default

Honeywell

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

29

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configure DSA Status Tab All LEDs Should be Green

Honeywell

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

30

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

15

Question 2: DSA Server Configuration In configuring DSA, assets:


A) Must be unique across all servers B) Must be configured on all DSA servers for all shared points C) Do not restrict remote points. Operators are allowed to see and control all remote points D) Only inhibit operator-based security stations from viewing remote points
Server1
Asset A1
Sinewave1

Honeywell

Server2

DSA
Publisher Subscriber

The correct answer is: Yourcorrect answer is: The answer: Youranswer: Yes! The correct answer question configuring DSA, No. You did answer the is 'B'. In before You must not answer is 'B'. In configuring DSA, No. The correct answer is 'B'. In configuring DSA, Yes!The correct answer this question The configuring DSA, You correct answer is to continue not anywhere question You must Clickanywhere 'B'. In before Incorrect --Clickanswer question DSA Correctdid answer the thistocontinue assetsYou -answered this correctly! must Clickanywhere on continue configured Correct becompletely to all Incorrect Click configuredon all DSA servers for anywhere continuing assetsYou -answered this correctly! servers for must becompletely to continue continuing all shared points. Remember to configure assets all shared points. Remember to configure assets for the remote server (assets whose data is to be for the remote server (assets whose data is to be accessed) on your local server. accessed) on your local server. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
31

Clear

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 3: Creating DSA Network To create a DSA network, add servers to the system using:
A) Quick Builder B) Control Builder C) Configuration Studio D) HMIWeb Display Builder
Server2 LIC41
The correct answer is: Yourcorrect answer is: The answer: Youranswer: Yes! The correct answer is 'C'. To create aaDSA No. The correct answer is 'C'. To before a DSA You must answer the is 'C'. To before DSA Yes! The correct answer question create a DSA No. The correct answer is 'C'. To create You not Click anywhere to continue must answer question create YouIncorrectanswered thequestioncontinue Incorrectadd serversquestioncontinue Correct --Clickanywhere tocontinue network answer anywhereto system using Correct answerthisthis thetosystem using Youdid You --answeredthis correctly! did You Click anywhere not Click this to the completely completely network add continuing correctly! servers to continuing Configuration Studio. Add remote (publishing) Configuration Studio. Add remote (publishing) servers in Configuration Studio and configure servers in Configuration Studio and configure DSA in station. DSA in station. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Honeywell

Server 1 FIC21 Server3

DSA

TIC31

Submit
32

Clear

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

16

Question 4: DSA Server Configuration

Honeywell

Which of the following statements is true? If the option Also subscribe to : System Components Tree is unchecked
A) No data from the DSA connected servers will be seen on local server B) System Alarms of DSA connected servers will be seen in System Status display of the local server C) System tree and System Alarms of DSA connected servers will not be seen in System Status display of local server D) All of the above
Yes! The correct answer is 'C'. IfIfthe option 'Enable No. The correct answer is 'C'. If the option 'Enable No. The correct answer is 'C'. If the option 'Enable Yes! The correct answer is 'C'. If the option 'Enable No. No. If the option 'Enable the option 'Enable Yourcorrect answer is: The correct System Tree' is unchecked system tree Subscription of answer is: Youranswer: The answer: Subscription ofSystem Tree' is unchecked system tree Youalarmsof the DSA question before will not must answerthe connectedserver and system alarms answer DSAconnectedbefore will not You must Click and system You -answered the question server of the this correctly! YouIncorrect--Clickanywhere to continue Incorrect answeranywhere to continue Correct Click this question continue Youdid not answer anywhere to continue did You Click anywhere to completely not this question completely be seen in Correct -answered this correctly! local server. continuing be seen inthe System Status display of the local server. the System continuing Status display of the Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.
33

Submit

Clear

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics DSA Basics DSA Server Configuration DSA Asset Configuration DSA Operation

Honeywell

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

34

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

17

Configure Assets - Import When Server Added Allows assets of an included server to be imported
If Server External to System was selected, this cannot be done

Honeywell

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

35

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Configure Assets - Manually

Honeywell Enterprise Model Builder Asset


New Asset

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

36

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

18

Configure Assets - Manually Enter New Asset Information

Honeywell

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

37

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Assign Assets to Operators and/or Stations Must download Assets to included servers Assign asset to Operators or stations If asset is not assigned, the error shown below displays when requesting a point from the other server

Honeywell

Assign access

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

38

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

19

Question 5: DSA Asset Configuration Assets are assigned to


A) Parents and/or Children B) Events C) Operators and/or Stations D) Message Counts

Honeywell

The correct answer is: Yourcorrect answer is: The answer: Your answer: answer the question before Yes!You must-Click anywhere toAssetsare assigned No. Correct -answered theis'C'. Assets are assigned The correct answer question completely before YouIncorrect-answeredthisquestioncompletely Incorrect answer is 'C'. Assets are Yes!The You answer anywhere tocontinue assigned No.You not answeranywhere to continue assigned The must Click this is correctly! Thecorrect answer is 'C'. correct answer questioncontinue correct answer Youdid You -Click thisthis'C'. Assets are Correct Click anywhere tocontinue did not continuing correctly! to Operators andcontinuing to Operators and/or Stations. If an asset is not /or Stations. If an asset is not assigned, an error will occur in Station when a assigned, an error will occur in Station when a point from the other server is requested. point from the other server is requested. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
39

Clear

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics DSA Basics DSA Server Configuration DSA Asset Configuration DSA Operation

Honeywell

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

40

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

20

Configure DSA Summary Status Status Summary shows the remote server is OK

Honeywell

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

41

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Operate Points Across DSA Message Zone shows server in which this point resides

Honeywell

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

42

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

21

Summary When configuring servers and assets for DSA, remember:

Honeywell

DSA enables multiple servers to share point data, alarms, messages, and history without the need for duplicate configuration on any server Point IDs can be the same on two servers participating in DSA because they are accessed using the full name, which includes the server name The points with same ID must belong to different assets When configuring DSA, make sure the mngr account passwords are the same on all DSA connected servers Add servers (included and external) in Configuration studio and configure DSA in station Must configure assets, on all DSA servers, for all shared points Assign assets to operators and/or stations for access

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

43

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Lab Example Configure DSA

Honeywell

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

44

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

22

Conclusion Describe Distributed System Architecture

Honeywell

Completion Certificate

Proceed to the Configure DSA lab exercise


Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

45

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Distributed System Architecture Describe Distributed System Architecture

46

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

23

Topic: Distributed System Architecture


Contents
Configure DSA.......................................................................................................................................3

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

This page was intentionally left blank.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Distributed System Architecture Configure DSA

Configure DSA
Practice
Student Partition Sheet Team ## Windows Login User Password Your System Details Student

System Name Server Name

E02ESV##_System E02ESV##_Server

Your Partners System Details ( ## below is your partners Team Number ) System Name Server Alias Name Server Description Server Abbreviation Server Node Name Network Type Server External to System? Non Publishing Server? E02ESV##_System E02ESV##_Server Experion PKS Server ESV## E02ESV## SINGLE/FTE YES No

Assets Present on Partners System ( ## below is your partners Team Number ) Tag Name Item name Description Directly Assignable Tag Name Item name Description Directly Assignable Valves## Valves##_Item Flow Valves ## Yes Pumps## Pumps##_Item Pump Control ## Yes

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Distributed System Architecture Configure DSA

This page was intentionally left blank.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Distributed System Architecture Configure DSA Objective

Given Configuration Studio is connected to an Experion PKS Server: Configure a DSA network

Prerequisites

Configuration Studio navigation knowledge Station navigation knowledge Station connected to a Server with the DSA option Knowledge Builder available

Introduction

The Distributed System Architecture (DSA) option enables multiple Experion PKS servers to share data, alarms, messages, and history without the need for duplicate configuration on any server. During this lab, you will configure a DSA connection in Station from which you will browse tags, check alarms and trend history.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Distributed System Architecture Configure DSA Procedure

Perform the following procedures in Configuration Studio:


Step Configure a DSA connection 1 Login to Windows with Student User if not already logged in. Action

ATTENTION Refer your partition sheet for password details.

2 3

Open Configuration Studio (if not already open.) Connect to your System. ATTENTION For System Name, refer your partition sheet.

In the Configuration Studio Explorer tab, select your System name. In the right-side pane, under Server Tasks, click Add a server to this system.

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Distributed System Architecture Configure DSA Step 5 Action a. In the SYSTEM:SERVER Block Parameters window, in the Main tab, type your partners server details as specified in your partition sheet. b. Select Server External To System? Checkbox. c. Click OK.

ATTENTION If you select the Server External to System? Option, this server will be DSA connected but external to the system. This means no server in your system will be able to build assets or points on this server. However, your system can access points, alarms and groups of this server but only after manually building specific assets that are to be shared. If you select the Non-Publishing Server option, this server becomes a subscribing only server. In other words, this server will be able to receive details about your system but will not be able to modify your system. However, a publishing server in the system can modify this servers asset model, control strategy etc., by downloading its model. It is also possible to import the Assets and Alarm Groups of this server. eServers are configured as non-publishing servers.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Distributed System Architecture Configure DSA Step 6 ATTENTION If you do NOT select any of the two options, Server External to System? Or Non-Publishing Server, then both servers would be configured as DSA connected to each other and the Assets and Alarm Groups of this server can be imported. You can configure items (Asset Model, Control Strategy, Quick Builder, etc.) on this server from your System by downloading this model. 7 Click Yes to EMB message dialog as shown. Action

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Distributed System Architecture Configure DSA Step 8 Select System Name Action

In the Configuration Explorer tab (in the right-side pane, under Server Tasks) click Load system configuration to servers.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

Distributed System Architecture Configure DSA Step 10 Action Ensure the checkbox against your Server name is checked.

11 12

Click OK on the Enterprise Model Builder Load window. In the Loading System Configuration window, ensure Load Status is Completed.

13
10

Click OK. EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc. 11/5/2010

Distributed System Architecture Configure DSA Step 14 15 16 Open Station, if not already open. Change your access level to Mngr Select Configure > System Hardware > Distributed Servers from the Station menu bar. Action

17

On the Distributed Servers page, click the name of your partners server.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11

Distributed System Architecture Configure DSA Step 18 Action On the configuration tab, under the Alarms and Data Subscriptions, drop down to select Enable both Alarm and Data. Enable the option Also subscribe to: System components Tree

ATTENTION From R310, a new option present in the configuration page of a DSA connected server is Also subscribes to: System Components Tree. This option enables subscription to system tree and system alarms. Prior to R310, no option was available to unsubscribe to System Tree & System Alarms from remote server. From R310, user can select /deselect subscription to System Tree and System Alarms. Disabling subscription to System Tree & System Alarms significantly reduces total DSA points cached

12

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Distributed System Architecture Configure DSA Step 19 Action Click Status tab. Verify that all the status LEDs are green, indicating a healthy link to the remote server.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

13

Distributed System Architecture Configure DSA Step Creating Shared Assets 20 21 Open Configuration Studio, if not already open, and Connect to your System Create two Assets to match those of your partner. Add the assets at the same hierarchical level as on your partners server. See your partition sheet for details. ATTENTION Here ## is your partners team number. 22 Download the new Asset Model to your server. Action

Verify the DSA operation 23 24 25 Start Station application (if it is not already open). Change your access level to Mngr a. In the Command zone, type ANATEST##, where ## is your partners team number. b. Press <F12> to open the Point Detail page. ATTENTION After adding your partners server in Configuration Studio, you created the shared Assets present on your partners server to which the points you wish to monitor across DSA are assigned. You should be able to view the point details of the remote point.

14

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Distributed System Architecture Configure DSA Step 26 Action Generate an Alarm for the tag ANATEST##, where ## is your partners team number.

27

Select View > Alarms in the Station menu bar to open the Alarm Summary page.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

15

Distributed System Architecture Configure DSA Step 28 Click the Show Column Organizer window. Action button to display the Column Organizer

16

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Distributed System Architecture Configure DSA Step 29 Action Scroll down and select the DSA Server Name checkbox. Continuously click the Move Up button to position the DSA Server Name checkbox above the Location Tag checkbox.

30

Click OK.

ATTENTION The DSA Server Name column is added to the Alarm Summary and the remote server alarm can be viewed as shown in the figure.

11/5/2010

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

17

Distributed System Architecture Configure DSA Step 31 9 Action Assign the tag ANATEST## (your partners team number) to Trend 2## (where ## is your team number). You will see both ANATEST##( your team number) and ANATEST## ( your partners team number)

ATTENTION The historized values of this tag are not historized on your server but on the remote server.

18

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server Honeywell, Inc.

11/5/2010

Describe OPC

Integrating Non-Experion Nodes Describe OPC

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Introduction

Honeywell

In this lesson you will learn about OPC (OLE for Process Control) At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
Describe OPC concepts Describe how to configure distributed component object model (DCOM) security Identify the OPC client options available in Experion PKS

Integrating Non-Experion Nodes Describe OPC

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics OPC Concepts DCOM Security Concepts Experion OPC Options

Honeywell

Integrating Non-Experion Nodes Describe OPC

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

What is OPC?

Honeywell

OPC (OLE for Process Control) consists of a set of standards, that define COM interfaces, for OPC clients and servers to observe
The COM interfaces are based on Microsoft's COM/OLE technology

OPC Foundation established these standards to foster greater interoperability between automation and control applications, field systems and devices, and business and office applications
For detailed information about OPC, visit the OPC Foundation's Web site: http://www.opcfoundation.org

Integrating Non-Experion Nodes Describe OPC

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

OPC Concepts

Honeywell

OPC provides data from a OPC compliant data source (server) and communicates the data to any OPC compliant client application in a standard way,
Eliminates the requirement for an application to have specific knowledge about a particular data source, such as its internal structure and communications protocols

An OPC server and an OPC client can reside on the same (local server) or different (remote server) machines

Integrating Non-Experion Nodes Describe OPC

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

OPC Concepts

Honeywell

The OPC Data Access Standard does not have a concept of hardware - there are just items
An item represents a single element of data from the OPC server; for example, a PV

The OPC client gathers items, with the same deadband and update period, into groups The OPC client requests the server to create a group with the corresponding client-specified update rate and deadband The OPC client then requests the OPC server to add items to the group

Integrating Non-Experion Nodes Describe OPC

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

OPC Concepts

Honeywell

The OPC server creates a cache for the group, which is updated according to the group's update rate The OPC server sends data to OPC clients using a callback technique with report-by-exception
Exceptions are changes by an amount equal to or greater than the groups deadband for analogs, and state changes for discretes, since the last cache update

Optionally, the OPC client can perform a background scan of all the items in a group to update their values regardless of whether or not they have changed by an amount greater than the groups deadband
Period is usually 60 seconds or greater

Integrating Non-Experion Nodes Describe OPC

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

OPC Concepts Model


Send Groups of Items including update times and deadbands

Honeywell

OPC Client

Report by Exception

OPC Server

Background Scan of all Items

Integrating Non-Experion Nodes Describe OPC

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Question 1: OPC Concepts The three main components of an OPC group are:
A) Callback technique, deadband, and items B) Deadband, items and update rate C) Server cache memory space, update rate and deadbands

Honeywell

OPC Server
The correct answer is: Yourcorrect answer is: The answer: Your answer: Correct!must Thecorrect answer'B'.'B'. The three Incorrect. The correct answeris The The main Correct!mustansweranswer is 'B'. before three Incorrect. correct answer is is 'B'. three main The The three You The correct the question before You not answerOPC the YouIncorrect-answeredthisgroup continue Incorrect --Clickanywhere to continue Correct Clickan anthiscorrectly! Deadband, maindid You -answeredOPCquestioncompletely components Clickanywhereto continue components ofthis question are You Correct answerofthisOPC group are Deadband, not Click anywhere to continue questioncompletely maindid You answer anywhereto are are Deadband, componentsofcontinuing correctly! Deadband, components an an OPC group ofcontinuing group items and update rate. items and update rate. Click anywhere to continue. Click anywhere to continue.

Submit
9

Clear

Integrating Non-Experion Nodes Describe OPC

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

Topics OPC Concepts DCOM Security Concepts Experion OPC Options

Honeywell

Integrating Non-Experion Nodes Describe OPC

10

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

OPC Security Configure 3rd Party OPC Server

Honeywell

Communication path and usernames used between Experion PKS and 3rd Party OPC Server
Server Computer Experion PKS Server Experion PKS OPC Client Windows Security Remote Computer Third-party OPC Server DCOM Security Windows Security Create mngr account on remote server

Create Server account on Experion server

Callbacks/Notifications (account belongs to Product Administrators group) Requests (mngr account)

Configure DCOM access in remote server for mngr account

Integrating Non-Experion Nodes Describe OPC

11

EXP02R400 - EPKS Server 11/5/2010

OPC Security Configure 3